SPRUsers Guide V5

SmartPlant Review
User’s Guide
December 2002 Version 5.0
DVIS2-PE-200001B
Copyright
Copyright © 2000-2002 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license
agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by
copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available
without proper authorization.
Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the
Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer
Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of
the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---
Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract,
and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or
amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to
applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in
this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance
with the terms of this license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by
Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, DesignReview, SmartSketch, and SmartPlant are registered trademarks and PDS is a
trademark of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of AutoDesk.
Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introducing SmartPlant Review .................................................................................... 19
What's New? .............................................................................................................. 19
Additional Documentation......................................................................................... 23
Using SmartPlant Review Modules: An Overview ................................................... 24
API Module.......................................................................................................................24
Collaboration Module .......................................................................................................25
Construction Module.........................................................................................................26
On-Site Drawing Generation Module ...............................................................................27
Photo-Realism Module......................................................................................................28
Simulation and Visual Effects Module .............................................................................29
Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview............................................................ 30
Display Set Changes..........................................................................................................31
Function Key Changes ......................................................................................................33
Measurement Changes ......................................................................................................33
Position Control Changes..................................................................................................34
.vue File Changes ..............................................................................................................35
Getting Started with SmartPlant Review: An Overview............................................. 36

Opening a Model File: An Overview......................................................................... 36
Create Project Dialog Box.................................................................................................37
Search Path Dialog Box ....................................................................................................40
Design File Search Path ....................................................................................................41
Open Model from Command Line ....................................................................................41
Open a Model File.............................................................................................................43
Save As a .vue File............................................................................................................45
Refresh Data......................................................................................................................45
Understanding Project Databases: An Overview....................................................... 46
Working with Large Datasets............................................................................................48
Sharing the Project Database Over the Network...............................................................48
Supporting Other Software: An Overview................................................................. 49
MicroStation Design File Working Units .........................................................................51
AutoCAD Design File Working Units ..............................................................................52
SAT Design File Working Units.......................................................................................52
Working with .dwg, .dxf, and .sat Files: An Overview.....................................................52
SmartPlant Review Files ...................................................................................................53
Working with Views: An Overview............................................................................... 55

Arrange All Views ............................................................................................................56
Refresh All Views .............................................................................................................56
Refresh View.....................................................................................................................57
Display a Single Pane Layout ...........................................................................................57
Display a Three Pane Layout ............................................................................................58
Display a Four Pane Layout ..............................................................................................58
Full Screen Display Mode.................................................................................................58
Changing View Settings: An Overview..................................................................... 59
SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates ........................................................59

Set Background Color .......................................................................................................60
Set Display Tag .................................................................................................................60
Set Textures.......................................................................................................................61
Set Lighting Intensity........................................................................................................61
Set Sun Bearing Angles.....................................................................................................62
Set Range Reject ...............................................................................................................62
Set View Options ..............................................................................................................63
Set Stroking Tolerance ......................................................................................................64
Define Display Order ........................................................................................................64
Maintain Display Options .................................................................................................65
View Settings Dialog Box.................................................................................................65
Set Brightness Level Dialog Box ......................................................................................73
Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box................................................................................73
Set Light Direction Dialog Box ........................................................................................74
Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box.....................................................................74
Set Stroking Tolerance Dialog Box...................................................................................75
Rendering Views: An Overview ................................................................................ 75
Toggle Between Shaded and Wireframe...........................................................................76
Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line............................................................................76
Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe............................................................................77
Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line .................................................................................77
Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded .................................................................................78
Maintain Render Settings ..................................................................................................78
Fitting Views: An Overview ...................................................................................... 79
Fit All Views to Model......................................................................................................79
Fit View to Model .............................................................................................................79
Fit View to Object .............................................................................................................80
Fit View to Display Set .....................................................................................................80
Fit View to Volume...........................................................................................................80
Zoom In .............................................................................................................................81
Zoom Out ..........................................................................................................................81
Zoom Amount Dialog Box................................................................................................82
Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview .............................................................. 82
Rename Group ..................................................................................................................84
Delete Group .....................................................................................................................85
Create Group .....................................................................................................................85
Select All...........................................................................................................................86
Edit Selected Views ..........................................................................................................86
Delete View.......................................................................................................................87
Move View........................................................................................................................87
Copy a View......................................................................................................................88
Modify Frame Numbers ....................................................................................................88
Add Current View .............................................................................................................89
Set Up Partial View Recall................................................................................................89
Recall Partial View............................................................................................................90
Recall a View ....................................................................................................................90
Generate a ModelView View File.....................................................................................91
Import Saved Views..........................................................................................................91
Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3.7...................................................................92
4 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Export Saved Views..........................................................................................................93

Save and Recall Views Dialog Box ..................................................................................94
Rename Group Dialog Box ...............................................................................................95
Create Group Dialog Box..................................................................................................96
Edit View Dialog Box .......................................................................................................96
Copy Selected View Dialog Box ....................................................................................102
Move Selected Views Dialog Box ..................................................................................103
Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box ..............................................................................103
Add Current View Dialog Box........................................................................................104
Setup Partial View Recall Dialog Box............................................................................110
Generate ModelView View File Dialog Box ..................................................................112
Import Saved Views Dialog Box ....................................................................................112
Export Saved Views Dialog Box ....................................................................................113
Selecting Level Settings: An Overview ................................................................... 114
Hide Levels .....................................................................................................................114
Edit Levels ......................................................................................................................114
View Current Level Settings ...........................................................................................115
Match Files......................................................................................................................115
Hide Level Dialog Box ...................................................................................................116
Level Settings Dialog Box ..............................................................................................117
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................117
Match Items Dialog Box .................................................................................................118
Viewing in Stereo: An Overview............................................................................. 119
Stereo Distances Dialog Box...........................................................................................120
Set Stereo Settings...........................................................................................................121
Set Stereo Settings Interactively .....................................................................................121
Working with Elumens: An Overview..................................................................... 122
Working in Elumens Display Mode................................................................................123
Toggle the Elumens Display Mode On or Off ................................................................124
Elumens Settings Dialog Box .........................................................................................125
Edit Elumens Display Mode Settings..............................................................................126
Using the View Cone: An Overview ............................................................................ 127

Position Control Toolbar.......................................................................................... 128
Set Eye Point ...................................................................................................................129
Set Center Point...............................................................................................................130
Set Clipping Planes .........................................................................................................132
Set Perspective Angle Dialog Box ..................................................................................132
Set View Cone Perspective .............................................................................................133
Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview ................................................... 133
Define a Bore Sight .........................................................................................................134
Place a Data Point ...........................................................................................................134
Snap to an Element..........................................................................................................135
Navigating Through the Model: An Overview ........................................................... 136

Examining Motion Devices: An Overview.............................................................. 137
Using the Mouse: An Overview......................................................................................138
Work with Mouse Drag Modes.......................................................................................140
Auto-Highlight ................................................................................................................140

Table of Contents
Forward/Back, Left/Right ...............................................................................................141

Pan...................................................................................................................................141
Rotate ..............................................................................................................................141
Manipulate the View Cube..............................................................................................142
Set Priority Mode ............................................................................................................142
Set Center Mode..............................................................................................................142
Using Microsoft IntelliMouse Features: An Overview...................................................143
Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse .................................................................................143
Step Using the IntelliMouse............................................................................................143
Using the Keyboard: An Overview .................................................................................144
Using the Joystick: An Overview....................................................................................149
Install a Joystick on Windows NT ..................................................................................151
Install a Joystick on Windows 2000 and Windows XP...................................................152
Activate a Joystick ..........................................................................................................152
Map Joystick Buttons......................................................................................................153
Exploring Motion Types: An Overview .................................................................. 155
Set Continuous Motion....................................................................................................155
Set Single Step Motion....................................................................................................156
Set Toggle Step Direction ...............................................................................................156
Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview.............................. 157
Using Lateral Motion ......................................................................................................157
Set Horizontal Encircle Motion.......................................................................................158
Set Vertical Encircle Motion...........................................................................................158
Set Surface Encircle Motion ...........................................................................................159
Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview .............................. 160
Set View Dependent Mode .............................................................................................161
Set View Dependent Level Mode ...................................................................................161
Set View Independent Mode ...........................................................................................161
Set Plant North Mode......................................................................................................162
Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview........................................................... 162
Set Motion Rates .............................................................................................................163
Set Display Options.........................................................................................................163
Set Bearing Angles..........................................................................................................164
Activate a Joystick ..........................................................................................................164
Set Motion Control to Display Set ..................................................................................165
Set Motion Control to Eye Point .....................................................................................166
Motion Settings Dialog Box............................................................................................166
Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box .............................................................................171
Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview......................................................... 171
Display Key Frame Motion.............................................................................................172
Play Key Frame Motion ..................................................................................................173
Pause Key Frame Motion................................................................................................173
Stop Key Frame Motion..................................................................................................174
Snapshot Key Frames......................................................................................................174
Setup Partial Key Frame Recall ......................................................................................175
Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box .........................................................................175
Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box ..................................................................................176
Setup Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box...................................................................178
Using Project Manager: An Overview ........................................................................ 180

Table of Contents
Display or Hide the Project Manager ..............................................................................182

Move the Project Manager Window ...............................................................................182
View Items in the Model with Project Manager .............................................................182
Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager ................................................183
Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager .................................................................184
Add a Display Set in the Project Manager ......................................................................184
Edit a Display Set in the Project Manager ......................................................................185
Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager .................................185
Edit a ScheduleReview Project in the Project Manager..................................................186
Review a Construction Sequence in the Project Manager...............................................187
Working with Display Sets: An Overview .................................................................. 188

View Display Sets ...........................................................................................................189
Display Sets - Show Only ...............................................................................................189
Display Sets - Hide Only.................................................................................................190
Delete Display Sets .........................................................................................................191
Defining Display Sets: An Overview....................................................................... 191
Create a Display Set Definition.......................................................................................192
Sub-definitions ................................................................................................................193
Edit a Display Set Definition ..........................................................................................194
Assign Material to a Display Set.....................................................................................195
Automatically Define Display Sets .................................................................................195
Import Display Sets.........................................................................................................196
Export Display Sets.........................................................................................................196
Find an Object .................................................................................................................197
Display Sets - Reverse Dim ............................................................................................197
Edit Display Set Dialog Box ...........................................................................................197
Edit Definition Dialog Box .............................................................................................198
Find Volume Inside Dialog Box .....................................................................................203
Find Volume Overlap Dialog Box ..................................................................................204
Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box ....................................................................205
Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box ............................................................................205
Pick Objects Dialog Box .................................................................................................206
Import Display Sets Dialog Box .....................................................................................206
Export Display Sets Dialog Box .....................................................................................207
Find Object Dialog Box ..................................................................................................207
Define Search Criteria for Pipes......................................................................................212
Editing Positions: An Overview .............................................................................. 213
Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box .............................................................................213
Edit Display Set Position.................................................................................................216
Move Display Set ............................................................................................................217
Rotate Display Set...........................................................................................................218
Taking Snapshots: An Overview ................................................................................. 219

Snapshot View Dialog Box...................................................................................... 220
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch.....................................................................................222
Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot ............................................................................223
Placing Measurements: An Overview ......................................................................... 225

Table of Contents
Snaplock Measurement ...................................................................................................225

Surface Measurement......................................................................................................226
Shortest Distance Measurement ......................................................................................227
Move Measurement.........................................................................................................228
Restore Position ..............................................................................................................228
Delete Last Measurement................................................................................................229
Delete Active Collection Measurements.........................................................................229
Delete All Measurements ................................................................................................230
Delete All Collections .....................................................................................................230
Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview .................................................. 231
Measurement Collections Dialog Box ............................................................................231
Create a New Measurement Collection...........................................................................239
Edit a Measurement Collection .......................................................................................239
Using Annotations: An Overview ................................................................................ 240

Communicating with Tags: An Overview ............................................................... 240
Place Tag With Leader....................................................................................................241
Place Tag Without Leader...............................................................................................242
Edit Tag...........................................................................................................................244
Delete Tag .......................................................................................................................244
Find Tag ..........................................................................................................................244
Next Tag..........................................................................................................................245
Previous Tag....................................................................................................................245
Go To Tag .......................................................................................................................246
Activate Display of Tags.................................................................................................246
Display Active Tag Only.................................................................................................246
Display All Tags..............................................................................................................247
Display No Tags..............................................................................................................247
Display Action Comments ..............................................................................................247
Import Tags .....................................................................................................................248
Export Tags .....................................................................................................................248
Tags Workflow: An Overview........................................................................................249
Importing Tags with Attributes and Symbology.............................................................250
Querying Tags to Review Associated Sets......................................................................251
Edit Tags Dialog Box......................................................................................................253
Delete Tag Dialog Box....................................................................................................255
Find Tags Dialog Box .....................................................................................................255
Go To Tag Dialog Box....................................................................................................257
Placing Data Annotations: An Overview................................................................. 257
Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box..........................................................................258
Create a Data Annotation ................................................................................................260
Edit a Data Annotation File.............................................................................................260
Edit a Data Annotation Position......................................................................................261
Display Data Annotations ...............................................................................................261
Delete Data Annotations .................................................................................................262
Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview ........................................................... 262
Place Volume Annotations..............................................................................................265
Create a New Volume Annotation Category...................................................................267
Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category......................................................................268
Edit a Volume Annotation...............................................................................................268

Table of Contents
Adjust a Volume Annotation...........................................................................................269

Find a Volume Annotation..............................................................................................269
Delete a Single Volume Annotation................................................................................270
Delete All Volume Annotations by Type........................................................................271
Load and Display a Clipping Volume.............................................................................271
Import Volume Annotations............................................................................................272
Export Volume Annotations............................................................................................272
Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box ............................................................................273
Edit Categories Dialog Box.............................................................................................276
Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box ........................................................................276
Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box ........................................................................277
Attaching External Data: An Overview ................................................................... 277
The Get External Data Database .....................................................................................278
Attach External Data to a PDS Project............................................................................280
Add Types .......................................................................................................................282
Edit Types .......................................................................................................................284
Edit Attachments Dialog Box .........................................................................................285
Getdata Filename / Argument Dialog Box......................................................................286
Edit Types Dialog Box....................................................................................................286
Assigning Material Properties: An Overview............................................................. 287

Default Material Palette ........................................................................................... 287
Assign Materials to Elements..........................................................................................289
Unassign Materials..........................................................................................................290
Create Materials from Color Table .................................................................................290
Define Search Path for Material Files .............................................................................291
Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box ......................................................................291
Unassign Materials Dialog Box ......................................................................................292
Edit Materials Dialog Box...............................................................................................293
Adjust Pattern Dialog Box ..............................................................................................297
Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box........................................................................................298
Create Materials Dialog Box...........................................................................................299
Search Path Dialog Box ..................................................................................................300
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview...................................................... 301

Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview.......................................................... 301
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box................................................................................301
OpenGL Lighting ............................................................................................................311
Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview............................................................. 313
Global Lighting Dialog Box............................................................................................313
Time Zones Dialog Box ..................................................................................................316
World Map Dialog Box...................................................................................................316
Cities Dialog Box............................................................................................................317
Solar Vector Dialog Box .................................................................................................318
Set Global Lighting .........................................................................................................319
Placing Source Lights: An Overview....................................................................... 319
Place a Source Light........................................................................................................320
Edit a Source Light..........................................................................................................321
Delete Source Light.........................................................................................................322

Table of Contents
Lighten Shadows.............................................................................................................322
New Source Light Dialog Box ........................................................................................323
Edit Source Lights Dialog Box .......................................................................................329
Delete Source Lights Dialog Box....................................................................................330
Raytracing: An Overview ........................................................................................ 331
Raytrace a View ..............................................................................................................331
Define a Raytrace Range.................................................................................................332
Edit Raytracing Options ..................................................................................................332
Detecting Collisions: An Overview .............................................................................. 333

Collision Detection Dialog Box............................................................................... 335
Select Filters for Collision Types....................................................................................343
Select Graphic Element Types ........................................................................................344
Select Objects and Range................................................................................................344
Select Collision Display Colors ......................................................................................345
Select Collision Sounds...................................................................................................346
Run Collision Detection ..................................................................................................347
Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box ...................................................... 349
View Collision Reports ...................................................................................................350
Collaborating with Others: An Overview................................................................... 352

Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review ...................................................................354
Passenger Settings ...........................................................................................................355
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box..................................................................................356
Establish a Collaboration Session ...................................................................................357
Rejoin a Collaboration Session .......................................................................................358
Edit Collaboration Settings .............................................................................................359
Using ScheduleReview: An Overview ......................................................................... 360

ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................... 361
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings..............................................................................366
ScheduleReview Task Symbology..................................................................................366
Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings ........................................................................367
Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings ..........................................................................368
Set ScheduleReview Review Settings.............................................................................368
Create a New ScheduleReview Project ...........................................................................369
Delete a ScheduleReview Project ...................................................................................369
Set Active ScheduleReview Project ................................................................................369
Refresh Active ScheduleReview Project.........................................................................370
Import ScheduleReview Project......................................................................................370
Export ScheduleReview Project......................................................................................371
ScheduleReview Auto Association .................................................................................371
Add a ScheduleReview Association................................................................................372
Remove a ScheduleReview Association .........................................................................372
Create a ScheduleReview Query.....................................................................................372
Edit a ScheduleReview Query.........................................................................................373
New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box .......................................................................375
Edit ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box........................................................................376
Task Symbology Dialog Box ..........................................................................................377

Table of Contents
Auto-Association Dialog Box .........................................................................................378

Add Association Dialog Box...........................................................................................379
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box......................................................................379
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box .................................................................379
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box..................................................................380
Using ScheduleReview Controls: An Overview...................................................... 380
ScheduleReview Play......................................................................................................380
ScheduleReview Pause....................................................................................................381
ScheduleReview Stop......................................................................................................382
ScheduleReview Forward ...............................................................................................382
ScheduleReview Back.....................................................................................................382
ScheduleReview Go To Start ..........................................................................................383
ScheduleReview Go To End ...........................................................................................383
ScheduleReview Go To Date ..........................................................................................384
ScheduleReview Record .................................................................................................384
ScheduleReview Percent Complete.................................................................................385
Printing: An Overview.................................................................................................. 386

Change Page Setup Options..................................................................................... 386
Quick Print the Main View ...................................................................................... 387
Quick Print the Full View ........................................................................................ 387
Print the Main View at a High Resolution............................................................... 387
Page Setup Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 388
Print Preview Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 390
Print Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 391
Using Accessories: An Overview.................................................................................. 393

Modifying the Accessories Menu ............................................................................ 393
Starting Programs Automatically............................................................................. 395
Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview ....................................................... 395
Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview...................................................395
Place Text Annotations ...................................................................................................396
Place Annotation Dialog Box..........................................................................................396
Moving or Editing Text Annotations: An Overview.......................................................398
Move Text Annotations...................................................................................................399
Edit Text Annotations .....................................................................................................399
Deleting One or More Text Annotations: An Overview .................................................400
Delete Text Annotations..................................................................................................400
Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview...................................................................401
Display Text Annotations................................................................................................401
Setting Window Size: An Overview........................................................................ 401
Set Window Size Dialog Box..........................................................................................402
Set Window Size .............................................................................................................402
Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview ...................................................... 403
Move Display Set Dialog Box ........................................................................................405
Move and Rotate Display Sets ........................................................................................406
Command Reference: An Overview............................................................................ 408

Table of Contents
File Menu ................................................................................................................. 408

Open Command (File Menu) ..........................................................................................408
Close Command (File Menu)..........................................................................................409
Save Command (File Menu) ...........................................................................................409
Save As Command (File Menu)......................................................................................410
Import Display Sets Command (File Menu) ...................................................................410
Import Saved Views Command (File Menu) ..................................................................411
Import ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu)...............................................412
Import Tags Command (File Menu) ...............................................................................413
Import Volume Annotations Command (File Menu)......................................................413
Export Display Sets Command (File Menu) ...................................................................414
Export Saved Views Command (File Menu) ..................................................................415
Export ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu)...............................................416
Export Tags Command (File Menu) ...............................................................................416
Export Volume Annotations Command (File Menu)......................................................417
Page Setup Command (File Menu) .................................................................................417
Print Preview Command (File Menu) .............................................................................418
Print Command (File Menu) ...........................................................................................418
Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)...................................................................418
Exit Command (File Menu) ............................................................................................419
Edit Menu................................................................................................................. 419
Undo Command (Edit Menu)..........................................................................................419
Redo Command (Edit Menu) ..........................................................................................420
Cut Command (Edit Menu).............................................................................................420
Copy Command (Edit Menu)..........................................................................................420
Paste Command (Edit Menu) ..........................................................................................421
Find Object Command (Edit Menu)................................................................................421
View Menu............................................................................................................... 422
All to Model Command (View Menu) ............................................................................422
View to Model Command (View Menu) ........................................................................422
View to Object Command (View Menu) ........................................................................422
View to Volume Command (View Menu) ......................................................................423
View to Display Set Command (View Menu) ................................................................423
View by Eye Point Command (View Menu) ..................................................................423
View by Center Point Command (View Menu)..............................................................424
Eye Point Only Command (View Menu) ........................................................................424
Center Point Only Command (View Menu)....................................................................425
Far Clipping Plane Command (View Menu) ..................................................................425
Near Clipping Plane Command (View Menu) ................................................................425
Top Command (View Menu) ..........................................................................................426
Front (North) Command (View Menu) ...........................................................................426
Right (West) Command (View Menu)............................................................................426
Bottom Command (View Menu).....................................................................................426
Back (South) Command (View Menu) ...........................................................................427
Left (East) Command (View Menu) ...............................................................................427
Top Front Right (North West) Isometric Command (View Menu) ................................427
Top Front Left (North East) Isometric Command (View Menu) ....................................427
Top Back Right (South West) Isometric Command (View Menu).................................428
Top Back Left (South East) Isometric Command (View Menu) ....................................428
Bottom Front Right (North West) Isometric Command (View Menu)...........................428

Table of Contents
Bottom Front Left (North East) Isometric Command (View Menu) ..............................429
Bottom Back Right (South West) Isometric Command (View Menu) ...........................429
Bottom Back Left (South East) Isometric Command (View Menu)...............................429
Rotate with Model Fit Command (View Menu) .............................................................430
Zoom In Command (View Menu)...................................................................................430
Zoom Out Command (View Menu) ................................................................................431
Zoom About Point Command (View Menu)...................................................................431
Zoom Amount Command (View Menu) .........................................................................432
Settings Command (View Menu)....................................................................................432
Display Commands: An Overview..................................................................................433
Wireframe Command (View Menu) ...............................................................................435
Wireframe, Hidden Line Command (View Menu) .........................................................435
Flat Shading Command (View Menu) ............................................................................435
Coarse Facets Command (View Menu) ..........................................................................436
No Specular Command (View Menu).............................................................................436
Full Shading Command (View Menu) ............................................................................436
Object Textures Command (View Menu) .......................................................................437
Backfaces Command (View Menu) ................................................................................437
End Caps Command (View Menu) .................................................................................438
Annotations Command (View Menu) .............................................................................438
Measurements Command (View Menu) .........................................................................438
Axis Activate Command (View Menu)...........................................................................439
Axis XYZ Label Axis Command (View Menu) .............................................................439
Dashed View Cone (View Menu) ...................................................................................439
Perspective Command (View Menu) ..............................................................................439
Perspective Angle Command (View Menu) ...................................................................440
Wireframe Background Color Command (View Menu).................................................440
Stroking Tolerance Command (View Menu)..................................................................440
Direction Command (View Menu)..................................................................................440
Ambient Command (View Menu)...................................................................................441
Brightness Command (View Menu) ...............................................................................441
Range Rejection Activate Command (View Menu)........................................................441
All Command (View Menu) ...........................................................................................442
Main Command (View Menu) ........................................................................................442
Plan Command (View Menu) .........................................................................................442
Elevation Command (View Menu) .................................................................................442
Show Settings Command (View Menu)..........................................................................443
Show/Hide for Main View Command (View Menu) ......................................................443
Show/Hide for Plan View Command (View Menu) .......................................................443
Show/Hide for Elevation View Command (View Menu) ...............................................444
Advanced Commands: An Overview..............................................................................444
Redraw on Refresh Command (View Menu)..................................................................445
Buffer Updates Command (View Menu) ........................................................................445
Stereo Activate Command (View Menu)........................................................................446
Distances Command (View Menu) .................................................................................446
Left View Command (View Menu) ................................................................................447
Right View Command (View Menu) ..............................................................................447
Far to Near Clip Ratio Command (View Menu).............................................................447
NetMeeting Command (View Menu)..............................................................................448
Elumens Activate Command (View Menu) ....................................................................448
Elumens Settings Command (View Menu).....................................................................449

Table of Contents
Display Order Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................................449

Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu) ...........................................................450
Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu) .........................................................450
New Point Light Command (View Menu) ......................................................................451
New Distant Light Command (View Menu)...................................................................451
New Spot Light Command (View Menu) .......................................................................452
Edit Source Light Command (View Menu) ....................................................................452
Delete Source Light Command (View Menu) ................................................................453
Raytrace Command (View Menu) ..................................................................................453
Raytrace Range Command (View Menu) .......................................................................454
Save and Recall Command (View Menu).......................................................................454
Snapshot Command (View Menu) ..................................................................................455
Full Screen Command (View Menu) ..............................................................................455
Toolbars: An Overview...................................................................................................456
Standard Toolbar .............................................................................................................456
Common Toolbar ............................................................................................................456
Tools MiniBar .................................................................................................................458
ScheduleReview Toolbar ................................................................................................458
Views Toolbar .................................................................................................................460
Common Views Toolbar .................................................................................................461
Tools Toolbar ..................................................................................................................462
Measure Toolbar .............................................................................................................463
Annotation Toolbar .........................................................................................................464
Navigation Toolbar .........................................................................................................465
Motion Toolbar ...............................................................................................................466
Tags Toolbar ...................................................................................................................467
Window Toolbar .............................................................................................................467
Photo-Realism Toolbar ...................................................................................................468
Position Control Toolbar Command (View Menu).........................................................469
Perspective Angle Toolbar ..............................................................................................469
Encircle Radius Toolbar..................................................................................................470
Views Control Toolbar....................................................................................................470
Using Key-In Commands................................................................................................471
Customizing Toolbars: An Overview..............................................................................471
Customize Dialog Box ....................................................................................................472
New Toolbar Dialog Box ................................................................................................473
Create a Toolbar ..............................................................................................................474
Reset a Toolbar................................................................................................................474
Menu Bar Command (View Menu) ................................................................................475
Using the Status Bar: An Overview ................................................................................475
Status Bar Command (View Menu) ................................................................................475
Show or Hide the Status Bar ...........................................................................................476
Project Manager Command (View Menu) ......................................................................476
Tools Menu .............................................................................................................. 477
Show Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................................................477
Shade Command (Tools Menu) ......................................................................................477
Dim Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................................................477
Material Command (Tools Menu)...................................................................................478
Move Command (Tools Menu).......................................................................................478
Show Only Command (Tools Menu) ..............................................................................479
Hide Only Command (Tools Menu) ...............................................................................479

Table of Contents
Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................................480

Display Sets Assign Material Command (Tools Menu) .................................................480
Edit Position Command (Tools Menu) ...........................................................................481
Auto-Define Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................................482
Folder Command (Tools Menu)......................................................................................482
Display Set Command (Tools Menu)..............................................................................482
Display Sets Delete Command (Tools Menu).................................................................483
Rename Command (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................483
Reverse Dim Command (Tools Menu) ...........................................................................483
Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu) .....................................................................484
Unassign Materials Command (Tools Menu) .................................................................485
Edit Materials Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................................485
Create Materials Command (Tools Menu)......................................................................486
Edit Search Path Bump Map Command (Tools Menu)...................................................487
Edit Search Path Palette Command (Tools Menu)..........................................................487
Edit Search Path Pattern Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................487
Snaplock Command (Tools Menu) .................................................................................488
Surface Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................................488
Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command (Tools Menu)..........................489
Measure One Click Measurement Mode Command (Tools Menu) ................................489
Move Measurement Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................490
Restore Position Command (Tools Menu)......................................................................490
Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu) ......................................................................491
New Collection Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................................491
Delete Last Measurement Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................492
Delete Active Collection Measurements Command (Tools Menu) ................................492
Delete All Measurements Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................492
Delete All Collections Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................492
Hide Level Command (Tools Menu) ..............................................................................493
Level Settings Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................................493
Collision Detection Command (Tools Menu) .................................................................493
ScheduleReview Settings Command (Tools Menu)........................................................494
Query New Command (Tools Menu)..............................................................................495
Query Edit Command (Tools Menu)...............................................................................495
Review Play Command (Tools Menu)............................................................................496
Review Pause Command (Tools Menu)..........................................................................496
Review Stop Command (Tools Menu)............................................................................496
Forward Command (Tools Menu)...................................................................................497
Back Command (Tools Menu)........................................................................................497
Go To Start Command (Tools Menu) .............................................................................497
Go To End Command (Tools Menu) ..............................................................................498
Go To Date Command (Tools Menu) .............................................................................498
Record Command (Tools Menu).....................................................................................498
Task Symbology Command (Tools Menu) .....................................................................499
Auto-Association Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................499
Add Association Command (Tools Menu) .....................................................................500
Remove Association Command (Tools Menu) ...............................................................500
New Project Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................................500
Delete Project Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................................501
Set Active Project Command (Tools Menu) ...................................................................501
Refresh Active Project Command (Tools Menu)............................................................501

Table of Contents
Data Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................502

Data Annotation Edit Command (Tools Menu) ..............................................................502
Delete One Command (Tools Menu) ..............................................................................502
Delete All Command (Tools Menu)................................................................................503
Volume Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu) ...................................................503
Volume Annotation Place Command (Tools Menu).......................................................503
Volume Annotation Edit Command (Tools Menu).........................................................504
Volume Annotation Adjust Command (Tools Menu).....................................................504
Volume Annotation Delete One (Tools Menu)...............................................................509
Volume Annotation Delete All Command (Tools Menu)...............................................509
Collaboration Run Command (Tools Menu)...................................................................509
Collaboration Edit Command (Tools Menu)...................................................................510
Refresh Data Command (Tools Menu) ...........................................................................511
Edit Attachments Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................511
Edit Types Command (Tools Menu)...............................................................................512
Open Database Command (Tools Menu)........................................................................512
Motion Menu............................................................................................................ 512
Eye Point Command (Motion Menu)..............................................................................513
Display Set Command (Motion Menu) ...........................................................................513
Continuous Command (Motion Menu) ...........................................................................513
Single Step Command (Motion Menu) ...........................................................................514
Toggle Step Direction Command (Motion Menu) ..........................................................514
Motion Settings Command (Motion Menu)....................................................................515
Auto-Highlight Elements Command (Motion Menu) .....................................................515
Auto-Highlight Complex Elements Command (Motion Menu) .....................................516
Auto-Highlight Components Command (Motion Menu)................................................516
Auto-Highlight ................................................................................................................517
Forward/Back, Left/Right Command (Motion Menu) ....................................................517
Pan Command (Motion Menu) .......................................................................................518
Rotate Command (Motion Menu) ...................................................................................518
View Cube Command (Motion Menu) ...........................................................................519
Priority Mode Command (Motion Menu) .......................................................................519
Center Mode Command (Motion Menu).........................................................................519
Lock Center Point Command (Motion Menu) ................................................................520
Lock Elevation Command (Motion Menu) .....................................................................520
Positioning Modes Command (Motion Menu) ...............................................................520
Lateral Command (Motion Menu) ..................................................................................521
Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu) ..............................................................521
Vertical Encircle Command (Motion Menu) ..................................................................522
Surface Encircle Command (Motion Menu) ...................................................................523
Clip to Encircle Sphere Command (Motion Menu) ........................................................524
Maintain Encircle Clipping Command (Motion Menu)..................................................524
View Dependent Command (Motion Menu)...................................................................524
View Dependent, Level Command (Motion Menu) .......................................................525
View Independent Command (Motion Menu) ................................................................525
Plant North Command (Motion Menu) ...........................................................................526
Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar) ...........................................................526
Key Frame Play Command (Motion Menu)....................................................................527
Key Frame Pause Command (Motion Menu) .................................................................527
Key Frame Stop Command (Motion Menu) ...................................................................528
Snapshot Command (Motion Menu)...............................................................................528

Table of Contents
Tags Menu................................................................................................................ 529

Leader Command (Tags Menu) ......................................................................................529
No Leader Command (Tags Menu).................................................................................529
Tags Edit Command (Tags Menu) ..................................................................................530
Tags Delete Command (Tags Menu) ..............................................................................530
Tags Find Command (Tag Menu) ...................................................................................531
Next Command (Tag Menu) ...........................................................................................531
Previous Command (Tags Menu)....................................................................................532
Go To Command (Tags Menu) .......................................................................................532
Display Activate Command (Tags Menu).......................................................................532
Active Only Command (Tags Menu)..............................................................................533
Display All Command (Tags Menu) ...............................................................................533
Display None Command (Tags Menu) ...........................................................................533
Action Comments Command (Tags Menu) ....................................................................533
Accessories Menu .................................................................................................... 534
Load Accessories Command (Accessories Menu) ..........................................................534
Text Annotations Place One Command (Accessories Menu) .........................................534
Text Annotations Place Many Command (Accessories Menu) ......................................535
Text Annotations Move One Command (Accessories Menu) ........................................535
Text Annotations Move Many Command (Accessories Menu)......................................536
Text Annotations Edit One Command (Accessories Menu) ...........................................536
Text Annotations Edit Many Command (Accessories Menu) ........................................537
Text Annotations Delete One Command (Accessories Menu) .......................................537
Text Annotations Delete Many Command (Accessories Menu).....................................538
Text Annotations Delete All Command (Accessories Menu).........................................538
Text Annotations Display On Command (Accessories Menu) .......................................538
Text Annotations Display Off Command (Accessories Menu) ......................................539
Set Window Size Command (Accessories Menu) ..........................................................539
Move Display Set Command (Accessories Menu) .........................................................539
Paint Command (Accessories Menu) ..............................................................................540
Window Menu.......................................................................................................... 540
Main Command (Window Menu) ...................................................................................540
Plan Command (Window Menu) ....................................................................................540
Elevation Command (Window Menu) ............................................................................541
Text Command (Window Menu) ....................................................................................541
Single Command (Window Menu) .................................................................................541
Three Command (Window Menu) ..................................................................................542
Four Command (Window Menu) ....................................................................................542
Cascade Command (Window Menu) ..............................................................................542
Arrange Icons Command (Window Menu).....................................................................543
Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)................................................................543
Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu) ....................................................................543
Arrange All Command (Window Menu) ........................................................................544
Restore All Command (Window Menu) .........................................................................544
Scroll Bars Command (Window Menu)..........................................................................544
Refresh All Command (Window Menu) .........................................................................545
Refresh Command (Window Menu) ...............................................................................545
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 546
Solutions to Common Problems .............................................................................. 546

Table of Contents
System Performance Tips ........................................................................................ 549

Customer Support .................................................................................................... 550
Glossary.......................................................................................................................... 551
Index ............................................................................................................................... 555

Introducing SmartPlant Review

Intergraph® SmartPlant® Review provides a robust set of review-oriented tools for
the clear and concise communication of spatial design. Going beyond low-end viewer
capabilities, SmartPlant Review provides tools for visual analysis and simulation
(dynamic walk through), tagging, and model queries, as well as an API for complete
customization. Advanced features include construction simulation, stereo viewing,
and sophisticated image generation using textures, reflection maps, and lighting. The
familiar, easy-to-use Microsoft® Windows® interface allows you to navigate through
the three dimensional models with a joystick, mouse, or keyboard control.
SmartPlant Review displays and manipulates PDS™ three dimensional models as

well as AutoCAD®, MicroStation®, and ACIS® SAT files without translation and is
specifically designed to meet the process and power industry's requirements to
dynamically visualize computer-generated three dimensional plant models. With
SmartPlant Review walk-through and interrogation features, process plant models can
now remain live throughout the life cycle of the facility from conceptual design
studies to de-commissioning.
What's New?
SmartPlant Review Usability Changes
SmartPlant Review capabilities set it apart from any other visualization product on
the market. One of the key deliverables for version 5.0 is vastly enhanced usability.
SmartPlant Review lets you customize model and data navigation to meet the needs
of the casual or the expert user. The wide range of users include designers, engineers,
project managers, owners/clients, and construction foremen. While many of these
users are 3D experts, most are casual users who have little or no experience in 3D
modeling. You can easily modify the SmartPlant Review interface to meet the needs
of any of these users. The graphic user interface is completely familiar; matching the
user interface of all the most widely used office applications.
The functionality of SmartPlant Review is separated into modules. This makes it

possible for you to extend these functions as your firm deems necessary without
buying features that you will not need. Another money-saving innovation is
concurrent licensing, in which, for example, 50 users could share ten concurrent use
licenses. This purchase plan drastically reduces your company's expenditure. Leasing
is also a cost-reducing option. A single-user license for standalone or remote
machines is available as well.

Simplicity For Casual Users

For a simpler view of your model, SmartPlant Review offers individual floating
windows with scroll bars for main, plan, elevation, and text views, instead of the
splitter windows of preceding versions. You can cascade, tile vertically or
horizontally, or turned off or on these floating windows. Reorganized toolbars make
motion and navigation much easier procedures, plus the work space is customizable.
Common Views supply a one-click method for quick orientation, with Top, Right
(West) or Front (North) as examples.
See the following topics for more information:

Scroll Bars Command (Window Menu), page 544
Main Command (Window Menu), page 540
Plan Command (Window Menu), page 540
Elevation Command (Window Menu), page 541
Text Command (Window Menu), page 541
Cascade Command (Window Menu), page 542
Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu), page 543
Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu), page 543
Motion Toolbar, page 466
Navigation Toolbar, page 465
Common Views Toolbar, page 461
New Option for Programmers

The Application Programming Interface (API) module includes programming
libraries that allow developers to create custom programs that run with SmartPlant
Review. The API includes both the original DRAPI C library function interface and
the ActiveX Control Interface DRAPIX. C or C++ programs can use either interface.
Visual Basic programs may also be linked in a similar fashion using the ActiveX
control interface. Documentation for these libraries is provided online in the
DRAPI_API.chm (C library interface) and DRAPIX_API.chm (ActiveX control
interface) files.
See the following topic for more information:

API Module, page 24
Reducing the Tedium of Repetitive Tasks

You can create your own workflow-oriented toolbars by grouping your most
frequently used commands. An example of a common workflow is zooming to an
object, rotating the view around the object, and reviewing its attributes. You might
call this toolbar the Encircle and Review. You could also include a measurement or
tag command and end with a quick print command.

Several measurement enhancements have been implemented in this version. The

shortest distance between two selected objects is measured with a new command. A
new option is provided for Range Box Measurement, which is a graphic
representation of a cube with snaplocks on each corner. You can select the range box
color, line style, and line width.
The new and improved Project Manager furnishes a Microsoft Explorer-style tree and
list view, replacing the custom view of previous versions. The tree and list view
presents more information to you at a glance and allows you to easily control the
display of files, levels, and display sets. Perspective Angle and Encircle Radius
toolbars and the menu bar can be docked either vertically or horizontally. The Status
Bar displays information panes based on the information currently presented by
various command processes. The progress bar also displays inside its own
information pane. You can choose and lock elevation and center point during
navigation.

Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 471
Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command (Tools Menu), page 489
Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box), page 232
Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 180
Perspective Toolbar, page 469
Encircle Radius Toolbar, page 470
Using the Status Bar: An Overview, page 475
Lock Elevation Command (Motion Menu), page 520
Lock Center Point Command (Motion Menu), page 520
Extend to All Phases of your Project

Employ SmartPlant Review in the conceptual design phase in addition to the as-built
construction phase with the use of new place volume annotation commands to place
scaffolding, field welds, and model temporary construction work areas. Place zones
around graphic areas to control their display. Place cubes, cylinders, and spheres for
visualization of hazardous work areas caused by noise or potential spills. Volumes
have user definable attributes. Associate construction areas and scaffolding with
project schedules (using Primavera and Microsoft Project) so they can be viewed
along with the design objects. The volumes can be saved for re-use. The volume can
be annotated with associated information, such as statistics related to field welds in
piping.
See the following topic for more information:

Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview, page 262

Work Sharing and Collaboration

SmartPlant Review offers collision-free multi-user sharing of the database. This
feature makes it possible for two users to save views and place tags, measurements,
and text annotations without stepping on one another's work. Database queries are
faster so you can find tags or object attributes quickly. Another time saver that
reduces screen updates is a new scan check allowing you to browse the text without
changing the view. Text annotation can be saved or not, as you choose, and any text
can be associated.
SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Jet Access 2000 database engine by default to
create the project databases. SmartPlant Review also supports Access 97 and provides
an option to create the project databases in the Access 97 database format when you
open your model for the first time.
The new tag features include a tabbed dialog box for editing tag data, attributes, and
symbology, such as coloration for grouping tags. SmartPlant Review provides a new
tag query capability and new data fields to save more information on tag origin, user,
date, discipline, the office that placed the tag, and more. The software now tracks
who, when, and where tags were placed to help insure everyone's comments are
recorded. Searches can be based on dates, users, disciplines, tag status, and more.
You can import and export tags for better communication with clients and within
standalone work sessions. As another convenience, SmartPlant Review provides new
commands allowing you to import and export saved views, tags, and display sets
from other project databases, rather than having to input the same data.

Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 46
Edit Tags Dialog Box, page 253
Import Tags Command (File Menu), page 413
Export Tags Command (File Menu), page 416
Smooth Upgrade for New or Existing Projects

SmartPlant Review 5.0 supports Microsoft Windows® XP and Windows 2000. The
application includes a utility to upgrade SmartPlant Review 4.2 databases. SmartPlant
Review continues to support PDS DRV Integrator and easily replaces version 4.2 on
existing projects. You can also map SmartPlant Review commands to your Microsoft
joystick to match your graphic navigation preferences.
You can now open another project, or close the current project, without exiting the
application. The software closes the existing project and then opens a new one.
SmartPlant Review supports dual screen workstations, views can be dragged into
position on either screen (main, plan, or elevation). Additionally, SmartPlant Review
now supports MicroStation® cells, replacing the single element concept.


Open Command (File Menu), page 408
Close Command (File Menu), page 409
Auto-Highlight Complex Elements Command (Motion Menu), page 516
Additional Documentation
For more information about installing and using SmartPlant Review, the following
documentation is provided:
• SmartPlant Review Installation Guide (SPRInstall.pdf) - Provides

installation and configuration information for system administrators.
This guide, available online only, is available on the SmartPlant
Review CD, on the AutoPlay dialog box, and in the
..\SmartPlant\Review\resdlls\0009 installation folder on your computer
after you install the software.
• SmartPlant Review User's Guide (SPRUsersGuide.pdf) - Provides
all of the information found in the online Help file, presented in a
printable .PDF format. You will find this guide in the
..\SmartPlant\Review\resdlls\0009 installation folder on your computer
after you install the software.
• SmartPlant Review README (README.TXT) - Contains
installation and configuration information, along with notes about last-
minute fixes and other helpful hints. You will find this file on the
SmartPlant Review CD and, after installing the software, in the
..\SmartPlant\Review\ folder on your computer.
• SmartPlant Review Programming Help (DRAPI_API.chm and
DRAPIX_API.chm) - These files, available online only, contain
instructions and complete reference information for programming with
the SmartPlant Review Automation Interface. You will find these files
in the ..\SmartPlant\Review\resdlls\0009 installation folder after you
install the SmartPlant Review API module.
Related Topics
• Introducing SmartPlant Review, page 19
• Solutions to Common Problems, page 546

Using SmartPlant Review Modules: An Overview

The following add-in modules further enhance the functionality found in SmartPlant
Review.
Tip
• To see which modules are currently installed on your computer, click
the Modules list on the About SmartPlant Review dialog box
available on the Help menu.
API Module
The Application Programming Interface (API) module includes programming
libraries that allow developers to create custom programs that run with SmartPlant
Review. The API module is not a requirement to run the custom programs, only to
create a custom program for SmartPlant Review. The online SmartPlant Review
Programmer's Guide contains a complete list of function calls and programming
examples.
Key Features:
• API Library - Links into your application program to control
SmartPlant Review functions. The API includes both the original
DRAPI C library function interface and the ActiveX Control Interface
DRAPIX. The functions in this library give your applications direct
control over the working of SmartPlant Review instead of just sending
commands that a user would enter. This library gives your application
more control and flexibility. Visual C® or Visual C++® programs can
use either interface. Visual Basic® programs may also be linked in a
similar fashion using the ActiveX control interface.
• Save VUE file - Creates a vue file while inside SmartPlant Review.
This does not include the ability to create vue files in a batch mode.
• Snapshot - Creates an image file of the Main view, application
window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality
anti-aliased image of any resolution. This module includes support for
standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.
Related Topics
• Additional Documentation, page 23
• Save As a .vue File, page 45
• Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 219
• Using Accessories: An Overview, page 393

Collaboration Module
SmartPlant Review's Collaboration module allows multiple users in different
locations to view and interrogate the model simultaneously. The Collaboration
module allows enterprise-wide coordination of design reviews for more effective
communication and improved efficiency. This feature reduces travel time and
expenses.
This module serves to enhance both SmartPlant Review and NetMeeting® as an add-
on service to both products. The collaboration module extends the use of NetMeeting
by reducing network traffic and improving performance during the session.
Key features:
• Collaboration - Lets all team members join efforts by working
together in a single design review session. You can analyze the three-
dimensional model and data as the driver or become a passenger by
passing control to someone at another location. Everyone sees the
latest version of the model and everyone sees the same thing.
anti-aliased image of any resolution. Snapshot includes support for
Benefits of Collaboration module:

• Reduces administration and training costs as an add-on feature to
NetMeeting. The NetMeeting toolkit allows customization of
NetMeeting to accommodate SmartPlant Review and the extensive
data requirements of the process industry. The basic capabilities of
NetMeeting include security, network neighborhood, white boarding,
chat, cursor tracking, and passenger and driver controls. Customization
provides improved performance and reduced network traffic.
• Improves performance with no waiting for a large set of pixels to
distribute through the network each time that the view changes. The
software updates the view immediately when a small set of
instructions reach the passenger computer. Processing occurs at each
passenger computer so performance depends on each computer - not
the network. This feature allows the Collaboration module to support
dynamic navigation with the mouse or joystick at all passenger
computers. All participants see the entire collection of data with no
waiting.
• Reduces network traffic. This improvement occurs because only small
sets of instructions transmit to each passenger computer. The result is
excellent response times and allows collaboration even to remote
locations that have less than ideal network connections.

Related Topics
• Establish a Collaboration Session, page 357
• NetMeeting Command (View Menu), page 448
• Passenger Settings, page 355
• Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 358
• Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 354
Construction Module
The Construction module extends SmartPlant Review's capabilities with integrated
project scheduling and collision detection functionality. For project scheduling,
ScheduleReview turns data from your project planning software into a visual display
of the construction or demolition progress. Use ScheduleReview together with the
collision detection functionality to plan safe and timely equipment installation.
Review collisions as equipment moves dynamically through the plant. Hear sounds
and see objects highlight as collisions occur. ScheduleReview supports two popular
planning programs: Primavera Project Planner® and Microsoft® Project.
Key features:
• ScheduleReview - Helps analyze and visualize the process by
showing objects in the context of the overall project schedule. You can
display the project as it should appear on a specified day, or fly
through the model while displaying the construction sequence. This
component also allows you to visualize the construction or demolition
cycle in a single step - by day, week, or month - or continuously.
ScheduleReview supports two popular planning programs: Primavera
Project Planner versions 2.0B and 3.0, and Microsoft Project 98.
• Collision Detection - Includes static and dynamic collision detection.
Colliding objects can be highlighted in a user-definable color. Users
can play a sound file each time objects collide. Collisions can be
recorded as an object (or group) is driven through the model with
precision controls or moved freely with a mouse or joystick. Collision
information is written to a log file for review. Collision detection does
not take into account non-model tolerances, such as construction
tolerances, or soft boundaries, such as pipe insulation. Collision
detection runs only in an interactive mode. Batch processes are not
available. For these reasons, collision detection does not replace the
PDS clash reporting detection capabilities.
• Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view,
application window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a
high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Snapshot includes
support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

• Volume Annotations - Provides a very powerful planning and

tracking tool. You can use volume annotations to represent many types
of objects and areas in the model, including scaffolds, field welds,
work areas, security areas, construction parking lots, and lay down
yards. Volume annotations allow you to place three basic types of
geometry which SmartPlant Review saves only in the project database.
You can place boxes, cylinders, and spheres. SmartPlant Review also
provides several specialty types of volume annotations, including
scaffolds (boxes), welds (cylinders), and clipping volumes (boxes).
Related Topics
• Detecting Collisions: An Overview, page 333
• Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 360
On-Site Drawing Generation Module

The SmartPlant Review On-Site Drawing Generation module is a powerful,
versatile product that allows you to bring design and drawing capabilities from the
office to your project site. This module features fast, intelligent hidden line display
capability - your drawing maintains intelligence even when displayed in hidden-line
mode. The module also improves communication, because you control the way the
drawing will appear to others. Additionally, by reducing the time required to process
and display hidden line removal from hours to a fraction of a second, the On-Site
Drawing Generation Module saves time and money.
This module includes a wizard that places the hidden line view on a drawing border
inside the SmartSketch® product. You can use the wizard to easily and quickly
produce drawings for the engineering design office or the construction site. In
SmartSketch, you can update the drawing in several ways:
• Add notes to drawing borders

• Insert overlay comments
• Quickly print a drawing at a scale that you define
• Add symbols
You can combine the On-Site Drawing Generation module with the Simulation
and Visual Effects module to create hidden line animations to improve the quality of
your presentations.
Key features:
• Hidden Line Mode - Provides capabilities of a display model to
navigate the model by using the joystick, mouse, or keypad
• Labels - Assign identifying phrases to objects in the hidden line view
with tags, text annotation, and measurements.

• Drawing Package - Includes a full copy of SmartSketch with each

module for adding notes, comments, symbols, and drawing borders
Benefits of the On-Site Drawing Generation module:

• Saves time by eliminating the wait for the hidden line display to finish
• Improves communication by presenting your designs in a clear and
understandable way as you control the display of the objects in the
view and their display method on the drawing
• Easy to use because casual users can navigate the three-dimensional
model and quickly produce a hidden line drawing that is ready for
printing
Related Topics
• Display Commands: An Overview, page 433
• Using Annotations: An Overview, page 240
Photo-Realism Module
SmartPlant Review's Photo-Realism module provides features for creating realistic,
photo-quality images from a three dimensional model. A realistic image, rendered
using textures, patterns, bump maps, background images, environment boxes, and
raytraced lighting, helps you to visualize designs during each stage of the
development process and to create powerful presentations that communicate and sell
your ideas to clients and managers.
Key features:
• Display Textures - Creates a more realistic display by assigning
textures to materials and then applying the textures to objects.
• Material Editor - Provides complete material editor functionality for
creating new material definitions and palettes.
• Lighting - Supports global (ambient, flashbulb, solar, and fog), spot,
distance, and point lights.
• Raytracing - Creates more realistic 3-D effects by adding reflections
and shadows to images.
• High resolution - Captures the image at high resolution to produce
near photo-quality plots of the model.


• Stereo Viewing - Adds dramatic depth perception to models.
• Patterns Plus CD - Includes several pre-defined material definitions.
Related Topics
• Assign Materials to Elements, page 289
• Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview, page 313
• Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview, page 301
• Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview, page 301
• Viewing in Stereo: An Overview, page 119
Simulation and Visual Effects Module

SmartPlant Review's Simulation and Visual Effects module brings life to your three
dimensional model by simulating the placement or removal of equipment, reviewing
physical clearances, performing motion studies, and developing complex motion
scenarios. This module works with the Construction module to visually simulate the
construction process where you can review the simulation on-screen or create
animations for output to video.
Key features:
• Animation - Create animation paths - one or many - through your
models by defining key frames. Start with an aerial view of your
facility, for example, and then dive into it, moving along the animation
path for an impressive flythrough. Save your animation at the
resolution and size that you need, and apply anti-aliasing to produce
sharp, clear images. Import animation frames into the non-linear
digital video editor product VizFx Web Pro, provided with this
module.
• VizFx Web Pro - Create dynamic and original graphics, animation,
and video with a non-linear digital video editing product that includes
a collection of high-end special effects. Output file types include .avi,
.bmp, .gif, .jpg, .pict, .tga, and .tiff. The product includes a wide range
of effects categories to include the following items:
12 Deforms,
12 Composites,
9 Waves,
13 Blasts,
6 Concentric Blinds,
10 Embosses,
2 Chromators.

• Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view,

application window, or entire screen. Can be used to create a high
quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Includes support for
• Snapshot Animation - Used to create high quality animation
sequences. Snapshot is compatible with the Construction module for
SmartPlant Review to record the simulation of the construction
process. Snapshot can be used to create high quality anti-aliased
images of any resolution. The module includes support for standard
output types like .bmp and .jpg.
Note
• You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to
your animations, special web projects, or video. You can download
ViZfx Web Pro with your SmartPlant Review serial number from
http://www.intergraph.com/visualization/vizfx.asp.
Related Topics
• Construction Module, page 26
• Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview, page 171
• Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 82
Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview

Although SmartPlant Review has been redesigned to make commands much easier to
use by making them accessible from the regular menus and toolbars, SmartPlant
Review continues to support the Key-In commands found in DesignReview®.
For more information about any SmartPlant Review command, click the Search tab
in the SmartPlant Review Help and enter the name of the command or browse the
Command Reference section in the Help Table of Contents.
For more information about how to get started with SmartPlant Review, you can read
the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide (SPRInstall.pdf). This guide is delivered
on the SmartPlant Review CD and is installed on your computer during typical and
minimal setup.
Backward Compatibility
After you open your project in SmartPlant Review, you cannot go back and open the
project in DesignReview. There is no backward compatibility between SmartPlant
Review and DesignReview.

New Naming Convention for Label Files

Label files generated by DesignReview Integrator must be in a name:value format.
Although you can output any string from DesignReview Integrator, you can use only
those entries in the name:value format.
Project Databases
SmartPlant Review no longer uses the various text files that DesignReview used.
When you open an existing model document, SmartPlant Review creates a new
project database, with an .mdb extension, for you. If your project contains label data,
the software also creates an additional database, .mdb2, for your project. These
databases have the same name as your project. These databases contain view settings
and all other data associated with your project. Each project has at least one database.
For more information, see Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 46.
Related Topics
• .vue File Changes, page 35
• Command Reference: An Overview, page 408
• Display Set Changes, page 31
• Function Key Changes, page 33
• Measurement Changes, page 33
• Position Control Changes, page 34
• Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 46
Display Set Changes

SmartPlant Review contains the following display set behavioral changes.
Unlimited number of user-defined display sets

DesignReview is limited to 500 user-defined display sets per .dst file. A project can
have multiple .dst files, if needed. In DesignReview, the memory for these display
sets is allocated during each DesignReview session even if no display sets are
defined. SmartPlant Review removes these restrictions by supporting an unlimited
number of user-defined display sets and creating a memory management scheme that
allocates memory only for those display sets that exist.
Restrictions removed regarding display set user assigned ids

In DesignReview, you cannot assign a display set ID outside the range of 1 - 500.
SmartPlant Review lets you determine the numbering for the display sets so that it
can assign display set ids with meaningful criteria based upon their particular
discipline. The display set ids are usually the key in a foreign database table. The user
ID number is no longer restricted to 1-500.

Lowest user ID number determines controlling display set

In DesignReview, the display set with the highest user ID number takes precedence.
In SmartPlant Review, the display set with the lowest user ID number is the
controlling display set.
Do not assign display set user id numbers starting at 1

When assigning display set user id numbers in SmartPlant Review, start display set
numbers at a high number to allow manipulation at a future date. Do not start at 1
because a display set with a user ID number = 1 has the highest priority and would
prevent you from creating a controlling display set in the future. In other words, the
controlling display set would not be able to take priority because the lowest number is
already in use. The project length will need to be taken into consideration when the
start number is determined. A number of 1000 or greater is recommended.
API interface issues recommend using user ID numbers

greater than 512
Reserve user IDs 1 - 512 for SmartPlant Review API custom interface programming.
The existing SmartPlant Review API interface does not handle unlimited display sets.
If there are no plans for API programming, then those numbers can be used.
Important
• Please note that this suggestion does not mean the first 512 display sets
created, but display sets with user IDs between 1 and 512.
Display set information stored in a database table

DesignReview stores display set information in ASCII .dst files. This convention
forces you to insure that all files are delivered with a particular project. SmartPlant
Review stores display set information in the .mdb2 database along with other project
information. All that is needed to publish a project is the .vue and .mdb files.
Related Topics
• Defining Display Sets: An Overview, page 191
• Working with Display Sets: An Overview, page 188

Function Key Changes

The following table lists the changes from function keys in DesignReview to function
keys in SmartPlant Review.
Key Old Command New Command

F2 Full Screen Toggle Assign Materials to Elements
Ctrl + F3 Manipulation Display Sets Move Display Set
F4 Assign Materials to Elements Hide Level (Object)
F5 Main View Settings Refresh
Ctrl + F5 Save and Recall Views Refresh All
F6 Hide Object View Settings
F8 Motion Settings Snaplock Measurement
Ctrl + F8 Measurement Surface Measurement
F11 Copy Main View to Clipboard Full Screen Toggle
Ctrl + F11 Copy Full View to Clipboard Arrange All
F12 Print Main View Collision Detection
Related Topics
• Function Keys, page 144
Measurement Changes
In DesignReview, you could only measure the distance between two snaplock points
or two surface measurement points, and you could only measure between two objects
in the current view. DesignReview would not allow you to move to another location
in between measurement point selection.
In SmartPlant Review, you can measure the distance between two highlighted
snaplock points, two surface points, or a surface point and a snaplock point.
SmartPlant Review allows you to move to another location between the selection of
measurement points, and shows you the two points that you selected, a line between
the two points, and the distance between the points.
One Click Measurement Mode has been added to SmartPlant Review for use with
the Snaplock Measurement and Surface Measurement commands. One Click
Measurement Mode allows you to stay in these two measurement commands after

you start them. When you are not using One Click Measurement Mode, SmartPlant
Review requires you to start the measurement command and then select the element
to measure. One Click Measurement Mode allows you to use a single click to select
the next element to measure. One Click Measurement Mode makes SmartPlant
Review behave like DesignReview with respect to selecting the next element to
measure. Like DesignReview, SmartPlant Review users will not be able to freely
move around in the model when in One Click Measurement Mode.
Related Topics
• Placing Measurements: An Overview, page 225
Position Control Changes

The DesignReview Position Control dialog box is now the Position Control toolbar.
To display the Position Control toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Position Control.
The Position Control toolbar appears undocked by default, but can be docked if you
prefer.
Several commands from the DesignReview Position Control have been moved to
other menus and toolbars.
Old Position New Commands

Control
Command
Motion Modes Motion > Positioning Modes
Motion > Directional Modes
Motion toolbar
Select Display Project Manager

Sets and
Reference Points Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position
Encircle Point View > Place > Center Point OnlyView > Place > Center Point
Only

Encircle Radius View > Toolbars > Encircle RadiusView > Toolbars > Encircle
Radius
Step Motion Motion > Move > Single Step
Motion toolbar
View Independent Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent Motion
Motion
Motion toolbar
Set motion reference angles on the Position Control > Motion tab
Rotate about the When using any of the Encircle positioning modes, you can use
Center Point or the Bearing and Elevation buttons on the Position Control
the Eye Point dialog box to rotate around either the center point or eye point.
Rotating around the center point is the default. To rotate around
the eye point, press Ctrl while using these controls.
Related Topics
• Position Control Toolbar, page 128
.vue File Changes

If you make new material assignments while running from a .vue file, you must save
a new .vue file to retain those new assignments.
The .vue file saves the materials that it had when it was created. You can edit
materials while running from a .vue file. The edits appear as long as the .vue file is
running. However, those edits are not permanently saved to the existing file. You
must save a new .vue file and use the new .vue file to see the new material
assignments in subsequent sessions of the software.
Related Topics

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review: An Overview
Getting Started with SmartPlant Review:

An Overview
After installing SmartPlant Review, you are ready to start the application and open
your model. Before opening your model, you need to know the location of your
model file, the design file search path, and the materials search path for any
associated palette, pattern, or bump map files.
Related Topics
• Opening a Model File: An Overview, page 36
• Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 49
Opening a Model File: An Overview

When you open your model for the first time in SmartPlant Review, SmartPlant
Review creates a new project database for you (using, by default, the Microsoft
Access 2000 format) if a database does not already exist. All the data concerning your
project is stored in the database. An additional database with an .mdb2 extension is
created if the project contains label data.
SmartPlant Review requires writeable databases to run. If you try to use a database
that is write protected or in a write protected folder or share, SmartPlant Review will
look for a temporary folder to copy the databases to so that they are writeable and
SmartPlant Review can run.
If you have defined the environment variable SPRTEMP, SmartPlant Review uses
that environment variable's specified folder path for the copied database. If
SPRTEMP is not defined, then the system defined temporary folder will be used
instead.
SmartPlant Review attempts the following locations:

1. The path specified by the TMP environment variable.
2. The path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined.
3. The Windows folder, if neither TMP nor TEMP are defined.
To define a user environment variable, do the following:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > System.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Click Environment Variables
4. Under User variables click New.
5. Type SPRTEMP in the Variable Name field.

6. Type the full path to the temporary folder that you want SmartPlant Review to use
in the Variable Value field.
Related Topics
• Close Command (File Menu), page 409
• Open a Model File, page 43
• Open Model from Command Line, page 41
• Refresh Data, page 45
Create Project Dialog Box

Allows you to view current database information, including the origin of the database.
You also can use the Options tab on this dialog box to set the DRI file parameters
for PDS large plant monument and DGN file elements.
Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)

Lets you specify database information for the project that you are creating. The
following options apply to all model files being opened for review.
Name - Displays the name of the database associated with the project. The name is
based on the .dri, .dgn, .dwg, .dxf, or .sat document name. This box is read-only.
When using the use interface to create a project database, the path and base file name
of the database are always the same as the path and base file name of the project file.
From the user interface, you cannot change the name of the database unless you
change the base name of the project file. If you change the name of the .dri, .dgn,
.dwg, .dxf or .sat document, the Create Project dialog box appears again, allowing
you to create a new database. Command line options are available to allow you to
create or use a database in a remote location.
Project schema - Displays the name of the project schema file. The schema file
defines the layout of tables in the database. Click Browse to select another project
schema file. Although the schema file is a text file, you should not edit it.
Label schema - Displays the name of the label schema file. The label schema file
defines the table layout in the label database. Click Browse to select another label
schema file. Although the label schema file is a text file, you should not edit it.
Site Name - Sets the site name. The site name is stored in the site table and helps you
to identify the database or its origin. This fact is helpful if you want information from
different sites for activities, such as merging tables or tags.
Site ID - Sets an abbreviation for the site name identifier. You can type a maximum
of four letters or numbers in this box.
Access 2000 database format - Creates the project database in Microsoft Access
2000 format. If left unchecked, the project database will be created in Access 97

format. You will notice a significant file size increase in the Access 2000 files
because Access 2000 uses Unicode rather than ANSI format. However, creating the
databases in Access 2000 enhances performance. If disk space is limited and other
project parameters do not require the use of Access 2000, you may want to create
your project databases in the default Access 97 format.
Notes
• SmartPlant Review versions prior to 4.2 cannot use Access 2000
format.
• Although you can open and review the project and label databases in
Access 2000, do not edit or alter these files using Access 2000. Doing
so will render your databases unreadable by SmartPlant Review.
• If you open a SmartPlant Review Access 97 database in Access 2000
and you want to use the database with SmartPlant Review 4.1 or
earlier versions, do not convert the database to Access 2000 format.
Such a conversion renders the database unreadable by SmartPlant
Review versions 4.1 and earlier.
Related Topics
• Sharing the Project Database Over the Network, page 48
• Working with Large Datasets, page 48
Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)
Lets you specify project-level options for the project that you are creating. The
following options affect the transformation and range of the geometry when a Large
Plant Monument point is present in the .dri document. These options also can affect
the range of the model, impacting Fit and other SmartPlant Review operations for
MicroStation and PDS projects.
Use transform - Uses the transform matrix if the PDS project contains a defined
large plant monument.
Use old and new origin - Uses the old and new origin for PDS projects if the PDS
project contains a defined large plant monument. In the standard SmartPlant Review
product, there is no longer a limit on the large plant monument range. However, if
you use the API to recall saved views, the maximum new origin is the range -
2147483647 to +2147483648. You can bypass this limitation with the API by getting
the eye and center point information directly from the database after you save any
changes to views in the current session.
Keep construction text - Uses the construction text in the model. For better view
manipulation, do not check this option if you have placed construction text at extreme
points in the MicroStation model or PDS project.

Keep lines and line strings - Uses the lines and lines strings in the MicroStation
model or PDS project. The model display rate is slower when this option is used,
depending on the number of lines or line strings in the model.
Keep named views - Keeps any named views found in the MicroStation design file.
MicroStation can save named views to .dgn files. If you turn on this option, you can
read the named views automatically as Save/Recall views in SmartPlant Review. If
there is not an available group, the software creates a new group called Named views
from dgn files in which to save the .dgn file named view. The software saves named
views from .dgn files the first time that they are encountered. If the named view
exists, it is not overwritten during subsequent sessions. Because of this, any edits that
you make in SmartPlant Review to the views are preserved.
Use bright default colors - Uses a non-gamma corrected color table. Traditionally
SmartPlant Review darkened the file color table with a gamma correction. Now, you
can choose the traditional darker colors or use a non-gamma corrected color table.
The non-gamma corrected color table is typically much brighter and looks more like
MicroStation colors. Turn on this option to use the newer brighter colors. Turn this
option off to use the darker colors as in previous versions of the software.
Important
• Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats, data
such as display sets, tags, and saved views are not guaranteed to be
valid if you switch from large plant monument format to regular
format.
Notes
• Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in
the .set file are read in and used in database creation upon initial read-
in to SmartPlant Review. These settings include
ignore_dri_old_new_origin, ignore_dri_transform, and
ignore_construction_text.
• If you do not have a .set file defining the large plant monument
settings or construction text settings, you can define it during the initial
read-in of the initial database creation by selecting the Options tab on
the Create Project dialog box.
Related Topics

Search Path Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated
with your project.
Note
• The Search Path dialog box appears while SmartPlant Review is
opening your design file for the first time if it cannot find, in the
Design File Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to the
model.
Directory - Allows you to specify a folder containing the pattern or bump map file
that you are assigning to the current object.
Browse - Allows you to specify a different folder.
Search Path - Displays the folders currently in the search path and allows you to add
and remove folders, and to re-order the list of folders.
Add - Adds the current folder to the bottom of the search path list of folders to use for
searching for pattern or bump map files.
Delete - Removes the selected folder from the search path list of folders to use for
Move Up - Moves the selected folder up one level in the search path list of folders.
SmartPlant Review searches first for folders listed closer to the top. You can find
patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the
search list.
Move Down - Moves the selected folder down one level in the search path list of
folders. SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You
can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher
in the search list.
Related Topics
• Design File Search Path, page 41

Design File Search Path

The Design File Search Path defines where the related .dgn files are stored for your
project. This feature allows you to store design files and label data files in a folder
other than where the project files are stored. Multiple users sharing the same design
data will find this feature useful.
The Design File Search Path is defined in the SmartPlant Review interface (.dri)
file. To use the Design File Search Path feature with your own projects, edit the .dri
file with a text editor such as Notepad.
SmartPlant Review looks for design and label files in the folders defined in the .dri
file dgn_search_path entry. Use a semicolon (;) to separate multiple paths. For
example:
dgn_search_path{d:\samples\dgndata\example;e:\projects\example;c:
\dgnfiles}
SmartPlant Review first searches for the file name as specified in the .dri file. If the
file name is not found, it then looks for the file in the project folder (where the .dri
file resides), and then searches in the list of folders in the order given in the path
entry. SmartPlant Review reads the first file found and stops the search.
SmartPlant Review assumes that the label file is in the same folder as the design file.
Note
• Defining the Design File Search Path is not the same as defining the
search paths to the pattern, palette, or bump map files associated with
your project. To define the search paths to these files, use the Search
Path dialog box.
Related Topics
Open Model from Command Line

You can start SmartPlant Review from a command line prompt.
Syntax:
SPR.exe [input file] [-a] [-c (y|n)] [-d] [-e (y|n)] [-f (y|n)]
[-g (y|n)] [-h (y|n)] [-i database file name] [-j database schema
file name] [-k database site name] [-l log file name] [-n
database site id] [-o] [-p label schema file name] [-q value] [-r
value] [-s] [-t] [-v]

Where:
-a Uses PDS area corner clip coordinates from the .dri file.
-c (y|n) Keeps construction text.
-d Specifies that design file is being input.
-e (y|n) Uses .dri file transform.
-f (y|n) Uses .dri file old and new origin.
-g (y|n) Turns on (y) or off (n) the use of Software GL. This option allows
you to use the Microsoft generic software OpenGL implementation
instead of a specialized hardware video driver. Use this option only
as a last resort if there are problems with the hardware video
accelerator. This option should be necessary only for video
accelerators that do not allow you to turn off hardware acceleration.
Most video accelerators allow you to control this option from
Control Panel > Display program.
-h (y|n) Keeps lines and line strings.
-i [database Project database file name.

full path file
name]
-j [database Project database schema file name.
schema file
name]
-k [database Project database site name field.
site name]
-l [log file Writes text window data to a log file using [log file name].
name]
-n [database Project database site id field, limited to field size in schema.
site id]
-o Turns range rejection off. This option will be overridden by .set file
or database settings.
-p [label Specifies the file name for the label schema.

schema file
name]
-q [integer Specifies the subsequent index allocation in pages. We recommend a
value] value of -q 20.

-r [integer Specifies the initial index allocation in pages. We recommend 50

value] pages per MB of design data.
-s Uses default settings (not the options currently in .set file).
-t Skips loading of textures for this session. If you use this flag, you
cannot view textures for the entire session.
-v Uses the Access 97 database format to create the project database.
-? Displays this usage statement.
Related Topics
Open a Model File

1. Click File > Open.
2. Select the .dri, .dgn, dwg, .dxf, .dgn, or .sat document for which you want to
create a project.
3. On the Create Project dialog box, set the options that you want for the project
and label databases.
Caution
• Be sure to choose the options that you want. The only way to set these
options again is to delete the project database files (.mdb and .mdb2)
and then re-open the model file to create a new project database. You
also can change the name of the model file to start over with a new
name.
format.
Notes
• The Create Project dialog box provides options for creating the
project and label databases. The project database file has an .mdb
extension and the label database has an .mdb2 extension.
• The project and label databases are created in Access 2000 by default.
Access 97 is also supported. If you want to create these databases
using Access 97, clear the Access 2000 database format box on the
Database tab.

• You cannot change the names of the databases. The names are based
on the name of the model document. You can change the path (folder
location) to the database.
• The Options tab on the Create Project dialog box displays special
options for MicroStation and PDS models.
• SmartPlant Review does extensive range validation on geometric
elements in .dgn files. Elements that are off the design plane are
considered bad elements. To accommodate large plant monument data,
the current validation range is the large plant monument point, if one
exists, plus or minus 4294967294 units of resolution (UOR).
SmartPlant Review alerts the user to the problem element with a
message in the text view. You can log text view messages to a text file
for later review.
• If SmartPlant Review encounters a bad element, a message appears in
the text view indicating that the software found an element of a
particular geometric type. The message also gives the block and byte
location of the element in the .dgn file. You can use a tool like
MicroStation EDG to repair many bad elements.
• In the standard SmartPlant Review product, there is no longer a limit
on the large plant monument range. However, an API program must
use the new API functions with double precision coordinate values to
be fully compatible with large plant monument coordinates. Previous
versions of the API used long integers for coordinates which limited
the coordinate range to -2147483647 to +2147483648 Units of
Resolution (UORs).
Related Topics

Save As a .vue File

1. Open the model that you want to save as a .vue file.
2. Click File > Save As.
3. Type a file name.
Tip
• To avoid confusion, assigning the same name to the .dri and .vue files
(for example, mymodel.dri and mymodel.vue) is recommended.
4. Select a destination folder.
5. Click Save.
Important
• To use this functionality, you must install the Application
Programming Interface (API) module.
Notes
• The Save As command only allows you to save a file in .vue format. A
.vue file can read in large models, and all of the data associated with
the model, in less time.
• If you modify your .dri file by adding or removing files, you need to
start over with this workflow by reading in the .dri file again. This
action confirms that all of the new data related to the .dri file is
properly read in, which allows the .vue file to save the correct
information.
• If you make new material assignments while running in a .vue file, you
must save a new .vue file to retain those new material assignments.
Related Topics
• Save Command (File Menu), page 409
Refresh Data
• Click Tools > Refresh Data.
Note
• The status bar, located at the bottom of the window, provides brief
messages that state the actions of the software during the refresh
operation.
Related Topics
• Refresh Active ScheduleReview Project, page 370

Understanding Project Databases: An Overview

The project database is crucial to any SmartPlant Review session. It contains
information regarding on-going modifications to tags and measurements, display sets
and saved views, material assignments, project settings, as well as any other project-
critical data.
The project database supports information from existing DesignReview or SmartPlant

Viewer sessions. During a project's initial creation, information from existing support
files (for example, .dvf, .set, .tag, and .dst files) is written to the project database.
When SmartPlant Review initially opens a new three dimensional model, it creates
two project database files. One database file (<project name>.mdb2) contains all
PDS label data information linked to in the .drv file, while the other database file
(<projectname>.mdb) contains all non-graphical or project information. Because this
data must be read into these databases during the initial entry, project load time can
be affected. However, this is a one-time occurrence and load time should not be
impacted once the project database files exist.
Important
• You should back up the project databases regularly. The .mdb and
.mdb2 database files contain all the project data for each project and if
the database files are lost or corrupted, you must re-open your model
file and let SmartPlant Review re-create the database files. Not only
will load time be impacted, but all data previously written to ASCII
text support files (tags, measurements, display sets, saved views, and
so on) will be lost.
When you open your model document for the first time, the Create
Project dialog box opens, allowing you to set several options for the
project database.
Notes
The Create Project dialog box opens only when the model file is being
opened for the first time, before the file or project has a database
associated with it. After setting these options on the Create Project dialog
box, you cannot change these options unless you delete the existing
project databases and open the original .dri file.
Setting these options when the Create Project dialog box opens is
especially important when you review MicroStation or PDS projects
(especially those containing Large Plant Monument settings) because
these options appear only on the Create Project > Options tab. If you do
not set these options when you first open the model files in SmartPlant
Review project, you must delete the newly created databases and re-open
the model files to access the Create Project dialog box again.

SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Jet Access 2000 database engine by default to
create the project databases. SmartPlant Review also supports Access 97 and provides
an option to create the project databases in the Access 97 database format when you
open your model for the first time.
Caution
• If you open an Access 97 database in Access 2000, do not convert the
database to Access 2000 format within Access 2000. Such a
conversion renders the database unreadable by Access 97. However,
SmartPlant Review can read either format.
• Because Access 2000 databases are much faster than Access 97
databases, use the Access 2000 format databases instead of the Access
97 format. However, Access 2000 is in Unicode, which makes the
database file size up to twice as large as Access 97 because the
Unicode format doubles the size of text fields. The actual Access 2000
database size depends on the amount of text data in the database. This
change means that if you have a database in the 250-300MB range, the
size could increase up to the 500-700MB range with Access 2000.
Therefore, if you have the space and need the speed, use the Access
2000 format.
format.
Related Topics
• Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 30

Working with Large Datasets

When you work with large datasets, you can improve the performance of your
computer by adjusting the Index allocation. Use the following command-line
modifiers to adjust the Index allocation:
• -r specifies that the initial index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytes-

per-page.
• -q specifies that the subsequent index allocation is in pages of 4096
bytes-per-page.
The initial -r allocation is executed when the master index is created just before the
design data is read in. Any additional allocations will use the -q argument for
additional indexes to allocate (for example: SPR.exe -r 15000 -q 20). The previous
example command sets up 15,000 pages for indexes. Additional indexes are available
in 20-page increments.
Recommendations
• Estimate 50 pages (r and q units) per MB of SmartPlant Review data.
• Set the -r allocation up much higher than the -q allocation. Use this
feature cautiously as you do not want to waste memory.
• The default values are -r 75, -q 20 if these options are not used on the
command line. This size should accommodate smaller models like the
Example model delivered with SmartPlant Review.
Related Topics
Sharing the Project Database Over the Network

SmartPlant Review supports sharing a common project database on a server among
multiple users so that all users can share data. Although, by default, the project
databases and the graphics are kept in the same folder, you can share a remotely
located database among multiple users.
To do this, make sure each user has a .vue file (or any project data set) on their own
computers. This way they can share and create tags in a common database and still
use .vue files. The .vue file is limited to a single user at a time due to the nature of the
file, thus, for best performance, each user should have his own copy of a .vue file.
The SmartPlant Review Publisher product is a convenient tool to distribute .vue files
to users.

To open your .vue file with a remote database, use the command line functionality.
For example:
SPR.exe "C:\ProjectData\abc\abc.vue" -i
"\\LIGHTNING\Database\abc.mdb"
This allows you to use a database on any accessible share or folder. Multiple users
can easily have a .vue file on their own computers and a share to a project database so
they can have communal tags.
This approach works for all supported file types.
Notes
• For other users to be able to share your project databases, you must
give those users read/write permissions to the folder where the
databases are stored, read/write permissions to the databases
themselves, and read/write permissions to any necessary palette and
material files.
• If performance appears sluggish while sharing a database over the
network, modify the registry entry for the Microsoft Jet database
PageTimeout setting to a value less than the default 5 seconds (for
example, 1/2 second). Some users have found that this default value
adversely impacts performance for frequent database accesses.
Reducing this value may improve performance. Any changes to the
registry are at your own risk.
Related Topics
Supporting Other Software: An Overview

SmartPlant Review supports the following file types, databases, and software.
MicroStation
SmartPlant Review supports MicroStation® SE 05.07.01.14 and MicroStation/J
07.01.01.57 files.
SmartPlant Review displays MicroStation/J SmartSolids in shaded mode if you

change the display setting to Surfaces using the MicroStation/J Change SmartSolid
Display tool on the 3D Utilities tool bar prior to opening the project in SmartPlant
Review.

AutoCAD
• SmartPlant Review supports AutoCAD® files through version 14 and
AutoCAD 2002.
• Support also includes AutoCAD solids in .dwg files created as ACIS
(.sat file) solids.
• Single line and multi-line text are now supported using SmartPlant
Reviews standard wireframe font.
• Most common geometry types are now supported.
While most common geometry types are now supported, there are some limitations.
Items not supported include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Hatch lines
• Arrowheads on leader lines
• Dimensions
• Line styles
• True type fonts
• Arc aligned text
• Attribute definitions.
• Image/raster files or wipe out images
• Paper space entities
• Special classes or proxy objects
• Shape files
• Layer names or number of layers greater than 63. If the number of
layers is greater than 63, the layer number is computed modulo 63, and
the geometry will still be displayed.
SAT Files
SmartPlant Review supports SAT files ACIS® version 8.0 or earlier.
Databases
Microsoft Jet Access 97 is the engine used by default for creating the SmartPlant
Review databases. Access 2000 is also supported. Therefore, projects can be created
using either format.
Planning Software
ScheduleReview supports the following planning software: Microsoft Project 98,
Primavera Project Planner® 2.0B, and Primavera Project Planner 3.0.

NetMeeting
You can establish an online conference among computer users by using Microsoft
NetMeeting®, Version 3.01. With NetMeeting, you can conduct a review session
simultaneously with multiple users in different locations. SmartPlant Review offers a
Collaboration module that extends the power of a conference by performance
improvement, reduction of network traffic, and decrease in response time.
SmartSketch
SmartPlant Review On-Line Drawing Generation module supports Intergraph
SmartSketch 4.0.
Related Topics
• SmartPlant Review Files, page 53
• Working with .dwg, .dxf, and .sat Files: An Overview, page 52
MicroStation Design File Working Units

When MicroStation 3-D-based design files are first created, working units are
defined. Working units are coordinate units that correspond to the position and
definition of a point in a design file. These coordinates appear in the status bar as you
work in SmartPlant Review. There are a fixed number of points on each axis of a
design file. The idea in establishing working units is to make sure that the objects that
you want to draw can be entered with adequate precision, and at the same time fit in
the design plane. Working units include master units (the largest unit in use in a
design), sub-units (a portion of a master unit), and positional units (a portion of a sub-
unit). Positional units are the smallest degree of accuracy possible in your design.
Working units are usually referred to as MU:SU:PU. Most models in SmartPlant
Review use feet or meters as master units, inches or millimeters as sub-units, and
thousandths of an inch as positional units. For example, in a plant with the following:
MU : feetMU : feet
SU : inchesSU : inches
PU : .001 inch (one thousandth)PU : .001 inch (one thousandth)
An 8 3/4-foot pipe would be measured as 8:9:0. You can change your working units
at any time through using MicroStation.
Related Topics

AutoCAD Design File Working Units

The AutoCAD translator looks for units saved in the AutoCAD file. In versions prior
to AutoCAD 2000, engineering and architectural English units could be saved in
AutoCAD design files. If no units are found in the AutoCAD file, then meters are
assumed.
Starting with AutoCAD 2000, a more extensive set of units became available and are
supported. However, some of the more rare units such as parsecs, angstroms, and so
forth are converted to their equivalent values in meters for measurement. The
AutoCAD 2000 unit less type is displayed as inches.
Related Topics
• Open Command (File Menu), page 408
SAT Design File Working Units

SAT uses the SATacis.ini file to set your choice of scale units. Because the SAT
coordinates are very small, it is important to scale them. The line in this file that
SmartPlant Review uses is: Read Default Units=61.
SmartPlant Review can read one SATacis.ini file at a time.
Related Topics
Working with .dwg, .dxf, and .sat Files: An Overview

SmartPlant Review now has the ability to open and load .dwg, .dxf, and .sat file
formats. You may manipulate these file types in the same way that you manipulate
standard SmartPlant Review files (such as .dgn). The following is a brief description
of each of these new file types.
• The .dxf format is the standard Drawing Exchange Format file that
many three dimensional design systems use. SmartPlant Review reads
3-D .dxf format files directly; you do not need to convert the files to
another format.
• The .dwg format is the standard file type for AutoCAD. SmartPlant
Review reads 3-D .dwg format files directly; you do not need to
convert the files to another format.

• The ACIS .sat format allows you to exchange intelligent 3-D objects
and related data between applications.
Related Topics
• SAT Design File Working Units, page 52
SmartPlant Review Files

SmartPlant Review accesses and creates several different files that are associated with
a model. The descriptions of these files are below:
.dgn The MicroStation-based design files that you bring into SmartPlant
Review. Several design files are referenced by one SmartPlant Review
interface (.dri) file. For example, model.dri references 40pipe01.dgn,
40eqp01.dgn, sarea39.prp, and others. (A .prp file is another type of
design file created by plant design applications.) Each design file can
have a label file associated with it. Label files are text files that contain
database information. Label files are given the design filename with a
three-character extension. For example, in the example model
(model.dri), the label files for 40pipe01.dgn, 40eqp01.dgn, and
sarea39.prp are named 40pipe01.drv, 40eqp01.drv, and sarea39.drv,
respectively.
.dri This is an ASCII text files and the primary way that you enter
SmartPlant Review. The .dri file references all the design files, label
data files, and other files that are associated with a model. You can
create a .dri file from scratch or by converting old .pvi files. (See the
SmartPlant Review Programmers online help for more information on
file formats.) This file is given the model name with a .dri extension.
label data Text files that contain database information about elements in the
design file. There is a one-to-one correspondence with the design file.
They can have any name, and any extension or no extension. You must
use a .dri file to indicate which label files go with which design files.
tagseed.txt An ASCII text file SmartPlant Review uses to establish the pre-defined
template used by the Place Tag command. You create this file, and it
should be called tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review looks first in the folder
specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not found there,
SmartPlant Review tries the folders specified by the HOMEDRIVE and
HOMEPATH variables. If the file is not found in any of these locations,
SmartPlant Review tries c:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.
.mat Text files that contain the material assignments to objects in the
corresponding design file. Each .mat file corresponds to a design file

with material assignments. An example material file might be

sarea38.mat. This file would contain the object level and color numbers,
along with the material assigned to them. For example, all elements in
the file on level 8 with color number 12 might be assigned to bronze.
The material file is given the design filename with a .mat extension.
.pal Palette files that contain material definitions. A palette file can be used
with a number of models. An example palette file might be metal.pal.
This palette file would contain all the material definitions for items such
as bronze, iron, aluminum, and so on. Any file with elements using
these materials will reference this palette file.
.rgb Intergraph image files with a color file format that stores the red, green,
and blue (rgb) data values of a screen image in a single file.
.pvi Files that you can access when you enter SmartPlant Review. This is an
old file type that was created by plant design applications and is in a
proprietary non-text format. The .pvi file references all the .dgn files,
label data files, and other files that are associated with a model.
.vfa Contain the view parameters set up for the model, such as eye point,
lighting, and perspective. The file is given the design filename with a
.vfa extension. This file is used by the Intergraph ModelView™
software.
.vue File created in SmartPlant Review. A container file called .vue rapidly
reads in and manipulates data. You can create .vue files from the Save
As option within SmartPlant Review. To use this functionality, you
must install the API module.
.dwg AutoCAD design file. Because AutoCAD design files do not contain
intelligent data with the graphics, label files are not available for use
with .dwg files.
.dxf AutoCAD design file. Because AutoCAD design files do not contain
intelligent data with the graphics, label files are not available for use
with .dxf files.
.sat These files allow you to exchange intelligent 3-D objects and related
data between applications.
Related Topics
• AutoCAD® Design File Working Units, page 52
• MicroStation® Design File Working Units, page 51
• SAT Design File Working Units, page 52

Working with Views: An Overview

The primary SmartPlant Review user interface consists of a set of image displays,
which appear within views. Images and information appear in the following view
types.
Main View - Serves as the primary working view and is always displayed, unless the
Single pane layout option is turned on and the view is switched from the Main view.
Most of the review and positioning changes that you make appear here. The Main
view can be displayed in either shaded or wireframe form. See View Settings for
more information on changing what and how objects display in the Main view.
Plan View - Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working,
your position, and a view cone. The Plan view displays the top view (how the model
appears when you look down on it from directly above) and appears only in
wireframe form.
Elevation View - Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are
working, your position, and a view cone. The elevation view displays the front view
of the model and appears only in wireframe.
Text View - Displays information appropriate to the current command context, such
as, but not limited to, the text for the active tag, label search data, measurement data,
and component attribute data. You can copy text from the Text view to the Clipboard
for pasting into another field or application.
Notes:
• You can resize each view. Views are updated according to the action
that you are performing in the views. There are times when all the
views are updated, and other times when some of the views are not
updated. This selective updating improves productivity by avoiding
unnecessary image updates.
• The Copy command is available for copying text from the Text view.
The Copy command is also available in the graphical views for
copying the view image to the Clipboard.
• You can use the Pane Layout commands to display or cycle through
one, three, or all four views.
Related Topics
• Arrange All Views, page 56
• Display a Four Pane Layout, page 58
• Display a Single Pane Layout, page 57
• Display a Three Pane Layout, page 58
• Full Screen Display Mode, page 58
• Refresh All Views, page 56
• Refresh View, page 57

Arrange All Views

Click Window > Arrange All.
Notes
• Arranges any views that you have displayed to fit the SmartPlant
Review window. The Arrange All command also docks all opened
toolbars. SmartPlant Review does not dock the ProjectManager unless
you have made it dockable and it is opened.
• You can select Arrange All on the Window toolbar.

Related Topics
• Window Toolbar, page 467
• Working with Views: An Overview, page 55
Refresh All Views

Click Window > Refresh All.
Notes
• The Refresh All command redraws all of the views to update the
window contents.
• Press Esc to stop a view update in progress.
• Any item, such as a window, dialog box, or toolbar, that overlaps the
Main, Plan, or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the saved
(backing store) image. Therefore, to improve system performance and
to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image, you should use caution
when placing windows, dialog boxes, or toolbars.
Related Topics
• Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 444

Refresh View
Click Window > Refresh.
Notes
• The Refresh command redraws the selected view to update its
contents.
when placing windows, dialog boxes, and toolbars.
Related Topics
Display a Single Pane Layout

Click Window > Pane Layout > Single.
Tip
• You also can click Single Pane Layout on the Views toolbar, or
press Shift + 1 on your keyboard.
Note
• If the Main view is not visible, the Print, Snapshot, and Raytrace
Render commands are disabled.

Display a Three Pane Layout

Click Window > Pane Layout > Three.
Tip
• You also can click Three Pane Layout on the Views toolbar, or
press Shift + 3 on the keyboard.
Display a Four Pane Layout

Click Window > Pane Layout > Four.
Tip
• You also can click Four Pane Layout on the Views toolbar, or
press Shift + 4 on the keyboard.
Full Screen Display Mode

1. Click View > Full Screen.
2. Click the Full Screen icon to return to the normal display mode.
Notes
• Full Screen mode expands the application window to occupy the
entire monitor screen. The Main, Plan, Elevation, and Text views are
not resized unless they are maximized to occupy the entire application
window.
• If you have a dual monitor system, Full Screen uses both monitors.
Turning Full Screen off causes SmartPlant Review to display only on
the left monitor of dual monitor systems.
• The menu bar, the toolbars, and Project Manager are hidden when
Full Screen mode is activated.
• Full Screen mode is particularly useful to enhance stereo viewing.
• You can also activate Full Screen mode by clicking the button on
the Views toolbar or by pressing F11.
Related Topics

Changing View Settings: An Overview

SmartPlant Review offers full customization of the Main, Plan, and Elevation views.
All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting
and entering the project.
View settings allow you to define simple details, such as the shaded or wireframe
background color in the model, as well as more complex settings such as the amount
of non-directional light that displays in the model.
The software also provides range rejection options for reducing the number of small
graphical elements that SmartPlant Review draws, thus improving display time. You
can specify different range rejection criteria for each view.
Related Topics
• Define Display Order, page 64
• Set Background Color, page 60
• Set Lighting Intensity, page 61
• Set Range Reject, page 62
• Set Stroking Tolerance, page 64
• Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 62
View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates

The backing store and buffered updates are completely independent of each other.
The backing store is used to quickly repair holes in the display. Buffered updates
(also known as double-buffering) control where the graphics are drawn. If double-
buffering is off, the graphics are drawn directly to the front buffer and you can watch
each element as it is drawn. If double-buffering is on, SmartPlant Review draws to
the hidden back buffer. In this case, you will not see the new graphics until the entire
display is complete.
Double-buffering affects how SmartPlant Review draws the graphics. OpenGL

supports a front buffer and a back buffer. The front buffer is what you see. The back
buffer is always hidden. If SmartPlant Review draws to the front buffer, you can
watch it draw each element. If SmartPlant Review draws to the back buffer, you will
not see the graphics drawing. When using double buffering, SmartPlant Review
draws to the back buffer and "swaps" the buffers when the picture is complete.
Double-buffering makes animations and motion look smoother because you do not
see the individual elements draw.
The backing store is a picture of the current display. This picture is updated at the end
of any command that updates the data (except during Motion commands). Think of
the backing store as a piece of wallpaper. Dialog boxes and other application
windows that have been on top of SmartPlant Review graphics displays will leave a
white hole in the display when dismissed. To repair the hole, SmartPlant Review
wallpapers over it with the backing store.

Related Topics
• Set View Options, page 63
Set Background Color

1. Click View > Settings.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Click Edit in the Background color > Shaded box.
4. Click a color.
5. Click OK on the Color dialog box.
6. Click Edit in the Background color > Wireframe box.
7. Click a color.
8. Click OK on the Color dialog box.
9. Click OK on the View Settings dialog box.
Note
• You also can change the wireframe background color by clicking
View > Display > Wireframe Background Color.
Related Topics
• Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 59
Set Display Tag

3. Select Tags from Options.
Note
• The Display Tag command allows you to display the actual tags in the
model.
Related Topics
• Display Active Tag Only, page 246
• Display All Tags, page 247
• Display No Tags, page 247
• Maintain Display Options, page 65

Set Textures
3. Click Object textures.
Tip
• The textures defined in Material Editor display in the Main view.
Notes
• To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
• If you started SmartPlant Review from a command line using the -t
option, you cannot view textures until you restart SmartPlant Review
without using the -t option.
Related Topics
• Assigning Material Properties: An Overview, page 287
Set Lighting Intensity

2. Select the Lighting tab.
3. Move the Ambient from 0 to 100 slider to change the ambient lighting level.
4. Move the Brightness from 0 to 10 slider to change the brightness level.
Notes
• The ambient light is the light that surrounds everything and does not
appear to come from a single source in the display. You can set the
ambient light from low (0), which displays a darker image, to high
(100), which displays a whiter image. A high ambient light level
creates lighter shadows, while a low ambient light level creates darker
shadows.
• The brightness setting determines the exposure of light on the model,
which changes the intensity of the image's colors. If you select a low
brightness (exposure), the colors become darker. If you select a high
brightness, the colors become brighter.
• You also can set the lighting intensity by clicking View > Display >
Lighting.
Related Topics

Set Sun Bearing Angles

2. Select the Lighting tab.
3. Move the Horizontal from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting.
4. Move the Vertical from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting.
5. Select Relative to plant north to align light from the plant north setting.
Notes
• Sun bearing angles allow you to determine the horizontal and vertical
light angles in degrees.
• You also can set the sun bearing angle by clicking View > Display >
Lighting > Direction.
Related Topics
Set Range Reject

2. Click the Range Reject tab.
3. Select Activate to use range rejection.
4. Type the Main view X coordinate.
5. Type the Main view Y coordinate.
6. Type the Plan view X coordinate.
7. Type the Plan view Y coordinate.
8. Type the Elevation view X coordinate.
9. Type the Elevation view Y coordinate.
Tip
• You also can access the range rejection commands by clicking View >
Display > Range Rejection.
Notes
• The objects are rejected both on X, Y and Y, X approximate pixel
ranges. In other words, if you reject X=20 by Y=100 you are also
rejecting X=100 by Y=20. The pixel ranges given are approximate.
Related Topics

Set View Options

3. Click Redraw on refresh to turn this option on or off.
4. Click Buffered updates to turn this option on or off.
5. Click NetMeeting to turn this option on or off. Select the NetMeeting option
only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use
NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded
collaboration software.
Tip
• For best performance, clear the NetMeeting check box after you
complete a NetMeeting Application Sharing session.
6. Click Time display to turn this option on or off.
7. Click Perspective to turn this option on or off.
Important
Tip
• You also can access the Advanced commands by clicking View >
Advanced.
Notes
• To activate stereo viewing, you must have installed the display driver
for your graphics card and you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared
transmitter turned on.
• If the Stereo command is grayed, ensure that Stereo Display is
selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box on the Video
Configuration Control Panel in Windows Program Manager.
Main, Plan, or Elevation view during a refresh will be included in the
saved (backing store) image. Therefore, to improve system
performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image, you
should use caution when placing these items.
• If your saved image contains overlapping images that you do not want,
make sure items, such as windows, dialog boxes, and toolbars, are not
overlapping the view. You can then press Ctrl+F5 to completely
redraw the saved image using Redraw on Refresh.
Related Topics
• Photo-Realism Module, page 28

Set Stroking Tolerance

2. Select the Advanced tab.
3. Type a Stroking tolerance.
Tip
• You also can set the stroking tolerance by clicking View > Display >
Stroking Tolerance.
Notes
• The stroking tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes,
reducers, valves, and elbows are rendered. The larger the tolerance, the
better the display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the
view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100.
Related Topics
Define Display Order

1. Click View > Advanced > Display Order.
2. Select the object that you want to display first.
3. Continue selecting objects that you want to display, in order, until the entire list is
complete.
4. Right-click to save the list.
Tip
• You also can select Display Order on the Tools toolbar.

Notes
• Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time
the Main view updates. This is especially useful when you use the
motion controls. If you are interested in particular elements or if you
are working in a specific area, you can define those elements to
display first.
• Only one list can exist at a time. Each time that you select this
command, you are prompted to either create a new list or add to the
existing list.
Related Topics

Maintain Display Options

3. Select the Options to display.
Related Topics
View Settings Dialog Box

Allows you to fully customize the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. All display
settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and
entering the project.
The default settings allow for a rapid display at a lower stroking resolution. However,
the View Settings dialog box contains several tabs that offer options that affect speed
and display quality. You can use these options to choose between a more rapid update
with a lower display quality and a slower update with a higher display quality. This
choice is similar to that offered on printers with draft quality and letter quality
printing. For example, selecting Backfaces and Endcaps on the View Settings >
Display tab gives you a slower update with a higher display quality for views that
include pipes, valves, reducers and elbows. On the other hand, leaving Backfaces and
Endcaps unchecked increases the display quality but decreases the update time.
Important
• Turning off the Backfaces option can cause some special elements to
display partially or completely disappear. This situation occurs most
commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at
an angle to its original position.
For faster updates, the following settings are recommended:

• On the Display tab, leave Backfaces and Endcaps unchecked.
• On the Advanced tab, enter 16 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to
100 box.
• Check Activate on the Range Reject tab.
• From the Window menu, select Single pane layout . This mode
saves rendering time for the other panes.

For the highest quality updates, the following settings are

recommended:
• On the Display tab, check Backfaces and Endcaps.
• On the Advanced tab, enter 100 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to
100 box.
• On the Range Reject tab, leave Activate unchecked.
You can use these commands in any combination. The default display settings allow
rapid movement through the file with a reduction in display quality. For some
models, turning Backfaces on and Endcaps off provides a reasonable combination of
speed and display quality. In other cases, you may find that the highest display quality
is required for the best possible visual appearance.
Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to modify view display options.
Render
Shaded - Specifies whether or not the view displays as shaded or wireframe.
Hidden line - Displays the Main view with hidden line wireframe.
Quality - Specifies the quality of the shading in the Main view. You can choose from
Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading. These modes are in
the order of slowest update to fastest update.
• Full shading - Produces a more curved appearance by producing

various shades of the selected color across the surface of the element.
This type of shading is also known as "smooth shading using the
Gouraud Shading algorithm." This type of shading is the slowest to
update.
• No Specular - Provides smooth shading, but is faster than Full
Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element
surface.
• Coarse Facets - Turns off the smooth shading. Surfaces are still
shaded, but the display of circular objects is very faceted. For example,
pipes look like they are composed of flat sides.
• Flat Shading - Displays a single color for all pixels on the surface
instead of a range of slightly different colors. This is the fastest to
update.

Background Color
Shaded - Displays the shaded background color.
Wireframe - Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering. Click Edit to
display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded color.
Options
All tags - Specifies whether or not the tags appear.
Active tag only - Specifies whether or not only the active tag appears.
Object textures - Determines whether textures appear while you are manipulating
the model. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the
display. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
Backfaces - Specifies whether or not to display backfaces on valves, pipes, elbows,

and reducers in the view.
Endcaps - Specifies whether or not to display endcaps on pipes and other round
shapes. Update performance is faster if the Backfaces and Endcaps options are
turned off. However, turning the Backfaces option off may cause special elements to
display partially or completely disappear. This condition occurs most commonly
when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original
position.
Backface and Endcap settings are temporarily forced on during display set moves
and for all Collision Detection displays. However, all other elements are maintained
and updated according to your specifications in the Edit View dialog box. Also, any
temporary change to the Backface and Endcap settings does not affect normal
updates or eye movement.
All annotations - Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view.
Data annotations - Specifies whether or not to display data annotations in the view.
Text annotations - Specifies whether or not to display text annotations in the view.
Volume annotations - Specifies whether or not to display volume annotations in the

view.
Measurements - Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Only

measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed.
Axis - Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the top right
corner of the view showing which direction is East, North, and Elevation.
Levels - Displays the Level Settings dialog box.

Related Topics
• Level Settings Dialog Box, page 117
• Settings Command (View Menu), page 432
View Cone Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. The view cone
changes as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you
define motion using the motion/orientation controls.
Eye Point in MU:SU:PU

• North - Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to
the north direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change the
eye point by typing a new north coordinate.
• East - Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to
the east direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the
eye point by typing a new east coordinate.
• Elevation - Specifies the height of the eye point of the view cone in
relation to the model (Z coordinate). You can use this box to change
the eye point by typing a new elevation.
Center Point in MU:SU:PU

• North - Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation
to the north direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change
the center point by typing a new north coordinate.
• East - Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation
to the east direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the
center point by typing a new east coordinate.
• Elevation - Specifies the height of the center point of the view cone in
the center point by typing a new elevation.
Clipping Plane distances in MU:SU:PU

Near - Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the near
clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of
the near clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North,
East, or Elevation).
Far - Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the far
the far clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North,
Reference - Displays the reference point (if set to Eye) or the reference axis (if set to
North, East, or Elevation) for the values displayed in the Far and Near boxes.

When you select Eye from the Reference list, the Near and Far boxes display the
absolute distance from the eye point to the center point of the respective clipping
plane. When you select North, East, or Elevation from the Reference list, the
clipping plane fields display the location on that Reference coordinate of the center
point of the respective clipping plane.
For example, the Eye Point is at 100 feet North, -500 feet East, 200 feet Elevation
and is looking straight down. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in
the model. To accomplish this, you would select Elevation for the Reference and set
Near to 15. SmartPlant Review automatically calculates the correct clipping distance
from the eye to the near clipping plane as 185 feet.
When Reference is set to Eye, a value of 0 in the Near or Far boxes specifies no
clipping for that plane. A 0 in both boxes displays the entire model.
Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160 - Allows you to increase or decrease the

viewing area of the view cone without changing the locations of the clipping planes
or the eye and center points. Move the slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease
area) to 160 degrees (to increase area).
Dashed - Displays the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views using dashed lines
instead of solid lines. The dashed view cone allows faster updates on slow graphic
cards and some notebook computers.
Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the
shaded model. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the
model, which changes the intensity of the image's colors.
Ambient from 0 to 100 - Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your
display. A common value of ambient light is 25.
Brightness from 0 to 10 - Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes
the intensity of the colors in the image. This is similar to setting the aperture and
shutter speed of a camera. The value for this field is between 0 and 10.
Horizontal from -180 to 180 - Defines the horizontal angle of the sunlight coming
into the model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0. Positive
values are counterclockwise along a horizontal plane.
Vertical from -180 to 180 - Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model.
The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0.
Relative to plant north - Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light
are relative to Plant North or relative to the direction of the Main view.
Related Topics

Range Reject Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to disregard very small graphical elements. This change improves display
time by reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws. You can
specify different range rejection criteria for each view.
You specify the range in X, Y pixels for each view. Objects smaller than the range
(less than or equal to the dimensions specified) are not drawn. However, you still can
highlight these small objects.
Activate - Enables range rejection in any view with non-zero X, Y range rejection
settings.
Main view X - Specifies the approximate maximum delta X pixel size for objects to
reject in the Main View.
Plan view X - Specifies the approximate maximum delta X pixel size for objects to
reject for display in the Plan View.
Elevation view X - Specifies the approximate maximum delta X size for objects to
reject for display in the Elevation View.
Main view Y - Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y pixel size for objects to
reject for display in the Main View.
Plan view Y - Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y size for objects to reject
for display in the Plan View.
Elevation view Y - Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y size for objects to
reject for display in the Elevation View.
Notes
ranges. In other words, if you reject X=20 by Y=100, you are also
• You can activate range rejection without changing the settings. If
range rejection is on, it is on for all views. You can turn range
rejection off for specific views by setting the X, Y pixels for that view
to 0, 0.
Related Topics

Advanced Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review, such as fine
tuning stereo glasses.
Between Eyes - Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units.
Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters (00:2.2:00 if MU is feet;
00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). You must convert your actual distance values to the
proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while
a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth
perception. This option only effects stereo viewing.
Focal - Specifies the distance to the selected object. The Focal distance is the point at
which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects appear to be
coming out of the screen and objects that are further away appear to be behind the
screen. This option only effects stereo viewing.
Redraw on refresh - Redraws everything in the selected view on refresh. For large
models, turn off this option for better performance. When this option is off, the
backing store is used to repair the display until you click Window > Refresh. If this
option is off and you have dialog boxes or toolbars placed over a view, you may see
ghost images of the floating item. Press F5 to refresh the view and remove the ghost
image.
Buffered updates - Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire
view at once. When this option is on, you will not see the model "re-drawn" during
updates.
Notes
• While each option can be used independently, if both Redraw on
refresh and Buffered updates options are turned on, the entire view
is, on refresh, redrawn to the buffer and then displayed all at once. If
neither option is turned on, the backing store is used to repair the view
and updates are drawn to the window.
when placing these items.

Stereo - Activates stereo viewing. The following stereo viewing hardware is required
for this option:
• RealiZm or Wildcat graphics card and display driver.

• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes® interlaced eyeglasses (model CE-PC or
CE-1). Electrohome also has projection systems that support stereo
using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.
• CrystalEyes infrared transmitter (model E-1).
Notes
• Stereo Viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-
Realism module.
• Set the video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run
SmartPlant Review.
• If the Stereo option is disabled, verify that Stereo Display is
selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the
Video Configuration application in Control Panel.
• If the Stereo option on the Advanced tab is not available, make
sure your video driver is set to stereo. In some driver
versions/configurations, the menu selection may be available, even
when the stereo is not enabled on the driver.
• You do not have to remove the StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes
glasses when switching between stereo mode and regular mode.
SmartPlant Review automatically switches to regular mode when
you select a menu command or dialog box.
NetMeeting - Specifies whether to enable the NetMeeting display capability for high-
end graphics cards like Intergraph RealiZm and Wildcat cards that have private client
video drives instead of standard low-end video drivers. Select the checkbox only if
your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting
directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software.
For best performance, clear the NetMeeting check box after you complete a
NetMeeting Application Sharing session.
Time display - Toggle on to display the time that it takes to update the Main view.
The update time appears in the Text view.
Perspective - Specifies whether to display the perspective information.
Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 - Defines the stroking tolerance for the round
surfaces of pipes, reducers, valves, and elbows. The larger the tolerance, the better the
display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the view update time. The
tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. For faster updates, the recommended
tolerance is 16. For the highest quality update, the recommended tolerance is 100.

Far to near clip ratio - Adjusts the display quality produced by some video cards
(for example, with some video cards, some elements may appear cracked or pieces of
elements may be missing). In most cases, reducing this value using powers of 2 (such
as, 1024, 512, 256, 128, 64, 32, 16) will improve the display quality. If some of your
elements have a poor display quality, such as a cracked appearance, lower the Far to
near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by
a power of 2 works best. For example, reduce 1024 to 512, reduce 512 to 256, and so
on until the display quality is acceptable.
Aspect - Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (X
to Y value) at the time that the view was saved. However, when the view is recalled,
the aspect ratio is that of the current view. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored.
Related Topics
• Edit View Dialog Box, page 96
• Save and Recall Command (View Menu), page 454
Set Brightness Level Dialog Box

Specifies the amount of brightness in the model. The ambient light values can range
from 0.0 to 10.0.
Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the brightness in the
model.
Related Topics
• Brightness Command (View Menu), page 441
Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box

Specifies the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light
values can range from 0 to 100.
Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the ambient or ground
light in the model.
Related Topics
• Ambient Command (View Menu), page 441

Set Light Direction Dialog Box

Specifies the horizontal or vertical direction of light in the model in degrees. The
light angle can range from -180 to +180.
Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the direction of light in the model.
Next - Accepts the current horizontal value and prompts you for the vertical value.
Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple
values.
Related Topics
• Perspective Angle Command (View Menu), page 440
• Set View Cone Perspective, page 133
• SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys, page 146
• Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 127
Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box

Displays a series of Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, prompting you to
specify display rejection criteria for each view.
Main x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Main view X
coordinate.
Main y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Main view Y
coordinate.
Plan x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Plan view X coordinate.
Plan y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Plan view Y coordinate.
Elevation x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Elevation view X
coordinate.
Elevation y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Elevation view Y
coordinate.
Next - Accepts the current values and prompts you for the next requested value.
Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple
values.

Notes
ranges. In other words, if you reject X=20 by Y=100 you are also
Related Topics
• All Command (View Menu), page 442
Set Stroking Tolerance Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the number of facets to render on cylindrical objects.
Tolerance - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the stroking tolerance. The
tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. The larger the tolerance, the better
the display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the view update time.
Related Topics
• Stroking Tolerance Command (View Menu), page 440
Rendering Views: An Overview

SmartPlant Review offers full customization of the Main, Plan, and Elevation views.
All display settings are stored in the project database and are maintained when exiting
and entering the project.
View settings allow you to specify the type of rendering, as well as the display quality
of the Main view. You can choose from several shade quality options. These options
range from a low to a high display quality. However, a higher display quality
requires a longer update time. You can choose the options that best suit your
individual needs. For example, you may choose a slower update time with a higher
display quality for one model and choose a quicker update time with a lower display
quality for another.
Related Topics
• Maintain Render Settings, page 78
• Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 78
• Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 77
• Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line, page 77
• Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line, page 76

Toggle Between Shaded and Wireframe

You can toggle between shaded and wireframe by using any of these methods:
• Clicking View > Display > Wireframe or Full Shading.
• Clicking Shaded/Wireframe on the Views toolbar.

• Right-clicking in the view, and selecting Display Settings>
Wireframe or Full Shading.
Notes
• The Toggle Display Between Shaded and Wireframe command
allows you to display the model in shaded form or in wireframe form
in the Main view window. The default form is wireframe. You cannot
shade an image in the plan or elevation views.
• You can control the amount of time it takes for an image to appear
shaded by defining a Shading Quality on the Display tab of the Edit
Motion Settings dialog box. The Quality box defaults to Full
Shading, however, you also can choose No Specular, Coarse Facets,
or Flat Shading.
• You can click View > Settings to ensure the box next to Shaded under
Render is either enabled or disabled.
Related Topics
Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line

2. On the View Settings dialog box, click Hidden Line in the Render box of the
Display tab.
Tip
• When the View Settings dialog box opens, neither the Shaded nor the
Hidden Line check box is selected.
Note
• You also can change the model to hidden line by clicking View >
Display > Wireframe, Hidden Line.
Related Topics

Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe

Display tab.
Notes
• When you click Hidden Line, the model changes to wireframe.
Neither check box is selected now on the View Settings dialog box,
because Hidden Line was selected when the dialog box opened.
• Hidden line mode remains active, even when you recall a saved view.
For example, you have a view in Wireframe, hidden line mode.
When you recall the saved view manually or by playing a key frame
animation, the view remains in hidden line mode. You can recall all
other settings in the normal manner.
Tip
• You also can change the model to wireframe by clicking View >
Display > Wireframe.
Related Topics
Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line

Display tab.
Notes
• When you click Hidden Line, the Shaded option is no longer
available.
• Hidden Line mode remains active, even when you recall a saved view.
For example, you have a view in Wireframe, Hidden Line mode.
When you recall the saved view manually or by playing a key frame
animation, the view remains in hidden line mode. You can recall all
other settings in the normal manner.
Related Topics

Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded

2. On the View Settings dialog box, click Shaded in the Render box of the Display
tab.
Note
• When you click the Shaded check box, the Hidden Line check box is
no longer selected.
Tip
• You also can switch from a hidden line to a shaded view by clicking
View > Display > Flat Shading.
Related Topics
Maintain Render Settings

3. Select Shaded to display the model as shaded in the active display.
4. Select the quality of shading.
Tip
• You also can also switch between shaded or wireframe modes by
clicking Tools > Display Sets > Shade.
Note
• The Quality selections include: Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse
Facets, or Flat Shading.
Related Topics

Fitting Views: An Overview

SmartPlant Review provides several options for manipulating a view. For example,
you can adjust all the windows to display the entire model, adjust only the active
window to display the entire model, or adjust the active window to display a selected
object or display set.
You also can increase or decrease the viewing area. Decreasing causes everything
within the window to appear larger, while increasing causes everything within the
window to appear smaller.
In most cases, view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Fit, affect the active
window only. Therefore, the active window must be selected prior to using any of the
view related commands.
Related Topics
• Zoom In, page 81
• Zoom Out, page 81
Fit All Views to Model

1. Click View on the Menu bar.
2. From the drop down menu, click Fit.
3. Click All to Model.
Related Topics
• Fit View to Display Set, page 80
• Fit View to Model, page 79
• Fit View to Object, page 80
• Fit View to Volume, page 80
Fit View to Model

You can fit the view to your model using one of these methods:
• Click View > Fit > View to Model.
• Click Fit View to Model on the Common toolbar.

Note
• The Fit View to Model command adjusts the view window so the
entire model appears. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views
adjusts accordingly.

Fit View to Object

1. Click View, point to Fit, and click View to Object. The software prompts you to
select an object in the model. The pointer changes to crosshairs.
2. Move the crosshairs pointer over the object and click on the object.
3. Left-click again to accept or right-click to reject the object and select the next
object (if any) behind the currently selected object.
Fit View to Display Set

1. Select one or more display sets in the Project Manager to fit to the current view.
While clicking, use the Shift or Control keys to select multiple display sets.
2. Click View > Fit > View to Display Set.
Notes
• The Project Manager displays items associated with the model when
you open a document. If a model document is not open, the Project
Manager does not display any items.
• Double-clicking a display set in the Project Manager displays the
Edit Display Set Definition dialog box.
Fit View to Volume

1. Click View > Fit > View to Volume.
2. Place the first point to select the first corner of the volume to which the view will
be fit.
3. Place the second point to select the second opposite corner of the volume to which
the view will be fit.
Tip
• You also can click Fit View to Volume on the Common toolbar.
Note
• The Fit View to Volume command adjusts the view window to
display the volume selected. The view cone in the plan and elevation
views adjusts accordingly.

Zoom In
1. Click in the view that you want to zoom in (if that view is not already active).
2. Click View > Zoom > In.
Notes
• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view,
the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. Each time
that you zoom in, you increase the detail by the current zoom factor.
For example, if the zoom factor is 1.5, the detail will increase by 1.5
each time that you zoom in. For more information, see Zoom Amount
Command (View Menu), page 432.
• You can change the Perspective Angle of the Main view to produce
zoom effects without changing the Eye Point position.
Related Topics
• Zoom About Point Command (View Menu), page 431
• Zoom Amount Command (View Menu), page 432
• Zoom In Command (View Menu), page 430
• Zoom Out Command (View Menu), page 431
Zoom Out
1. Click in the view that you want to zoom out of (if that view is not already active).
2. Click View > Zoom > Out.
Notes
• Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything
within the window to appear smaller, providing an overview of that
portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all
the Microsoft zoom commands, except that each time that you zoom
out, you increase the viewing area by the chosen factor.
• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view,
the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. Each time
that you zoom out, you decrease the detail by the current zoom factor.
For example, if the zoom factor is 1.5, the detail will decrease by 1.5
each time that you zoom out. For more information, see Zoom Amount
Command (View Menu), page 432.
Related Topics

Zoom Amount Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a zoom factor.
Zoom amount - Allows you to enter the zoom factor for zoom in and zoom out
operations.
Related Topics
Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview

The Save and Recall command allows you to save the current view displayed in the
Main, Plan, or Elevation view windows. The views are organized into view groups
which you define. This command also allows you to define the animation path for a
movie.
Note
• Recalling a Plan or Elevation view does not change the current
location of the eye or center points.
• Saved views can be transferred from one database to another using the
Import Saved Views and Export Saved Views commands.
You can use the Save and Recall command to save any display in the view window
that you might want to recall later. If the view is saved without a frame number
(Frame Number = 0) it cannot be included in a movie; it is just a still image. You can
incorporate the saved view in an animation later by changing the frame number.
You also can create an animation path by saving a series of views displayed in the
Main view window. Each frame saves the current view parameters, such as the
position of the eye, lighting, and the direction the eye is looking. SmartPlant Review
uses these parameters and a fourth-order B-Spline curve to calculate transitional
frames. These transitional frames (or "tween" frames) are used to make a smooth
transition from one saved view to the next. You can adjust the number of tween
frames by modifying frame numbers with addition, subtraction, multiplication, or
division.
This list of saved views is only the definition of the path for the movie. To generate
raster images for a movie, you must create output images with the View Snapshot or
Snapshot Key Frames commands.

Important
• To use the Snapshot Key Frames command, you must install the
Simulation and Visual Effects module.
You save each frame with a name and assign it a number. This frame number
determines the order of the saved views and also the number of transitional frames
that SmartPlant Review creates between each saved view. The number of transitional
frames between each saved view determines the rate at which SmartPlant Review
makes the transition from one saved view to the next: the greater the span, the more
transitional frames that are needed, and therefore, the longer the transition. If you use
this frame list to make a video recording later, remember that 30 frames are equal to 1
second of video.
Use the Display Key Frame Motion command to view the animation path as it
would appear in the movie. This command displays those saved views with a frame
number greater than zero and the transitional frames. The view cone updates as the
frames advance.
When you create or modify saved views, they are saved to the database.SmartPlant
Review saves the following view settings with your saved views:
• Active Tag Only

• Sun Plant North
• Object Textures
• Backfaces
• Endcaps
• All Annotations
• Data Annotations
• Text Annotations
• Volume Annotations
• Measurements
• Axis
• Dashed View cone
• Refresh on Redraw
• Buffered Updates
• Stroking Tolerance
• Near to Far Clip Ratio

In versions of SmartPlant Review before version 5.0, these settings were not saved
and recalled along with the other settings in the saved and recalled views. When you
upgrade a project database to SmartPlant Review version 5.0, SmartPlant Review
automatically adds these settings to any existing save and recall view groups' views
(using the defaults defined in the installed SPRSchema.txt file).
Note
Related Topics
• Add Current View, page 89
• Delete View, page 87
• Edit Selected Views, page 86
• Import Saved Views Command (File Menu), page 411
• Recall a View, page 90
• Recall Partial View, page 90
Rename Group
1. Click View > Save and Recall.
2. Select a view group name.
3. Click Rename.
4. Type a new group name in the To box.
5. Modify the description for the new group name.
Note
• To use this functionality, you must install the Simulation and Visual
Effects module.
Related Topics
• Create Group, page 85
• Delete Group, page 85
• Rename Group Dialog Box, page 95

Delete Group
2. Select a view group name.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to delete the view group.
Caution
• If you delete a group, all of its saved views are deleted as well.
• You are prompted to verify deletion of the group.
Note
Effects module.
Related Topics
• Rename Group, page 84
Create Group
2. Click Create Group.
3. Type a new group name.
4. Type the description for the new group name.
5. Select which view that you want to save in the new view group by selecting the
view name from the Type field.
Note
• Use groups to categorize saved views for future reference.
Effects module.
Related Topics
• Copy a View, page 88
• Create Group Dialog Box, page 96
• Move Selected Views Dialog Box, page 103
• Move View, page 87

Select All
2. Click Select All.
Note
• The Select All button selects all the frames and names under Group
Views. To use this functionality, you must install the Simulation and
Visual Effects Module.
Related Topics
Edit Selected Views

2. Select the view to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Type a frame number.
5. Type a name.
6. Type a description.
7. Verify the eye point settings.
8. Verify the center point settings.
9. Verify the clipping planes settings.
10. Verify the stereo distances settings.
11. Verify the perspective settings.
12. Verify the background settings.
13. Verify the levels settings.
Note
Effects module.
• These steps only apply when editing a saved Main view. Not all of
these options are available for saved Plan and Elevation views.
Related Topics

Delete View
2. Select a View Group Name.
3. Select a Main Views Frame to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Yes.
Notes
• When the confirmation dialog box appears, click Yes if you do indeed
want to delete the view.
Related Topics
Move View
3. Select the frames that you want to move.
Tip
• Hold the Shift or Ctrl keys and click on views to select multiple
frames.
4. Click Move.
5. Select a group to move the frame view To.
Note
Effects module.
Related Topics

Copy a View
3. Select the frames that you want to copy.
Tip
• Hold the Shift key and click on views to select multiple frames.
4. Click Copy.
5. Select a group or view to copy the frame To.
6. Select the new Group Name to receive the copy.
Notes
• The Copy button allows you to copy one or more saved views to
another group.
Effects module.
Related Topics
Modify Frame Numbers

2. Select the frames that you want to modify.
3. Click Modify Frame Numbers.
4. Select the Operator (+, -, *, /) to modify the frame number.
5. Type the Amount to modify the frame number.
Notes
• If you want to modify a range of frame numbers rather than just the
selected frames, check the Use range instead of the selected frames
box and specify a range of frame numbers using the Start and Stop
boxes.
• You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog
box. After you have applied your changes, the Cancel button changes
to a Close button.
Effects module.

Add Current View

1. Set the view to be saved.
3. Click Add Current View.
4. Type a view name.
5. Type a description for the view.
6. Type a frame number. This setting is not available if you are saving a Plan or
Elevation view.
7. Verify the view properties.
Notes
• You can modify any of the view properties. If the view is a still image,
the frame number should remain at zero (0), which is the default value.
If the view is part of an animation, assign the frame number
accordingly.
Related Topics
• Fitting Views: An Overview, page 79
• Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 138
Set Up Partial View Recall

2. Click Setup Partial.
3. Select the settings that you want to recall.
Notes
• The Setup Partial button configures settings for recalling a partial
view.
• Select the view properties that you want to restore when recalling a
view.
• You should complete these steps before selecting Recall Partial View
for the first time.
Effects module.

Related Topics
Recall Partial View

2. Select a Frame number.
3. Click Recall Partial View.
Notes
• The Recall Partial View button recalls one or more view parameters
of the selected view based on the configuration set up using Setup
Partial View Recall.
Effects module.
Related Topics
• Set Up Partial View Recall, page 89
Recall a View
2. Select a frame number.
3. Click Recall View.
Notes
• The Recall View button recalls the selected view.
• All prior changes are saved at the time that you complete these steps.
Related Topics

Generate a ModelView View File

2. Click Generate ModelView View File.
3. Type a ModelView file name.
Tip
• The file name defaults to the same file name as the .dri file but with a
.vfa extension.
4. Select a ModelView default view.
5. Select a saved view group name if you selected the Use saved view option.
6. Select a saved view name if you selected the Use saved view option.
7. Select a view group for the ModelView key frames.
Note
Effects module.
Related Topics
Import Saved Views

1. Click File > Import > Saved Views.
2. Type a file name, or click Browse to locate the file.
3. Optionally, click the Select view group option, and select a group name from the
list to display the individual views in that group.
Tip
• If you turn on the Select view group option, then you only can select
view names. If you turn off the Select view group option, then you
only can select view group names.
4. Click each view group or saved view name to import.
5. Click Import.
Notes
• The import database must be in the SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later
project database table format before it can be imported.
• You can use the Select All button to select all of the items in the
Name column.

• If the database receiving the new views contains a view group with the
same name as the one being imported, the saved views of the two view
groups will be merged. Any identically named view in the receiving
view group is overwritten by the incoming view.
• When importing or exporting a view group with the same name as one
already in the receiving database, make sure that both view groups are
of the same type, such as Main, Plan, or Elevation. If the view groups
are of a different type, the resulting view group may contain saved
views of both types, possibly causing unintended consequences for the
user.
• SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on
the Save and Recall Views dialog box. Before you import or export
saved views, you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to
rename view groups. This will avoid collisions with existing view
group names in the target database.
• SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of
data that you import or export between project databases. SmartPlant
Review assumes that all projects used during import or export
activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. Therefore,
it is possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the
project that receives the data.
Related Topics
• Import Saved Views Dialog Box, page 112
Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3.7

1. Click File > Save.
2. Start SmartPlant Review and open the project with no database (temporarily).
Then, export the Saved Views read in from the DesignReview .dvf file.
3. In SmartPlant Review, click File > Import > Saved Views.
4. Click Browse to locate the file that you saved in step 2.
5. Optionally, click Select view group and select a group name from the list to
display the individual views in that group.
6. Click each saved view Name to select.
Notes
• You can reduce the number of saved views in the list by selecting a
view group name.
• You can use the Select All button to select all the saved view sets in
the file for importing.

Related Topics
Export Saved Views

1. Click File > Export > Saved Views.
2. Type a database file name, or click Browse to locate the project database file to
which you want to export the saved views. If SmartPlant Review does not find the
file name, it creates a new database with that name.
3. Optionally, click Select view group and select a group name from the list to
display the individual views in that group.
4. Under the Name column, click each view group (if the Select view group option
is not selected) or saved group (if the Select view group option is selected) that
you want to export.
Notes
• The database receiving the saved views must be in the SmartPlant
Review 5.0 or later project database table format.
• You can use the Select All button to select all of the items in the
Name column.
groups will be merged. Any identically named view in the receiving
view group is overwritten by the incoming view.
already in the receiving database, make sure that both view groups are
of the same type, such as Main, Plan, or Elevation. If the view groups
are of a different type, the resulting view group may contain saved
views of both types, possibly causing unintended consequences for the
user.
• SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on
the Save and Recall Views dialog box. Before you import or export
saved views, you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to
rename view groups. This will avoid collisions with existing view
group names in the target database.

Related Topics
• Export Saved Views Command (File Menu), page 415
• Export Saved Views Dialog Box, page 113
Save and Recall Views Dialog Box

Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view
windows. The views are organized in view groups that you create. You also can use
this dialog box to define the animation path for a movie.
Note
Effects module.
View Group
Name - Specifies the name of the active group.
Rename - Displays the Rename Group dialog box, allowing you to rename the
active group.
Delete - Removes the active group and all of its views. The Delete Group dialog box
appears giving you the opportunity to confirm the deletion.
Create Group - Displays the Create Group dialog box, allowing you to add a new
group.
Description - Displays the description of the active view group.
Group Views
Main or Plan or Elevation views - Specifies the view type associated with the active
group.
Select All - Selects all of the saved views in the active group.
Clear All - Unselects all of the saved views in the active group.
Edit - Allows you to make changes to each of the selected saved views.
Delete - Removes the selected saved views. The Delete Views dialog box appears
giving you the opportunity to confirm the deletion.

Move - Displays the Move Selected View dialog box allowing you to move the
selected views from the active view group to another view group within the same
project..
Copy - Displays the Copy Selected View dialog box, allowing you to copy the
selected views from the active view group to another view group within the same
project.
Modify Frame Numbers - Displays the Modify Frame Numbers dialog box,
allowing you to change the frame number of one or more views at a time.
Add Current View - Displays the Add Current View dialog box allowing you to
add the current view to the active group.
Description - If only one view is selected, this box displays its description.
Setup Partial - Displays the Setup Partial View Recall dialog box, allowing you to
specify the settings to retain when recalling a partial view.
Recall Partial View - Recalls the selected view based on the configuration specified
in the Setup Partial View Recall dialog box, and then closes the Save and Recall
Views dialog box.
Recall View - Recalls the selected view and then closes the Save and Recall Views
dialog box.
Generate ModelView View File - Displays the Generate ModelView View File
dialog box, allowing you to save a new view in the ModelView format.
Related Topics
Rename Group Dialog Box

Allows you to rename the active view group.
From - Displays the name of the active view group.
To - Allows you to enter the new name for the active view group.
Description - Allows you to add descriptive text to the active view group.
Related Topics

Create Group Dialog Box

Allows you to create a group of views. After you create the group, you can add views
to it.
Name - Allows you to enter the name of the new view group.
Type - Allows you to choose the type of the new view group.
Description - Allows you to enter an optional description for the new view group.
Related Topics
Edit View Dialog Box

Provides options for editing one or more of the saved views. The options apply to
view groups of all types (Main, Plan, and Elevation) unless otherwise noted.
Description Tab
Provides options for editing the frame number, name, and description of the selected
saved views.
Frame number - Allows you to edit the frame number of the selected saved views.
This setting is not available for views in view groups of type Elevation View or Plan
View.
Name - Edits the name of the selected saved view. This setting is not available if you
have selected more than one view.
Description - Edits the description of the selected saved views.
Related Topics
Display Tab
Allows you to modify view display options. For view groups of type Plan View or
Elevation View, only the Levels button is enabled.

Render
Hidden line - This setting is disabled.

update.
surface.
update.
Background Color
display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded color. The
Edit button is disabled for the Wireframe option.
Options



position.

view.

Related Topics
• View Settings Dialog Box, page 65
View Cone Tab
Settings on this tab will only display the current value if all of the selected saved
views have an identical value for that setting. For view group types of Elevation View
and Plan View, it is not possible to adjust view cone parameters. For views in groups
of these types, the only settings on this tab are Width, allowing you to specify the
horizontal distance across the view, and Center Point, allowing you to specify the
location of the view's center point.






Related Topics
Lighting Tab
model, which changes the intensity of the image's colors. This tab is not available if
the selected saved views are in an Elevation View or Plan View type of view group.
Related Topics

Advanced Tab
tuning stereo glasses. This tab is not available if the selected saved views are in an
Elevation View or Plan View type of view group.
image.
updates.
Notes
Stereo - This setting is disabled.

NetMeeting - This setting is disabled.
Time display - This setting is disabled.
Perspective - This setting is disabled.
Related Topics
Copy Selected View Dialog Box

Allows you to copy one or more of the saved views to another group.
Note
Effects module.
View Group
From - Displays the active view group name. This field is not editable.
To - Allows you to specify which view group to copy the selected views. Only view
groups with the same type as the active view group display in the list.

View Name
Note
• The following settings are only available if you have selected a single
view to copy.
From - Displays the selected view name. This field is not editable.
To - Allows you to specify a new name for the copy of the view.
Related Topics
Move Selected Views Dialog Box

Allows you to move saved views to another group within the project database.
View group
From - Displays the active view group name. This field is not editable.
To - Allows you to specify which view group to move the selected views. Only view
groups with the same type as the active view group display in the list.
Note
Effects module.
Related Topics
Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box

Allows you to change the frame number of the selected views.
Operator - Determines the type of operation to perform on the frame number for the
specified views. The choices are addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), or
division (/).
Amount - Determines the amount to apply to the frame number of specified views
using the current operator.

Use range instead of the <number of> selected frames - Determines if the selected
operation applies to the specified range or to the selected views on the Save and
Recall Views dialog box.
Start - Indicates the starting frame number of a range using the specified operation
and amount.
Stop - Indicates the stopping frame number of a range using the specified operation
and amount.
Notes
• You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog
box. After you have applied your changes, the Cancel button changes
to a Close button.
Related Topics
• Modify Frame Numbers, page 88
Add Current View Dialog Box

Provides options for editing the new saved views. The options apply to view groups
of all types (Main, Plan, and Elevation) unless otherwise noted.
Description Tab
Provides options for editing the frame number, name, and description of the selected
saved views.
Frame number - Allows you to edit the frame number of the selected saved views.
This setting is not available for views in view groups of type Elevation View or Plan
View.
Name - Edits the name of the selected saved view. This setting is not available if you
have selected more than one view.
Description - Edits the description of the selected saved views.
Related Topics

Display Tab
Allows you to modify view display options. For view groups of type Plan View or
Elevation View, only the Levels button is enabled.
Render
Hidden line - This setting is disabled.

update.
surface.
update.
Background Color
display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded color. The
Edit button is disabled for the Wireframe option.
Options


position.

view.

Related Topics
View Cone Tab
Settings on this tab will only display the current value if all of the selected saved
views have an identical value for that setting. For view group types of Elevation View
and Plan View, it is not possible to adjust view cone parameters. For views in groups
of these types, the only settings on this tab are Width, allowing you to specify the
horizontal distance across the view, and Center Point, allowing you to specify the
location of the view's center point.






Related Topics
Lighting Tab
model, which changes the intensity of the image's colors. This tab is not available if
the selected saved views are in an Elevation View or Plan View type of view group.
Related Topics

Advanced Tab
tuning stereo glasses. This tab is not available if the selected saved views are in an
Elevation View or Plan View type of view group.
image.
updates.
Notes
Stereo - This setting is disabled.

NetMeeting - This setting is disabled.
Time display - This setting is disabled.
Perspective - This setting is disabled.
Related Topics
Setup Partial View Recall Dialog Box

Allows you to turn on and off certain view settings when recalling a partial. These
settings are used with the Recall Partial View command.
Note
Effects module.
Eye point - If this option is not selected, the current eye point location does not
change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall Partial Views command.
Center point - If this option is not selected, the current center point location does not
change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall Partial Views command.
Perspective angle - If this option is not selected, the current perspective angle does
not change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall Partial Views command.

Clipping planes - If this option is not selected, the current location of the clipping
planes does not change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall Partial View
command.
Level settings - If this option is not selected, the current level settings will not change
after the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial View command.
Stereo eye separation - If this option is not selected, the current stereo eye separation
distance will not change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial
View command.
Stereo focal distance - If this option is not selected, the current stereo focal distance
will not change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial View
command.
Background color - If this option is not selected, the current background color will
not change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial View command.
Sun - If this option is not selected, the current sun angle settings will not change after
the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial View command.
Ambient - If this option is not selected, the current ambient setting will not change
after the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial View command.
Brightness - If this option is not selected, the current brightness setting will not
change after the saved view is recalled using the Recall partial View command.
Display quality - If this option is not selected, the current display quality setting will
View shaded - If this option is not selected, the current shading of the Main view will
Display tags - If this option is not selected, the current setting for displaying tags will
Display active tag only - If this option is not selected, the current setting for the
display of the active tag will not change after the saved view is recalled using the
Recall partial View command.
Related Topics

Generate ModelView View File Dialog Box

Allows you to create a ModelView view file from a saved view or from the contents
of the Main view.
ModelView view file (.vfa) file name - Allows you to type a name or path for the
ModelView file. The file name defaults to the same file name as the project file but
with a .vfa extension.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder to select an existing ModelView view

file to overwrite or to create a new ModelView view file.
Use current view - Creates the ModelView view file using the current contents of the
Main view.
Use saved view - Creates the ModelView view file using a saved view.
Saved view group name - Allows you to select the view group that contains the
saved view that you want to use to create the ModelView view file.
Saved view name - Allows you to select the view that you want to use to create the
ModelView view file.
View group for ModelView key frames - Selects a view group for the ModelView
key frames.
Related Topics
• Generate a ModelView View File, page 91
Import Saved Views Dialog Box

Allows you to import saved views from other project databases into the active project
database.
Database file name - Specifies the name of the project database from which you
want to import saved views.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder to select a database file containing the
saved views that you want to import.
Individual view selection

Select view group - Displays the individual views in the view group. When this
option is selected, the View group name list contains the view groups in the project
database.
View group name - Allows you to select a single view group name. This option is
only available when the Select view group check box is turned on.

Name - Displays a list of the view groups in the project database if Select view
group is turned off. Displays the saved views in the selected group if Select view
group is turned on.
Import - Imports the selected saved views without closing the dialog box.
Select All - Selects all of the names in the list.
Clear All - Unselects all of the names in the list.
Related Topics
• Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3.7, page 92
• Import Saved Views, page 91
Export Saved Views Dialog Box

Allows you to export saved views from the active project database to another
database.
Database file name - Specifies the name of the database to which you want to export
saved views. The name can be an existing database, or a new one.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder to select an existing database or to create

a new database file.
Individual view selection

Select view group - Displays the individual views in the view group. When this
option is turned on, the View group name list contains the view groups in the project
database.
View group name - Allows you to select a single view group name. This option is
only available when the Select view group check box is turned on.
Name - Displays a list of the view groups in the project database if Select view
group is turned off. Displays the saved views in the selected group if Select view
group is turned on.
Export - Exports the selected saved views without closing the dialog box.
Clear All - Unselects all of the names in the list.
Related Topics
• Export Saved Views Command (File Menu), page 415
• Export Saved Views, page 93

Selecting Level Settings: An Overview

The Level Settings command selects the categories (or levels) that you want to
display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting a category;
or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the
level number. You also can read the current level settings in the Plan, Elevation, or
Main view and change the level settings for designated views.
The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays
or levels, can be thought of as stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of
drawings on each pane. For example, SPRdemo.dri is designed with the handrails on
one level, the platforms on another, ladders on another, and so on. You can view each
level of the stacked drawings by turning on the individual level or you can view a
complete model by turning on all the levels. You can also view any combination of
these levels.
Related Topics
• Edit Levels, page 114
• Hide Levels, page 114
• Match Files Dialog Box, page 118
• View Current Level Settings, page 115
Hide Levels
1. Click Tools > Hide Level.
2. Select the object whose level you want to hide.
3. Select the views in which you want to turn off the levels.
4. Click Apply.
Notes
• You can select another object by clicking Pick Object.
Related Topics
Edit Levels
1. Click Tools > Level Settings.
2. Select the view for which you want to edit levels.
3. Select the files for which you want to edit levels.
4. Click Current to see the currently defined level settings.
5. Select the levels that you want on or off.
6. Click Apply.

Notes
• The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes.
These overlays or levels are similar to stacked panes of glass, with a
group or category of drawings on each pane. For example, model.dri is
designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on another,
ladders on another.
• You can view each level of the stacked drawings by turning on the
individual levels.
• You can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You also
can view any combination of the levels.
• Click the Current button to view the View Current Level Settings.
Related Topics
View Current Level Settings

2. Select the view for which you want to see the current level settings.
3. Select the file for which you want to see the current level settings.
4. Click the Current button.
Note
• If conflicting level settings exist, the Resolve Current Level dialog
box will display. You then can reduce level selections or select one of
the level combination buttons.
Related Topics
Match Files
2. Click Match.
3. Type the matching criteria in the Matching file name field.
Tip
• You do not have to know the design file name to find a specific file.
You can click Pick Object to select an item in a view, and the design
file name containing the selected object is returned.

4. Click Select to highlight the matched files in the Files list on the Level Settings
dialog box.
Note
• The Clear button allows you to unselect all selected files in the Files
list on the Level Settings dialog box.
Related Topics
Hide Level Dialog Box

Allows you to determine the views in which to hide a selected object.
Views - Allows you to select the Main, Plan, or Elevation view in which to change or
view level settings.
Number - Indicates the level on which the current selection object exists.
Category or level name - Displays all the level names and numbers for the selected
design files.
File - Allows you to select the design files for which you want to view or change
level settings.
Pick Object - Allows you to select an object with a level that you want to hide.
Related Topics
• Hide Level Command (Tools Menu), page 493

Level Settings Dialog Box

Allows you to select the levels that you want to display for one or more design files.
You can turn on a level by selecting the category. Or, if you already know the level
of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number. You also can read the
current level settings in the Main, Plan, and Elevation views.
Views - Allows you to select the views for which you want to view or change level
settings.
Names - Allows you to select the project files in which to change the level settings.
Select All - Allows you to select all of the listed project files in which to change the
level settings.
Clear All - Allows you to unselect all of the listed project files.
Match - Displays the Match Items dialog box, which allows you to select design
files matching the given pattern or selected object.
Levels - Shows which levels are selected. Each button represents an available level,
and an indented button indicates that the level is displayed.
All On - Allows you to turn on all the levels at once for the selected views and
project files.
All Off - Allows you to turn off all the levels at once for the selected views and
project files.
Current - Displays the current levels for the selected views and project files.
Category or Level Name - A multi-column table that displays all the level names
and numbers for the selected design files.
Related Topics
• Level Settings Command (Tools Menu), page 493
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box

Displays the current levels and any conflicting level settings for the selected views
and project files. You also can use the options on this dialog box to combine or
intersect level settings that are turned on in any of the selected items.
Note
• This dialog box displays automatically when conflicting level settings
exist within the selected views and project files in the Level Settings
dialog box.

Views - Allows you to select the Main, Plan, or Elevation view in which to change or
view level settings.
Any - Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are
turned on in any of the selected items.
All - Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned
on in all of the selected items.
Names - Contains the file names with level settings to use for resolving conflicts.
Select All - Selects all design files for which you want to change or view level
settings.
Clear All - Clears all design files selections.
Match - Displays the Match Files dialog box, which allows you to choose objects in
a view to select the design file.
Related Topics
Match Items Dialog Box

Allows you to narrow your item (file, level, color, or lights) selection by searching for
and selecting items (design files, levels, colors, or lights) based on their names or
name groupings. You can work in this dialog box while also working in the Level
Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find
Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes.
Matching item name - Allows you to narrow your item selection by defining
matching criteria for item names listed on the Level Settings, Find Object's and
Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights
dialog boxes. For example, you can select all files whose file names contain the word
"pipe" by typing *pipe* in this field.
Pick Object - Allows you match an item (file, level, or color) by selecting an object
from that file. For example, you can click an object in one of the views to select the
associated design file.
Select - Highlights the matched items in the Files/Levels/Colors/Lights list on the

Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or
Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes.

Clear - Clears the selection of the matched file items listed on the Level Settings,
Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or
Edit Source Lights dialog boxes.
Matched - Displays the number of items in the Files/Levels/Colors/Lights list that

were matched using the Matching item name criteria.
Related Topics
• Match Files, page 115
• Find Object Dialog Box, page 207
• Edit Definition Dialog Box, page 198
• Edit Source Lights Dialog Box, page 329
Viewing in Stereo: An Overview

Add dramatic depth perception to models with the stereo viewing capability of
SmartPlant Review. The Stereo feature takes SmartPlant Review to a new level of
realism and gives presentations or walkthroughs exceptional impact. You can adjust
stereo settings to achieve realistic or exaggerated depth perception. Also, Stereo
mode supports all display operations, including the Display Key Frame Motion
command.
The following Stereo Viewing hardware is required for this option:

• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or
CE-1).
• In addition, Electrohome has some projection systems that support
stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.
Notes
• Stereo Viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism
module.
• Set the video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run
SmartPlant Review.
• Ensure that you have properly installed the correct display driver for
your Intergraph GLI or GLZ graphics card and that you have turned on
the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter. You must have the correct
display driver for stereo capabilities to function properly.
• If the Stereo option is disabled, verify that Stereo Display is selected
in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the Video
Configuration application in Control Panel.

• To enhance depth perception, click View > Full Screen or press F11.
This increases the current view layout on the screen and may prevent
window borders from disrupting the stereo visual cues.
• You do not have to remove the StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses
when switching between stereo mode and regular mode. SmartPlant
Review automatically switches to regular mode when you select a
menu command or dialog box.
Important
• Stereo Viewing is only available in the full product and the Photo-
Realism module.
Related Topics
• Photo-Realism Module, page 28
• Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 121
• Set Stereo Settings, page 121
Stereo Distances Dialog Box

Allows you to create realistic depth perception by adjusting the stereo distances.
Note
00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). You will need to convert your actual distance values to
the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect,
while a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth
perception.
which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects will appear to be
coming out of the screen and objects that are further away will appear to be behind
the screen.
Pick Focal Point - Allows you to specify the focal point by selecting a point in the
model using the mouse rather than typing specific coordinate values.
Related Topics
• Distances Command (View Menu), page 446

Set Stereo Settings

3. Type a value for Between eyes.
4. Type a value for Focal.
Tip
• You also can change the stereo distance settings by clicking View >
Advanced > Stereo > Distances.
Note
• The Between Eyes is the actual distance between your eyes in model
units. Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters
(00:2.2:00 if MU is feet; 00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). You will need to
convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values
for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while a smaller
value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth
perception.
Related Topics
Set Stereo Settings Interactively

1. View a model in Stereo mode while wearing the interlaced glasses.
2. Click View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances.
3. Click Pick Focal Point.
4. Click an object in the Main view that is approximately halfway between the eye
point and the backmost object displayed.
5. Click again to accept the object.
6. Click Apply.
7. Edit the default Between Eyes value to equal the approximate distance between
your eyes. Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters (00:2.2:00 if
MU is feet; 00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). A larger value exaggerates the effect,
while a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic
depth perception.
8. Click Apply.
9. Adjust the Between Eyes value as needed to achieve the most realistic depth
perception.
10. When you finish adjusting stereo effects, click OK.

Tip
• You also can change the stereo distance settings by clicking View >
Advanced > Stereo > Distances.
Notes
• After setting the Focal Distance, elements behind the focal point
appear to recede into the distance, while elements in front of the focal
point appear to be in front of the monitor. The Focal Distance field
displays the location of the selected object.
• Screen updates may take slightly longer than normal because
SmartPlant Review is actually drawing two images on screen.
Related Topics
Working with Elumens: An Overview

SmartPlant Review supports the Elumens VisionStation® single projector
hemispherical display system. Rather than viewing a two dimensional take of a three
dimensional model on the computer screen, VisionStation places you in the model
with a full color, 180-degree field of vision, while allowing you access to the project
data linked to the model. With VisionStation, you can perform real time walk-
throughs, collaborate with the design team, or execute a full construction review day-
by-day or month-by-month. You also can select a specific day in the construction
cycle to view what the progress would be at that point. VisionStation supports all
capabilities found in SmartPlant Review, including dynamic motion, measurement,
construction simulation, collaborative review, tagging, annotation, external data
linking, and animation.
Using a joystick, mouse, or keyboard, you can navigate, review, and manipulate
engineering design, construction, retrofit, and maintenance displays as large as
300MB. Not only can you perform walk-throughs, you also can perform fly-
throughs, fly-arounds, and any other paths- or dynamics-based motions, as well as
zoom in or zoom out to display any level of detail in full-shaded or wireframe mode.
As with SmartPlant Review, the Material Editor allows you to assign materials,
colors, reflections, patterns, textures, and transparency to your model. These options
enhance and add realism to your VisionStation view.

Related Topics
• Elumens Activate Command (View Menu), page 448
• Elumens Settings Command (View Menu), page 449
• Working in Elumens Display Mode, page 123
Working in Elumens Display Mode

The following SmartPlant Review commands have been certified to work when the
Elumens display mode is turned ON.
Collaboration
Display Settings
Display Sets and all related display modes
Full Screen Mode
Key Frame Animation
Keypad Motion
Main View
Motion Settings
Mouse Motion
Photo-Realism
Shaded Mode
Notes
• SmartPlant Review sets the view cone to 90 degrees automatically
when entering Elumens mode.
• Your animation will look best if you set the view cone to 90 degrees
when building the animation outside Elumens mode.
The following commands are NOT certified to work when the Elumens display mode
is turned ON. The work around is to exit Elumens mode, do whatever placements are
necessary, and then re-enter Elumens display mode.

Auto-Highlight
Background Images
Display Set Destination
Display Set Reference Origin
High-Resolution Snapshots
with Scale or Anti-alias
Move Measurement
Place Annotation
Place Center Point
Place Eye Point
Place Measurement
Place Tag
Raytracing
Tags
Related Topics
• Elumens Activate Command (View Menu), page 448
Toggle the Elumens Display Mode On or Off

Click View > Advanced > Elumens > Activate.
Note
• The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.
• See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly
Instructions for more information about setting up and using your
VisionStation dish.
Related Topics

Elumens Settings Dialog Box

Allows you to edit the Elumens display mode settings.
Eye x - Defines the x eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point
shifts the location of the view on the dome.
Eye y - Defines the y eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point
Eye z - Defines the z eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point
Lens x - Defines the x coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens
modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more
pointed.
Lens y - Defines the y coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens
pointed.
Lens z - Defines the z coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens
pointed.
1.5 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the
1.5 meter Elumens dish.
3 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 3.0
meter Elumens dish.
5 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 5.0
meter Elumens dish.
Custom - Allows you to define custom values for the eye point and lens positions.
Use the Custom option to set and keep non-standard default sizes. For example, to
modify the 3.0 meter settings, select the 3.0 meter option to populate the settings with
those values, then select the Custom option and modify the values.
Size - Sets the texture size for each image. Using a larger texture size will result in
sharper picture quality. The maximum size is equal to the smallest power of 2 less
than or equal to the size of the smallest dimension of the Main window. For 1024 x
768 resolution, the maximum texture size is 512.
Left x - Displays the internal left x origin position. This value is read-only.
Left y - Displays the internal left y origin position. This value is read-only.
Right x - Displays the internal right x origin position. This value is read-only.

Right y - Displays the internal right y origin position. This value is read-only.
Top x - Displays the internal top x origin position. This value is read-only.
Top y - Displays the internal top y origin position. This value is read-only.
Note
VisionStation dish.
Related Topics
Edit Elumens Display Mode Settings

1. Click View > Advanced > Elumens > Settings.
2. Select the appropriate Elumens settings.
3. Click Apply to apply the selected options to the folder, file, or control.
Note
• The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.
VisionStation dish.
Related Topics

Using the View Cone: An Overview

The view cone defines the boundaries of the area being displayed in the Main view.
The view cone updates as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point,
and as you define motion with the mouse or keypad. The view cone appears in the
Plan and Elevation views.
Assume that you, the viewer, are in the eye point position (A). You are looking
toward the center point of the view cone (D). The limits of your view are defined by
the far-clipping plane (C) and the near-clipping plane (B). You see whatever lies
between the two planes.
You can set the eye point and center point positions by dragging them with the
mouse, or using either the View > Settings > View Cone tab or the Position Control
toolbar.
You can set the near and far clipping planes by dragging them with the mouse, or
using the Place Far Clipping Plane command, or the Place Near Clipping Plane
command.
The upper right side of the view cone is red, and the upper left side is green. The
angle between the red and green lines is the view perspective. You can set the view
perspective by dragging the edges of the view cone with the mouse, or by using either
the View > Settings > View Cone tab or the Perspective Toolbar.

Note
• If you are using the mouse to change the view cone, and any of the
regions overlap, SmartPlant Review resolves the conflict in the
following order:
1. Eye Point Crosshair
2. Center Point Crosshair
3. Near Clipping Plane
4. Far Clipping Plane
5. View Cone Sides
Related Topics
• Set Center Point, page 130
• Set Clipping Planes, page 132
• Set Eye Point, page 129
Position Control Toolbar

The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the view cone eye
point and center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement. For users
familiar with how the Position Control worked in DesignReview, see the Help for
DesignReview Users > Position Control Dialog Box topic for a discussion of the
differences between the two controls.
View - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Dependent
and View Dependent Level Directional Modes. The View Bearing Pointer displays
the current bearing direction of the view cone. The View Elevation Pointer displays
the current elevation direction of the view cone. You can change the direction of the
View Bearing Pointer or the View Elevation Pointer by dragging the left mouse
button in either the Bearing or the Elevation compass or by typing new bearing and
elevation values.
Motion - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View
Independent Direction Mode. The View Independent Bearing Pointer displays the
forward direction in regards to bearing. The View Independent Elevation Pointer
displays the forward direction in regards to elevation. Moving forward using View
Independent mode moves you in the direction defined by these two pointers. You use
the cursor directional keys (up, down, left, and right arrow keys) or the right mouse
button to define the direction of the pointers. You also can type new bearing and
elevation values.

When using the View Independent Direction Mode, the View Bearing Pointer and
View Elevation Pointer define the view cone direction (the direction in which you are
looking).
Eye Point - Displays the current location of the view cone eye point. You can
change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and
Elevation fields. You also can change the eye point location using the View >
Settings > View Cone tab.
Center Point - Displays the current location of the view cone center point. You
can change the location of the center point by typing in new values in the North,
East, and Elevation fields. You also can change the center point location using the
View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Related Topics
• Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview, page
160
• Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview, page
157
• Position Control Changes, page 34
• Position Control Toolbar Command (View Menu), page 469
Set Eye Point

2. Select the View Cone tab.
3. Verify the North eye point setting.
4. Verify the East eye point setting.
5. Verify the Elevation eye point setting.

Notes
• You also can place the eye point by clicking View > Place > Eye
Point Only. This command allows you to place the eye point by
locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the graphic
views.
• You also can place the eye point by clicking View > Place > View by
Eye Point. This command allows you to place a view based on eye
point, which involves the perspective that you have when viewing the
file.
• You also can set the eye point interactively by using the mouse to drag
the eye point of the view cone in the plan or elevation views. You
must hold the left mouse button down for at least 1 second or drag it at
least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the eye
point to change. See the README.txt file for information about
changing these defaults. You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the
eye point adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to the
eye point made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo
command.
• If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing
operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, do
one of the following:
- Place a new center point
- On the View > Settings > View Cone tab,
enter new values for the eye and/or center
points, as well as the viewing angles.
- Use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the
eye point, center point, and viewing angles.
Related Topics
• Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 166
Set Center Point

2. Click the View Cone tab.
3. Verify the North center point setting.
4. Verify the East center point setting.
5. Verify the Elevation center point setting.

Tip
• You also can click the Center View command on the Common
toolbar.
Notes
• You also can place the center point by clicking View > Place >
Center Point Only. This command allows you to place the center
point by locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the
graphic views.
• You also can place the enter point by clicking View > Place > View
by Center Point. This command repositions the model in a view and
is useful for seeing different portions of the model.
• You also can set the center point interactively by using the mouse to
drag the center point of the view cone in the plan or elevation views.
You must hold the left mouse button down for at least 1 second or drag
it at least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the
center point to change. See the README.txt file for information
about changing these defaults. You can right-click or press Esc to
cancel the center point adjustment without saving the changes. Any
changes to the center point made in this manner can be reversed using
the Edit > Undo command.
• If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing
operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, do
one of the following:
- Place a new center point.
- On the View > Settings > View Cone tab,
enter new values for the eye and/or center
points, as well as the viewing angles.
- Use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the
eye point, center point, and viewing angles.
Related Topics

Set Clipping Planes

3. Verify the Near clipping plane setting.
4. Verify the Far clipping plane setting.
5. Verify the Reference clipping plane setting.
Notes
• The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane and the
near-clipping plane. You see whatever lies between the two planes.
• The Reference clipping plane setting allows you to choose Eye point,
North, East, or Elevation for the reference point.
• You also can set the clipping planes interactively by dragging the
plane with the mouse. You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the
clipping plane adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to
the clipping planes made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit
> Undo command.
• You can maintain your current Encircle clipping plane settings when
you switch from any of the Encircle positioning modes back to the
Lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning
Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command.
• You can maintain your current Lateral clipping plane settings when
you switch from the Lateral positioning mode to any of the Encircle
positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning Modes >
Clip to Encircle Sphere command.
Related Topics
Set Perspective Angle Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the perspective angle, in degrees, for rendering the view. The
perspective angle values can range from 2 to 160.
Angle - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the perspective angle.

Related Topics
• Perspective Angle Command (View Menu), page 440
Set View Cone Perspective

3. Move the slider to set the Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160.
4. Select Dashed to display the view cone as dashed lines.
Notes
• You also can set the view cone perspective by typing a value in the
box next to the slider on the view cone tab or by clicking View >
Display > Perspective Angle.
• You can also display the view cone as dashed lines by clicking View >
Display > Dashed View Cone.
• You also can set the perspective angle interactively by dragging the
view cone sides with the mouse toward or away from the view cone
eye point. You can right-click or press ESC to cancel the perspective
angle adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to the
perspective angle made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit
> Undo command.
Related Topics
Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview

Many SmartPlant Review commands prompt you to place three dimensional points.
For example, when you place tags with leader lines, take measurements, or window in
on an area, you can place three dimensional points for more precision control. You
can place these points three ways:
• Define a bore sight

• Place data point
• Snap to an element

Define a Bore Sight

1. Begin the three dimensional point placement process by clicking a Place
command from the View menu or Pick Point button found on certain dialog
boxes.
2. Place the cursor where you want to place the point (usually in the Main or Plan
views) and right-click twice (quickly) to place the point. A solid yellow line
(called a bore sight) passes through that point in the other views.
3. To define the depth of the point, position the cursor on the bore sight and left-
click once.
Related Topics
• Place a Data Point, page 134
• Placing Three Dimensional Points: An Overview, page 133
Place a Data Point

1. Begin the three dimensional point placement process by clicking a Place
command from the View menu or Pick Point button found on certain dialog
boxes.
2. Place the cursor where you want to place the data point (usually in the Main or
Plan views) and left-click once.
Notes
• When the three dimensional point is selected, the coordinates appear in
the Status bar.
• You can place a data point in any view.
• Data points selected using this quick two dimensional method get their
missing depth-of-view coordinate information from the current view's
center point. These data points also do not maintain their exact
location during view manipulations (for example, zooming in or out in
a view). To precisely place three dimensional data points, use the bore
sight method.
Related Topics
• Define a Bore Sight, page 134
• Snap to an Element, page 135

Snap to an Element
1. In the Main view, place a tentative point (quick left double-click) on an element
in the model.
2. Click to accept the highlighted element.
Notes
• When the three dimensional point is placed, the coordinates appear in
the message field.
• You can reject the highlighted element and tentatively select another
element by clicking. The next element highlights.
Related Topics
• Define a Bore Sight, page 134
• Place a Data Point, page 134

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview
Navigating Through the Model: An

Overview
SmartPlant Review allows you to move laterally and in a circular motion through a
model and view various points of interest using three different types of modes: mouse
drag modes, positioning modes, and directional modes.
Mouse Drag Modes

You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. Each
mode causes the mouse to move in a different direction. In addition to moving around
in the model, you can use the mouse to display the label data for an object in the Text
view.
When using mouse drag motion, such as Forward/Back, Left/Right, you can release
the data button while the cursor is outside the Main, Plan, or Elevation views. Mouse
motion then continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse
button. This mode stays in affect until you select a data point in the Main view.
Positioning Modes
Positioning modes are used to define how the eye point moves. You can use the
lateral mode to move freely about the model, or you can use one of the encircle
modes to lock the eye point to a circular track.
Directional Modes
Directional Modes define how you want to navigate around the model. The different
modes provide different types of motion. For example, when in View Dependent
Motion mode, the direction that you are looking, the eye point to the center point in
the view cone, is the direction that you move. View Dependent Motion Level also
moves the eye point in the direction that you are looking, but the elevation of the
view cone does not change.
Related Topics
• Activate a Joystick, page 152
• Controlling Movement with Directional Modes, page 160
• Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes, page 157
• Map Joystick Buttons, page 153
• Set Motion Rates, page 163
• Using the Keyboard: An Overview, page 144
• Work with Mouse Drag Modes, page 140

Examining Motion Devices: An Overview

SmartPlant Review provides three different options for moving around in the model:
mouse, keypad, and joystick.
The mouse allows you to move forward and back, pan left and right, pan up and
down, and rotate in the model. You can perform any of these options in any of the
views, with the exception of rotate. You can only use the mouse to rotate in the Main
view. Options for a standard mouse, as well as a Microsoft IntelliMouse® pointing
device are also provided with the software.
You can perform many common SmartPlant Review tasks quickly and easily with the
function, control, shortcut, and keypad keys on your keyboard. You can use the
function keys, the F-keys across the top of your keyboard, to execute functions,
invoke dialog boxes, or modify functions. Function key equivalents and modifier
keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to Microsoft Windows
conventions. You also can use the function keys table to view F-keys and their
corresponding functions.
SmartPlant Review also supports standard Microsoft control key and shortcut
functions. You can access these options by pressing Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter.
Some of these options execute functions, while others invoke forms, display dialog
boxes, or modify window layouts of the three dimensional model. You can view the
control keys or shortcuts and their corresponding functions on the standard control
key table or the SmartPlant Review shortcut key table.
You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected
display set. A list of keypad keys and their corresponding functions is provided.
You also can use a joystick to move around in your model. The joystick shares the
same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. However, it is important
to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. The speed
setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion,
independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the
speed around this setting.
Related Topics
• Exploring Motion Types: An Overview, page 155
• Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 149
• Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 138

Using the Mouse: An Overview

Use a standard mouse or a Microsoft IntelliMouse to move through the model. Each
view mode causes the mouse to move in a different direction. In addition to moving
around in the model, you can use the mouse to display the label data for an object in
the Text view.
In any view, Mouse Drag allows you to move forward and back, pan left and right,
pan up and down. In the Main view, but not in the Plan or Elevation views, Mouse
Drag also allows you to rotate.
For best results when using the Mouse Drag, remain in Auto-Highlight mode and
press a modifier key to change Direction modes as you move the mouse around in the
view. The following table lists the modifier keys and their related direction modes.
Ctrl Forward/Back and Left/Right
Shift Pan
Alt Rotate
Related Topics
• Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse, page 143
• Step Using the IntelliMouse, page 143
Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview
You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. Each
mode enables the mouse to move the view in a different direction.
Auto-Highlight mode displays object label data instantly in the Text view.
Forward/Back, Left/Right mode moves the view cone forwards or backwards

toward the object that you are looking at in the model when moving the mouse
up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate about
the eye point left or right.
Pan mode increases and decreases the view cone elevation when you move the
mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to move
in a line parallel to the far clipping plane. Think of the left or right motion as
taking a step side-ways.

Rotate mode tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or
back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate left and
right. This mode is similar to standing in one place and tilting your head up and
down and looking left and right. The view cone eye point does not move using
this mode.
View Cube mode points the view cone in a direction that you define
interactively. This mode is similar to standing in one place and looking in any
direction. The view cone eye point does not move using this mode.
When using mouse drag motion, such as Forward/Back, Left/Right, you can release
the data button while the cursor is outside the Main, Plan or Elevation views. Mouse
motion then continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse
button. This mode stays in effect until you select a data point in the Main view.
Remember the following tips and techniques when you are moving with the mouse:
• When you are familiarizing yourself with mouse drag, watch the Eye
Point and view cone in the Plan and Elevation views as you move. As
the Plan and Elevation views change, you can see the effect of mouse
drag and modifier key combinations.
• The speed of movement is relative to how far you move the mouse. If
you move the mouse a short distance, speed is slow. If you move the
mouse a long distance, speed is faster.
• The speed of movement depends on the settings in the Edit Motion
Settings > Rates Tab. Changing these and other settings on this dialog
box affects not only speed but display quality as well.
• The origin point from which you begin movement is the position
where you first click in the Main, Plan or Elevation view. A crosshair
displays to indicate this point. A null region surrounds the crosshair. If
you drag a very small distance and remain within the null region, no
movement occurs.
• When you drag the mouse, the pointer changes to a special cursor that
indicates the direction of movement.
Related Topics
• Auto-Highlight, page 140
• Forward/Back, Left/Right, page 141
• Manipulate the View Cube, page 142
• Pan, page 141
• Rotate, page 141

Work with Mouse Drag Modes

1. Click the mouse on the position from which you want to start moving.
Tip
• You can click on the position in any view.
2. Hold Shift, Ctrl or Alt then click and hold down the left mouse button, and move
the mouse in the direction that you want to move.
Tip
• The cursor indicates direction of movement.
3. Move the mouse a short distance to move slowly.
4. Move the mouse a longer distance to move faster.
5. Press and hold another modifier key while dragging to change direction mode.
6. Stop moving the mouse and release the mouse button and modifier keys to stop
movement.
Related Topics
• Pan, page 141
• Set Center Mode, page 142
• Set Priority Mode, page 142
Auto-Highlight
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight.
2. Click an object in the model.
Notes
• Auto-Highlight displays object label data instantly in the Text view. If
you are in Single Pane Layout (you do not have the Text view open),
you can click and accept an object to view the label data.
• Auto-Hightlight also displays the corresponding object surface point
location in the status bar while you drag the mouse over an object. If
no object is currently under the mouse, then the point is on the view
plane at the center point location.
• You also can click the Auto-Highlight command on the View

toolbar.
Related Topics
• Auto-Highlight Components Command (Motion Menu), page 516

Forward/Back, Left/Right
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right.
2. Left-click in the model.
3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.
Note
• You also can click the Forward/Back, Left/Right command on

the View toolbar.
Related Topics
• Forward/Back, Left/Right Command (Motion Menu), page 517
Pan
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan.
Notes
• You also can click Pan on the View toolbar.

Related Topics
• Pan Command (Motion Menu), page 518
Rotate
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate.
Notes
• You also can click Rotate on the View toolbar.

Related Topics
• Rotate Command (Motion Menu), page 518

Manipulate the View Cube

1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube.
Note
• You also can click View Cube on the View Menu.

Related Topics
• Motion Toolbar, page 466
• View Cube Command (Motion Menu), page 519
Set Priority Mode

1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Priority Mode.
2. Click on an object in the model.
Notes
• Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north
and east axis translation (thus diagonal movements are possible).
• Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the
greatest move amount (thus only non-diagonal movements are
possible).
Related Topics
Set Center Mode

1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode.
2. Click on an object in the model.
Note
• Center Mode changes the mouse drag motion to always be relative to
the center of the window instead of where the mouse drag began in
that window.
Related Topics

Using Microsoft IntelliMouse Features: An Overview

If your computer has a Microsoft IntelliMouse pointing device, you can use it as you
would a standard mouse. In addition, you can use the wheel on the mouse. Rotating
the wheel causes a stepping type of motion, rather than a smooth, continuous
scrolling motion.
Note
• To use the IntelliMouse, the pointing device and its software must be
installed and configured correctly. See the IntelliPoint Online User's
Guide for details. To start the IntelliPoint Online Help, from Control
Panel, double-click the Mouse icon. Then, click Help.
Related Topics
Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse

1. Move the IntelliMouse pointer to the Text Window.
2. Rotate the wheel to scroll up or down.
Note
• You also can press SHIFT and rotate the wheel to scroll left or right.
Related Topics
Step Using the IntelliMouse

1. Move the IntelliMouse pointer to the position from which you want to start
stepping.
2. Rotate the wheel forward or back to move.
Notes
• You also can press a modifier key and rotate the wheel forward or
back to move.
• You can use a combination of Mouse Drag and IntelliMouse wheel
action to move in the model. For example, press CTRL, then click and
drag the IntelliMouse forward while rotating the wheel forward. This
combination moves you forward while panning up.

Related Topics
Using the Keyboard: An Overview

Use the following keys and key combinations to execute functions, invoke forms, or
enter commands:
Function Keys
The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Some keys
execute functions while others invoke dialog boxes. Press Ctrl or Shift + function
key to modify the functions. Function key equivalents and modifier keys, if any,
display next to commands on menus, according to standard Microsoft Windows
conventions.
F1 Help
F2 Assign Materials to Elements
Ctrl+F2 Assign Materials to Display Set
F3 Define Display Set
Ctrl+F3 Move Display Set
F4 Hide Level (Object)
Ctrl+F4 Level Settings
F5 Refresh
Ctrl+F5 Refresh All
Shift+F5 Raytrace
F6 View Settings
Ctrl+F6 Save and Recall (View Operations)
Shift+F6 Photo-Realism Settings
F7 Frame Show Motion
Ctrl+F7 Motion Settings

Shift+F7 Global Lighting Settings
F8 Snaplock Measurement
Ctrl+F8 Surface Measurement
Shift+F8 Edit Measurement Collections
Ctrl + Shift+F8 New Measurement Collections
F9 Place Tag with leader line
Ctrl+F9 Place Tag without leader line
F10 Next Tag
Ctrl+F10 Previous Tag
F11 Full Screen Toggle
Ctrl+F11 Arrange All
F12 Collision Detection
Related Topics
• Examining Motion Devices: An Overview, page 137
• Keypad Keys, page 147
• Standard Control Keys, page 145
Standard Control Keys
The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts supported by SmartPlant
Review. You can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter. Some of these
options execute functions while others invoke forms.
Ctrl+C Copy Text
Ctrl+F Find Object
Ctrl+O Open
Ctrl+P Print
Ctrl+S Save
Ctrl+V Paste Text

Ctrl+X Cut Text
Ctrl+Y Redo
Ctrl+Z Undo
Related Topics
• Examining Motion Devices: An Overview, page 137
SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys
The following table lists commands that you can access by pressing a combination of
either Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter. Some of these options execute functions while
others display dialog boxes or modify window layouts of the model.
Alt+0 View Project Manager
Alt+1 View Position Control Toolbar
Alt+2 View Perspective Angle Toolbar
Alt+3 View Encircle Radius Toolbar
Alt+4 Views Control
Ctrl+D Delete All Collections
Ctrl+Alt + D Delete All Measurements
Ctrl+M Delete Last Measurement
Ctrl+Shift + M Delete Active Collection Measurements
Ctrl+R Play Key Frame Motion
Ctrl+Space Pause Key Frame Motion
Ctrl+Alt+R Play Schedule Review Session
Ctrl+Alt+Space Pause Schedule Review Session
Ctrl+Alt+S Stop Schedule Review Session
Shift+1 Single Pane Layout
Shift+3 Three Pane Layout

Shift+4 Four Pane Layout
Ctrl + 1 Main Window
Ctrl + 2 Plan Window
Ctrl + 3 Elevation Window
Ctrl + 4 Text Window
ESC Stop current View Update, Key Frame Motion, or Raytrace in

progress
Related Topics
Keypad Keys
You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected
display set. All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, discrete, and
keypad) share the same basic speed/control settings. However, it is important to set
the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model on the Motion
Settings dialog box. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units
per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick
discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.
By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one.
You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time
is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings >
Display tab can be very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane
to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting).
By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will
decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye
point.
Important
• To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of the view cone,
you must first enable the Eye Point motion toggle (click Motion >
Eye Point). To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of a
display set, you must first select a display set in the Program Manager
tree, and then enable the Display Set motion toggle (click Motion >
Display Set).
Tilt Keys - The plus key (+) on the numeric keypad tilts up the view cone/Display
Set. The minus key (-) on the numeric keypad tilts down the view cone/Display Set.

Elevation Keys - The Page Up key to the left of the numeric keypad raises the view
cone/Display Set to an upper level of the model. The Page Down key to the left of the
numeric keypad moves the view cone/Display Set to a lower level of the model.
Rotation Keys - The forward backslash or divide key (/) on the numeric keypad
rotates the view cone/Display Set to the left. The asterisk or multiply key (*) on the
numeric keypad rotates the view cone/Display Set to the right.
Special Keys - The Esc key cancels the current screen update. The Insert key
increases the movement and rotation rates by the amount specifies on the Motion >
Settings > Rates tab. The Delete key decreases the movement and rotation rates. The
Home key cycles through the four Positioning modes. The End key cycles through
the four Directional modes.
Number Keys - Use keys 1 - 9 to move through the model. Press and hold these keys
to cause continuous motion. The 0 key toggles the Continuous Motion option. The
period key (.) repeats the last direction one step. The 5 key toggles the step direction.
Notes
• If you press more than one key at a time, the motion directions of each
key are averaged. For example, if you press keys 7 and 8 at the same
time, the motion direction is forward and a little to the left.
• All directions and angles of motion are in relation to the Positioning
Mode and Directional Mode that you selected.
• As you move through the model using the keypad, the Position
Control toolbar and the view cone continually update.
• The keypad is reserved for motion and orientation control and
sometimes does not let you use the keypad to key in numbers. To
avoid any problems, use the number keys at the top row of the
keyboard to enter numbers.

• To use the numeric keypad for navigation, NumLock must be on.

• The Left/Right Arrows decrease/increase the View Independent
Motion Elevation Angle by the current rotation adjustment rate.
• The Up/Down Arrows increase/decrease the View Independent
Motion Bearing Angle by the current rotation adjustment rate.
Related Topics
Using the Joystick: An Overview

In SmartPlant Review, you can use a joystick to navigate in the model, no matter
which add-in modules that you have installed. Before you can use a joystick with
SmartPlant Review, you must:
1. Install the joystick and its driver. If you are running Windows 98, upgrade
DirectX to version 8.1 or greater (available on the Web from Microsoft) before
installing the joystick driver. The proper DirectX components are already
installed on Windows 2000 service pack 3 and Windows XP systems.
2. Configure and calibrate the joystick.
3. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.
Beginning with version 4.2, SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft DirectX API
interface when supporting joystick use on Windows 98 and Windows 2000. This new
interface may cause the following changes in performance or response when using a
joystick with these operating systems.
• Digital joysticks will work on the Windows 98 and Windows 2000

platforms using the same workflows and functionality as the analog
joysticks. Using a digital joystick may result in a noticeable difference
in performance.
• Because performance may be enhanced when using this interface,
Motion Settings may be affected accordingly, making a difference in
how the motion rate variables respond.
• The Move threshold in percent setting on the Motion Settings >
Joystick tab has no effect on either joystick movement mode.
• The data gathering method from the joystick through the DirectX API
interface is different from the method used in previous versions of the
Windows operating system. Data is now polled from the joystick
instead of depending on a joystick's event driven notification.
The joystick shares the same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad.
However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for

the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move)
for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete
controls can vary the speed around this setting.
point.
For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing
support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the
View Settings dialog box. When enabled, this option allows textures to display
during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Display tab of the
Motion Settings dialog box.
Command Mapping
You can map joystick command buttons to start SmartPlant Review commands that
you select. Command mapping is available only if you are running Windows 2000 or
greater.
By default, in relative mode, the first 3 buttons (1, 2, 3) are assigned the following
commands:
• Button 1 - Forward/Back, Left/Right

• Button 2 - Rotate
• Button 3 - Pan
You must assign the remainder of the buttons available for your particular joystick
before you can start any of the other available commands from the joystick.
You can assign any or all of these buttons to a different command. You can arrange
them in any order that you choose. SmartPlant Review saves any change in the button
map to the registry.
Entries in the button list that contain the letters POV are associated with the point of
view switch (POV switch), on a joystick. Typically there are 8 available locations on
the POV switch to which you can assign a command. POV 1 refers to the 12 o'clock
position on the switch and the numbers are incremental for each additional 45 degrees
moving around the switch clockwise.

Notes
• Texturing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism
module.
• You can set the proper MU:SU:PU speed values on the Motion
Settings > Rates tab.
• When you are using relative joystick mode, position the cursor outside
the main view. If the cursor remains on the main view, SmartPlant
Review will receive input as if the mouse were driving the motion.
This may cause an unexpected jumpy behavior.
Related Topics
• Install a Joystick on Windows 2000 and Windows XP, page 152
• Install a Joystick on Windows NT, page 151
• Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box, page 171
Install a Joystick on Windows NT

1. Open the Control Panel and double-click Multimedia.
2. Click the Devices tab.
3. Select Joystick Devices from the list and click Add.
4. Select Unlisted or Updated Driver from the list.
5. Install the drivers supplied with your joystick. You can install the standard analog
joystick driver from your Windows NT 4.0 CD or the driver disk supplied with
your joystick. To use the joystick, you need the JOYSTICK.DLL,
JOYSTICK.SYS, and OEMSETUP.INF files.
6. Open the Control Panel and double-click Joystick.
7. Select Joystick 1.
8. Select 2-axis, 4-button joystick in the Joystick list.
9. Click Calibrate and follow the directions.
10. Click Test to verify that the calibration process completed properly.
11. Click OK if the calibration was verified correctly.
12. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.
Note
• SmartPlant Review supports only the Joystick 1 analog joystick on
Windows NT. Digital joysticks are supported on Windows 98 and
Windows 2000.

Related Topics
Install a Joystick on Windows 2000 and Windows XP

Important
• If you are running Windows 98, upgrade DirectX to version 8.1 or
greater (available on the Web from Microsoft) before installing the
joystick driver. The proper DirectX components are already installed
on Windows 2000 service pack 3 and Windows XP systems.
Consult your operating system or joystick manufacturer's installation documentation
for the necessary steps to install and calibrate your joystick. After your joystick has
been verified as working correctly with the operating system you will then be able to
Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.
Related Topics
Activate a Joystick
1. Click Motion > Settings.
2. Select the Joystick tab.
3. Click Allow joystick.
4. Select a Movement type.
5. Type the amount to Move threshold in percent.
Tip
• You must click OK to activate the joystick. If you click Apply,
SmartPlant Review will not activate the joystick, and you must exit
SmartPlant Review before you can restart this process.
Important
• All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, keypad, and
discrete) share the same basic speed/control settings. However, it is
important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for

the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement
(units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed.
Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this
setting.
• You can set the proper MU:SU:PU speed values on the Rates tab of
the Motion Settings dialog box.
Notes
• Start with a very small project to get used to the way the joystick
allows you to move in the model.
• You can set the move and rotation settings to small values using the
Motion Settings > Rates tab to ensure the joystick moves properly
with your movement.
• By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to
the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large
models because the update time is too long. For these large models,
the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very
useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the
specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping
setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics
being drawn. This will decrease update time, while allowing you to
see all graphics that are near the eye point.
• For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have
hardware texturing support. You can set the global settings for texture
display on the View Settings > Display tab. When enabled, this
option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all
texturing is already enabled on the Motion Settings > Display tab.
module.
Related Topics
Map Joystick Buttons

3. Click Command Mapping.
4. Select a button from the list, and then select the command that you want to assign
to that button.

5. Click Apply.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as necessary.
Notes
• If a button has a command mapped to it, that command displays in the
list when you select the button. If there is no command mapped, the
command list remains blank.
with your movement.
module.
Related Topics

Exploring Motion Types: An Overview
Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a
constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion
continues even if you provide no input. When Continuous Step is off, you
move through the model only by command from the mouse, keypad, or
joystick. Continuous motion mode allows you to use other commands while in
motion.
You also can press 0 on the keypad to toggle continuous motion. The keypad 0
movement repeats the last keypad motion key up to the rate specified by the
Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.
Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single step, then
select Continuous, and then toggle the step direction. However, Continuous
motion does not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled
the step direction was not a step.
Single Step repeats the last direction or rotation one step. You also can press
the period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in
MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box. dialog box.
Toggle Step Direction reverses the direction you are currently traveling. You
can toggle the step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-
clockwise and back again. You also can press 5 on the keypad to toggle the
step direction. on the keypad to toggle the step direction.
Related Topics
• Set Continuous Motion, page 155
• Set Single Step Motion, page 156
• Set Toggle Step Direction, page 156
Set Continuous Motion

1. Click Motion > Move > Continuous.
2. Click in the model.
Notes
• In continuous motion, you move through the model at a constant rate
and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion
continues even if you provide no input.
• You also can click Continuous on the View toolbar or press 0 on

the keypad to start Continuous motion.

• If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion, the last

keypad motion command is repeated up to the rate specified by
Maximum moves per second on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.
For example, if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction
and then press 0, Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction
motions.
• Press Esc or 0 on the keypad to stop the motion.
Related Topics
Set Single Step Motion

Click Motion > Move > Single Step.
Notes
• Single step motion moves you through the model only one step at a
time by repeating the last movement command.
• You also can click Single Step on the View toolbar or press
period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in
MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.
Related Topics
Set Toggle Step Direction

Click Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction.
Notes
• Toggle step direction reverses the single step direction from
forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again.
• You also can click Toggle Step Direction on the View toolbar or
press 5 on the keypad.
Related Topics

Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes:

An Overview
Positioning modes control the movement of the view cone eye point.
Lateral - The eye point is free to move in any direction in the model.
Horizontal Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The

circular track is parallel to the Plan View. You can move the center point in any
direction.
Vertical Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The

circular track is perpendicular to the Plan View. You can move the center point
in any direction.
Surface Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The

circular track can be moved in any orientation. You can move the center point
in any direction.
Related Topics
Using Lateral Motion

1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Lateral.
2. Set or adjust the Center Point.
3. Adjust the Eye Point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views).
4. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.
Note
• You also can click Lateral on the View Menu.

• To switch between Encircle motion settings without losing your
clipping plane settings, use the Home key on your keyboard to cycle
through the four Positioning modes. The End key cycles through the
four Directional modes.
Related Topics
• Lateral Command (Motion Menu), page 521
• Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 158
• Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 159

Set Horizontal Encircle Motion

1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle.
Notes
• You also can click Horizontal Encircle on the View Menu.

• You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position
Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye
point. Rotating around the center point is the default. To rotate around
• You also can use the Home key to cycle through the Encircle modes
without losing your clipping plane settings. The End key cycles
through the Directional modes.
Related Topics
• Common Toolbar, page 456
• Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 521
Set Vertical Encircle Motion

1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle.
Notes
• You also can click Vertical Encircle on the View Menu.

Related Topics
• Using Lateral Motion, page 157
Set Surface Encircle Motion

1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle.
Notes
• You also can click Surface Encircle on the View Menu.


Related Topics
Controlling Movement with Directional Modes:

An Overview
Directional Modes define how you want to navigate around the model. The different
modes provide different types of motion.
View Dependent Motion - Sets the motion direction relative to where the eye
is looking (i.e., forward is toward view center). This mode allows you to move
directly toward where you are looking.
Level View Dependent Motion - Sets the motion direction relative to where
the eye is looking, but remains level while moving. This mode allows you to
move toward where you are looking without changing the elevation.
View Independent Motion - Allows you full control in defining the forward
direction by using the motion bearing and elevation indicators on the Position
Control toolbar, thus giving you the flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary
direction while looking in another arbitrary direction.
Plant North - Sets the motion direction relative to Plant North (that is, forward
is toward Plant North). This mode allows you to look in one direction, which
the view cone defines, while moving in another direction. This mode is similar
to View Independent mode with the exception that forward is always north.
The Mouse Drag Modes, Positioning Modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect
how the Directional Modes operate.
Related Topics
• Set Plant North Mode, page 162
• Set View Dependent Level Mode, page 161
• Set View Dependent Mode, page 161
• Set View Independent Mode, page 161

Set View Dependent Mode

Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent.
Note
• You also can click View Dependent on the View toolbar.

Related Topics
• View Dependent Command (Motion Menu), page 524
Set View Dependent Level Mode

• Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent, level.
Note
• You also can click View Dependent Level on the View toolbar.
Related Topics
• View Dependent, Level Command (Motion Menu), page 525
Set View Independent Mode

• Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent.
Note
• You can also click View Independent on the View toolbar.

Related Topics
• View Independent Command (Motion Menu), page 525

Set Plant North Mode

Click Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North.
Note
• You also can click Plant North on the View toolbar.

Related Topics
• Plant North Command (Motion Menu), page 526
Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview

The Motion Settings command defines the time for screen updates, the shading
mode, the keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. The Motion Settings dialog
box tabs also allow you to set up a joystick.
All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, discrete, and keypad) share the
same basic speed/control settings. However, it is important to set the speed setting to
the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. The speed setting determines the base
rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed.
Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.
point.
For best performance during motion, do the following:
• Use the lowest acceptable display quality.

• On the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box:
- Leave Allow all texturing unchecked.
- Leave Update View Cone unchecked.
- Leave Update position status unchecked.
- Change the motion rates to move the largest acceptable amount.

Related Topics
• Set Bearing Angles, page 164
• Set Display Options, page 163
• Set Motion Control to Display Set, page 165
Set Motion Rates

2. Select the Rates tab.
3. Type the amount to Move in MU:SU:PU.
4. Type the amount to Rotate in degrees.
5. Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Move in MU:SU:PU.
6. Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Rotate in degrees.
7. Type the Maximum moves per second.
Note
• You also can click Motion Settings on the Common toolbar.

Related Topics
• Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview, page 162
Set Display Options

2. Select the Display tab.
3. Specify the display settings that you want to use.
Note
• You also can click Motion Settings on the Motion toolbar.

Related Topics
• Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 180

Set Bearing Angles

2. Select the Bearing tab.
3. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Direction
from 0 to 359.9.
4. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Elevation
from -90 to 90.
5. Move the slider to set the Non-view motion bearing angles in degrees Direction
from 0 to 359.9.
6. Move the slider to set the Non-view motion bearing angles in degrees Elevation
from -90 to 90.
Note
• You also can click Motion Settings on the Common toolbar.

Related Topics
Activate a Joystick
3. Click Allow joystick.
4. Select a Movement type.
5. Type the amount to Move threshold in percent.
Tip
• You must click OK to activate the joystick. If you click Apply,
SmartPlant Review will not activate the joystick, and you must exit
SmartPlant Review before you can restart this process.
Important
setting.

Notes
• Start with a very small project to get used to the way the joystick
allows you to move in the model.
with your movement.
module.
Related Topics
Set Motion Control to Display Set

• Click Motion > Display Set.
Notes
• The Display Set motion setting is relative to the defined display set.
• The Display Set Motion control mode command is only enabled when
a valid display set is selected in Project Manager.
Related Topics

Set Motion Control to Eye Point

Click Motion > Eye Point.
Note
• The Eye Point setting motion is relative to the current directional
mode.
Related Topics
Motion Settings Dialog Box

Provides options for defining the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the
keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. The Motion Settings dialog box tabs also
allow you to set up a joystick.

Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Use this tab to change the default movement and adjustment rates.
Amounts
Move in MU:SU:PU - Allows you to specify in working units the distance to move
in one step. This distance is specified in master unit:sub units:positional units
(MU:SU:PU) for the model. This value is unit independent. For example, if the
model's master unit is feet and the sub unit is inches, a value of 1:6:0 would move 1
foot, 6 inches each step. However, if the model's master unit is meters and the sub
unit is centimeters, 1:6:0 would move 1 meter, 6 centimeters each step.
Rotate in degrees -Allows you to specify the rotation amount to move the view cone
in one step.

Increment/Decrement adjustments
Move in MU:SU:PU - Allows you to specify in working units incremental
adjustments to the motion rate. This distance is specified in master unit:sub
units:positional units (MU:SU:PU) for the model. This value is unit independent. For
example, if the model's master unit is feet and the sub unit is inches, a value of 1:6:0
would move 1 foot, 6 inches each step. However, if the model's master unit is meters
and the sub unit is centimeters, 1:6:0 would move 1 meter, 6 centimeters each step.
Rotate in degrees - Allows you to specify incremental adjustments to the motion

angle.
Maximum moves per second - Allows you to specify the maximum number of
moves to perform during any keypad motion (continuous or otherwise). This value is
the same value used for the Frames per second option in the Display Key Frame
Motion dialog box. Changing one value will change the other value.
Note
• Pressing the Insert key will increase the movement and rotation rates
using the values that you specified on the Rates Tab. Pressing the
Delete key will decrease the rates by the specified values.
Related Topics
• Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 166
Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
Each time that you manipulate the Main view with a shaded image (see Toggle
Display Between Shaded and Wireframe), the image updates. This can be time-
consuming, especially for large designs. You can speed up the process for motion and
static (no motion) updates of a shaded image by changing options on this tab.
Quality - Specifies the Main view shading display quality during motion. You can
choose from Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading. These
modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update.
• Full Shading is the highest quality for a shaded display produces a

more curved appearance by producing various shades of color selected
across the surface of the element. This is also known as smooth
shading the Gouraud Shading algorithm. This is the slowest to update.
• No Specular also provides smooth shading, but is faster than Full
surface.
• Coarse Facets turns off the smooth shading. Surfaces are still shaded,
but the display of circular objects is very faceted. For example, pipes
look like they are composed of flat sides.

• Flat Shading displays a single color for all pixels on the surface
update.
Allow all texturing - Determines whether textures display while you are
manipulating the model. If you want textures to display in the model, you must first
activate the Textures command (from the View menu; see Texture for details). Then
select this option. If you already have the Allow all texturing option on and decide
that you do not want textures to display while manipulating the model, clear this
option.
Notes
• To use the texturing functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism
module.
• If you display textures while manipulating models, it may slow down
the display. Clear the Allow all texturing option to hide the textures
and speed up the display.
Update View Cone - Updates the view cone and related overlay graphics during
motion.
Update position status - Specifies whether to update the position status during
motion.
Clip far - Activates the far clipping plan on the view cone.
Clip far distance in MU:SU:PU - Sets the distance of the optional far clipping plane
used during motion.
Related Topics
Bearing Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
Defines the default or starting position for the view cone and motion direction
indicators on the Position Control toolbar.
View/encircle bearing angles in degrees

Direction from 0 to 359.9 - Allows you to select the View directional mode forward
bearing or encircle bearing angle.
Elevation from -90 to 90 - Allows you to select the View directional mode forward
elevation or encircle angle elevation.

View independent motion bearing angles in degrees

Direction from 0 to 359.9 - Allows you to select the directional bearing of forward
motion when in non-view dependent direction mode.
Elevation from -90 to 90 - Allows you to select the directional elevation of forward
motion when in non-view dependent direction mode.
Related Topics
Display Set Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
Defines which display set that you want to move. After selecting a display set to
move, you can use Mouse Drag modes and Directional Modes to move the selected
display set to another location in the model.
You must set the motion relative to display sets using the Motion > Display Set
command to move a display set.
Important
To return a display set back to its original position, open Project Manager and right-
click on the display set that was moved. Then clear the Move option.
Name - Allows you to choose the display set to move.
Edit - Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, which can be used to view
or change position settings for the selected display set.
Detect collisions on move - Starts the collision set during the movement of the
selected display set.
Collision set - Selects the existing collision set during the movement of the display
set.
Related Topics
• Display Set Command (Motion Menu), page 513

Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Activates input from a joystick and specifies whether the joystick movement should
use keypad-defined (discrete) or mouse-defined (relative) movement.
Important
setting.
Notes
the Clip far option on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog
box can be very useful. When enabled, it sets the far clipping plane to
the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping
being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see
all graphics that are near the eye point.
display on the Display tab of the View Settings dialog box. When
enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if
Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Display tab of the
Motion Settings dialog box.
module.
Allow joystick input - Allows you to activate joystick input.
Discrete (keypad like) - Allows movement to respond incrementally to a given

direction without a button press, much like movement using the keypad.
• No buttons pushed: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode

• Button 1: Rotate mode.
• Button 2: Pan mode.

Relative (mouse like) - Allows the joystick to respond relative to a point on the
screen. This option works similarly to the Mouse Drag modes in that the joystick
does not engage a motion mode until a button is pressed.
• Button 1: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode.

• Button 2: Rotate mode.
• Button 3: Pan mode.
Move threshold in percent - Describes the amount of joystick movement before the
movement is registered.
Button Mapping - Maps commands to joystick buttons.
Related Topics
Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box

Provides options for defining the commands mapped to the buttons on your joystick.
Button - displays the buttons available for mapping.
Command - displays the command SmartPlant Review has mapped to the selected
button.
Related Topics
Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview

The Display Key Frame Motion command displays the movie definition that you
created with the Save and Recall Views command. This command only displays
those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.
Important
Effects module.

After you click OK, the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box disappears and the
animation sequence begins to play, updating all view properties. You can press Esc to
stop the movie.
Related Topics
• Display Key Frame Motion, page 172
• Pause Key Frame Motion, page 173
• Play Key Frame Motion, page 173
• Simulation and Visual Effects Module, page 29
• Snapshot Key Frames, page 174
• Stop Key Frame Motion, page 174
Display Key Frame Motion

1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Display.
2. Select a Group.
3. Type the number of Frames per second to view.
Notes
• The Display Key Frame command allows you to display the movie
definition that you created with the Save and Recall Views command.
• This command only displays those key frames with a frame number
greater than zero.
• You also can click Display Key Frame on the Motion toolbar.
Effects module.
Related Topics

Play Key Frame Motion

Click Motion > Key Frame > Play Key Frames.
Important
• If the current key frame motion group does not have valid key frames,
or if a key frame motion group has not been selected (via the Display
Key Frame Motion dialog box), a message is displayed, and the key
frame motion will exit.
Notes
• You also can click Play Key Frame on the Motion toolbar or
press Ctrl+R on the keyboard.
• This command only plays the current key frame animation from its
current starting frame or from its current paused frame.
Effects module.
Related Topics
Pause Key Frame Motion

Click Motion > Key Frame > Pause Key Frames.
Tip
• You also can click Pause Key Frame on the Motion toolbar or
press Ctrl+Space on the keyboard.
Notes
• This command will pause the current PLAYING key frame motion
and/or resume the currently PAUSED key frame motion.
Effects module.
Related Topics

Stop Key Frame Motion

Click Motion > Key Frame > Stop Key Frames.
Important
• Clicking the Play command will resume the key frame animation at
the starting frame, not the frame at which you stopped.
Notes
• You also can click Stop Key Frame on the Motion toolbar or
press Esc.
• This command will stop the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame
animation.
Effects module.
Related Topics
Snapshot Key Frames

1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot.
2. Select a View group.
3. Type the frame number to Start.
4. Type the frame number to Stop.
5. Select Anti-alias amount.
Tip
• For large bitmaps, increase the size of the Main view before using the
higher anti-alias settings. Best performance is achieved when the Main
view is as large as possible before running the snapshot functionality.
6. Type a number for Width.
7. Type a number for Height.
8. Select an Output Directory.
9. Type a Files prefix.
10. Select a File type.

Notes
• You must define a view group using the Save and Recall View
command before you can snapshot the key frames in that group.
• Press ESC to stop the snapshot process once it is started. You will be
given the option to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the
moment the process stopped.
Effects module.
Related Topics
Setup Partial Key Frame Recall

1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot.
2. Click Setup Partial on the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box.
3. Select the settings that you want to apply.
Related Topics
• Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box, page 175
• Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar), page 526
Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box

Allows you to set movie definition items.
Important
Effects module.
View group - Enables you to select the frames of a named group. This grouping is
created using the View > Save and Recall Views command.
Frames per second - Allows you to place a limit on the animation speed. You can
specify a value for the maximum number of moves to perform during playback. This
value is the same value used for the Maximum moves per second option on the
Motion Settings Rate tab. If you change one value, the software will automatically
change the other.
As needed - Allows animation to skip frames during playback to keep up with the
Frames per second value that you specify. This option provides a smoother display,
which is particularly useful for large models or limited hardware resources.

To interval - Skips frames at a specific interval. You also can set an interval for
skipping frames during an animation by choosing a number in the large interval box.
Start - Defines the starting frame of the animation sequence in the specified group.
You can type another frame number to start the animation at that frame.
Stop - Defines the ending frame of the animation sequence in the specified group.
You can type another frame number at which to stop the animation.
Loop - Restarts the animation at the Start frame after reaching the End frame.
Use partial - Specifies that you want to use the partial view settings. Use Setup
Partial on the Save and Recall Views dialog box to define what you want to see.
Setup Partial - Displays the Setup Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box, which
allows you to define what part of the views that you want to see. This works in the
same manner as the Setup Partial View dialog box that is part of the Save and
Recall Views command. However, this Setup Partial only works for Main view key
frames.
Related Topics
Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box

Allows you to create selected snapshots of key frames.
Note
Effects module.
Key frames
View group - Selects a named group of frames. This grouping is created using the
View > Save and Recall Views command.
Start - Sets the start frame of an animation sequence in the specified group. You can
type another frame number to start the animation at that frame.
Stop - Sets the stop frame of an animation. You can type another frame number to
stop the animation at that frame.
Use partial - Allows the use of partial view settings. You can use Setup Partial on
the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box to define what you want to see.
Setup Partial - Displays the Setup Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box, which
allows you to define partial view settings. This works in the same manner as the

Setup Partial View dialog box that is part of the Save and Recall Views command.
However, this Setup Partial view only works for Main view key frames.
Raytrace image - Allows you to raytrace a snapshot and save the raytraced image to
a file. If the Raytrace image toggle is on, the current snapshot GUI is used for
creating raytrace images and animations. To use this functionality, you must install
the Photo-Realism module.
Print only - Specifies that all snapshots go directly to the current default printer
instead of to files on the computer disk.
Rotate 90 ° - Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If the Rotate 90 ° toggle

is on, the output image rotates 90 degrees clockwise for plotting purposes. If you
capture the image without the capture form, SmartPlant Review scans the screen
image from left-to-right, instead of top-to-bottom.
Extent - Specifies the view that the software uses when writing frame output.
Example selections include Main View, Application Window, and Entire Screen.
Anti-alias - Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. You can choose from 1
through 4. If you select 1, the frames are the lowest quality but process quickly. If
you select 2 or 3, the quality is slightly higher but process more slowly. If you select
4, the frames are high quality but process very slowly. Also, some anti-alias settings
require that the Main view have a sufficient aspect ratio. In some scenarios,
Snapshot may fail indicating that , "The main view is too small to do a snapshot with
an anti-alias level of 4. Please resize the view."
Dimensions
Ignore aspect - Allows width and height to change independently. If the Ignore
aspect option is off, Width, Height, and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by
the aspect ratio of the Main view. If you change one field, the other fields change
accordingly. If you turn the toggle on, the Scale field is disabled and set to its default
value. You can then change the Width and Height fields independently.
Scale - Sets the scale factor of the output frame.
Width - Sets the width of the output frame.
Height - Sets the height of the output frame.
Output
Directory - Sets the folder in which the software writes the output frames.
Browse - Allows you to select a file or folder.
Files prefix - Sets the unique portion of the output frame file name.

File type - Specifies the type of file format that the software uses when writing frame
output. You can click .rgb for Intergraph Red Green Blue file format, or click .bmp
for Windows bitmap.
Related Topics
• Snapshot Command (Motion Menu), page 528
Setup Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box

Allows you to select the partial view setting options to recall or ignore.
Eye point - Displays the eye point setting from the saved settings. The Eye point
setting allows motion commands to affect the graphic views. The Eye point setting
motion is relative to the current directional mode. You can change the eye point
location on the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Center point - Displays the center point setting from the saved setting. Center point
allows you to view the model from the center of the current view. You can change
the center point location on the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Perspective angle - Displays the perspective angle from the saved settings. You can
use the Perspective toolbar to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view cone.
Clipping planes - Displays the clipping planes settings from the saved settings. The
limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane and the near-clipping plane.
You see whatever lies between the two planes. You can change the clipping planes
on the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Level settings - Displays the level settings from the saved settings. The Level
Settings command selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one
or more design files. You can view the current level settings by clicking the Current
button on the Level Settings dialog box.
Stereo eye separation - Displays the stereo eye separation setting from the saved
settings. The stereo eye separation is the approximated distance between your eyes.
To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module and you must
have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on.
Stereo focal distance - Displays the stereo focal distance setting from the saved
settings. The Stereo focal distance is the point at which objects are level with the
screen. For example, closer objects appear to come out of the screen while objects
that are further away appear to be behind the screen.
Note
• To use the Stereo functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism
module.

Background color - Displays the background color from the saved settings. You can
edit the background color by clicking Edit on the Display tab of the View Settings
dialog box.
Sun - Displays the sun setting from the saved settings. There are several options for
displaying sunlight in your model. For example, you can set sun bearing angles on
the Lighting tab of the View Settings dialog box or, if you have installed the Photo-
Realism module, you can select sunlight options on the Solar tab of the Global
Light Settings dialog box.
Ambient - Displays the ambient setting from the saved settings. Ambient light
surrounds everything in your display. A common setting for ambient light is 25%.
You can edit the ambient light setting on the Set Ambient Light Level dialog box.
Brightness - Displays the brightness setting from the saved settings. The brightness
setting determines the exposure of light on the model, which changes the intensity of
the image's colors. If you select a low brightness (exposure), the colors become
darker. If you select a high brightness, the colors become brighter. You can edit the
brightness setting on the Set Brightness Level dialog box.
Display quality - Displays the quality setting from the saved settings. The quality of
the main view shading can be edited using the Display tab on the View Settings
dialog box. The dialog box lists the shading modes in order from slowest update to
fastest update.
View shaded - Displays the view shaded setting from the saved settings.
Display tags - Displays the tags setting from the saved settings. Tags are labels that
provide additional information about items in a plant. You can edit tag settings by
choosing an option from the Tags menu.
Display active tag only - Displays the active tag setting from the saved settings.
Related Topics

Using Project Manager: An Overview

You can easily view and manage the structure and various sections of the model using
the Project Manager. This feature allows you to easily look at an overview of the
model and manage its parts in the following tasks:
• View all project files associated with the model,

• Add, manage, and edit the display sets,
• Review construction sequences by using a ScheduleReview project.
Manipulating the Project Manager

To open the Project Manager, click View > Project Manager, or press ALT + 0.
When you open a .dri document, the items comprising the model's structure display in
Project Manager. By expanding one of the branches in the Project Manager
window, you can view parts of the model, including the project files, display sets, and
the ScheduleReview project.
You can display or hide the Project Manager while you are in the model. If the
Project Manager is hidden when you close SmartPlant Review, the Project
Manager does not appear the next time that you open SmartPlant Review.
In addition to hiding or displaying the Project Manager, you also can dock Project
Manager by selecting Dockable from the right-click menu. You can then dock the
Project Manager on any edge of the SmartPlant Review window.
Viewing Project Files

When you expand the Project Files branch in the Project Manager window, it
displays files, such as .dgn and .prp files, in a tree structure. This allows you to easily
view all the graphic files associated with the model.
Editing the Display Sets

When you expand the Display Sets branch, and then select a display set, the Project
Manager window shows the Name of the display sets in the model and a numeric
ID. If you right-click in the Display Sets window, you can accomplish the following
items:
• Add, delete, or rename display sets,
• Display or hide a selected display set,
• Edit the definition of a display set,
• Add new materials,
• Dim or move the selected display set,
• Organize the display sets by adding folders to group them,
• Resort the display sets by name or ID.

Reviewing Construction Sequences

You can easily review construction sequences from the Project Manager. When you
expand the ScheduleReview branch, the Project Manager window displays the
ScheduleReview project associated with the model. You can easily add your own
ScheduleReview project to the model by right-clicking and using the New command
on the shortcut menu. Only one ScheduleReview project can be associated with a
model.
Important
• To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
When you add your own ScheduleReview project, the ScheduleReview branch
automatically reflects the name of the new ScheduleReview. For example, if you
create a new ScheduleReview project and name it Management Review, a new
branch appears in the Project Manager window with the text ScheduleReview -
Management Review.
When you expand the ScheduleReview - Management Review branch, the Project
Manager window shows the display sets that are associated with the new
ScheduleReview project named ScheduleReview - Management Review. The
Project Manager also shows any unassociated display sets.
The branch usually reflects the name of the active ScheduleReview project. So when
you add another ScheduleReview, the title on the ScheduleReview branch changes.
If you right-click in the ScheduleReview window, you can accomplish the following
items:
• Edit settings for the ScheduleReview project,

• Select and edit a display set,
• Create and edit queries for the ScheduleReview project,
• Step through the ScheduleReview by playing it,
• Edit the active project.
Related Topics
• Add a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 184
• Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager, page
185
• Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 182
• Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 184
• Move the Project Manager Window, page 182

Display or Hide the Project Manager

Click View > Project Manager.
Notes
• The Project Manager displays items associated with the model when
you open a document. If a model document is not open, the Project
Manager does not display any items.
• You can display or hide the Project Manager at any time.
• You can dock the Project Manager on any of the SmartPlant Review
window edges by selecting Dockable from the right-click menu.
Related Topics
Move the Project Manager Window

1. If the Project Manager is docked on the edge of the SmartPlant Review window,
click Dockable on the Project Manager right-click menu.
2. Select the top border of the Project Manager window and drag it to the place that
you want in the main window.
Notes
• You can select Dockable from the Project Manager right-click menu
to dock it on one of the borders of the main window.
• To display the window, click View > Project Manager. If the Project
Manager is hidden when you close the software, the Project
Manager does not appear the next time that you open the software.
Related Topics
View Items in the Model with Project Manager

1. Open a document.
2. In the Project Manager window, open one of the following branches:
Project Files
Display Sets
ScheduleReview

Notes
• If the Project Manager does not appear, click View > Project
Manager.
• In the Project Manager, you also can manage and edit display sets
and ScheduleReview projects with commands on the shortcut menu. If
a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear in the
Project Manager window.
• To use the ScheduleReview functionality, you must install the
Construction module.
Related Topics
• Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager, page 183
Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager

1. In the Project Manager window, expand the Display Sets, Files, Display Set
Folder, and/or File item branches. A check box displays beside each display set
folder, display set, file or level. A black checkmark by an item indicates that the
item or its sub-items appear in the view of the model. A greyed checkmark
indicates there is a mix of shown and hidden sub-items.
2. Clear the check box to hide one or more corresponding display sets, files, or
levels in the view of the model.
Notes
Manager.
• If a model document is not open, the Project Manager does not
display any items.
• If you right-click in the Project Manager window, you can access
commands on the shortcut menu. This shortcut to commands is
especially useful when manipulating display sets.
• Use the Show/Hide for Main View, Show/Hide for Plan View, and
Show/Hide for Elevation View commands to select the views where
the selected items or sub-items are shown or hidden.
• You also can also show or hide your display sets by clicking Tools >
Display Sets > Show.
Related Topics
• Level Settings Command (Tools Menu), page 493

Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager

1. In the Project Manager window, expand the Display Sets branch.
2. Select a Display Sets folder, and then right-click in the window.
3. Click New > Display Set > Folder. The new folder appears in the Display Sets
area and displays a blinking cursor.
4. In the Display Sets area, type the name of the new folder and press Enter.
5. Drag a display set to the new folder.
6. Double-click the folder to see the display set that you dragged.
Notes
• If you want to remove a display set from a folder, drag the display set
to the left of the Display Sets area. The cursor changes to indicate that
you can drop the display set. The display set now appears in a higher
level of the Display Sets tree and is removed from the folder.
• If the Project Manager is not displayed, click View > Project
Manager.
commands on the shortcut menu to manipulate or edit display sets and
ScheduleReview projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu
is not displayed.
Related Topics
Add a Display Set in the Project Manager

1. Open a document.
3. Right-click in the window.
4. Click New > Display Set > Definition.
Notes
• The Project Manager appears to the left of the main window by
default. If the Project Manager does not appear, click View > Project
Manager.
display any items.
• Double-click the display set to edit its settings.


Related Topics
• Edit a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 185
• Project Manager Command (View Menu), page 476
Edit a Display Set in the Project Manager

2. Expand a Display Sets branch.
3. Double-click a display set to edit the settings.
Notes
display any items.
Related Topics
Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project

Manager
1. In the Project Manager window, expand the ScheduleReview branch.
2. Right-click in the window.
3. On the shortcut menu, click New > ScheduleReview > Project.
4. On the New ScheduleReview dialog box, enter the name of the project.
5. On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, enter the settings that you want.
Notes
• If a model document is not open, you cannot display the Project
Manager.


commands on the shortcut menu to run or edit ScheduleReview
projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear.
Related Topics
• Edit a ScheduleReview Project in the Project Manager, page 186
• Project Manager Command (View Menu), page 476
Edit a ScheduleReview Project in the Project Manager

1. Open a document. The Project Manager automatically displays the
ScheduleReview project associated with the model.
2. In the Project Manager window, expand the ScheduleReview branch. The check
mark by a ScheduleReview project indicates it is the active ScheduleReview
project.
3. Right-click in the window and then click Edit > ScheduleReview > Settings.
4. On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, edit the settings that you want.
Notes
Manager.
display any items.
commands on the shortcut menu to run the ScheduleReview project. If
a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear.
Related Topics
185

Review a Construction Sequence in the Project

Manager
On the ScheduleReview toolbar, click Play.
Notes
commands on the shortcut menu to run or edit ScheduleReview
projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear.
Related Topics
• ScheduleReview Toolbar, page 458

Working with Display Sets: An Overview

SmartPlant Review includes the ability to form sets of graphic objects, called display
sets, that you can manipulate. SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of
display sets. However, your hardware capability can limit your number of display
sets.
A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one or more other
display sets. Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or display sets to any
level of nesting that you require. However, a display set cannot contain itself or any
other display set that contains itself (to prevent recursive or looping organization
structures).
Display set ID numbers determine the order of precedence when you assign
conflicting display characteristics to the same elements. The lower the display set
number is, the higher the precedence. Therefore, an element that is a member of two
different display sets appears with the characteristics of the lower numbered display
set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on.
Caution
• The portion of display sets that use the search criteria Picked Objects
can be lost when you edit the definition in a subsequent SmartPlant
Review session. The loss also can occur if the display set definition is
loaded using the Import Load Display Set dialog box. The selected
elements are lost if you modify the design files that contain these
elements. For this reason, only use the Picked Objects search criteria
in temporary display sets.
In SmartPlant Review, you also can automatically define display sets by selecting a
type of label data. SmartPlant Review automatically creates these display sets for you
based on the criteria that you select.
You can import and export tags to a user-defined database or to a different project
file. This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for
display sets. You can import and export one or all attributes. The display sets
correspond to the delivered fields.
The software allows you to switch the brightness of selected display sets. You can
switch from a dimmed level to normal brightness. This setting applies to all display
sets (that is, you cannot isolate a portion of the display sets and apply a different
setting). You never can have some display sets in low brightness (or dimmed) and
others in high brightness.
Note
• If you are familiar with using displays sets in DesignReview, see
Display Sets Changes for more information about the differences
between displays sets in DesignReview and SmartPlant Review.

Related Topics
• Create a Display Set Definition, page 192
• Import Display Sets, page 196
• View Display Sets, page 189
View Display Sets

1. Click View > Project Manager.
2. Click the Display Sets drawer.
Notes
• Display set ID numbers determine the order of precedence when
conflicting display characteristics are assigned to the same elements.
The lower the display set number, the higher the precedence. This
means that an element that is a member of two different display sets
will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set,
assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on.
• Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. However, if your
new display set does not seem to display properly, overlapping display
sets may be the problem. The last action performed on the object by
corresponding display set manipulations wins. For example, if Object
1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2, and you turn off
DisplaySet1, then Object 1 is off, even though DisplaySet2 is still on.
Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and then on, Object1 will appear
again.
Display Sets - Show Only

1. Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and verify that there
are some display sets already created.
2. Highlight the display set whose display you want to remain active.
3. Click Tools > Display Sets > Show Only.
Tips
• You also can select Show Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut
menu. First, select the display set in Project Manager, then right-click
on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.
Notes
• The Show Only command is a toggle used to display selected display
sets. When selected, the command displays only the selected display
set in all the views. All the other elements are transparent.

• You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance
within the Project Manager. When a display set is On, or visible, a
check mark appears next to the display set item . When a display set
is Off, or hidden, the check mark does not appear.
Related Topics
• Display Sets - Hide Only, page 190
Display Sets - Hide Only

1. Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and verify that there
are some display sets already created.
2. Highlight the display set whose display you want to hide.
3. Click Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only.
Tip
• You also can select Hide Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut
menu. First, select the display set in Project Manager, then right-click
on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.
Notes
• The Hide Only command is a toggle used to hide selected display sets.
When selected, the command hides (does not display) the selected
display set in all the views. All other elements are visible.
the selected display sets are shown or hidden.
Related Topics
• Delete Display Sets, page 191
• Display Sets - Show Only, page 189
• Show/Hide for Elevation View Command (View Menu), page 444
• Show/Hide for Main View Command (View Menu), page 443
• Show/Hide for Plan View Command (View Menu), page 443
• View Display Sets, page 189

Delete Display Sets

1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Delete.
2. Confirm that you want to delete the display set.
Note
• You also can right-click in Project Manager, then select Delete >
Display Set.
Related Topics
Defining Display Sets: An Overview

SmartPlant Review provides the ability to form visual groups of graphic objects based
on user-defined criteria. These graphical groups are called display sets. You may
define up to 250,000 display sets in a single SmartPlant Review project.
You can define display sets to contain any group of graphical data. However, display
sets must meet the following criteria:
• A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one
other display set.
• Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or display sets to
any level of nesting.
• A display set cannot contain itself or any other display set that contains
itself.
Once a display set is defined, it can be manipulated independent of the model. For
instance, you can review different material assignments on a single structure of an
entire facility, or wireframe the HVAC data in a shaded model of a plant.
Display sets, one of the major features of the SmartPlant Review core product, greatly
extend the review process. Display sets allow you to isolate and separate objects
within huge projects, allowing you to perform an in-depth review analysis of your
model.
Important
• The lower the display set ID number, the higher the precedence. This
means that an element that is a member of two different display sets
will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set,
assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on.
• Display sets that use the search criteria, Picked Object(s), can be lost
when the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review

session, or if the display set definition is loaded using the Import

Display Set dialog box. The selected elements are lost if the design
files that contain these elements is modified. For this reason, it is
recommended that you only use the Picked Object(s) search criteria
for temporary display sets.
• When you exit SmartPlant Review, the current display set definitions
and manipulations are automatically saved to a filename with a .dst
extension.
Related Topics
• Automatically Define Display Sets, page 195
• Display Sets - Reverse Dim, page 197
• Edit a Display Set Definition, page 194
• Export Display Sets, page 196
Create a Display Set Definition

1. Click Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set.
2. Type a name for the Display Set that you are defining.
3. Type a display set ID number. The new display set ID default is the first non-zero
and non-used user ID available in the project.
4. Click Edit in the Definition group.
5. Click Insert and define the selection criteria for the display set.
Note
• See Find Object for more information on defining selection criteria.
6. Optionally, assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the
Default Material group.
Tip
• When you assign a material name to the display set, all elements in the
set appear in the Main view using those material properties (color,
surface characteristics, and so on) when applied.
7. Type a Description for the display set.
Important
• If you have an editable display set selected in the display set tree
control in the Project Manager, the display set name is defaulted to
"Copy of" and the selected display set name (i.e. "Copy of Reboiler
System").

• If you do not have an editable display set selected in the display set
tree control in the Project Manager, BUT the current criteria
definition in memory for the Find Object command is not empty, then
the new display set's name is set to "Copy of Find Object."
Notes
• You also can click Display Sets on the Tools toolbar or right-click
in Project Manager, then select New > Display Set.
• Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. However, if your
new display set does not seem to display properly, overlapping display
sets may be the problem. The last action performed on the object by
corresponding display set manipulations wins. For example, if Object
1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2, and you turn off
DisplaySet1, then Object 1 is off, even though DisplaySet2 is still on.
Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and then on, Object1 will appear
again.
Related Topics
Sub-definitions
Sub-definitions are sometimes needed to create more complicated definitions. Sub-
definitions are created by placing an operation on a line by itself, and then using the
FIND operator on the following line. Each line in a sub-definition works similarly to
the definition itself. The FIND operation selects a group of elements and then each of
the following lines, up to the end of the sub-definition, operates on the previous result
to create a new group of elements. Mark the end of a sub-definition by choosing the
END FIND option, which appears on the continuation operator list.
The end of a sub-definition results in a group of elements that meet the sub-definition
criteria. This sub-definition group is then applied to the search criteria of any previous
FIND criteria to produce the completed set of elements. Definitions can be nested
indefinitely and can be nested multiple times. The following example definition
contains one sub-definition:
FIND Volume 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El
KEEP ONLY Display Set Firewater
THROW AWAY Data Diameter > 12
ADD

FIND Volume 375 N, 600 E, 377 El - 500 N, 700 E, 500 El
KEEP ONLY Level 7, 8, 9, 31
THROW AWAY File steel.dgn
THROW AWAY Color 3
END FIND
ADD Picked Objects
Lines 1 through 3 define the group of elements in the specified volume that belong to
the Firewater display set and are <= 12 inches in diameter.
Line 4 adds the sub-definition to the group.
Line 5 begins the sub-definition by selecting a volume to start with.
Lines 6, 7, and 8 keep only the elements on certain levels and then throw away
anything left that is in file steel.dgn with color number 3. The END FIND operator
on line 9 ends the sub-definition. The group that results from this sub-definition is
then added to the results from line 3 to yield a new group. The last line adds some
selected elements to the group to yield a final set of elements.
Related Topics
• Find an Object, page 197
Edit a Display Set Definition

1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition.
2. Click Edit in the Definition group.
3. Change the selection criteria to meet your needs.
Tip
• See Find Object for more information on defining selection criteria.
4. Optionally, assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the
Default Material group.
Tip
• When you assign a material name to the display set, all elements in the
set appear in the Main view using those material properties (color,
surface characteristics, and so on).

Notes
• You also can click Edit Display Sets on the Tools toolbar or
right-click in Project Manager, then select Edit Definition.
• Selecting the Copy button in the Edit Definition dialog box will copy
the current complete criteria definition (even if blank) into the
clipboard.
• Selecting the Paste button in the Edit Definition dialog box will paste
the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current
complete criteria definition. If there is no text on the clipboard, then
the criteria definition is not changed.
Related Topics
Assign Material to a Display Set

1. Highlight a display set in the Project Manager.
2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material.
3. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes.
4. Click Edit Materials to modify material definitions in the selected palette file.
Important
• Material assignments can be made to individual three dimensional
objects if the Photo-Realism module is installed. The core product is
limited to display set material assignments only.
Related Topics
Automatically Define Display Sets

1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define.
2. Select the labels for which you want to create display sets.
3. Specify a starting ID.
Notes
• The labels that you select from are read in from all the labels files
associated with the .dri file that you opened.

• The Start ID field defaults to the first unused ID. Once the automatic
definition process begins, the Start ID increments once per generated
display set, skipping any ID already in use.
Related Topics
Import Display Sets

1. Click File > Import > Display Sets.
2. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file.
3. Click each display set ID or Name to select.
Notes
• A display set is a collection of design file elements that are grouped
together according to specific definition criteria.
• You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the
file for importing.
Related Topics
Export Display Sets

1. Click File > Export > Display Sets.
3. Click each display set ID or Name to select.
Notes
• The file to export has an .mdb extension.
• Use the File > Import > Display Sets command to import displays
sets that you have exported.

Related Topics
Find an Object
You can access the Find Object command using one of the following methods:
• Click Edit > Find Object.
• Click Find Object on the Tools MiniBar.

• Press Ctrl+F.
Related Topics
Display Sets - Reverse Dim

1. Select a display set from the list in Project Manager.
2. Click Tools, point to Display Sets, and click Reverse Dim.
Note
• To allow the display sets again to have dimmed perspective, you can
return to this command and clear the Reverse Dim setting on the
Tools menu.
Related Topics
Edit Display Set Dialog Box

Allows you to create a new or edit an existing display set definition.
Name - Displays the name of the display set for the definition that you are creating or
editing.
ID - Displays the ID of the display set for the definition that you are editing. This ID
must be unique.

Definition
Criteria - Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects that
you want to include in the display set.
Edit - Displays the Edit Definition dialog box, allowing you to specify criteria
describing the graphic objects that you want to include in the display set.
Default Material
Name - Displays the name of the material file to assign to the display set.
Edit - Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box, which allows you to
select a material to assign to the display set and to specify the properties for that
material.
Clear - Removes the current material assignment for the display set.
Description
Text - Displays the text description associated with the current display set. You can
edit these notes to describe the display set definition that you are creating.
Clear - Removes the text description associated with the display set.
Related Topics
• Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu), page 480
Edit Definition Dialog Box

Allows you to edit the definition that the software uses to combine the objects that
compose the selected display set.
There are several different operators that you use to search for an object. The first
two operators are FIND and FIND ALL BUT.
• FIND - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that meet the
specified criteria.
• FIND ALL BUT - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that
do not meet the specified criteria.
After selecting either FIND or FIND ALL BUT, you are prompted to select the
definition type of the criteria: Data, File, Level, Color, Display Set, Volume Inside,
Volume Overlap, Picked Objects, or Linkages.

• Data - Allows you to search for the definition type by a data field
name, a data operator, and a match string. An element matches data
criteria if it has the specified application label data field, and the data
in that field matches the match string according to the data operator.
An element will not match if it does not have the specified label data
field name or if it has no label data at all.
After you select the Data type criteria, the available data field names appear in a list.
The data field names are derived from the label data as follows. Each line in the label
data is scanned for a colon (:) character. If a colon exists, then all the text to the left of
the colon is considered the data field name. For example, the line: Equip no: G-
7708A would yield:
data field name = Equip no:
data field data = G-7708A
If there is no colon in the line, then the first white space after the first text is used to
delimit the name. Everything to the right of the first white space is considered the
data field data. For example, the line: Equip no G-7708A would yield:
data field name = Equip
data field data = no G-7708A
After you select the data field name, a list of data operators displays:
• = An operator that specifies that the data field information equals the
match string.
• > An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is greater than the match number.
• >= An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is greater than or equal to the match number.
• < An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is less than the match number.
• <= An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is less than or equal to the match number.
Note
• There is not a "does not equal" data operator (!=) provided because the
same effect can be accomplished by combining the equals (=) and
FIND ALL BUT operators at the beginning of the line.

After you select the operator, the Enter Data dialog box appears. For data operators
<, >, >=, and <=, this value is simply a number to compare to. For the = data operator,
this value is treated as a text string to match. The match string can contain the special
characters * and ?, where * matches any number (even zero) of characters and ?
matches exactly one character.
For example, the match string: *77?3*line matches the following cases of data field
data: 12347713line, 7783line, 1247723 line, and 123477a3 water line.
The match string is case insensitive. For example, if a label value is stored exactly as
"New" in the label database, the following Find Object definitions will return the
same results:
Find DATA Construction status = New
Find DATA Construction status = new
Find DATA Construction status = nEw
Find DATA Construction status = NEW
• File - Displays the Files dialog box, which allows you to select the
files in which to search for the graphic objects.
• Level - Displays the Levels dialog box, which allows you to select one
or more level numbers to search for the graphic objects. An element
matches if it is located on one of the levels.
• Color - Displays the Colors dialog box, which allows you to select the
colors of the graphic objects to search. You can choose one or more
color numbers for your definition criteria. An element matches if it
coincides with one of the chosen color numbers.
Note
• The Match button on the Files, Levels, and Colors dialog boxes
displays the Match Items dialog box to allow you to either select
files, levels, or colors matching the given pattern or selected
object.
• Display Set - Allows you to search for graphic objects by selecting
one or more display set names. An element matches if it is in one of
the display sets. However, the definition list cannot reference display
sets that refer to themselves, even if the reference is through another
display set, because this would create a "circular" definition.
• Volume Inside - Displays the Find Volume Inside dialog box, which
allows you to search for graphic objects by specifying a volume
definition (a portion of the model) by placing data points. An element
matches if it lies completely inside the volume (area).

• Volume Overlap - Displays the Find Volume Overlap dialog box,

which allows you to specify a volume definition by placing data
points. An element matches if it intersects or overlaps the volume
(selected area), or if it lies completely inside the area.
• Picked Object(s) - Displays the Pick Objects dialog box, which
allows you to select an object by clicking the graphic in the Main
view.
Note
• The portion of display sets created using the Picked Object search
criteria can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent
SmartPlant Review session. The picked objects portion will also be
lost if the display set definition is loaded using the Load Display Set
form, or if the design files that contain these elements is modified. For
these reasons, the Picked Objects search criteria should only be used in
temporary display sets.
• LINKAGES is the PDS DRMS linkage associated with the object.
After you have defined a single criteria line, if you click Insert you are prompted to
select an operation for additional definition lines:
• ADD - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous

results, plus all the elements that meet the current criteria.
• ADD ALL BUT - Allows you to create a group that consists of the
previous results, excluding all the elements that do not meet the
current criteria.
• KEEP ONLY - Allows you to create a group that consists of only the
elements from the previous results that meet the current criteria.
• THROW AWAY - Allows you to create a group that consists of the
previous results, minus all the elements that meet the current criteria.
Note
• An element is only added to a group once, even if it meets multiple
definition criteria. This list is followed by a list of criteria for your
second line, and so on. Thus, you build the definition by selecting
from lists, and these lists vary in content according to each stage. You
may also want to read about Sub-Definitions.
Important
• If you select an editable display set in the display set tree control in the
Project Manager, then that display set's criteria definition is used as
the current criteria definition for the command. This allows you to
select a display set, then run the Find Object command and find all
the objects in that display set without having to manually re-enter its
definition.

Example: Basic Search

The following definition defines the search criteria for all pipes that are 10 inches or
larger (assuming a Diameter Data field name in inches. They are also in line 8011,
intersect a certain section of the plant, and are not on level 12 or 15:
FIND Data Diameter >= 10
KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011*
KEEP ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El
THROW AWAY Level 12,15
The first line creates a group of all the elements that have a number greater than or
equal to 10 in the Diameter field. The second line searches this new group for
elements that have the text 8011 somewhere in the Line No field. In this way, the
previous group is narrowed down to a new group that includes only the elements that
meet both criteria lines. The third criteria line creates a new group by searching the
last group that was created for elements that are inside or overlapping the specified
volume. The fourth line then throws away any elements in the group that are on levels
12 or 15. Because this is the last line, this final group of elements is the one selected
by the Search For Objects Matching Criteria command.
Example 2: Search for "Null" Fields

The following display set definition is based on a search for any element that has an
empty field in the Service category.
FIND Data Service: = *
THROW AWAY Data Service: = ?*
The first line creates a group on all elements that contain a Service field. Then an
additional search criteria is used to throw away any element that contains at least one
character in the Service field. The elements remaining will contain no entry (null) in
the Service field.
Notes
• You can select the Copy button to copy the current complete criteria
definition (even if blank) onto the clipboard.
• You can select the Paste button to paste the current complete text from
the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. If
there is no text on the clipboard, then the criteria definition is not
changed.

• You can select the Clear button to remove all definition criteria for the
display set.
• You can select the Delete button to remove the selected row of the
criteria definition.
• You can select the Insert button to create a new row above the
selected row in the definition criteria.
Related Topics
• Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu), page 480
Find Volume Inside Dialog Box

Allows you to set First and Second Defining points for the north, east, and elevation
coordinates. You also can select a specific point in the Main view.
Dialog Box Options

First - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select the
point in the Main view) for the first point in the volume definition.
• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the first point in
the volume definition.
• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the first point in the
volume definition.
• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the first point in the
volume definition.
• Pick Point - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the
Main view, the object that you want to select.
Second - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select
the point in the Main view) for the second point in the volume definition.
• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the second point
in the volume definition.
• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the second point in
• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the second point in
• Pick Point -Allows you to graphically select the second point in the
volume definition.
Display set name - Displays the name of the display set that you are defining.

Related Topics
Find Volume Overlap Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options

First - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select the
point in the Main view) for the first point in the volume definition.
• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the first point in
• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the first point in the
volume definition.
• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the first point in the
volume definition.
• Pick Point - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the
Main view, the object that you want to select.
Second - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select
the point in the Main view) for the second point in the volume definition.
• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the second point
in the volume definition.
• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the second point in
• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the second point in
• Pick Point -Allows you to graphically select the second point in the
volume definition.
Related Topics

Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box

Assigns materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. You can select
materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the
Material Sphere. You must select the display set in the project manager display set
control before running this command.
Display Set - Displays the display set name that you have selected in the Project
Manager > Display Sets tray.
Palette File - Displays the name of the active palette file. You can type the name of
an existing palette file or select the list button at the end of the field.
Browse - Determines the pathname to the folder containing the palette files. You can
navigate to a file or folder.
Name - Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file.
You can select a material to make it the active material.
Preview - Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is

mapped onto a spherical surface.
Note
• You can use the Tools > Materials > Edit Materials command to
create or edit a material definition. See Edit Materials Command
(Tools Menu), page 485 for more information.
Related Topics
Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box

Allows you to automatically define and create display sets.
Important
• To automatically define display sets, PDS label data must exist.
• SmartPlant Review automatically creates display sets based on the
label data that you select.
Label fields for display set creation - Allows you to pick items by label to include
in a new display set.
Delete existing display sets with the same name - Overwrites existing display sets
that have the same names.

Start ID - Allows you to type a numerical display set ID to start with. You can
specify any unused ID. Any used IDs encountered after the start ID that you specify
are skipped automatically when new display sets are generated.
Related Topics
• Auto-Define Command (Tools Menu), page 482
• Defining Display Sets: An Overview, page 191
Pick Objects Dialog Box

Pick Object - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the Main view, the
object that you want to select. An element matches if it is one of the elements that you
selected with a data point.
Picked objects - Displays the search criteria for the graphic object that you selected
using the Pick Object command.
Count - Displays the number of graphic objects that you selected.
Related Topics
Import Display Sets Dialog Box

Allows you to select a .dst file for import. After selecting the .dst file for import, a
list of all the display sets contained in the .dst file is displayed. You can select the
display sets that you want to import from this list.
File name - Provides a space for you to type the name of the existing display set file.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.
ID - Lists all the display sets that are available for import by ID.
Name - Lists all the display sets that are available for import by name.
Select All - Allows you to select all display sets that are shown in the list.
Clear All - Allows you to clear all the display sets that are shown in the list.

Related Topics
• Import Display Sets Command (File Menu), page 410
Export Display Sets Dialog Box

Allows you to select a display set from the current project to export to an .mdb file.
File name - Provides a space for you to type the name of the existing display set file.
ID - Lists all the display sets that are available for export by ID.
Name - Lists all the display sets that are available for export by name.
Select All - Allows you to select all display sets that are shown in the list.
Clear All - Allows you to clear all the display sets that are shown in the list.
Related Topics
• Export Display Sets Command (File Menu), page 414
Find Object Dialog Box

Allows you to search for graphic objects according to defined search definition
criteria.
Defining Criteria - Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the graphic
objects that you want to include in the display set.
There are several different operators that you use to search for an object that you are
looking for. The first two operators are FIND and FIND ALL BUT.
• FIND - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that meet the
specified criteria.
• FIND ALL BUT - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that
do not meet the specified criteria.
After selecting either FIND or FIND ALL BUT, you are prompted to select the
definition type of the criteria: Data, File, Level, Color, Display Set, Volume Inside,
Volume Overlap, Picked Objects, or Linkages.
• Data - Allows you to search for the definition type by a data field
name, a data operator, and a match string. An element matches data
criteria if it has the specified application label data field, and the data

in that field matches the match string according to the data operator.
An element will not match if it does not have the specified label data
field name or if it has no label data at all.
After you select the Data type criteria, the available data field names appear in a list.
The data field names are derived from the label data as follows. Each line in the label
data is scanned for a colon (:) character. If a colon exists, then all the text to the left of
the colon is considered the data field name. For example, the line: Equip no: G-
7708A would yield:
data field name = Equip no:
data field data = G-7708A
If there is no colon in the line, then the first white space after the first text is used to
delimit the name. Everything to the right of the first white space is considered the
data field data. For example, the line: Equip no G-7708A would yield:
data field name = Equip
data field data = no G-7708A
After you select the data field name, a list of data operators displays:
• = An operator that specifies that the data field information equals the
match string.
• > An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is greater than the match number.
• >= An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is greater than or equal to the match number.
• < An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is less than the match number.
• <= An operator that specifies that the first number in the data field data
is less than or equal to the match number.
Note
• There is not a "does not equal" data operator (!=) provided because the
same effect can be accomplished by combining the equals (=) and
FIND ALL BUT operators at the beginning of the line.
After you select the operator, the Enter Data dialog box appears. For data operators
<, >, >=, and <=, this value is simply a number to compare to. For the = data operator,
this value is treated as a text string to match. The match string can contain the special
characters * and ?, where * matches any number (even zero) of characters and ?
matches exactly one character.

For example, the match string: *77?3*line matches the following cases of data field
data: 12347713line, 7783line, 1247723 line, and 123477a3 water line.
The match string is case insensitive. For example, if a label value is stored exactly as
"New" in the label database, the following Find Object definitions will return the
same results:
Find DATA Construction status = New
Find DATA Construction status = new
Find DATA Construction status = nEw
Find DATA Construction status = NEW
• File - Displays the Files dialog box, which allows you to select the
files in which to search for the graphic objects.
• Level - Displays the Levels dialog box, which allows you to select one
or more level numbers to search for the graphic objects. An element
matches if it is located on one of the levels.
• Color – Displays the Colors dialog box, which allows you to select
the colors of the graphic objects to search. You can choose one or
more color numbers for your definition criteria. An element matches if
it coincides with one of the chosen color numbers.
Note
• The Match button on the Files, Levels, and Colors dialog boxes
displays the Match Items dialog box to allow you to either select
files, levels, or colors matching the given pattern or selected
object.
• Display Set - Allows you to search for graphic objects by selecting
one or more display set names. An element matches if it is in one of
the display sets. However, the definition list cannot reference display
sets that refer to themselves, even if the reference is through another
display set, because this would create a "circular" definition.
• Volume Inside - Allows you to search for graphic objects by
specifying a volume definition (a portion of the model) by placing data
points. An element matches if it lies completely inside the volume
(area).
• Volume Overlap - Allows you to specify a volume definition by
placing data points. An element matches if it intersects or overlaps the
volume (selected area), or if it lies completely inside the area.

• Picked Object(s) - Displays the Pick Objects dialog box, which

allows you to select an object by clicking the graphic in the Main
view.
Note
• The portion of display sets created using the Picked Objects search
criteria can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent
SmartPlant Review session. The picked objects portion will also be
lost if the display set definition is loaded using the Load Display Set
form, or if the design files that contain these elements is modified. For
these reasons, the Picked Objects search criteria should only be used in
temporary display sets.
• LINKAGES is the PDS DRMS linkage associated with the object.
After you have defined a single criteria line, if you click Insert you are prompted to
select an operation for additional definition lines:
• ADD - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous

results, plus all the elements that meet the current criteria.
• ADD ALL BUT - Allows you to create a group that consists of the
previous results, excluding all the elements that do not meet the
current criteria.
• KEEP ONLY - Allows you to create a group that consists of only the
elements from the previous results that meet the current criteria.
• THROW AWAY - Allows you to create a group that consists of the
previous results, minus all the elements that meet the current criteria.
Note
• An element is only added to a group once, even if it meets multiple
definition criteria. This list is followed by a list of criteria for your
second line, and so on. Thus, you build the definition by selecting
from lists, and these lists vary in content according to each stage. You
may also want to read about Sub-Definitions.
Important
• If you select an editable display set in the display set tree control in the
Project Manager, then that display set's criteria definition is used as
the current criteria definition for the command. This allows you to
select a display set, then run the Find Object command and find all
the objects in that display set without having to manually re-enter its
definition.

Example: Basic Search

larger (assuming a Diameter Data field name in inches. They are also in line 8011,
FIND Data Diameter >= 10
KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011*
KEEP ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El
THROW AWAY Level 12,15
Example 2: Search for "Null" Fields

The following display set definition is based on a search for any element that has an
empty field in the Service category.
FIND Data Service: = *
THROW AWAY Data Service: = ?*
The first line creates a group on all elements that contain a Service field. Then an
additional search criteria is used to throw away any element that contains at least one
character in the Service field. The elements remaining will contain no entry (null) in
the Service field.
Notes
• You can select the Copy button to copy the current complete criteria
definition (even if blank) onto the clipboard.
• You can select the Paste button to paste the current complete text from
the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. If
there is no text on the clipboard, then the criteria definition is not
changed.

• You can select the Clear button to remove all definition criteria for the
display set.
• You can select the Delete button to remove the selected row of the
criteria definition.
• You can select the Insert button to create a new row above the
selected row in the definition criteria.
Related Topics
• Find Object Command (Edit Menu), page 421
Define Search Criteria for Pipes

larger (assuming a Diameter Data field name in inches). They are also in line 8011,
FIND Data Diameter >= 10FIND Data Diameter >= 10
KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011*KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011*
KEEP ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 ElKEEP
ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El
THROW AWAY Level 12,15THROW AWAY Level 12,15
Related Topics
• Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 277
• Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 372
• Sub-definitions, page 193
• The Get External Data Database, page 278

Editing Positions: An Overview

The Edit Display Set Position dialog box works in conjunction with the Tools >
Display Sets > Move command to allow you to reposition display sets independent of
their default location. This functionality is a very useful tool for checking clearances
and provides the ability to temporarily move a group of objects around in the model.
To reposition a display set, you must use the Edit Display Set Position dialog box to
define the move destination and rotate angles for that display set. You can then use
the Tools > Display Sets > Move command to toggle the display set to be
repositioned or not using this information.
Related Topics
• Edit Display Set Position, page 216
• Rotate Display Set, page 218
Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box

Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which to move a selected
display set. Once the distance or destination path has been assigned, you can use the
Move tab on this dialog box to move the display set.
You also can select reference origin coordinates and angles for rotating the selected
display set.
Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)

Allows you to select and move a display set.
Display Set Name - Displays the name of the display set that you are moving.
ID - Displays the ID of the display set that you are moving.
Move - Moves the display set by the specified amount, or restores it to its original
position.
Reset - Sets the Move Destination Delta values and Rotate Angles values to zero. The
Move Reference Origin and the Rotate Reference Origin are not reset.
Minimum range in MU:SU:PU

• North - Displays the current minimum north coordinate of a bounding
box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU
(Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).
• East - Displays the current minimum east coordinate of a bounding

• Elevation - Displays the current minimum elevation of a bounding

Maximum range in MU:SU:PU

• North - Displays the current maximum north coordinate of a bounding
• East - Displays the current maximum east coordinate of a bounding
• Elevation - Displays the current maximum elevation of a bounding
Related Topics
• Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box, page 213
• Edit Position Command (Tools Menu), page 481
Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)
Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which the display set will be
moved. While defining the destination coordinates, keep in mind that they are
relative to the reference origin (where the display set started out).
Reference Origin in MU:SU:PU

• North - Specifies the north coordinate for the move reference origin.
The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub
Units:Positional Units).
• East - Specifies the east coordinate for the move reference origin. The
units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional
Units).
• Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the move reference
origin. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub
• Pick Point - Allows you to pick a point in the model using the mouse
rather than typing specific coordinate values.
Destination in MU:SU:PU
• Absolute - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept absolute
destination values for the new display set position. This option allows
you to move the display set a specified amount from the original
reference point.

• Delta value - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept delta

offset values for the new display set position. The Delta options allow
you to define an offset, either a specified amount or a distance and
bearing, from the original reference point.
• Delta direction - Switches the move coordinate boxes to accept delta
directional offset values for the new display set position. The Delta
options allow you to define an offset, either a specified amount or a
distance and bearing, from the original reference point.
• North - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction
for the north coordinate for the new position. The units are displayed
in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).
• East - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction
for the east coordinate for the new position. The units are displayed in
MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).
• Elevation - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta
direction for the elevation coordinate for the new position. The units
are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional
Units).
• Pick Point - Allows you to pick a point in the model for the
destination point rather than specifying each coordinate individually.
Related Topics
• Move Command (Tools Menu), page 478
• Move Display Set, page 217
Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)
Allows you to specify the reference origin coordinates, in MU:SU:PU (Master
Units:Sub Units:Positional Units), for the point around which the current display set
will rotate. The Rotate tab also allows you to specify the plan, front, and side angles,
in degrees from 0 to less than 360, for rotating the display set.
North - Specifies the north coordinate for the reference origin point around which the
display set rotates.
East - Specifies the east coordinate for the reference origin point around which the
display set rotates.
Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the reference origin point around
which the display set rotates.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a three dimensional point in the model for the
reference origin rather than specifying each coordinate individually.
Plan - Specifies the angle in the plan direction to rotate the display set.

Front - Specifies the angle in the front direction to rotate the display set.
Side - Specifies the angle in the side direction to rotate the display set.
Note
• The Rotate Reference origin in MU:SU:PU is adjusted internally by
the move deltas on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.
Related Topics
Edit Display Set Position

1. Select a display set from the list in Project Manager.
2. Click Tools, point to Display Sets, and click Edit Position.
Tip
• The Edit Display Set Position dialog box identifies the display set
name and identification in the Display set name and ID boxes,
respectively.
3. On the Information tab, specify the current display set Range, activate/deactivate
display set Move (based on current display set positional information), or Reset
the Move and Rotate deltas back to zero (effectively returning the moved display
set back to its original position).
4. On the Move tab, specify the move amounts for the current display set positional
information.
5. On the Rotate tab, specify the rotate amounts for the current display set positional
information.
Note
• Backface and Endcap settings are temporarily switched on during
display set moves and all Collision Detection displays. However,
during a display set move, only the display set that is being moved is
affected. All other elements will be updated according to the active
view settings. Also, the temporary change to the Backface and
Endcap settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion
movement. User settings are maintained and honored for all other
updates.
Related Topics

Move Display Set

1. Select the display set in the Project Manager > Display Sets window that you
want to move.
2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position.
3. Click the Move tab.
4. Type the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the
Reference Origin.
5. Select Absolute, Delta Value, or Delta Direction for the Destination. Delta
defines an offset from the current position, either by a specified amount (value),
or by distance and bearing (direction), from the original reference point (the
Reference Origin). Absolute defines the exact destination of the moved display
set (not an offset).
6. Type the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Destination.
7. Click the Information tab.
8. Check the Move option to move the display set to the specified destination
coordinates.
Notes
• Moving display sets requires special considerations. Moved display
sets that contain special elements such as pipes, valves, reducers, and
elbows may sometimes not display properly unless the backface flags
and endcap flags are turned on. At the same time, though, enabling
backfaces and endcaps makes the display slower for views that contain
pipes, valves, reducers, and elbows.
• Backface and Endcap settings are temporarily forced on during
display set moves and for all Collision Detection displays. However,
all other elements will be maintained and updated according to your
specifications in the View Settings dialog box. Also, the temporary
change to the Backface and Endcap settings does not affect normal
updates or eye motion movement.
• If an object is a member of more than one display set with different
offsets, the object is displayed using the offset assigned to the display
set with the lowest ID number.
• You also can click Pick Point to select the point in the model rather
than specifying each coordinate individually.
• Once the display set destination has been defined in the Edit Position
dialog box, use the Move toggle command on the display set shortcut
menu in the Project Manager > Display Sets window, or Tools >
Display Sets, to toggle the Move property without having to return to
the Information tab on the Edit Display Set Position dialog box.

• You also can dynamically move display sets using the Motion >
Display Set control mode command.
• Although you can select multiple display sets in Program Manager,
you can select only one display set at a time for dynamic motion.
• You also can use the Keypad to manipulate the position of a display
set.
Related Topics
Rotate Display Set

1. Select the display set in the Project Manager > Display Sets window that you
want to rotate.
2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position.
3. Click the Rotate tab.
4. Type the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the
Reference Origin.
5. Specify the Plan, Front, and Side angles.
Notes
• If an object is a member of more than one display set with different
offsets, the object is displayed using the offset assigned to the display
set with the lowest ID number.
• You also can click Pick Point to select the point in the model rather
than specifying each coordinate individually.
• The Rotate Reference Origin is adjusted internally by the move
deltas on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.
• Although you can select multiple display sets in Program Manager,
you can select only one display set at a time for dynamic motion.
Related Topics
• Move Display Set, page 217

Taking Snapshots: An Overview

This command allows you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by
taking a snapshot of the current Main view. Image files can be saved in . rgb (red,
green, blue), .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .pcx, and .tga formats. If you do not specify a format,
then the image is saved as an .rgb image. The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10
pixels.
Three Ways to Capture a Snapshot to the Clipboard

1. Full-Screen (taken by pressing Print Screen) - Data is captured directly from the
screen without an update, and is copied to the Clipboard.
2. Application Window Only (taken by pressing Alt+Print Screen) - Data is
captured directly from the application window without an update, and is copied to
the Clipboard.
3. Graphic View Only (taken by using the Edit->Copy command or by pressing
Ctrl+C in the Main, Plan, or Elevation views) - Data is captured directed from
the graphic view without an update, and is copied to the Clipboard.
In all other cases, the scaled and/or partial views are displayed in the Snapshot View
dialog box during the capture process. Be sure to display the image in the Main view
the way that you want to save it.
Tip
• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but have less than
the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout on
the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a
higher Anti-alias setting.
Notes
• To maximize snapshot performance, enlarge the Main view as much as
possible before running the Snapshot command. Higher Anti-alias
settings on large images at low screen resolutions may require that you
enlarge the Main view before the snapshot can be taken.
• Occasionally, when using High Resolution snapshot with an anti-alias
factor and/or scale factor greater than 1 (which forces tiled view
updates), one of the tiles in the resulting snapshot image may appear
brighter than the surrounding tiles. This anomaly may happen because
of a conflict between OpenGL lighting and snapshot process in which
the eye point moves slightly for each snapshot tile in the output image.
Shades of gray seem to be sensitive to this tiling. Modifying the color
of gray objects may eliminate the problem.

• Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing,

especially when Anti-alias settings are greater than 1. These features
include full screen mode, measurements, data annotations, and text
annotations. Also, some settings, such as Axis, are not supported in
high-resolution printing.
Caution
• Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during
high-resolution printing. SmartPlant Review will capture those images
instead of the intended image. SmartPlant Review automatically
disables your screen saver for this reason.
• There must be sufficient hard disk space when using high-resolution
printing. A general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is:
Bytes = Image Height X Image Width X 32.
Note
• To use this functionality, you must install one of the following
modules:
1. Construction
2. API
3. Collaboration
4. Simulation and Visual Effects
5. Photo-Realism
6. On-site Drawing Generation
Related Topics
• On-Site Drawing Generation Module, page 27
• Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch, page 222
Snapshot View Dialog Box

Allows you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot
of the current Main view. Image files can be saved in . rgb (red, green, blue), .bmp,
.tif, .jpg, .pcx, and .tga formats. If you do not specify a format, then the image is
saved as an .rgb image. The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels.
Extent - Allows you to select the area to include in the snapshot. Example selections
include Main View, Application Window, and Entire Screen.
Anti-alias - Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. The Anti-alias value
determines how much data is captured and averaged to produce the snapshot size. If
Anti-alias is set to 2, then SmartPlant Review captures and averages twice as much
data for the width and height. If you multiply the Anti-alias value by the Scale value
and square the result, the end answer is the number of "Main views" of data that

SmartPlant Review processes. The Anti-alias field defaults to 1, which means that
no anti-aliasing occurs.
Tip
• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but you have less
than the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout
on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot
with a higher Anti-alias setting.
Notes
printing. A general rule of thumb for calculating file size is: Bytes =
Image Height X Image Width X 32.
Rotate 90 degrees - Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If the Rotate 90
degrees toggle is on, the output image rotates 90 degrees (clockwise) for plotting
purposes. If you capture the image without the capture form, SmartPlant Review
scans the screen image from left-to-right, instead of top-to-bottom.
Raytrace image - Allows you to raytrace the snapshot and save the raytraced image
to a file. To use this option, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
Ignore aspect - Specifies whether to ignore the aspect ratio of the selected extent or
to stretch the image to fix the specified height and width.
Scale - Specifies the aspect ratio between the height and width of the snapshot image.
Width - Specifies the width in pixels of the snapshot image.
Height - Specifies the height of the snapshot image in pixels. If the Ignore aspect
option is off, the Width, Height, and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the
aspect ratio of the Main view. So if you change one field, the other fields change
accordingly. If you turn the toggle on, the Scale field is disabled and set to its default
value. You can then change Width and Height fields.
File name - Indicates the path and file name where you want to save the snapshot. If
you do not want to use the default information in the File name box, type the
appropriate path and name of the file. A Browse button is available for navigating to
the correct location.

Use SmartSketch - Allows you to open the snapshot in SmartSketch as well as save
the snapshot to a file. To use this functionality, you must install the On-Site
Drawing Generation module.
Template file name - Specifies the template which SmartSketch will use to open the
snapshot. If you do not want to use the default information in the Template file
name box, type the appropriate path and name of the template file for the snapshot. A
Browse button is available.
Reset All - Resets all snapshot properties to preset defaults.
Caution
• When you use the Snapshot command for a view, do not switch tasks
or bring up any dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead
of the image. For the same reason, any screen saver operations are
automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running.
Capturing the image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full
advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant
Review to capture the image quickly.
Related Topics
• Snapshot Command (View Menu), page 455
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch

1. Click View > Snapshot.
2. On the Snapshot View dialog box, select the type of display view that you want
from the Extent list.
3. Set the value for Anti-alias. Move the slider to the right to increase the value or to
the left to decrease the value.
4. If you want to rotate the view in the snapshot, select the Rotate 90 Degrees check
box.
5. In the Dimensions box, select the Ignore Aspect check box if you do not want
the software to consider the aspect ratio of the view extent. If you do not select
Ignore Aspect, the software stretches the image to the specified height and width.
Then, type any changes to the pixel values in Scale, Width, and Height.
Tip
• If you select Ignore Aspect, the Scale box is not available.
6. In the Output box, specify a name for the snapshot file.
7. If you have installed the On-Site Drawing module, you can select the Use
SmartSketch check box to open the snapshot in SmartSketch. Then, in the

Template file name box, specify the template SmartSketch should use to open
the snapshot.
Note
• If installed, SmartSketch opens and places the snapshot inside the
drawing border specified by the selected template. If you have not
installed SmartSketch, a message instructs you to load SmartSketch
before using the snapshot functionality. The snapshot process stops.
You can continue to create ordinary snapshots using the Snapshot
View dialog box.
Related Topics
Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot

1. Calculate the number of horizontal and vertical tiles required based on scaled
width and scaled height.
• T(x) = Scaled width / 128
• T(y) = Scaled height / 128
2. Calculate tile size = 128 * anti-alias factor.
Note
• Tile size is equal to the minimum Main window size in x, y, pixels.
3. Calculate the total number of horizontal and vertical tiles which can be blocked
per window update.
• B(x) = Main window width / tile size
• B(y) = Main window height / tile size
4. Calculate the total number of updates required per snapshot.
• U(x) = Number of horizontal blocks = Maximum (1, Greatest Integer
(T(x) / B(x))
• U(y) = Number of vertical blocks = Maximum (1, Greatest Integer
(T(y) / B(y))
• U = Total updates = U(x) * U(y)
Caution
• Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during
high-resolution printing. SmartPlant Review will capture those images
instead of the intended image. SmartPlant Review automatically
disables your screen saver for this reason.

• Be sure that you have sufficient hard disk space for using high-
resolution printing. The general rule of thumb for calculating print file
size is: Bytes = Image Height * Image Width * 32.
Related Topics
• On-Site Drawing Generation Module, page 27
• Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch, page 222

Placing Measurements: An Overview

You can place measurements and create measurement collections in SmartPlant
Review. Measurements consist of key-point to key-point precision measuring and are
stackable, persistent, and available in English and Metric units regardless of the
project environment.
For each measurement, you can measure the distance between two highlighted
snaplock points, two surface points, the shortest distance between two objects, or
between a surface point and a snaplock point. SmartPlant Review shows you the
points you selected, a line between the two points, and the distance between the
points.
In SmartPlant Review, there are now two methods to measure points, continuous and
non-continuous. Continuous measurements work like a "rolling tape measure," with a
continuous connection between each selected point. Because each measurement
requires two points, for N number of measurements, you must select N + 1 number of
points. Non-continuous measurements consist of measurements between pairs of
unique points. In non-continuous measurement, there is no connection between each
pair of points and the next pair. To create N measurements using non-continuous
measurement, you must select 2 * N points. The points comprising either this "rolling
tape measure" or the non-continuous measurements are grouped together in a
measurement collection. You can create your own collections, which is useful if you
need more than one set of measurements, or use the default collection provided.
Related Topics
• Create a New Measurement Collection, page 239
• Shortest Distance Measurement, page 227
• Snaplock Measurement, page 225
• Surface Measurement, page 226
Snaplock Measurement
1. Click Tools > Measure > Snaplock.
2. Select an object.
3. Accept the object by left-clicking anywhere in the view.
4. Select the snaplock point on the object from which to measure.
Notes
• When measuring a distance, you must access the Snaplock command
twice because it takes two selection points to define the distance to be
measured.

• Because measurements occur for every single selection point, you can
use Tools > Measure > Edit Collection to delete any unnecessary
measurements.
• You can use any of the standard motion commands or view
manipulation commands to move to a different part of the model
between defining snaplock points.
• Snaplock measurements allow you to define formats for the line,
snaplock points, and text.
• The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view.
• If you have rubberbanding turned on, you can cycle through the
snaplock points to select the starting point for the rubberband. Right-
click to cycle through the available points.
• See Placing three dimensional Points for more information on
identifying points.
• Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the snaplock
point.
• You also can access this command pressing F8 or by clicking
Snaplock Measure on the Tools Mini-Bar.
Related Topics
• Delete Last Measurement, page 229
• Move Measurement, page 228
Surface Measurement
1. Click Tools > Measure > Surface.
2. Click the first point on the model.
3. Click Tools > Measure > Surface.
4. Click the second point on the model.
5. Continue to identify end points.
Notes
• When measuring a distance, you must access the Surface command
twice because it takes two selection points to define the distance to be
measured.
• Surface measurement allows you to select any surface point on any
object.

• Because measurements occur for every single selection point, you can
use Tools > Measure > Edit Collection to delete any unnecessary
measurements.
• The measurement is saved in the active collection.
• You can define formats for the measurement line, points, and text.
identifying points.
• Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the next
surface point.
Related Topics
Shortest Distance Measurement

1. Click Tools > Measure > Shortest Distance between Objects.
2. Click the first point on the model.
4. Click the second point on the model.
Notes
• The measurement is saved in the active collection.
• You can define formats for the measurement line, points, and text.
identifying points.
Related Topics
• Measure Shortest Distance between Objects Command (Tools Menu),
page 489

Move Measurement
1. Click Tools > Measure > Move Measurement.
2. Click any square red label position marker.
3. Click any point in the Main view to reposition the lower left corner of the
measurement field.
Notes
• Move Measurement displays the label position markers (red squares).
Click the position marker for the measurement that you want to move
and then click where you want the new position to be.
• The moved measurement is attached to the original connecting line
with a line.
• You can click anywhere on the label to move or restore the
measurement.
Related Topics
• Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 231
• Edit a Measurement Collection, page 239
• Restore Position, page 228
Restore Position
1. Click Tools > Measure > Restore Position.
2. Click the red label marker of the label that you want to restore.
Note
• The selected label returns to the original position when you click the
red label position marker.

Related Topics
157
Delete Last Measurement

Click Tools > Measure > Delete Last.
Notes
• Delete Last removes the last measurement made in the active
collection.
• You also can access this command by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking
Delete Last Measurement on the Tools toolbar.
Related Topics
• Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 229
• Delete All Measurements, page 230
Delete Active Collection Measurements

Click Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements.
Notes
• This command removes all measurements in the active collection, but
does not delete the collection itself.
• To see which collection is the active collection, click Tools >
Measure > Edit Collections and note the name highlighted in the
Collection Name box.
• You also can access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+M or by
clicking Delete Active Collection Measurements on the Tools
toolbar.
Related Topics

Delete All Measurements

Click Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements.
Notes
• This command removes all measurements in all collections, but does
not delete the collections themselves.
• You also can access this command by pressing Ctrl+Alt+D or by
clicking Delete All Measurements on the Tools toolbar.
Related Topics
Delete All Collections

Click Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections.
Notes
• This command removes all collections and all of the measurements
they contain. You do not need to delete the measurements before
deleting the collections.
• To see the measurements contained in each collection before deleting
them, click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections, select a collection
Name, then click the Display option to view the measurements in the
Main view.
• You also can access this command by pressing Ctrl+D or by clicking
Delete All Collections on the Tools toolbar.
Related Topics

Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview

SmartPlant Review groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. A
measurement collection is a named group of measurements that connect together
within each collection. One collection is independent of all other collections, allowing
you to display or hide measurement collections independently in the model.
For example, one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected
series of footings measurements. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and
contain a series of I-Beam measurements. The footings measurement collection will
not connect to the I-Beam collections of measurements.
You can create your own Measurement Collections or use the default measurement
collection provided. You can have any number of named measurement collections, up
to the limit of records allowed in the project database. All measurement information
is stored in the project database.
You also can customize how the measurement symbology (lines, snaplock points, and
text) appears in your project by using the Tools > Measure > Edit Collection
command. User-defined collections can display measurements in English or Metric
units regardless of the project environment.
As you place measurements, all selection points are placed in the current or active
collection. Measurements occur for every single point. You can delete specific
measurements in a collection by using the Point Range options.
Related Topics
• Delete All Collections, page 230
Measurement Collections Dialog Box

Allows you to create or edit basic information for existing measurement collections.
You can customize all measurement symbology for lines, text, formats, range boxes,
and snaplock points. Also, you can display user defined collection measurements in
English and/or Metric units regardless of the project environment.

Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing measurement collection.
With the Edit tab, you also can display each collection independently from the other
collections or select a specific range of measurements in a collection to display or
delete.
Notes
• The active measurement collection is the last measurement collection
selected immediately before exiting the Edit tab.
• Measurement collection names cannot contain single tick marks ( ' ).
Collection
Name - Allows you to enter the required name of the measurement collection.
Delete - Removes the selected measurement point range in the active collection.
Description - Allows you to enter an optional description of the measurement

collection.
Continuous measurement - Displays measurements between the points that you

select with the rolling measuring tape. The software displays one measurement
between each point continuously. For example, points 1 to 2, 2 to 3, and 3 to 4 will
have measurements. You will see three measurements if you provide four points.
Turn this option off to display measurements between each two pairs of points but not
display measurement between multiple pairs of points. For example, points 1 to 2 and
3 to 4 will have measurements but points 2 to 3 would not have a measurement. You
will see two measurements displayed if you provide four points.

You can turn this option on or off at any time to meet your needs.
Use range box snaplocks - Specifies that you want to use the snaplocks for the range
box instead of geometric snaplocks on a graphic element.
Turn this option off to use the geometric snaplocks on the graphic element instead of
those on the range box.
Display
On - Displays all or part of a measurement collection using the selected point range.
Range box on measurement points - Displays the rangebox around the

measurement points.

Measurement of graphic range box - Displays the range box dimensions of

measured graphic elements in the text window.
Dynamic measurement rubberband - Measures dynamically and interactively from

one selected measurement point over any graphic in the model until the next
measurement point is selected.
Point range
From - Selects the starting measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.
To - Selects the ending measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.
Display - Displays the selected measurement point range to assist you in determining
which measurement points to delete.
Delete - Removes the currently selected point range.

Related Topics
• Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu), page 491
Line Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)
Defines the properties for the line that displays to show the distance being measured.
The Line tab also allows you to control the line color, width, and display pattern.
Collection - Displays the collection name of the currently selected measurement

collection.
Measurement Style
Color - Allows you to select a color for the measurement leader line.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a line color.
Width - Allows you to select a line width for connecting line measurements.
Solid - Allows you to select a solid line style for connecting line measurements.
Dash - Allows you to select a dashed line style for connecting line measurements.
Dot-dash - Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for connecting line
measurements.
Dot - Allows you to select a dotted line style for connecting line measurements.
Range Box Style

Color - Allows you to select a color for the range box lines.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a line color.
Width - Allows you to select a line width for the range box lines measurements.
Solid - Allows you to select a solid line style for the range box.
Dash - Allows you to select a dashed line style for the range box.
Dot-dash - Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for the range box.
Dot - Allows you to select a dotted line style for the range box.
Related Topics
• Measurement Collections Dialog Box, page 231

Text Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Defines the display properties for the measurement text. You can define different text
properties for each measurement collection.
You also can change the font, text color, background color, and position along the
measure line where the measurement text displays using this tab.
Collection - States the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.
Background
Transparent - Allows you to select a transparent background for measurement text.
Color - Displays the background color for the measurement labels that are currently
selected.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the background color
associated with the measurement.
Position from 0.0 to 1.0 - Allows you to select the position for the measurement
label between start and end points for a measurement.
Font
Name - Displays the name of the currently selected font for the measurement labels.
Edit - Displays the Font dialog box, allowing you to select font parameters.
Type - Displays the currently selected font type for the measurement labels.
Supported font types include regular, bold, italic, and bold italic.
Size - Displays the currently selected font size for the measurement labels.
Color - Displays the font color for the measurement labels that are currently selected.
Related Topics
Format Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)
Allows you to select the display of only master units or both master and sub units on
the measurement label. You also can define whether measurements display in metric
or imperial units and the amount of precision after the decimal place.
Collection - Displays the name of the measurement collection that is currently

selected.

Both master and sub units - Allows you to select the display of both master and sub
units on the measurement label.
Decimal master units only - Allows you to select the display of master units only on
the measurement label.
English - Displays measurement in English units.
Metric - Displays measurements in metric format.
Precision - States the maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal on
measurement labels.
Master - States original master (MU) in current original master units (MU).
Sub - States original sub units (SU) for the current master file.
Display North - Displays the north measurement.
Display East - Displays the east measurement.
Display Elevation - Displays the elevation for the measurement.
Display order for two or more delta distances - Specifies the display order for the
delta distances that you have turned on. You can select any order from the list.
Related Topics
Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)
Defines the measurement line terminator display properties for the active collection.
These terminators indicate the points between which you are measuring. You also
can define the point color, style, and size using this tab.
Collection - Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.
Current - States the color of the snaplock measurement point that is currently
displayed for a selected piece of geometry.
Alternate - States the color of all alternate, non-selected snaplock measurement

points for a selected piece of geometry.
Final - States the color of the final displayed snaplock measurement point for a
selected piece of geometry.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to select the snaplock point color.

Size from 6 to 10 pixels - Allows you to specify snaplock point size from 6 to 10
pixels.
Square - Allows you to specify square snaplock measurement points.
Round - Allows you to specify small, round snaplock measurement points.
Related Topics
Range Box Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)
Defines which snaplocks are available on the range box. The active range box
snaplocks display on the figure at the bottom of the dialog box.
Collection - Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.
Group snaplock point selection

All points - Activates all of the snaplock points on the range box.
Graphically selected - Activates the snaplock points that you select on the figure at
the bottom of the dialog box.
Groups of points - Lets you select logical groups of snaplock points.
Corner points (circles) - Activates the corner snaplock points.
Edge midpoints (rectangles) - Activates the midpoint snaplock points for each edge
of the range box.
Face midpoints (triangles) - Activates the midpoint snaplock points for each face of
the range box.
Range box center point (diamond) - Activates the center point snaplock point for
the range box.
Graphical point selection - Displays the active snaplock points for the range box.
Active points display as yellow. Inactive points display as white.
Related Topics

Create a New Measurement Collection

Click Tools > Measure > New Collection.
Notes
• This command automatically generates a new measurement collection
and sets it to be the active collection.
• The default name for the new collection is prefixed with
AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the project site name and an
incremented integer (for example,
AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). This name cannot be edited.
• To edit the newly created measurement collection, click Tools >
Measure > Edit Collections.
• You also can access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+F8 or by
clicking New Collection on the Tools toolbar.
Related Topics
Edit a Measurement Collection

1. Click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections.
2. Select the appropriate settings on the Measurement Collections dialog box.
Notes
• You also can access this command by pressing Shift+F8 or by
clicking Edit Measurement Collections on the Tools toolbar.
Related Topics

Using Annotations: An Overview

From tagging and annotating to finding and attaching data, SmartPlant Review
provides a number of features that ensure clear, concise visual communication among
project team members.
• Tags allow you to attach pertinent information about an object in your

model, such as its name, location, type or classification, or attach
general comments made during a walk-through of the design.
• Measurement features provide the capability to data point (snaplock)
at the center of a pipe.
• Data Annotations allow you to attach external data - spreadsheets,
raster images - to objects in your model.
• Text Annotations allow you to access and display label data associated
with objects in your model.
Related Topics
• Create a Data Annotation, page 260
• Import Tags, page 248
• Place Tag With Leader, page 241
• Place Tag Without Leader, page 242
• Place Text Annotations, page 396
Communicating with Tags: An Overview

Tags provide a means of communication between the people who design a plant and
the people who construct a plant. Tags can provide information such as the name of a
piece of equipment, its location, its type or classification, or general comments made
during a walk-through of the design. Essentially, tags are labels that provide
additional information about items in a plant.
You can import and export tags directly to and from project databases. All tag
attributes are available for you to use when you query for tags.
In SmartPlant Review, you can place tags with leader lines or without leader lines,
edit tags, and delete tags. When you create a new tag, it is assigned the next available
tag number, and the tag becomes the active tag. The software saves the corresponding
view, including levels and clipping planes, when you place a new tag. Then, when
you display the tag, the corresponding view also displays. You can search for a tag by
entering text that appears in the tag label. You can directly go to a tag by entering a
tag number.
You can step through the tag list to view each tag. The tag that you are currently at is
the active tag. You can display all tags, only the active tag, or no tags. You also can

display action comments, which are additional text fields associated with tags that
were placed during project design.
You can import and export tags to an ASCII tag file. This ASCII file is used in other
Intergraph Process, Power and Offshore products to allow users to review tags placed
within SmartPlant Review. After reviewing the tags, users can make comments that
are written back to the same ASCII file. The user can then import the modified ASCII
file to SmartPlant Review and show the comments placed by other products.
Related Topics
• Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 257
• Using Annotations: An Overview, page 240
Place Tag With Leader

1. Click Tags > Place > Leader.
2. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag leader line to
begin.
Tips
• Double-clicking causes the object to highlight. You then will be able
to see the object's attributes in the Text view and accept or reject the
placement point. The leader line will start at the point where you
clicked the object. However, you will not see the leader line until the
bubble is placed.
• The status bar, the horizontal strip at the bottom of the active window,
displays the tag placement prompts.
3. Left-click to accept the placement point for the beginning of the leader line.
Important
• The first placement point is used to set the target depth for your bubble
in the current view, as well as the starting point for the leader line.
4. Single-click at the location where you want to place your bubble.
5. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box. The software automatically assigns
the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag becomes the active tag.
Notes
• Tags appear in all three views. The text and tag number from the
active tag appear in the text window.

• When you place a new tag, the corresponding view is also saved. The
view settings saved with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point
locations, and the clipping planes. Each time that you display a tag, the
corresponding view is also displayed. These view parameters
associated with a tag cannot be edited.
• You can establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag
command by creating an ASCII text file named tagseed.txt. SmartPlant
Review searches first in the folder specified by the
DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review
searches the folders specified by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH
variables. If the file is not in any of these locations, SmartPlant Review
searches c:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.
• If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears, the Tags Off
command is active. This means that the tags do not appear in the
design.
• When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the
model, SmartPlant Review saves the link between the tag and the
selected object. When you open the model in PDS and select the tag,
the associated object appears highlighted.
• The beginning of the leader line can also be palced using a 3D data
point or by simply single-clicking a point in space. However, these
methods will not associate the tag with an object in the model.
Related Topics
• Activate Display of Tags, page 246
• Delete Tag, page 244
• Go To Tag, page 246
Place Tag Without Leader

1. Click Tags > Place > No Leader.
2. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag to be placed.
Tips
• Double-clicking causes the object to highlight. You then will be able
to see the object's attributes in the Text view and accept or reject the
placement point.
• The status bar, the horizontal strip at the bottom of the active window,
displays the tag placement prompts.
3. Left-click to accept the placement point for the tag.
4. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box. The software automatically assigns
the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag becomes the active tag.

Notes
• The Place Tag Without Leader command places a new tag in the
model without attaching a leader line. Tags appear in all three views.
• The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the text window.
• When you place a new tag, the corresponding view is also saved. The
view settings saved with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point
locations, and the clipping planes. Each time that you display a tag, the
corresponding view is also displayed. These view parameters
associated with a tag cannot be edited.
• You can establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag
command by creating an ASCII text file named tagseed.txt. SmartPlant
Review searches first in the folder specified by the
DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review
searches the folders specified by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH
variables. If the file is not in any of these locations, SmartPlant Review
searches c:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.
• If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears, the Tags Off
command is active. This means that the tags do not appear in the
design.
• The tag can also be placed using a 3D data point or by simply single-
clicking a point in space. However, these methods will not associate
the tag with an object in the model.
Related Topics
• Edit Tag, page 244
• Find Tag, page 244

Edit Tag
1. Click Tags > Edit or click Edit Tag on the Tools MiniBar.
2. Select the tag Number to edit.
3. Type the Text for the tag.
4. Select Show comments to display comments associated with the tag.
5. Select Active only, All or None for Display option.
6. On the Attributes tab, type or select the values for the properties.
7. On the Symbology tab, select color values for parts of the tag.
Related Topics
Delete Tag
1. Click Tags > Delete or select Delete Tag on the Tools MiniBar.
2. On the Delete Tag dialog box, select the tag to delete.
Notes
• When you delete a tag, the tag number is removed from use and is not
reassigned to a new tag.
• You also can delete tags from the Edit Tags dialog box.
Find Tag
1. Click Tags > Find or select Find Tag on the Tags toolbar.
2. Type the identifying information for the tag or tags that you want to locate.
Tip
• The matching tag displays on the Edit Tags dialog box.
Notes
• You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters and a
question mark (?) to match exactly one character. For example, the
text search string *Huntsville* will find all tags containing the text
string Huntsville in their text attribute.
• You can use wildcard search characters in the Text or Comment
attributes. All other query attributes will search for exact matches.

• When you select a tag to display, the view settings associated with that
tag become active. The view settings saved with a tag are the levels,
the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping planes.
• The list of tags generated by a query is emptied if you import a tag or
place a new tag. If you perform one of those actions, you must
regenerate the query to rebuild the tag list.
Related Topics
• Tags Toolbar, page 467
Next Tag
Click Tags > Next.
Notes
• If the active tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list, the
next tag number is the lowest-numbered tag in the tag list.
tag become active. These view settings saved with a tag are the levels,
the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping planes.
• If the Find Tags Results toggle is on, the tag list will consist only of
those tags that meet the current search criteria.
• You also can click Next Tag on the Tools MiniBar or press F10.
Previous Tag
Click Tags > Previous.
Notes
• If the active tag number is the lowest numbered tag in the tag list, the
previous tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list.
tag become active. These view settings include the levels, the Eye and
Center point locations, and the clipping planes.
• You also can click Previous Tag on the Tools MiniBar or press
Ctrl+F10.

Go To Tag
1. Click Tags > Go To.
2. Select the tag Number.
Notes
• The tag that you go to becomes the active tag.
tag become active. These view settings include the levels, the Eye and
Center point locations, and the clipping planes.
• You also can select Go To Tag on the Tags toolbar.
Activate Display of Tags

Click Tags > Display > Activate.
Notes
• This command changes the view settings to those associated with the
tag that was last active. The view settings associated with tags are the
levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping planes.
• The text for the tag displays in the Text view.
• This command does not change the current display setting of the tag
itself (that is, Active Only, All, or None).
Display Active Tag Only

Click Tags > Display > Active Only.
Notes
• You can also display only the active tag by clicking View > Settings
and then, in the Options section on the Display tab, clicking both the
All tags and Active tag only options.
• If you are in a shared environment, click Tools > Refresh Data to see
the tags initiated by other team members using the same session.

Display All Tags

Click Tags > Display > All.
Notes
• The Display All Tags command allows you to display all the tags in
the view.
• You can also display all tags by clicking View > Settings and then, in
the Options section on the Display tab, clicking the All tags option.
Related Topics
• Display Action Comments, page 247
Display No Tags
Click Tags > Display > None.
Note
• The Display Tags > None command allows you to turn off the display
of tags in the model.
• You can turn off the display of tags by clicking View > Settings and
then, in the Options section on the Display tab, unselecting the All
tags option.
Display Action Comments

Click Tags > Display > Action Comments.
Notes
• The Action Comments command allows you to display the action
comments for the current tag in the Text view.
• An action comment is information associated with a tag and is created
using a plant design product. You can incorporate action comments
into a SmartPlant Review project by importing .tag files.

Import Tags
Click File > Import > Tags.
Important
• The import operation will not succeed if the sending database does not
have the SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later format. The sending database
must be upgraded to this format prior to importing from it.
Notes
• You can import tags from an ASCII .tag file or a database file (.mdb).
The ASCII file allows you to use other Intergraph products to review
and comment on tags placed in SmartPlant Review files. Any
comments you make using these other products are written back to the
same ASCII file. You can then import the modified ASCII file into
SmartPlant Review and display the comments made using the other
products.
• Importing tags from a database file (.mdb) allows you to optionally
overwrite like-numbered tags or append tags to the current project
data. Importing from a .tag file replaces all of the tag data in the
current project with data found in the .tag file.
Export Tags
Click File > Export > Tags.
Notes
• When exporting tags to a database file (.mdb), the tags from the
current database maintain their same numbering. In the instance
where like-numbered tags exist in both databases, the software allows
you to optionally overwrite tags in the receiving database. Otherwise,
the tags from the current database are merged with the tags in the
receiving database. There is no option to append exported tags to the
existing tags in the receiving database.
• Exporting to a .tag file replaces all of the tag data in the .tag file with
data found in the current project.

• The export operation will not succeed if the target database does not
have the SmartPlant Review 5.0 format. The target database must be
upgraded to this format prior to exporting to it.
• The .tag file format has not changed. None of the new attribute data
supported in a SmartPlant Review 5.0 project is written during an
export to a .tag file.
Related Topics
• Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 240
Tags Workflow: An Overview

Tags have evolved to a point that the method of numbering tags has become less of a
dominant influence on workflows related to recording project notes using the tags
functionality.
The merging of tag information from copies of the same project has always been
absolutely dictated by the incremental tag numbering system. The process of creating
tags at different locations for the same project simultaneously has been hampered
considering the ultimate goal of combining all tags into a single database. Merging
tags has been complicated in this scenario due to the possible creation of duplicate tag
numbers, which are currently not allowed in tags functionality. Tags created after the
initial engineering process in PDS, can now focus on workflows involving new tag
attributes that allow for advanced methods of sorting or grouping tags associated with
the location or process in which tags are created. This in effect makes the numbering
system of tags much less of a primary key for tracking, and allows tags to be merged
using tag renumbering without loosing the ability to uniquely identify tags as having
some association to it's origin.
Related Topics
• Export Tags Command (File Menu), page 416

Importing Tags with Attributes and Symbology

This workflow describes two simultaneous edit sessions of the same original project
using duplicate databases. The two edit sessions then combine the edit session data in
order to provide a single valid project. This example shows a use for tag attributes,
symbology, and importing tags.
1. Create a new project. For the rest of this example, this new project will be
referred to as the original project.
2. Place a tag with the following attributes:
• Text = Example workflow tag Original 1
• Creator = User
• Discipline = Engineer
• Background = orange
3. Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the
Save as Defaults button on their respective tabs.
4. Place another tag with the following attributes:
• Text = Example workflow tag Original 2
5. Save and copy the project database to a different folder so that you can edit it later
to simulate parallel edit sessions.
Notes
• In a real world scenario, you might copy the project to two different
locations for parallel reviewing and editing. For the purposes of this
example, leave the database as it is and simulate a separate tag edit
session using the attributes of the tags.
• The current project database can now be thought of as project one.
• Text = Example workflow tag Project 1-1
• Discipline = Scheduling
• Background = blue
8. Save and copy this project database to a folder different than the one used
previously for saving the original project database.
9. Exit the project.
10. Replace the current project database with the first database saved after original
tags were added.

Note
• The project can now be thought of as project two.
11. Open the project.
• Text = Example workflow tag Project 2-1
• Discipline = Inspector
• Background = green
• Text = Example workflow tag Project 2-2.
15. Import the following tag:
• Click File > Import > Tags.
• Select the second saved database file that represented project two tags.
• Select the tag with “Project 1-1” in its text field.
• Verify that the tag append and renumbering check box is set in the
Import dialog box.
• Click Import.
• Click Close.
Note
• The imported tag will become the highest numbered tag during the
renumbering import.
Related Topics
• Tags Workflow: An Overview, page 248
Querying Tags to Review Associated Sets

This workflow describes manipulating the tags resulting from Importing Tags with
Attributes and Symbology. Now that you have tags added to the project database
representing different edit sessions, you can easily review tags related to those
different sessions.
Create a query to find all tags from project one

1. Click Tags > Find.
2. Set Discipline to Scheduling.

Tips
• When a valid query list is created, the Edit Tags dialog box displays
the results.
• Only the single tag containing the text "Project 1-1" displays.
Create a query to find all tags from project two

2. Set the Background symbology to green.
Tips
the results.
• Only the two tags containing the text "Project 2-1" and "Project 2-2"
display.
Create a query to find all tags inserted during all edit sessions
in this workflow
2. Set the left most combo box list in the Created: group to =.
3. Set the left most date control of the Created: group to the date that the tags were
created.
Tips
• This portion of the workflow will only function correctly if all the tags
are created on the same day.
the results.
• All five tags created in the workflow example display.
Create a query to find the tags existing as Original

2. Set the Text to *Original*.
Tips
the results.
• The tags containing the text "Original 1" and "Original 2" display.
Related Topics
• Tags Workflow: An Overview, page 248

Edit Tags Dialog Box

Allows you to edit or review the text associated with the active tag. You also can use
this dialog box to quickly create a new tag with or without a leader.
Related Topics
• Tags Edit Command (Tags Menu), page 530
Edit Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)
Allows you to edit or review the active tag. You also can quickly create a new tag
with or without a leader.
Selection
• Number - Allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its
number.
• "Find Tags" results - Fills the Number list with just those tags in the
current Find Tags result set.
• Recall view - Changes the view settings to those associated with the
tag number displayed in the Number field. The view settings
associated with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point locations,
and the clipping plane locations.
• Delete - Removes the tag displaying in the Number field from the
model.
Caution
• If you click Delete, the selected tag will automatically be
removed from the model. If you would like to receive a
confirmation message prior to the deletion of the tag, use the
Delete command on the Tags menu.
• Text - Displays data associated with a tag.
• Show comments - Allows you to toggle between the comment text or
the tag text.
Create
• Leader - Allows you to create a new tag with or without a leader.
• Place - Allows you to place a new tag.
Display
• Active only - Displays only the active tags.
• All - Displays all tags in the view.
• None - Prevents the display of tags in the view.

Related Topics
Attributes Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)
Allows you to edit or review the attributes of the active tag.
Creator - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the creator of the tag.
Discipline - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the discipline associated with the
tag.
Site ID - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the site identification associated with
the tag.
Category - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the category associated with the
tag.
Computer name - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the name of the computer
that generated the tag.
Status - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the status of the tag.
Save As Defaults - Saves the current set of values for each attribute so that you can
use them as a starting point for other tags.
Restore Defaults - Displays the last saved set of defaults.
• Placed – Displays the date the tag was placed.

• Last Modified - Displays the date the tag was last modified.
Related Topics
Symbology Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)
Allows you to edit or review the symbology of the active tag.
Text - Displays the text color of the tag. You can select a color from the list.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box. Select the color that you want to use. This color
will display in the Text field.
Background - Displays the background color of the tag. You can select a color from
the list.
will display in the Background field.

Leader - Displays the color of the tag's leader line. You can select a color from the
list.
will display in the Leader field.
Save As Defaults - Saves the current set of symbology values so that you can use
them as a starting point for other tags.
Restore Defaults - Displays the last saved set of defaults.
Related Topics
Delete Tag Dialog Box

Allows you to delete a tag by specifying its tag number. When you delete a tag, the
tag number is removed from use and will not be reassigned to a new tag.
Number - Allows you to choose a specific tag number to delete.
Verify - When this toggle is enabled, you will receive a prompt asking you to confirm
the deletion of the tag. You can answer Yes to delete the tag number or No to cancel
the command and return to the Delete Tag dialog box.
Related Topics
Find Tags Dialog Box

Allows you to search for tags based on their attributes and symbology.
Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box)

Specifies attribute criteria that will be part of a find tags query. None of the fields are
case sensitive.
Text - Allows you to type a text string representing the text attribute as part of the
find tags query. You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters and a
question mark (?) to match exactly one character. For example, the text search string
*Huntsville* will find all tags containing the text string Huntsville in their text
attribute.

Comment - Allows you to type a text string representing the comment attribute as
part of a find tags query. You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters
and a question mark (?) to match exactly one character.
Creator - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing
the creator attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match.
You cannot use special characters in this field.
Discipline - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value
representing the discipline attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an
exact match. You cannot use special characters in this field.
Computer name - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value
representing the computer name attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must
be an exact match. You cannot use special characters in this field.
Site ID - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing
the site id attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match.
Category - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing
the category attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match.
Status - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing
the status attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match.
Number
This group of controls lets you query on tag numbers. Select an operator on the left
and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular
tag. SmartPlant Review provides two number-operator pairs, so that you can
represent a range of values to search for.
Created
This group of controls lets you query on creation date. Select an operator on the left
and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular
tag. SmartPlant Review provides two number-operator pairs, so that you can
represent a range of values to search for.
Last modified
This group of controls lets you query on last modified date. Select an operator on the
left and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one
particular tag. SmartPlant Review provides two number-operator pairs, so that you
can represent a range of values to search for.

Note
• If SmartPlant Review finds any tags as a result of running a find tags
query, the Edit Tags dialog box displays the resulting set of tags.
Related Topics
Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box)
Allows you to search for tags based on the symbology.
Color
Text - Displays the text color. You can select a color from the list.
Background - Displays the background color for the tag. You can select a color from
the list.
Leader - Displays the leader color for the tag. You can select a color from the list.
Related Topics
Go To Tag Dialog Box

Allows you to locate a specific tag using the tag number.
Number - Allows you to specify the number of the tag that you want to view.
Note
• To display tags in the model, click Tags > Display and choose a
viewing option from the menu.
Related Topics
• Go To Command (Tags Menu), page 532
Placing Data Annotations: An Overview

Data Annotation allows you to select virtually any data file using Windows Explorer,
and drag it onto your model. Double-click the data annotation icon to display the file
contents. You also can place a leader line and attach the file to an object. For
example, you can drag and drop a spreadsheet, a word processing file, or an HTML
document into your model.

Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation, such as
the target and program that opens the annotation. You also can add and change the
background color of the data annotation icon to make its appearance more apparent.
The Position tab on the Data Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to
change the location of the data annotation by changing the North, East, and
Elevation values. You also can use the Pick Point feature to define a point in the
model and change the position of the data annotation.
This dialog box also enables you to change the leader line attributes, such as color,
location, and arrowheads at the end of leader lines. You also can toggle the display of
the leader lines on or off.
File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation, such as
the target and program that opens it. You also can make the data annotation's
appearance more apparent by editing the background color.
• Target - Allows you to type a path or Browse to the file that you want
to place as a data annotation in the drawing.
• Optional viewer - Displays the name of the optional executable to
associate with a data annotation. You also can use the Browse button
to navigate to the program that you want to use.
• Optional start in - Allows you to type a path or Browse for a folder
in which to open the annotation object. If this box has no information,
the software uses the current folder.
• Show - Displays a solid color, rectangular background behind the
annotation icon.
• Color - Displays the optional solid background color for the
annotation icon.
• Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to set the
optional solid background color for the data annotation icon.
• Browse - Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.
Related Topics
• Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box, page 258
• Edit a Data Annotation File, page 260
• Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 261

Position Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to change the location of the data annotation by changing the North,
East, and Elevation values. You also can reposition the data annotation by manually
defining a three dimensional point.
In addition, the Position tab allows you to change the attributes of a leader line.
These attributes include color, location, and arrowheads at the end of leader lines.
You also can toggle the leader line display on and off.
Annotation
North - Sets the north coordinate of the annotation position.
East - Sets the east coordinate of the annotation position.
Elevation - Sets the elevation coordinate of the annotation position.
Pick Point - Allow you to set the annotation position by placing a three dimensional
point in the Main view.
Leader line
Activate - Starts or stops the display of the leader line for a selected data annotation.
Arrowhead - Allows you to use arrowheads with leader lines for the selected data
annotation.
Color - Displays the color for the annotation leader line.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a color for the
leader line.
North - Sets the north coordinate of the leader line point.
East - Sets the east coordinate of the leader line point.
Elevation - Sets the elevation coordinate of the leader line point.
Pick Point - Allows you to set the leader line position by placing a three dimensional
point in the main view.
Related Topics

Create a Data Annotation

1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Drag a file from Explorer to the Main View. When the cursor changes to a
document icon with a plus (+) sign, drop the file on the object that you want to
annotate.
3. Click the object to select the anchor point for the leader line, and click again to
accept.
4. Move the cursor to the position where you want the data annotation to appear.
5. Click to place the annotation.
Note
• To place a data annotation without a leader line, right-click when
prompted to place a leader line. Then left-click. The data annotation
appears without a leader line.
Related Topics
• Delete Data Annotations, page 262
• Display Data Annotations, page 261
Edit a Data Annotation File

1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit.
2. Click the data annotation in the Main view that you want to edit.
3. Click to accept the data annotation that you selected.
4. Edit the Target file.
5. Select an Optional Viewer.
6. Select an Optional start in folder.
7. Select Show Icon background.
Related Topics

Edit a Data Annotation Position

1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit.
2. Identify the data annotation that you want to edit.
3. Click to accept the data annotation that you selected.
4. Click the Position tab.
5. Edit the annotation location using the North, East, and Elevation fields.
Tip
• You also can click Pick Point, which allows you to select the
placement point for the annotation directly in the model.
6. Edit the Leader Line options as needed.
Note
• Use the Position tab to edit the location of the data annotation icon in
the model, and to edit the leader line color and other properties.
Related Topics
Display Data Annotations

1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Display.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click Off to turn off display of all data annotations
• Click On to turn on display of the data annotations.
Note
• The View > Display > Annotations command controls the display of
all annotations, regardless of the program that created them. The Tools
> Data Annotation > Display command controls only annotations
created by the Data Annotation command. For data annotations to
display, you must turn on both the View > Display > Annotations
and the Tools > Data Annotation > Display commands.
Related Topics

Delete Data Annotations

1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Delete.
• Click One to delete one annotation. Locate and accept the annotation
that you want to delete. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete
the annotation.
• Click All to delete all annotations. A Delete alert box appears. Click
Yes to delete all of the annotations.
Related Topics
Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview

The Volume Annotation command allow you to place certain types of geometry in a
model. Volume annotations can be of three basic geometric types:
• boxes
• cylinders
• spheres
SmartPlant Review also provides three additional special types of volume
annotations:
• scaffolds (boxes)
• field welds (cylinders)
• clipping volumes (boxes)
The volume annotations are saved in the SmartPlant Review project database. The
original design files are not modified. The Volume Annotation data does not go back
to the PDS database or software.
You can use volume annotations as a very powerful planning and tracking tool.
Scaffolds are frequently built, used, knocked down and rebuilt as needed incurring
considerable expense for a construction project. You can use SmartPlant Review to
track scaffolding and help the planners and workers visualize where the scaffolds are
and how and when they can be used. Work requiring scaffolds can be planned around
the scaffold being present to reduce the need and cost associated with building,
knocking down and rebuilding the same scaffold an excessive number of times. Using
volume annotations to plan scaffolding work could result in a considerable cost

savings for a project. Work areas may be designated and planned using boxes to
indicate the size and importance of the work area. Cylinders may be used as
cylindrical scaffolding or may be used in other ways. Welds may be used to track
field welds. Spheres may be used to designate work areas or for any other use where a
spherical shape would be appropriate. Clipping volumes let you isolate and view
portions of a model.
The clipping volume is a box that you can place anywhere inside a model just like the
other volume annotation box shapes like scaffold and box. You can draw the clipping
volume itself as a visible piece of geometry for ease in placement and editing. You
can turn off the clipping volume's geometry while the view clipping display is still
active for a cleaner clipped display. The picture on the left is a clipping volume
around the pipe rack in SPRDemo.dri with the clipping volume visible. The picture
on the right is the same active clipping volume with the clipping volume geometry
display turned off. Note in the picture on the right below that with the clipping
volume loaded and turned on, just the pipe rack is visible. With the clipping volume
turned off the entire model will display.
You can only have one clipping volume loaded and active at a time. However,
multiple different clipping volume annotations may be defined and saved in the
database for later recall, reload and usage as active clipping volumes.
The following examples show cylinder, scaffold, and sphere volume annotations. Box
and weld are just different categories for scaffold (box) and cylinder (weld) types.
The types allow you to place, edit, delete and manage different kinds of volume
annotations and use them in different ways appropriate to their application.

You can use volume annotations to represent both temporary and permanent areas or
objects in the model. Temporary items like construction scaffolds and construction
parking lots may be placed in the model for construction work planning. Field welds
may be identified and marked for tracking and testing purposes. Special security
areas, work areas or construction lay down yards may also be identified using volume
annotations.
Note
• To use this functionality, you must first install the Construction
Module.
Related Topics
• Adjust a Volume Annotation, page 269
• Create a New Volume Annotation Category, page 267
• Delete a Single Volume Annotation, page 270
• Delete All Volume Annotations by Type, page 271
• Edit a Volume Annotation, page 268
• Find a Volume Annotation, page 269
• Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box, page 276
• Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category, page 268
• Load and Display a Clipping Volume, page 271
• Place Volume Annotations, page 265

Place Volume Annotations

1. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Place.
Tips
• The specific Place command depends on the last volume annotation
type that you placed. For example, if the last volume annotation that
you placed was a scaffold, the command will be Place Scaffold.
• You can use only the Main view for placing volume annotations, but
also using the Plan and Elevation views provides more visual feedback
and extra locate options.
• You may also find it useful to manipulate the Main view throughout
the volume annotation placement. Different view orientations can be
beneficial for different steps. SmartPlant Review disables the
interactive mouse drag motion and accelerator key commands, but all
menu commands, toolbar commands, and view manipulation controls
remain available. The Common Views toolbar can be particularly
helpful, for example.
2. Click the object with which you want to associate the annotation.
Tips
• If you want to place the volume annotation in space, press ESC to not
locate an object.
• If you select an object, the position, dimensions, and orientation of that
object can determine the volume annotation's position, dimensions,
and orientation.
• If you do not select an object, the position of the annotation defaults to
the center point of the main view.
• If you do not select an object, the orientation defaults to none. The
exception to this rule is cylinders. For cylinders, the orientation
defaults to the orientation of the main view. Because of this, you
should set up the main view to the appropriate orientation before you
place cylindrical volume annotations.
• If you select a volume as the object with which you want to associate
the annotation, SmartPlant Review copies all of the attributes of the
selected volume to the new volume.
3. If you selected an object, click to accept the highlighted object.
4. Select the first point of the volume.
Tips
• For box, scaffolding, and clipping volume types, select an object to
position the first corner point of the box volume on the surface point of
the object.

• For cylinder and weld volume types, select the point that you want to
function as the center of the cylinder.
• For sphere volume types, select the point that you want to function as
the center point of the sphere. SmartPlant Review places this point at
the current model view depth.
Notes
To indicate placements, you can do any of the following:
• Double click to locate a surface point on an object. If there are
multiple objects under your cursor, click to cycle through the available
options. Click again to accept the object and its surface point.
SmartPlant Review positions the volume at the surface point of the
object that you selected.
• Double right-click in one view (for example, Plan) and then click on
the bore-site line in an orthogonal view (for example Elevation).
SmartPlant Review positions the volume at the intersection of the
bore-sight line and the cursor position.
• Press ESC to complete the placement process with the current default
volume position, dimensions, and orientation.
• Right click to back up one step in the placement process.
5. Determine the size of the volume.
Tips
• For box, scaffolding, and clipping volume types, select the position of
the second corner of the box volume to the current cursor location at
the current model view depth. This defines the height, width, and
depth dimensions of the volume.
• For cylinder, weld, and sphere volume types, select the position of the
radius for the cylinder or sphere. This radius is at the current model
view depth.
Notes
• A white wireframe representation of the volume tracks the current
size. The current model view depth for the cursor is determined by the
volume position.
• The volume size for the current cursor location displays in the status
bar. For box volumes, these dimensions represent depth, width, and
height. For cylinder or sphere volumes, these dimensions represent the
radius.
6. If you are placing cylinder or weld volume types, place a point to determine the
orientation and length of the volume.

7. If necessary, select any yellow highlighted part of the volume glyph to enter the
adjustment mode. See Volume Annotation Adjust Command (Tools Menu), page
504 for more information.
Notes
• To create a new volume annotation after editing an existing volume
annotation, click Clear first.
• If you are creating a new volume, the Volume Annotation dialog box
will automatically display if the Automatically edit new volume
check box on the Volume Annotation Dimensions and Options tab
is turned on. If this option is turned off, you can use the Tools >
Volume Annotation > Edit command to the volume annotation.
• If cylinder volume annotations display as triangles, increase the
stroking tolerance for the view. See Advanced Tab, page 101 for more
information.
Module.
Related Topics
• Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box, page 273
• Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box, page 277
• Placing Volume Annotations: An Overview, page 262
Create a New Volume Annotation Category

1. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit.
2. Click the Definition tab.
3. Click Edit.
4. Type a name for the new category.
5. Click Add.
Note
Module.
Related Topics

Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category

3. Click Edit.
4. Select the category that you want to inactivate from the list.
5. Click Inactivate.
Notes
• SmartPlant Review marks the category inactive in the database but
does not be deleted from the database. Other records may still be using
the inactivated category and require the category record be maintained
in the database.
Module.
Related Topics
Edit a Volume Annotation

3. Select the volume annotation that you want to change from the list.
4. Make the changes to meet your needs.
5. Click Apply.
Note
Module.
Related Topics

Adjust a Volume Annotation

1. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust.
2. Select the volume annotation that you want to change.
3. Click to accept the highlighted volume.
4. Select any yellow highlighted part of the volume glyph to enter the adjustment
mode. See Volume Annotation Adjust Command (Tools Menu), page 504 for more
information.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
Find a Volume Annotation

3. Select the volume annotation that you want to find from the list.
4. Click Find.
Tip
• SmartPlant Review fits the volume annotation in the Main view.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
• Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box), page 273
• Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box),
page 275
• Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box), page 274

Delete a Single Volume Annotation

3. Select the volume annotation that you want to delete from the list.
4. Click Delete.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
page 275

Delete All Volume Annotations by Type

3. Select the category of annotation that you want to delete from the list.
4. Click Delete All.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
page 275
Load and Display a Clipping Volume

3. Set the Type to clipping volume.
4. Click Clip Volume.
Notes
• To turn the clipping volume on and off, you can click the Activate
Clipping Volume button or click View > Advanced > Activate
Clipping Volume.
• Clipping volumes only work in shaded and the wireframe modes.
Hidden line and raytracing do not work with clipping volumes.
Module.
Related Topics
page 275

Import Volume Annotations

1. Click File > Import > Volume Annotations.
3. Click each Name to select.
Notes
• You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotations
in the file for importing.
Module.
Related Topics
Export Volume Annotations

1. Click File > Export > Volume Annotations.
3. Click each Name to select.
Notes
• You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotations
in the file for exporting.
Module.
Related Topics
• Export Volume Annotations Command (File Menu), page 417

Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box

Allows you to review, edit, and create volume annotations. Volume annotations can
be of three basic geometric types: boxes, cylinders, or spheres. Three additional
special types are also provided: scaffolds (boxes), field welds (cylinders) and clipping
volumes (boxes). The volume annotations are saved in the SmartPlant Review project
database. The original design files are not modified. The Volume Annotation data
does not go back to the PDS database or any other software.
Volume annotations can be used to represent temporary and permanent areas or

objects in the model. Temporary items like construction scaffolds and construction
parking lots can be placed in the model for construction work planning. Field welds
can be identified and marked for tracking and testing purposes. Special security areas,
work areas or construction lay down yards also can be identified using volume
annotations.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
• Volume Annotation Adjust Command (Tools Menu), page 504
Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box)
Defines the volume annotation.
Type - Allows you to pick one of the volume annotation types.
Current volume
Name - displays the name of the volume annotation.
Description - displays the description associated with the volume annotation.
Status - displays the status associated with the volume annotation.
Category - displays the category associated with the volume annotation.
Place - places the volume annotation in the project.
Clear - removes any text from the Name, Description, Status, and Category fields.
Edit - displays the Edit Category dialog box so that you can add to or delete from
the list of available categories.
Volumes - displays all the volume annotations of the selected type currently defined
in the project. You can sort the list by one of the categories by clicking that category
heading.

Find - fits and displays the selected volume annotation in the Main window.
Delete - removes the selected volume annotation from the project.
Delete All - removes all volume annotations from the project.
Clip Volume - generates a clipping volume for the selected volume annotation.
Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box)

Defines the look of the volume annotation.
Volume name - displays the name of the active volume annotation.
Display
On - displays the volume annotation in the project.
Shaded - shades the volume annotation.
Transparent when shaded - sets the shaded volume annotation to be transparent so

that you can see the objects within the volume.
Wireframe
Width - specifies the width of the lines for the wireframe.
Pattern
Solid - specifies a solid line for the wireframe.
Dash - specifies a dashed line for the wireframe.
Dot-dash - specifies a dot-dash line for the wireframe.
Dot - specifies a dotted line for the wireframe.
Materials
Color - displays the color associated with the volume annotation.
Edit - displays the Color dialog box from which you can select a color to associate
with the volume annotation.
File number - displays the default volume annotation file number.
Level index from 1 to - specifies the upper range of levels. The level index can be
from 1 to 63.
Color index from 0 to - specifies the upper range of colors. The color index can be
from 0 to 255

Note
• If you change the color of a volume annotation on a given level and
color, you will change the color of all the volume annotations and
optional lights that are assigned to that level and color. When you
change the color of a volume annotation, select the level and color for
the volume annotation first.
Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog

Box)
Defines the look of the size, location, and placement options for the volume
annotation.
Volume name - displays the name of the active volume annotation.
Origin point in MU:SU:PU

North - displays the distance from the project origin in the North (Y) direction.
East - displays the distance from the project origin in the East (X) direction.
Elevation - displays the distance from the project origin in the Elevation (Z) direction.
Size
Metric units - specifies the unit type for the volume annotation. If this option is
turned off, the units are English.
Units - displays the master unit associated with the volume annotation. The value in
this field depends on whether the Metric units option is turned off or on.
Width - displays the width (dimension in the X direction) of the volume annotation.
Depth - displays the depth (dimension in the Y direction) of the volume annotation.
Height - displays the height (dimension in the Z direction) of the volume annotation.
Radius - displays the radius of the volume annotation.
Length - displays the length of the volume annotation.
Placement options
Place with dialog dimensions - places new volume annotations using the dimensions
on this dialog box rather than calculating dimensions based on data points that you
place in the project.
Automatically edit new volume - automatically opens the Volume Annotation

dialog box when you place a new volume annotation.

Edit Categories Dialog Box

Allows you to add or remove volume annotation categories.
New
Name - Specifies the name for the new volume annotation category that you want to
add.
Add - Includes the new category name in the list of available categories.
Categories
Names - Provides a list of available category names.
Inactivate - Removes the selected category name from the list, and marks that
category name as inactive in the project database.
Related Topics
Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box

Allows you to import volume annotations from other project databases.
Database file name - Specifies the name of the project database from which you
want to import volume annotations.
Import - Imports the selected volume annotations without closing the dialog box.
Clear All - Selects none of the names in the list.
Related Topics
• Import Volume Annotations Command (File Menu), page 413
• Import Volume Annotations, page 272

Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box

Allows you to export volume annotations to other project databases.
Database file name - Specifies the name of the project database to which you want to
export volume annotations.
Export - Exports the selected volume annotations without closing the dialog box.
Clear All - Selects none of the names in the list.
Related Topics
• Export Volume Annotations Command (File Menu), page 417
• Export Volume Annotations, page 272
Attaching External Data: An Overview

SmartPlant Review can display virtually any data attached to an object, including
documents, spreadsheets, text files, MicroStation files, sounds, and animation.
SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Jet database engine to store and manage the
associations between SmartPlant Review data and the external data.
The Get External Data commands allow you to create an attachment by associating
objects in a project to external information based on PDS label data. The Get
External Data feature is similar to Tools > Data Annotation. However, unlike data
annotations that display icons in the Main view, associated Get External Data
applications result in entries on the Get External Data menu. You can add, edit, or
delete these menu entries. Any changes that you make are written to the Microsoft
Access Get External Data database file for your project.
Caution
• Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically
attach the file to every element with the same attribute value.
• Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will
automatically delete that attachment from every element with the same
attribute value.
Related Topics
• Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 285
• Edit Types Dialog Box, page 286

The Get External Data Database

Get External Data queries tables in a Microsoft Access database (.mdb file
extension) to manage the files and their associated applications that display as menu
entries in the Get External Data menu. See the Microsoft Access User's Guide for
details on using the database software.
If the database does not exist, Get External Data will allow you to browse for the
file. You also can tell Get External Data to look for the database in another location
by creating a text file named GetData.txt in the project folder and setting the second
line to the path and filename of the database. The path can be a UNC path.
Important
• Your Get External Data database must contain the following three
tables: CriteriaList, MenuList, and DataTable.
• You must name these tables exactly as shown.
• For each of these tables, the column names can be changed, but must
remain in the order specified below.
• Changes to the column names will be reflected in the column header
names for the Edit Attachments and Edit Types dialogs boxes.
CriteriaList Use the Edit Attachments dialog box to add entries to this table.
The table must contain the following two columns:
ID - Contains a unique number that links the attribute names in

the Criteria column of this table to the attribute values in the
DataKey column of the DataTable.
Criteria - Contains the attributes names. These names populate

the Match Criteria column on the Edit Attachments dialog
box. Attribute names must be no longer than 50 characters.
MenuList Use the Edit Types dialog box to add or edit entries in this table.
The table must contain the following four columns:
DataType - Contains a unique number that links the FileName

column of this table with the FileName column in the
DataTable.
FileName - Specifies the type of data that is externally attached

to an attribute value. The ExecuteStr column in this table
uniquely associates these types with the program. These types
populate the Type column in the Edit Attachment dialog box
and appear as entries in the Get External Data popup menu.
There is a 50 character maximum limit for this field.
ExecuteStr - Specifies the name and, optionally, the location of

the executables for each type of data in the FileName column of

this table. ExecuteStr can contain any executable file type (for
example, .exe, .com, .bat). These program names populate the
Executable column on the Edit Type dialog box. If the path to
the program is not specified, it is searched for in the following
sequence:
1. Project folder
2. Current folder
3. Windows folder
4. Windows System folder
5. All of the paths set in the Path environment
variable
DefaultDir - (optional) Specifies the folder in which to search for
the external data file if there is no folder specified in the
Directory column in the DataTable.
DataTable Use the Edit Attachments dialog box to add or edit entries in
this table. The table must contain the following six columns:
Id - Contains a unique number used to index the entries in this

table.
Criteria - Contains a unique number that links the attribute

values in the DataKey column in this table with the attribute
names in the Criteria column of the CriteriaList table.
DataKey - Contains the attribute values that have external data

attached to them. These values populate the Match Criteria
column on the Edit Attachments dialog box. This field has a
255 character limit.
DataType - Contains a unique number that links the FileName

column in this table with the FileName column (containing the
data type) of the MenuList table.
FileName - Specifies the name of the external data file and

serves as the argument to the program specified in the
ExecuteStr column in the MenuList table. These external data
files names populate the Filename column on the Edit
Attachments dialog box and display on the Get External Data
popup menu.
If ExecuteStr specifies an executable (such as .exe, .bat, or

.com), that executable is launched with FileName as its
argument. If ExecuteStr is set to Default (which is an empty

string) or does not point to a valid executable, SmartPlant Review

calls ShellExecute, which finds the association for the extension
of FileName in the registry and launches the Open command for
that file association. For example: if ExecuteStr contained
Default and FileName contained a .txt file, the text file would be
opened using Notepad because the registry entry ".txt" is
associated with the registry entry "txtfile" that has a shell open
command specifying notepad.exe as the executable.
Directory - Specifies the location that Get External Data first

searches for the external data file specified in FileName. If
Directory is empty, then Get External Data searches the
specified folder for that external file's data type in the DefaultDir
column in the MenuList table. If that text box is also empty, the
current working folder is used for the search. If the file is still not
found, a message will appear.
upgrade_version This table cannot be edited through the SmartPlant Review user
interface and should not be edited by the user. It must contain the
following columns:
schema_upgrade_version - Tracks the version of the database

schema.
schema_upgrade_date - Tracks the date of the database schema.
Related Topics
Attach External Data to a PDS Project

1. Select a graphic object in the model.
2. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments.

3. Click Insert on the Edit Attachments dialog box.

4. From the Match Criteria list, select the label data attribute to which the external
data will be attached.
5. From the Type list, select the file type for the attached data file.
6. On the Getdata Filename / Argument dialog box, browse to the data file that
you want to attach. Be sure the file that you select is of the same type that you
specified in the preceding step.
7. Specify any arguments for the data file in the Arguments box, then click OK.
The Edit Attachments dialog box should now list the new attachment.
8. Click OK on the Edit Attachments dialog box. The Tools > Get External Data
menu should now show the new attachment type:

All objects in your drawing that contain the label data attribute that you selected
(for example, Sequence) set to the same value (in this example, Pumps) will have
the same file attached (in this example, Richfield.jpg).
Caution
attribute value.
Related Topics
Add Types
1. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types.

2. Click the Insert button.
3. Select an executable from the Select Executable dialog box.
4. Select a folder from the Default Directory dialog box.
5. Select an existing type or select (Edit) and create a new type.

Note
• The name of the new type cannot be the same as one of the existing
types.
Edit Types
1. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types.
2. Double-click an entry in the Type column to open the entry for editing.
3. Type a new Type name. In this example the Type name Spreadsheet is changed
to Tank.
4. Click OK to accept the changes.

5. The Tools > Get External Data menu should now show the new attachment
Type name.

Tips
• To change the executable associated with a type in the Edit Types
dialog box, double-click an entry in the Executable column and select
a new executable from the Select Executable dialog box.
• To change the default folder associated with a particular type, double-
click an entry in the Default Directory column on the Edit Types
dialog box and select a new folder from the Default Directory dialog
box.
Related Topics
• Attach External Data to a PDS Project, page 280
Edit Attachments Dialog Box

Allows you to view a list of the files that are attached to a selected object. You can
insert or delete attachments using the commands on this dialog box. You also can
associate file types with executable programs.
Caution
attribute value.
Insert - Allows you to add additional files to the selected object. After selecting the
appropriate label data and entering a new or existing type, the Getdata Filename /
Argument dialog box displays, allowing you to select a file name or argument for the
new attachment. The Insert command can be existed prior to completion by pressing
Escape.
Delete - Removes the link from the attribute value to the external data file, but does
not delete the external data file.
Edit Types - Displays the Edit Types dialog box, which allows you to define the
application used to open files of a selected type when using the Get External Data
command.
Related Topics
• Edit Attachments Command (Tools Menu), page 511

Getdata Filename / Argument Dialog Box

Allows you to select a filename or argument for a new attachment.
Filename - Displays the result of using the Browse button. If the type selection was
Default, the file must be an executable (.exe, .bat, or .com).
Browse - Allows you to navigate to the file (or attachment) that you want.
Argument(s) - Allows you to add text to the file name to act as an argument
Related Topics
Edit Types Dialog Box

Allows you to associate file types with executable programs. You also can use this
dialog box to delete associations.
Insert - Allows you to create a new type. After selecting the executable from the
Select Executable dialog box, select the default folder and then enter the new type.
You can exit the Insert command prior to completion by pressing Escape. You must
click OK for the addition to be saved to the database.
Delete - Removes the selected type from use in the model. Any links that were
established between an object and its external data via this type will also be broken.
You must click OK for the delete to be reflected in the database.
Related Topics
• Edit Types Command (Tools Menu), page 512

Assigning Material Properties: An Overview
Assigning Material Properties: An

Overview
The Material Editor command allows you to assign material properties to model
elements and set various rendering parameters. By assigning material properties to
model elements, you can create photo-realistic renderings with color and surface
characteristics that match the real-world materials of the finished product. The
Material Editor command allows you to access the extensive set of material palette
files provided with SmartPlant Review, or you can create your own materials
interactively. You can preview the effect of several material properties within
Material Editor, including diffuse and specular colors, normal and ambient
reflectivity, transmittance, and refraction. In addition, you can preview the effect of
pattern maps and bump maps, without having to render an actual image. The Material
Editor features an improved user interface and several new functions, such as
transparency, pattern matching, and texture mapping. You can choose a pattern, apply
it to a material, and assign it to an element in the model. You also can apply textures
to display sets.
The Material Editor allows you to assign material definitions to your three
dimensional model (such as wood, metal, glass, stone, and plastic). As you make
material assignments, the Material Editor creates a material table file for your three
dimensional model. The material table contains all the information about the colors,
surface characteristics, patterns, and bump maps assigned to model elements. The
material table file is given the model filename with a .mat extension. For example, the
model file xyz.dgn will have a material table file named xyz.mat. (For a detailed
description of the material table file format see the SmartPlant Review DRAPI
Programming with C++ Guide.) The Material Editor is also used to set various image
rendering parameters. These parameters are also saved in the material table.
Related Topics
• Create Materials from Color Table, page 290
• Define Search Path for Material Files, page 291
• Unassign Materials, page 290
Default Material Palette

The SPRDefault.pal file, which contains a material definition named default, is
delivered in the SmartPlant Review folder when you install the Photo-Realism
module. The default material in this file can be used to specify the default material
properties of elements without assigned materials. The delivered default material has
the look of non-reflective shiny plastic. This palette file is a standard palette file and
can be used as such. It also can be edited using a text editor outside SmartPlant
Review or by using the Edit Materials functionality.

You can now have a common SPRDefault.pal file to set the default material
properties for all of your projects. You also can place a different SPRDefault.pal file
in different project folders and each of those projects could have different default
materials.
Note
Because the SmartPlant Review folder is not included in your default palette search
path, you must copy or move the SPRDefault.pal file to your project folder or to a
folder in your palette search path before you can use the SPRDefault.pal file. If you
do not want to use this file, rename it (or its default material) or remove it from the
palette search path.
If you do not have the Photo-Realism module, if the SPRDefault.pal file is not found
in the current palette search path, or if this file does not contain a material named
default, then the internally hard-coded default material is used for elements without
assigned materials. This hard-coded material has the look of non-reflective shiny
plastic.
The default material for graphic elements without assigned materials is set only when
the project is opened or when you remove a material for that element. Thus, if you
edit the SPRDefault.pal file and its default material during a SmartPlant Review
session, you should not expect to see all the graphic elements without assigned
materials to immediately update. You must either reopen the project or manually
remove materials for each graphic element.
If you have the SPRDefault.pal file in the current palette search path and it contains
a material named default, then those settings, except for color, are used for the
default material.
The graphic element's default color is always retained, regardless of the color
specified in the default material in the SPRDefault.pal file. However, if you assign
this default material to graphic elements, then its color will override the graphic
element's default color, just like when any other material is assigned.
The Photo-Realism Raytracer uses the same default material properties as the shaded
view. This means that raytraces of elements with default materials assigned to them
will look like a "smoother" version of a fully shaded view.
Notes
• You cannot change the material assignments in an existing vue file. If
you open a vue file and change any material settings during that
session, you must create a new vue file in order to retain the new
settings. If you change the default material definition, then you must
manually remove the default material assignment from the graphic
elements that you want to use the modified default material so that

those elements' material assignments will be updated before the new

vue file is created.
• The default material is not an assigned material. For example, you will
receive a message stating No material assignment exists for this
element if you pick a graphic element without an assigned material and
then try to view that element's material assignment in the Assign
Materials to Elements dialog box.
• You will not be prompted to modify your palette search path if the
SPRDefault.pal file is not found while setting the default material.
• Using this SPRDefault.pal file mechanism may add a very slight
overhead to the total project load time.
Related Topics
• Edit Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 485
Assign Materials to Elements

1. Click Tools > Materials > Assign Materials.
2. Click Palette File.
4. Select the material definition that you want to assign.
5. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the material definition by
selecting the model file (from the Files list), level (from the Levels list), and color
(from the Color list) of that surface. Select one of each to identify the surface.
Tip
• You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more
than one model file, level, and color. You can click the Select All to
select all the files, levels, or colors; or, use Clear All to clear all the
file, level, or color entries.
6. Select the Pick command as you need it.
7. Click Apply to save an assignment without exiting the form. Repeat steps 1-5 to
make additional assignments, if necessary.
Tip
• A material table (.mat file) is created for each model file that you
select.

Notes
Related Topics
• Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 484
Unassign Materials
1. Click Tools > Materials > Unassign.
Tip
• You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more
than one model file, level, and color combination. Click Apply to
unassign a material without exiting the form. Repeat these steps to
unassign additional materials, if necessary.
Notes
Related Topics
• Unassign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 485
Create Materials from Color Table

1. Select the IGDS or MicroStation color table that you want to use.
2. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the color table by selecting the
model file, level, and color of the surface. You must select one of each to identify
that surface.
Tip
• Identify multiple surfaces at once by selecting more than one model
file, level, and color. Use Select All to select all the files, levels, or
colors; or, Clear All to clear all the file, level, or color entries.
Notes
• A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the
IGDS or MicroStation color table.
• A material table (.mat file) is created for each model file that you
select, with material assignments based on the colors and levels that
you select.

Related Topics
• Create Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 486
Define Search Path for Material Files

1. Click Browse to select the folder that you want to add to the Search Path.
2. Click Add.
3. Click Move Up or Move Down to reorder the Folders list.
Tips
• SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom.
You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most
likely locations higher in the search list.
• You must add each folder individually, even if you have already added
the parent folder to the Search Path Directories list.
Related Topics
Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box

Allows you to select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display
characteristics. You also can select model elements by choosing the model filename
and identifying the level and color of the element. Also, in the SmartPlant Review
environment, you can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main
view window.
Notes
• Material assignments are not stored in the project database, but are
kept in a .mat file. The project database contains references to the
material assignments stored in the .mat file. To quickly delete these
material assignments, delete the project's .mat file.
Palette File - Displays the name of the active palette file. Select this field and type
the name of an existing palette file or select the list button at the end of the field.
Browse - Determines the pathname to the folder containing the palette files. Select
the folder that contains the palette files that you want to use.

Name - Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file.
Select a material to make it the active material.

Levels - Identifies an element by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn. You
must select both a level and color number to identify an element.
Colors - Identifies an element by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn.
You must select both a level and color number to identify an element.
Files - Displays a list of model files and folders. Identify the model file to which the
material definition will be assigned.
Select All - Selects all levels, colors, or files depending on which list is active.
Clear All - Unselects all levels, colors, or files depending on which list is active.
Show - Displays the material definition assigned to the file, level, and color selected.
The Palette, Material Name, and Preview update to display the assigned material
definition. If an assignment does not exist for the selected file, level, and color, a
message displays stating that there is no assignment.
Pick - Hides the Assign Materials to Elements dialog box so that you can identify a
model element in the Main view. After you select an element, the Levels, Colors, and
Files information for the selected element displays in the dialog box. You can then
assign a material definition to that element.
Related Topics
Unassign Materials Dialog Box

Allows you to unassign materials currently assigned to elements by file, level, and
color indices.
Notes
material assignments, delete the project's .mat file.

Select assignments - Displays the palettes, materials, levels, colors, and files of the
assigned materials. Select a material to make it the active material.

Pick object - Hides the Unassign Materials dialog box so that you can identify a
model element in the Main view. After you select an element, the information for the
selected element displays in the dialog box. You can then unassign a material
definition for that element.
Related Topics
• Unassign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 485
Edit Materials Dialog Box

Allows you to create and edit material definitions. If you want to assign an existing
material to your model, you do not need to use this dialog box. Go directly to the
Tools > Materials > Assign Material command.
Important
Palette - Displays the name of the active palette file. Type the name of the file to
create a new palette file. You also can select Browse to find and open an existing
palette file.
Material name - Specifies the name of the active material definition. Type the name
of the material to create a new material definition, or select one of the materials in the
active palette.
Copy - Copies the material from an object that you select in the model. After you
select an object, the selected object's material surface characteristics are loaded and
the material displays in the Preview.
Replace/Add - Replaces the active material definition with the new values that you
have defined. If you rename the material name, this button changes to an Add button,
allowing you to add the new material definition to the current palette. You also can
create a new palette by typing a new palette name and then creating new material
definitions in that palette.
Delete - Deletes the active material from the active palette file.

Base color
Default - Sets the base color back to the default color.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a new base color.
Specular color
Default - Sets the specular color back to the default color.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a new specular
color. The specular color is the color of the glare. A shiny green surface is rendered
more realistically, for example, when the specular color is tinted toward the diffuse
green color. Specular color is extremely important for the accurate rendering of
metallic surfaces. Gold, for example, has a deep tan/orange diffuse color and a pale
yellow specular highlight. Specular color can only be a solid color.
Diffuse - Controls the intensity of the diffuse color of a material. Diffuse values range
from 0-1, where 0 is black and 1 is 100% color saturation. The diffuse color may be
either a solid color or a bitmap file (rgb, pattern, scan). The intensity value is the
degree to which the diffuse color or pattern contributes to the final look of the
geometry. A highly diffuse intensity results in a high saturation of the diffuse color or
pattern.
Specular - Controls the intensity of the specular features of the material. The specular
property is the degree to which light reflects from the surface of the geometry of the
model. The specular property creates a hot spot or glare, which is proportional to the
surface finish. Specular values can range from 0-1, where 0 is a low specular surface,
such as a tennis ball, and 1 is a high specular surface, such as a cue ball.
Finish - Controls the degree of polish or smoothness on an object's surface. When

light is reflected off of a surface, the finish determines whether it is scattered (a rough
surface) or concentrated (a smooth surface). Finish values range from 0-1, where 0 is
a low polish, such as felt, and 1 is a high polish, such as glass. The finish of a material
interacts directly with its specular characteristics. A high specular value and a high
finish value results in a bright concentrated hot spot on the surface. A high specular
value and a low finish value results in a large glaring hot spot that is scattered all over
the surface.
Reflectivity - Controls the amount of reflectivity that a material exhibits. This

property determines how other surfaces in the model will be reflected in the material.
For example, a pond of water, a mirror, and highly polished metals are all highly
reflective. Reflectivity values range from 0-1, where 0 is no reflectivity and 1 is a
high reflectivity. As the reflectivity value of a material gets higher, environment
clouds begin to appear in the Preview to display the reflectivity.

Use the following guidelines to use reflection mapping:
• Create a pattern file for the reflection in a raster image editor. Use a
spherize filter (or equivalent) to distort the image slightly.
• Turn off the old patterns before applying reflection to objects on which
patterns already are applied.
• Use a high Reflection slider value to display more reflection on the
object than the object's Base Color. Use a low Reflection value to
display more object Base Color than reflection.
Ambient - Controls the ambient reflectivity of a material. The ambient reflectivity of
a material is the degree to which the ambient lighting in the overall model will be
reflected by the surface of the material. The total ambient light value of a surface is
calculated by multiplying the ambient reflectivity value by the model ambient light
setting. The ambient reflectivity value can range from 0-1, where 0 is no ambient
light reflected and 1 is full ambient reflectivity.
For example, if the overall ambient light setting for the model is set to 1.0, and a
material has an ambient reflectivity value of 0.10, model elements using that material
will have an effective ambient lighting value of 10%. A lower ambient light value
causes the shadows that fall on the material to be dark, with a high contrast between
the directly and indirectly lit areas. A higher ambient light value results in a more
uniformly lit surface, fainter shadows, and less overall contrast in lighting. This
would be desirable, for example, if you wanted to create a bright, uniformly lit ceiling
in a room.
Transmittance - Controls the transmittance of a material. Transmittance is the degree

of transparency that a surface exhibits. You can select values of 0 (0% transparent,
opaque), 50 (screen door transparency), or 100 (100% transparent, or invisible). The
screen door range shades surfaces by omitting every other pixel. As you change the
transmittance value of a material, the background image behind the Preview becomes
visible to illustrate the degree of transparency.
Note
• Remember that the diffuse color should be evaluated when you are
using transparent and reflective surfaces. A high diffuse value can
saturate the material with diffuse color and thus override most of the
reflectivity or transparency. By setting the diffuse color intensity
(saturation) lower, the object becomes more transparent and less
opaque when transmittance is used. For example, a clear drinking glass
should have a white diffuse color, a very low diffuse intensity value
(0.01), and a high transmit intensity value (100).
Refraction - Controls the angle of refraction on a material. Refraction is the bending
of light as it passes through transparent surfaces. The lens of a pair of eyeglasses, for
example, would exhibit refraction. A straw in a clear glass of water also appears to
bend, when viewed from certain angles, due to refraction.

Refraction values range from 1.0-2.0, where 1.0 is no refraction and 2.0 is high
refraction. For example, water has some refraction (1.20) because it causes objects to
appear distorted when they are immersed. Refractive surfaces must also be
transparent (have a high transmittance setting). When a material is transparent and
refraction is high, the image behind the Preview appears distorted to illustrate the
degree of refraction.
You can define Refraction as less than 1.0. The default value of 1.0 still equals no
refraction. For example, a Refraction value of 1.2 is good for light passing from air
into water or glass. Use a value less than 1.0 when the eye point is inside water or
glass looking into air.
Pattern Weight - Mixes the percentage of pattern and base color for a material.
Values range from 0 (all color) to 1 (all pattern); midrange values are a mix of both
attributes.
Preview - Displays the material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface.

The sphere updates as you modify the material's display properties.
Pattern - Specifies the diffuse color between a solid and a pattern. The diffuse color
may be either a solid color or a bitmap image file (rgb, pattern, scan). You can edit a
solid color or choose an image file for the diffuse color. See Adjust Pattern for more
information.
Bump Map - Specifies the bump map pattern file. When you select the bump map, it
appears in the Preview. See Adjust Bump for more information.
Fresnel - Activates fresnel characteristics. When on, fresnel makes transparent

objects more opaque on curved and angular surfaces, such as a soap bubble: the
steeper the angle at which you view the surface, the greater the reflection and
opaqueness of the surface. The effects of this command appear in the Preview.
Shadows - Activates shadows. Activate if you want materials to cast shadows in a

Phong-shaded mode. The effects of this option appear in the Preview.
Related Topics

Adjust Pattern Dialog Box

Defines the pattern you want to associate with an object. You can base pattern size on
the model working units so that patterns are not stretched or distorted to fit surfaces.
Surface mode stretches the pattern to the extent of the element.
SmartPlant Review also supports texture mapping. You can choose a pattern, apply it
to a material, and assign it to an element in the model.
File Name - Defines the pattern that you want to associate with an object.
Units - Allows you to choose Surface, Sub Units, or Master Units for the pattern.
X Offset - Specifies offset from the X-axis. The pattern is placed at the specified
offset. This offset is a percentage of the rgb raster file size. For example, a value of .5
equals a 50% offset. (You also can have a negative (-) value.)
Y Offset - Specifies offset from the Y-axis. The pattern is placed at the specified
X Scale - Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the pattern. The software
then applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale. For example, a scale
factor of two scales the image pattern to twice its size. A scale factor of .25 scales the
pattern to 1/4 its size, allowing four patterns to fit on the surface.
Y Scale - Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the pattern. The software then
applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale.
Angle - Specifies the angle to rotate the pattern. A positive value rotates the pattern
counterclockwise, whereas a negative value rotates the pattern clockwise.
Gamma - Specifies the gamma correction for a pattern. This prevents double gamma
correction on the pattern so that it does not appear washed out when applied. This
value is necessary in files saved in formats other than .rgb (for example, .bmp or .tif)
because these types of files were saved with gamma correction.
Transparent Background - Specifies whether the background is visible or

transparent. A transparent background is useful for applying decals to surfaces. A
common usage is for adding foliage. The effect of a transparent background is
displayed in the Preview.
Mirror Y - Specifies whether or not to mirror the pattern about the Y-axis.
Related Topics

Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box

Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object.
File name - Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object.
Units - Allow you to choose Surface, Sub Units, or Master Units for the bump map.
X Offset - Specifies offset from the X-axis. The bump map is placed at the specified
Y Offset - Specifies offset from the Y-axis. The bump map is placed at the specified
X Scale - Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the bump map. The software
then applies the bump map to the surface at the specified scale.
Y Scale - Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the bump map. The software
then applies the bump map at the specified scale.
Angle - Specifies the angle to rotate the bump map. A positive value rotates the bump
map counterclockwise, whereas a negative value rotates the bump map clockwise.
Height - Specifies the height at which to apply the bump map.
Inverted - Inverts the bump map display.
Mirror Y - Specifies whether or not to mirror the bump map about the Y-axis.
Related Topics

Create Materials Dialog Box

Allows you to create a palette (.pal) and material table (.mat) file from an existing
IGDS or MicroStation color table (.tbl). A palette file is created with material
definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The colors in the
.tbl table are used in the material definition, and default values are given to the
remaining display properties and rendering parameters. The resulting
RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the .tbl colors. You also can edit
the resulting palette through the Edit Materials command.
Note
• This command overwrites any existing material table.
IGDS color table - Specifies the IGDS or MicroStation color table to convert. Most
color table files have a .tbl extension.
Levels - Identifies a surface by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn.
Select Select All to select all the levels.
Color - Identifies a surface by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn.
Select Select All to select all the colors.
Files - Displays a list of model files and folders. Select the model file for which to
create the material table (.mat) file.
Select All - Selects all the files, levels, or colors.
Clear All - Clears all the current selections.
Related Topics
• Create Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 486

Search Path Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated
with your project.
Note
• The Search Path dialog box appears while SmartPlant Review is
opening your design file for the first time if it cannot find, in the
Design File Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to the
model.
Directory - Allows you to specify a folder containing the pattern or bump map file
that you are assigning to the current object.
Browse - Allows you to specify a different folder.
Search Path - Displays the folders currently in the search path and allows you to add
and remove folders, and to re-order the list of folders.
Add - Adds the current folder to the bottom of the search path list of folders to use for
Delete - Removes the selected folder from the search path list of folders to use for
Move Up - Moves the selected folder up one level in the search path list of folders.
SmartPlant Review searches first for folders listed closer to the top. You can find
patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the
search list.
Move Down - Moves the selected folder down one level in the search path list of
folders. SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You
can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher
in the search list.
Related Topics

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An

Overview
SmartPlant Review's Photo-Realism module provides basic features for creating
realistic, high-quality images from a three dimensional model. These images are
important for users to communicate and promote a clear understanding of a project.
For example, EPCs might use in-depth visualizations to sell a final design to an
owner-operator, or an owner-operator might use visualization to study light
placement in maintenance areas of a plant.
SmartPlant Review uses a raytracing algorithm to build these images. Once the user
assigns materials to objects and places lights in the model, advanced rendering
techniques can transform the three dimensional model into photograph quality art.
The memory-efficient raytracer is multi-threaded to take advantage of all the
available processors on the user's computer, so even very large models can be
rendered quickly.
Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview

The Photo-Realism Settings command provides features that allow you to do the
following:
• Specify options for background and environment box images.

• Control the quality and speed of the raytrace program on a per
model/material basis.
• Define settings for Reflective or Transmittance Threshold and Bounce,
Gamma, and Anti-alias level.
• Enable raytrace generation without shadows.
• Specify whether SmartPlant Review renders the entire model, or only
the part of the model within the view cone.
Related Topics
• Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 301
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box

Provides features that allow you to load a background image and environment box
into the Main view. You also can use this dialog box to control the quality and speed
of the raytracing program, as well as choose options for improving system
performance during raytracing operations.

Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for loading a background image and environment box into the Main
view. Although these image settings are only available with the Photo-Realism
module, the background and environment box can appear in any render mode, not just
shaded or raytrace. These images can be in any of the image type formats supported
by SmartPlant Review, including .bmp, .tif, .rgb, .tga, and so on.
None - Specifies that you do not want any environment displays in the scene.
Background - Specifies that you want to display a background image in the Main
view. Like wallpaper on the Windows desktop, the background image is sized to the
view and always appears the same; regardless of what eye location or view angle that
you specify.
Environment box - Specifies that you want to surround the three dimensional model
space with several images. You can specify up to six different images, one for each
side of the environment box. The images are not sized to the screen. Instead, a
correct, infinite environment map is created before a shade or wireframe update. The
environment map is created dynamically during a raytrace. As with background
images, different sides of the box are visible with different view angles and eye
locations.
MicroStation - Specifies that any MicroStation® source lights (that are on) be
displayed in the rendered image. If this option is not selected, no MicroStation source
lights are used when rendering the image.
Shaded view - Specifies that you want to display point, distance, spot, and area lights
in the shaded view of the model, as well as the rendered image.
Image files - Lists all of the possible file types and their locations for the background
image and environment box.
Clear - Removes a file name and path from the Location list.
Modify - Displays the Modify Location dialog box, in which you can add or modify
an image file location.
Note
• To add or modify the location of an image file, you must click a row in
the Image files list box, and then click Modify.
Related Topics
• Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu), page 450

Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the quality and speed of the raytracing program.
During the raytracing process, the software sends rays across the monitor like a
scanner.
There are two types of raytracing: forward and backward. SmartPlant review uses
backward raytracing. In backward raytracing, the software starts from the eye and
sends a ray that goes into the scene and looks for light. Forward raytracing looks for
light and then sends a ray back to the eye.
Because raytracing gives the effects of shadows, reflections, and transparency, it is

significantly better than the smooth texture shading offered by OpenGL. However,
raytracing is not truly photo realistic; the options on this tab are designed to
compensate for the imperfections in the raytracing technology.
Notes
• During raytracing, 95% of the algorithm's time is spent looking in the
model to see whether the ray hit anything, and then attempting to
identify what it hit.
• Raytraced reflective surfaces are true reflections of the environment
and do not depend upon applied reflective textures.
• Although forward raytracing is far superior in quality, the performance
cost is extremely high.
Related Topics

Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Reflective threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global threshold that
determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of shiny
surfaces in the model, such as mirrors.
For example, if the model contains a large shiny surface that is close to the eye point,
such as a building with large surfaces of mirrored glass, you should set this option to
a low value to produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. However, if a
model contains a reflective object that is very far from the eye point, this option
should be set to a high value. This prevents the raytracer from computing reflection
rays that will have little influence on the overall quality of the image.
Tip
• Decreasing the number of reflection rays by setting the value closer to
1 can significantly increase performance.
Notes
• Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and
material in the model, you are encouraged to modify these settings and
re-run the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you
want.
• We recommend that you set this control to 0.6, which means only
objects greater than 60% reflective will not have additional reflection
rays spawned.
• In the Material Editor dialog box, the Reflectivity setting of the
object's material determines whether or not the object is reflective. If
the object is not reflective, additional rays are not fired.
• If the Reflectivity setting (found in the Material Editor dialog box)
for a texture is greater than or equal to 0.15 (15%), the texture will be
environment mapped in shaded OpenGL mode. Environment mapping
gives a curved or mirrored appearance to the texture.
• The Finish setting of the material (found in the Material Editor
dialog box) determines the smoothness of the object surface and
controls whether and by what amount the second ray is skewed.
Related Topics
• Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 303

Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab)

If the raytracer needs to spawn additional reflection rays to determine the color of a
reflective object, such as a mirror, the Reflective bounce from 1 to 16 option allows
you to specify the number of additional rays.
Important
• Color intensity decreases with each bounce.
Notes
• We recommend setting this control to 2 because, in most cases, only
two reflections are required to correctly determine the pixel color of a
reflective surface. Because most objects in nature aren't very
reflective, a high setting like 16 would be necessary only if you were
conducting a study in a house of mirrors.
want.
• Reflective bounces are expensive in terms of performance.
Related Topics
Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Transmittance threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global stop threshold
that determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of
transparent surfaces in the model, such as glass.
For example, if the model contains many transparent surfaces that are close to the eye
point, such as a glass milk bottle factory, you should set this option to a low value in
order to produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. However, if the model
contains a transparent object that is very far from the eye point, you should set this
option to a high value to limit the number of reflection rays the raytracer computes.
Tip
• Decreasing the number of transmittance rays by setting the value
closer to 1 can significantly increase performance.
Notes
want.

• In the Material Editor dialog box, the Transmittance setting of the

material of the object determines whether or not the object is
transparent. At a minimum, transparent objects always create at least
two additional rays. If the object is not transparent, additional rays are
not fired.
• The Refraction setting of the material (defined in the Material Editor

dialog box) determines the thickness of the object surface and how
much the third ray should bend.
• We recommend setting this control to 0.4, which means objects greater
than 40% transparent will have additional transmittance rays created.
Related Topics
Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab)
If the raytracer needs to create additional rays to determine the color of a transparent
object, such as glass or clear plastic, the Transmittance bounce from 1 to 16 allows
you to specify the number of additional rays necessary.
Important
• Color intensity decreases with each bounce.
Tip
• We recommend setting this control is 5. Although the raytracer
supports up to 16 transparent bounces for those models that contain
many transparent surfaces, such as a milk bottle factory, a single
object can only be hit with 5 transparent bounces.

Notes
want.
• Transmittance bounces are expensive in terms of performance. This
safeguard prevents recursion overflow such as the inside of a
Christmas tree ornament or other perfectly, spherical, shiny transparent
objects.
Related Topics
Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Gamma from 0 to 4 option specifies a value for correcting red, green, and blue
(RGB) values when the raytracing output goes to video frame buffers that do not have
gamma adjustments or to Intergraph RGB file formats. This value is applied to each
pixel as an RGB triplet prior to final output.
Important
• Only users who are using a hardware frame buffer should modify the
default value for this option.
• This option does not control image brightness when there are too few
or too many lights in the scene.
Tip
• We recommend setting for this control is 1, but only if gamma
correction is needed. Otherwise, the setting should be 0.
Note
want.
Related Topics

Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Anti-alias level from 1 to 13 option specifies the number of rays per pixel that
the raytracer should fire to determine the final color.
Tips
• We recommend setting this control to 1.
• To simulate the ModelView settings of low and high anti-aliasing, use
3 rays for low and 9 rays for high.
Important
• Increasing this option slows the performance speed of the raytracer.
Use this option to reduce the jagged edges of surfaces that should appear smooth.
At a setting of 1, only a single ray is fired into each pixel, and that ray goes directly
into the center of the pixel. As a result, objects that are only partially displayed in the
pixel may be missed. The following illustration shows where all the rays are fired as
you increase the number of rays through anti-aliasing.

Tip
• Increasing anti-aliasing from 1 to 2 does not necessarily double
raytracing time. It depends on whether or not the second ray hits an
object and has to spawn additional rays.
Notes
want.
• Although the raytracer supports an anti-alias setting of up to 13 rays
per pixel, additional rays are fired only if the primary ray determines
that potential additional intersections in the ray cone exist. This
method prevents unwanted and time-consuming rays against flat
surfaces
Related Topics
Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Generate shadows option overrides all other lighting shadow options (global
and source) to generate raytraced images without shadows. With this setting you can
avoid manually turning off shadows for every individual light in the model. By
default, this option is selected.
Important
• When this option is disabled, no shadows are generated in the
raytraced image, even if all lights have shadows turned on.
Notes
want.
Related Topics

Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Raytrace option enables you to raytrace the preview globe on the Material
Editor and other material dialog boxes.
Note
• Raytracing the globe provides a better representation of materials,
especially materials with ambient properties.
Related Topics
Background Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Neutral gray background option allows you to use a neutral gray background
instead of the pipes behind the preview globe on the Material Editor and other
material dialog boxes. This option shows the material color a little more clearly.
Related Topics
• Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 302
Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box)
Provides options for improving system performance during raytracing operations.
Illumination threshold from 0 to 1 - Specifies the minimum threshold for firing rays
into dark areas. The default value is 0.11, which is almost black.
Spawned rays from 1 to 100 - Specifies the total number of rays the raytracer
spawns to calculate the illumination of a pixel. The default value is 8.
Important
• Higher values increase the amount of time necessary to raytrace the
image.
Everywhere - Specifies rays will extend throughout the entire model, not just within
the view. When this option is selected, all the lights, textures, and other information
in the model must be loaded into memory for the raytrace. For this reason, of the two
options available, this option causes the most performance degradation.
Only within the View Cone - Specifies that rays will only extend within the volume
of the view cone. However, all light sources, whether in the view or not, are
considered when rendering the view. Setting this option means that objects located
outside the view cone have no affect on rays generated in their direction. Objects
outside of the view cone will also not cast shadows into the view.

Use only a single processor for raytraces - Specifies that only one of multiple
available processors be used by the raytracer.
Important
• Select this option if you want to continue working in other programs
while the raytracer generates the image.
Notes
• As rays bounce around a scene, the contribution of light diminishes.
For areas that are below the value defined in the Illumination
threshold, the raytracer does not fire any rays.
Related Topics
OpenGL Lighting
While not as accurate as the raytracer, OpenGL lights are well-suited for providing a
quick and approximate preview of what the lighting looks like in the raytracer. Of
note are the distinct differences in how each lights a drawing. OpenGL relies on a
geometric vertex-by-vertex basis, whereas the raytracer lights a drawing on a pixel-
by-pixel basis. Consequently, the resulting output of the two methods is not identical.
Usage of OpenGL lighting is controlled using the Activate source lights option on
the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box. OpenGL lights are used once the following
conditions have been met:
• Photo-Realism module is installed.

• The Shaded view check box in the Activate source lights option is
selected.
• Lights have been placed in the model.
• The lights in the model are turned on.
Important
When any one of the following conditions exist, SmartPlant Review's default sun is
used in place of OpenGL lights:
• The Photo-Realism module is not installed.

• The Shaded view check box in the Activate source lights option has
not been selected.
• There are no lights in the model.
• There are lights in the model, but none of the lights are turned on.

Notes
• There are limitations to using OpenGL lights, as illustrated in the
following diagrams. In each diagram, the circles represent spotlights.
The red circles are spotlights that are visible, and the black circles are
spotlights that are not visible.
• OpenGL lights a triangle only if light hits a vertex on that triangle -
any lighting shining in between vertices will not show up on a triangle.
• Although OpenGL does shine light through solid objects, unlike the
raytracer, it does not know when to stop.
The triangle on the left will light because the spotlight is shining on at least one
vertex. The triangle on the right will not light because the spotlight shines between
the vertices.
The rectangular plane (shape) is drawn as two large triangles. The spotlight circle
(shown in red) on the upper-left corner will be visible in the plane because it is
shining on a vertex. The spotlight circle (shown in black) in the middle of the plane
will not be visible because it does not hit a vertex.
Related Topics
• Attenuation Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box), page 327
• Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab), page 304
• View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates, page 59

Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview

The Global Light Settings command provides features that allow you to control the
global lighting in the model. The options that you can modify are:
• Ambient lighting
• Flashbulb lighting
• Solar lighting
• Fog
Related Topics
• Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview, page 301
Global Lighting Dialog Box

Provides features that allow you to control lighting properties globally within the
model.
Note
Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the light that envelops objects. Ambient light
simulates light scatter in nature, and it is used to soften shadows and simulated
natural light shining through a window. When used properly, ambient light can
closely simulate a radiosity solution. Ambient light also can be designed for use with
scene lighting.
Activate - Allows you to use ambient lighting in the raytraced image. Ambient light
affects only those objects that have a value for material ambient reflectivity. Objects
that have no ambient reflectivity will not reflect light and could appear black if no
additional lights are defined in the scene. Because ambient light is not cumulative,
objects in front of a mirror are not brighter than the mirror itself.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the ambient light. We recommend

setting this option is 0.15.
Color - Controls the color of the ambient light. A recommended setting for this
control is white (RGB 255, 255, 255).
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for
the ambient light.

Related Topics
• Global Lighting Dialog Box, page 313
• Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu), page 450
Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)
Provides options for controlling the light from a camera flashbulb. This type of
lighting is particularly useful for people who want to create "pretty pictures" but do
not know how to set the lights properly in their models. A warning appears in the
Text window if no lights have been defined in the current scene, and to prevent an un-
viewable render, a default flashbulb light is used automatically.
Activate - Allows you to use flashbulb lighting in the raytraced image. Flashbulb
lighting does not generate shadows because the flashbulb location is the same as the
eye point. As a result, flash lighting is also useful during material setup to determine
the overall color balance of the image. Flashbulb lighting acts as a point light at the
camera lens. As with point lights, there is light falloff from the camera, which is
controlled by Intensity.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the flashlight bulb. We recommend

setting this option to 0.70.
Color - Controls the color of the flashbulb light. We recommend setting this option to
white (RGB 255, 255, 255).
the flashbulb light.
Notes
• Flashbulb lighting should be used rather than ambient lighting when
no lights are present in the model because flashbulb lighting is not
affected by material ambient reflectivity.
Related Topics
Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)
Provides options for controlling the light from the sun.
Activate - Allows you to use sunlight in the current scene.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the solar light. We recommend

setting this option to 0.70.
Color - Displays the current color of the solar light. We recommend setting this
control to white (RGB 255, 255, 255).

the solar light.
Cast shadows - Allows you to generate shadows from the solar light.
Latitude - Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. This
position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either North or South. You
can type values in these fields or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the
model's latitude.
Longitude - Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees. This
position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either East or West. You can
type values in these fields or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the model's
longitude.
GMT offset - Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and
the time at the model's location. You can type in a value or use the Zone or Cities
buttons to pick the correct offset.
Zone - Displays the Time Zones dialog box, which allows you to choose the GMT
offset by picking a zone's region or description from a list. By default, the first
instance of the current zone is selected.
Map - Displays the World Map dialog box, from which you can choose the latitude,
longitude by picking a location from a world map.
Cities - Displays the Cities dialog box, from which you can choose the latitude,
longitude, and GMT offset by picking a city name from a list. The nearest city to the
current latitude and longitude, based on a rough distance estimate, is selected by
default.
Date - Specifies the date for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. The
default date is your computer's time when you first created the project database, for
example, the date when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. You can
change this date by clicking the down arrow and picking a new date from the
calendar.
Time - Specifies the time of day for calculating how the sun should appear in the
model. The default time is your computer's time when you first created the project.
For example, when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. You can
modify this time by clicking the up and down arrows.
Daylight savings - Specifies whether or not the specified time is daylight savings
time.
Use vector - Allows you to lock the sun's position to a specific vector, rather than
calculate the vector from the latitude and longitude values. When this box is checked,
the options under location are not available. When this box is not checked, the values
in the longitude and latitude boxes feed the X, Y, and Z coordinates and angles on the

Solar Vector dialog box. However, changes made to these coordinates on the Solar
Vector dialog box are not reflected in updates to the Latitude and Longitude fields.
Vector - Displays the Solar Vector dialog box, which allows you to lock the sun to a
certain vector. This option effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation default
sunlight.
Related Topics
Time Zones Dialog Box

Allows you to choose the GMT offset by picking a zone's region or description from
the list of regions.
Select time zone - Allows you to set the GMT offset by selecting a zone's region or
description from a list. By default, the first instance of the current zone is selected.
You can sort the Select time zone list by clicking any of the columns in the grid. By
default the list is sorted alphabetically by Description. When you click OK, the
GMT offset field on the Solar tab displays the appropriate value for the selected time
zone.
Related Topics
• Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 314
World Map Dialog Box

Allows you to choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by interactively picking
a location from a world map.
A ToolTip displays the latitude and longitude as the bull's eye indicator is dragged
across the map. When the bull's eye is released, the latitude and longitude fields
automatically update with that location's corresponding north/south and east/west
position (in degrees).
Latitude - Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. This
position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either North or South. You
can type values in these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the
latitude. The current latitude and longitude are displayed in a ToolTip when the bull's
eye indicator is dragged to a new location. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that
position will populate the Latitude and Longitude fields.

Longitude - Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees. This
position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either East or West. You can
type values in these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the
longitude. The current latitude and longitude are displayed in a ToolTip when the
bull's eye indicator is dragged to a new location. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at
that position will populate the Latitude and Longitude fields.
GMT offset - Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and
the time at the model's location. You can type in a value or use the Zone or Cities
buttons on the Solar tab to pick the correct offset.
City - Displays the name of the city selected in the Cities dialog box or with the bull's
eye indicator. If the bull's eye indicator passes over a city listed in the Cities dialog
box, then the city name displays in the ToolTip beside the latitude and longitude
coordinates. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the city
field in addition to the Latitude and Longitude fields on the World Map dialog box.
Notes
• The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude, Longitude,
and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values from their
respective fields on the dialog box.
Related Topics
Cities Dialog Box

Allows you to choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by interactively picking
a city name from the list. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically by city name.
Select city - Allows you to select a city from the list to set the latitude, longitude, and
GMT offset for the solar lighting. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically by city
name. However, you can sort this list by clicking any of the columns in the grid.
Note
• By default, the nearest city to the current latitude and longitude (based
on a rough distance estimate) is selected.
The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude, Longitude, and
GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the appropriate values for the
selected location on the map.

Related Topics
Solar Vector Dialog Box

Allows you to lock the sun to a certain vector. This effectively mimics the
IGDS/MicroStation default sunlight.
X - Defines the X coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.
Y - Defines the Y coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.
Z - Defines the Z coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.
Azimuth from 0 to 360 - Controls the bearing of the solar light in degrees ranging
from 0 to 360, 0 degrees being North. Clicking OK sets the sun to the specified
vector but does not populate the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset fields on the
Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and angle.
Altitude from -90 to 90 - Controls the angle of the sun above (positive values) and
below (negative values) the horizon in degrees ranging from -90 to 90. Clicking OK
sets the sun to the specified vector but does not populate the Latitude, Longitude,
and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and
angle.
Notes
• The solar directional vector defines the exact direction of the solar
lighting.
• When the X, Y, Z coordinates are adjusted, the Azimuth and Altitude
angles are updated to reflect the current values.
• When the Azimuth and Altitude angles are adjusted, the X, Y, and Z
coordinates are updated to reflect the current values.
• When the Use Vector option is not selected, the values in the
longitude and latitude boxes feed the X, Y, and Z coordinates and
angles on the Solar Vector dialog box. However, changes made to
these coordinates on the Solar Vector dialog box are not reflected in
updates to the Latitude and Longitude fields.
Related Topics

Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the computation of fog.
Activate - Select to use fog in the current scene.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the density of the fog effect. A value of 1 is

extremely foggy. The current distance between the eye point and center point of the
view also effects the density of the fog in the current scene.
Color - Displays the current fog color.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative fog color.
Related Topics
Set Global Lighting

1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings.
2. Select the Ambient tab to control the light that envelops objects.
3. Select the Flashbulb tab to control the light from a camera flashbulb.
4. Select the Solar tab to control the light from the sun.
5. Select the Fog tab to control the computation of fog.
Note
Placing Source Lights: An Overview

Three different types of source light can be placed in your model: Spot, Point, and
Distant. Each of the New Source Light Settings commands prompt you to specify a
position (using either standard three dimensional placement or a data point in any
graphic view) and size of a new source light, and then displays the corresponding
source light dialog box.
The physical location for the lights is as follows:
• For point lights, the center of the spherical glyph.

• For distance lights, the neck of the arrow glyph.
• For spot lights, the neck of the flash light glyph

Note
• You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a spot
light to a point light, for example, you must delete the spot light and
then place a new point light.
Related Topics
• Define a Raytrace Range, page 332
• Delete Source Light, page 322
• Edit a Source Light, page 321
• Place a Source Light, page 320
• Raytrace a View, page 331
Place a Source Light

1. Click View > Photo-Realism > New XX Light
2. Enter the point where the light should be placed.
3. Enter a second point to indicate the light's interest point.
Tip
• This second point is used to determine both the lighting direction and
also the light's falloff distance (used for the MicroStation, Fast, and
Slow attenuation effects).
4. In the New XX Light dialog box, enter a name for the new source light.
5. Modify any other properties as needed.

Notes
• In Steps 1 and 3, XX refers to the type of light that you want to place -
Point, Distant, or Spot.
• To see the effect of the new light, click View > Photo-Realism >
Raytrace Range and identify a small range around the light.
• The glyph color of a source light matches the color of the light being
cast (as specified on the Effects tab).
• You also can select Point Light , Distant Light , or Spot

Light on the Photo-Realism toolbar.
Related Topics
Edit a Source Light

1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light
2. If there is more than one light in the model, the Edit Source Light dialog box
displays, allowing you to select the light that you want to edit.
3. Modify any properties as needed.
Notes
• Source lights are listed in the order that they were placed.
• When multiple lights are selected on the Edit Source Light dialog
box, the Edit > Light Type > Light dialog box cycles through all the
selections until there are no more lights to edit.
• The geometry for lights that cannot be edited (that is, MicroStation
lights) appears "dim" in the model.
• Like any other piece of geometry, you can place any light, including
non-editable MicroStation lights, into a display set. The raytracer does
not use lights that are in a hidden display set in the rendered image.
This feature allows you to manipulate the use of non-editable lights for
raytracing without modifying the original geometry file.
• You also can select Edit Light on the Photo-Realism toolbar.

Related Topics

Delete Source Light

1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light.
2. Select a source light from the Lights list.
Notes
• You also can select Delete Light from the Photo-Realism toolbar.
• Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.
• Clicking Yes in the confirmation box permanently removes the light
from the project database.
Related Topics
Lighten Shadows
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light.
2. Select the light that you want to edit.
3. Click the Effects tab on the Edit XX Light dialog box.
4. Click the Edit button and change the color to be a lower percentage of its
maximum value.
Tip
• For example, instead of pure white (RGB=255, 255, 255), use a 25%
white (RGB=64, 64, 64)
5. Ensure the Cast shadows option is selected.
6. Place a source light of the same type as the one edited in the exact same location
with the exact same interest point.
7. On the Effects tab, edit the color of the second light to make up the difference in
the percentage of the maximum light when combined with the first light.
Tip
• For the previous example, you would use a 75% white (RGB=128,
128, 128).
8. Disable the Cast shadows option.
Notes
• In Step 3, XX refers to the type of light that you selected in Step 2 -
Point, Distant, or Spot.

• When you raytrace, the results appear to be the same as if you used a
single pure white light. However, the shadows are the same percentage
lighter as the second light's contribution.
• Following this procedure can help you simulate some of the effects of
atmospheric scattering observed in the real world without the cost of
extra computational time during the raytrace.
Related Topics
• Effects Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box), page 326
New Source Light Dialog Box

Provides options for controlling the source light position, effects, and attenuation. The
dialog box for each type of source light (point, spot, and distant) have identical fields.
Therefore, the following descriptions, except where indicated, apply to all three light
source dialog boxes.
Note
• You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a point
light to a spot light, for example, you must delete the point light, and
then place a new spot light.
Information Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the light display, position, and effects.
Light name - Specify the light name. By default, this string is "New Light" with
numerical increments. Light names do not have to be unique. However, unique names
allow you to identify lights more easily. The light name is limited to 32 characters for
.vue support
Important
• MicroStation lights cannot be named.
Type - Displays the type of light, such as Spot, Point, or Distance. This box is not
editable.
Level index - Assigns the selected light to a specific Level (1-63). This allows you
more flexibility in using existing level, material assignments, and display set
functionality in combination with source lights.
Color index - Assigns a specific color level (0-250) to the selected light. This allows
you more flexibility in using existing level, material assignments, and display set
functionality in combination with source lights.

File - Displays the name of the master file to which the SmartPlant Review source
lights are associated.
Size in MU:SU:PU: - Provides a place for you to type the size of the light geometry.
Show - Specifies whether or not the light geometry should display in each view of the
model. By default, this option is selected.
Important
• The display set containing the specified light must be active;
otherwise, the light geometry will not display.
Shade - Specifies whether or not the light geometry should appear in shaded or
wireframe mode in the model.
Show in Main view only - Works in tandem with the Show option to restrict the
display of the light to the Main view only.
Related Topics
• New Source Light Dialog Box, page 323
Position Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box)
Provides options for you to key in precise positions for the light. By default, the fields
on this tab are populated with coordinates that the user selected during light
placement.
Location in MU:SU:PU
North - Specifies the north coordinate of the new light.
East - Specifies the east coordinate of the new light.
Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the new light.
Pick Point - Allows selection of the North/East/Elevation point (using either standard
three dimensional placement or a data point in any graphic view) from within the
model.
Interest in MU:SU:PU
Absolute - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept the absolute directional
values for the new light. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by
specifying distances from the origin of the model.
Delta value - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for
the light direction. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by
specifying distances from the location of the light.

Delta direction - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta directional
offset values for the light. Selecting this option changes the offset fields to Distance,
Bearing Angle, and Elevation Angle. This option allows you to define the direction
of the light by specifying a distance and two angles from the location of the light.
North - Specifies the absolute or delta value for the north coordinate of the direction
of the new light.
East - Specifies the absolute or delta value for the east coordinate of the direction of
the new light.
Elevation - Specifies the absolute or delta value for the elevation coordinate of the
direction of the new light.
Distance - Specifies the delta direction distance for the direction of the new light.
Bearing Angle - Specifies the delta direction bearing angle for the direction of the
new light.
Elevation Angle - Specifies the delta direction elevation angle for the direction of the
new light.
Pick Point - Allows you to select the interest point (using either standard three
dimensional placement or a data point in any view) from within the model.
Important
• In source lighting, interest is the second point in a two-point placement
that determines where the light is cast and/or its falloff rate. For distant
and spot lights, the interest point represents a point on a line from the
light location in the direction that the light is cast. For point and spot
lights, the interest point is also the falloff point (where the attenuated
intensity of the light is one-half of its original intensity).
Notes
• When placing point fall-off using a data point, the mouse move
provides only two coordinates. The missing coordinate for the view
selected is defaulted to the center point of the Main view.
• Points picked in the model are used by the software to get the vector;
the points themselves are not stored.
Related Topics

Effects Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box)

Allows you to simulate effects, such as the twinkling of stars, light scatter, and
shadows.
Activate - Specifies whether or not the light should be used for illumination. This
option is checked by default whenever a light is placed.
Affect ambient only - Specifies that the light should only affect objects with
materials that have ambient light properties.
Tip
• If this option is turned off, the light affects all objects equally.
• Ambient light is used to model the normal light scatter that is not
solved by the raytracer. Only radiosity solves for ambient contribution
in the scene.
Cast shadows - Specifies whether or not the light should cast shadows. This option
is selected by default.
Color - Displays the current color of the new light.
Tip
• When lighting a scene with a single light that casts shadows, the
shadows will be dark. With SmartPlant Review, you can lighten
shadows without adding unwanted amounts of light to the scene.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box from which you can alter the color of the new
light.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Specifies the intensity of the light. We recommend setting this
option to 1.
Important
• The following cone angle options are only available for spot lights.
These options are disabled for point and distant lights.
Inner (must be less than outer) - Specifies the degrees of the inner angle (hot spot)
of the spot cone, ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration.
Outer (must be greater than inner) - Specifies the degrees of the outer angle of the
spot cone, ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration.

Notes
• The Activate option can be used in display set animation to simulate
effects such as twinkling of stars. However, to display an actual light
in a scene, you must model the light as geometry and then add lights in
the same location to simulate the effect of light.
• The Affect ambient only option is useful to simulate "scatter", such as
under a desk or in dark closet. Ambient light is used to model the
normal light scatter that is not solved by the raytracer. Only radiosity
solves for ambient contribution to the scene.
• There is one level of attenuation for light in the inner cone, and a
different attenuation for light in the outer cone angle.
Related Topics
Attenuation Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box)
Provides options for defining various attenuation settings for the light.
Important
• For distance lights, this tab is not visible.
• For MicroStation lights, this tab is disabled, and the MicroStation
option is selected if the light is attenuated.
None - Specifies that there is no reduction of the intensity of the light based on the
distance from the source of the light. This option selected by default.
MicroStation - Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after those found
in MicroStation. This option is the default and read-only for MicroStation lights that
are attenuated. If the MicroStation light is not attenuated, the None option is selected.
Fast - Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after ModelView's fast
attenuation. When this option is selected, the light becomes dimmer more quickly.

Slow - Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after ModelView's slow
attenuation. When this option is selected, the light becomes dimmer more slowly.
Custom - Specifies an exact attenuation effect based on the three constants in the
following fall-off (F) equation: F = 1.0 / (c1 + (c2*distance-to-light) + (c3*distance-
to-light-squared).
Constant component from 0 to 10 - Allows you to specify a value for the constant
attenuation component. The default value is 1.0
Linear component from 0 to 1 - Allows you to specify a value for the linear
attenuation component. The default value is 1.0.
Quadratic component from 0 to 1 - Allows you to specify a value for the quadratic
attenuation component. The default is value is 1.0
Notes
• Attenuation simulates the fall off of light from a positional light
source. Constant fall off is the slowest and quadratic fall of is the
fastest with linear in between constant and quadratic.
• OpenGL attenuates positional lights (points and spots) by an
attenuation factor composed of the constants listed previously using
the following equation: Attenuation factor = 1 / (C+L*d+Q*d*d)
• Ambient, diffuse, and specular are all attenuated; global ambient and
emission are not attenuated.
• For MicroStation lights, this tab is disabled, and the MicroStation
option is selected if the light is attenuated.
• When the Custom option is selected, the light can be specified to
exact catalog standards. For example, this option would be used to
specify a GE 30 watt frosted bulb.
• Using non-default attenuation does require extra calculations and may
slow performance.
Related Topics

Edit Source Lights Dialog Box

Allows you to select a light in the model and then edit all properties of the light.
Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited.
Match - Displays the Match Items dialog box to allow you to select lights matching
the given pattern or selected object.
Lights - Displays all the lights currently in the model using the format (State, Type,
Usage). If you select more than one light, the dialog box cycles through each light
individually until all the specified lights have been edited.
• Light State - If the source light is used by the raytracer, the light state
is On. Otherwise, it is Off.
Note
• For a light to be used by the raytracer, the following conditions
must be met. If no light meets all of the conditions, SmartPlant
Review will display a message in the Text view stating that a
flashbulb will be used to illuminate the scene.
1. The source light is activated within its own individual settings.
2. The source light is on a visible level.
3. The source light is in a visible display set or if Ungrouped
Elements is visible.
4. If the source light is a MicroStation light, the Photo-Realism
setting to activate all MicroStation lights must be On.
• Light Type - If the source light is a MicroStation type light, it will
display as such; otherwise, the light type displays as Editable.

SmartPlant Review does not allow you to edit or delete MicroStation

lights.
• Light Usage - If source lighting is activated for the shaded view, then
the indicator displays OpenGL + a slot number indicating which
OpenGL hardware slot number is being used for the source light (if
any). If source lighting is not activated for the shaded view, this
indicator displays Raytrace. This light usage indicator is helpful in
determining which source lights (if any) are actually being used in the
shaded view.
Important
• OpenGL only supports a limited number of source lights, depending
on the video card and driver implementation, whereas the raytracer can
use a virtually unlimited number of lights. The OpenGL standard
guarantees that a minimum of eight lights is supported.
Related Topics
• Edit Source Light Command (View Menu), page 452
Delete Source Lights Dialog Box

Allows you to select a source light in the model and then delete it. Deleted lights are
permanently removed from the project database. Therefore, you will be prompted to
answer Yes or No to delete the specified light. Lights placed in the file by
MicroStation cannot be deleted.
Note
Lights - Displays all the lights currently in the model.
Related Topics
• Delete Source Light Command (View Menu), page 453

Raytracing: An Overview
SmartPlant Review's raytracer process produces quality images that include true light
reflection, transparency, refraction, and shadowing. These images enable you to see
the true characteristics of the materials that you selected for your model by accurately
mimicking the way actual light reflects off your model surfaces.
The Raytrace process allows you to set the anti-alias level, to select a specific region
of the view to be processed, to scale the final image size, and set up batch raytrace
processes.
Related Topics
Raytrace a View
1. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the scene in the Main view.
2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace.
The rendered image appears in the Main view.
Important
• The SmartPlant Review application window automatically becomes
the topmost window on your screen once the raytrace is complete. This
allows you to work on other applications while raytracing.
Tip
• To stop a raytrace, press Esc.
Notes
• You also can select Raytrace on the Photo-Realism toolbar.

• If the Main view is not fully visible when the raytrace completes, a
message indicating this appears in the Text view.
• To modify rendering parameters, click View > Photo-Realism >
Settings.
• To modify global light settings, click View > Photo-Realism >
Global Light Settings.
• If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified, you must
click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again.
Related Topics

Define a Raytrace Range

1. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the scene in the Main view.
2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range.
3. Click the starting point for the range.
4. Click the ending point for the range. The output appears in the Main view.
Tip
Notes
• You also can select Raytrace Range on the Photo-Realism

toolbar.
Settings.
• If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings, you
must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the
image again.
Related Topics
• Edit Raytracing Options, page 332
Edit Raytracing Options

1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Settings.
2. Select the Environment tab to load a background image and environment box
into the Main view.
3. Select the Raytrace tab to control the quality and speed of the raytracing
program.
4. Select the Advanced tab to control system performance during raytracing
operations.
Related Topics

Detecting Collisions: An Overview

SmartPlant Review supports two modes of collision detection: static and dynamic.
Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a specified model
range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap
condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes
that are too close together or intersecting.
Dynamic collision is performed when you define an object or group of objects to set
in motion through the plant. Dynamic collision detection is useful when moving
equipment such as a construction crane through a plant to find a safe pathway for the
move.
SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space on the hard drive where
your TMP folder is located to run collision detection.
Important
• To use the collision detection functionality, you must install the
Collision detection provides the following capabilities:
Log File - A record of each collision run is always stored in the database. A log file
contains a collision ID number, data type of colliding elements, type of collision with
file location of colliding elements, and coordinates of the collision. Optionally, each
record stored in the project database can be written to a text file.
Retain or Eliminate Colliding Movements - You can move through the model
freely using display set motion while automatically generating collision reports for
later review.
Highlight - The colliding objects are highlighted in an optional user-defined color.
Sound - You can assign .WAV sound files to collision types.
Review Collision Data - Collisions are reviewed in sequential order, as they are
stored in the database. A snapshot option is available to save an image file of
colliding objects while the colliding objects are highlighted. A save option is
available to save a text file of the collision data on the collision report. You can zoom
to individual collisions or display all collisions in the current Main view.
Note
• Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files,
the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files. In
these cases, adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the
Display All command on the Report Collision Detection Results
dialog box to view the collisions.

Collision Data Management - The collision information is saved in a Microsoft

Access-compatible table. For collision detection, the display set is used for movement
through the model. You can select a single object for single step collision detection.
There are three types of collision detection:
• Single step collision - Moves a single graphic element one discrete

movement. Collision detection is run at the end of the single step
movement, not continuously during the movement. You can run a
single step collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision
Detection dialog box.
• Stationary collision - Runs static collision detection on the current
model without any additional movements. You can run stationary
collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision Detection dialog
box.
• Display set collision - Run as an option through the display set motion
settings. If you select the collision detection option, collision detection
is run at the end of each motion step, not continuously during the
movement.
Note
updates.
The collision detection process requires temporary disk space. If you receive a
message during collision detection notifying you that there is not enough
temporary disk space, free more space in one of the following ways.
• Delete temporary files in the system temporary folder stated on the

message box.
• Delete or move other files on the specified disk.
• Request assistance from your system administrator to change the
location of the system TMP environment variable to point to a local
disk with more available space.
Due to the changes in SmartPlant Review 5.0 to maintain the relationships between
complex elements (such as cells and solids) and their components, the object numbers
of elements may be different than in previous versions of SmartPlant Review. This
change impacts picked objects in display sets, single graphic elements selected for
collision detection and collision reports. Picked object display sets and single
graphical elements for collision sets may have to be re-selected to re-synchronize

with the SmartPlant Review 5.0 object numbers. Collision reports may be in a
different order than found in earlier versions. The same collisions will be present;
however the object numbers and the order of the collisions reported will be different.
For cells and solids, a component number is now listed in the collision report. The
component number identifies the element within the cell or solid.
Related Topics
• Run Collision Detection, page 347
• Select Collision Display Colors, page 345
• Select Collision Sounds, page 346
• Select Filters for Collision Types, page 343
• Select Graphic Element Types, page 344
• Select Objects and Range, page 344
• View Collision Reports, page 350
Collision Detection Dialog Box

Allows you to select options for running the collision detection program.
The Collision Detection command supports two modes of collision detection: static
and dynamic. Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a
specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a
touch or overlap condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems
such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting.
move.
SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space on the hard drive where
your TMP folder is located to run collision detection.
Important
• All tab settings must be assigned for each individual collision set. For
example, the default color assigned to an existing collision set will not
automatically be applied when creating a new collision set. The
default tab settings are applied only to the collision set in which they
are created.

Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to create or select a collision set name. You must create or select a
collision set name before you can define the collision detection process.
After you select a name, you can choose whether you want collision detection to
return all types of collisions, or only certain types of collisions. For example, if you
select the Between component elements filter, the collision detection process looks
for collisions between elements that are part of a larger component.
Important
• All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular
collision set. Therefore, when creating a new collision set, you must
assign settings for the new set.
Collision set name - Allows you to select or type the name of a collision set. You
must specify a name before you can define additional collision detection properties.
Single tick marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name. Click Apply after you type in the
name.
Note
• SmartPlant Review remembers the last collision set that you selected
during the current SmartPlant Review session. You must select a
collision set name the first time that you display this dialog box during
each session.
Delete - Removes the selected collision set from memory and the database.
All types - Allows you to search for all types of collisions.
Selected types - Enables you to choose certain filters for the collision detection
process. If you select Selected types, you must select one or more of the following
types of collisions.
Intersecting - Allows you to search for intersecting collisions.
Tangent - Allows you to search for tangent collisions.
Contains another - Allows you to search for collisions with closed graphic elements
that contain other graphic elements.
Embedded within - Allows you to search for collisions with graphic elements that
are contained within other closed graphic elements.
Between component elements - Returns collisions between graphic elements with

the same DMRS linkage, or label key. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all
part of a larger component.

Hidden elements
Use - Honors hidden levels and display sets that you have turned off during collision
detection
Related Topics
Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
Allows you to select one or more elements to move through a volume during the
collision detection process. Or, you can specify that the collision detection take place
in a stationary, or static, manner.
This tab also allows you to define the volume within which collision detection occurs.
You can select the entire model or define a smaller volume.
Important
Collision set name - Displays the current collision set name. You can create a new
collision set on the Type Filter tab.
Single graphic element - Indicates that you want to select a single graphic element as
the member of a collision set.
Display sets - Allows you to select a display set as the type of object to move for
collision detection.
Stationary collisions in selected range cube - Allows you to select a stationary

collision detection to find existing collisions in the model.
Select - Allows you to further define which elements are members of a collision set.
You can select either a single graphic element or a display set, depending on the
collision set type that you selected.
Entire model - Indicates that the selected range for collision detection is the entire
model range cube.

Range cube - Allows you to specify the range cube unit values for collision
detection.
Minimum range in MU:SU:PU

North - Defines the y-axis coordinates. Units are MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub
East - Defines the x-axis coordinates. Units are MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub
Elevation - Defines the z-axis coordinates. Units are MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub
Maximum range in MU:SU:PU

North - States the maximum range for the north (y-axis) in MU:SU:PU (Master
Units:Sub Units:Positional Units) units.
East - States the maximum range for the east (x-axis) in MU:SU:PU (Master
Elevation - States the maximum range for elevation (z-axis) in MU:SU:PU (Master
Related Topics
Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
Allows you to select geometry filters for the collision detection process. You can
select all types of filters, or you can select certain types of filters based on different
geometrical definitions.
Important

All types - Includes all types of geometry filters in collision detection.
Selected types - Includes the selected geometry filters in collision detection. You
must select at least one geometry filter if you check the Selected types option.
B-spline surfaces - Filters in B-spline surfaces during collision detection.
Cone - Filters in conical surfaces during collision detection.
Elbow - Filters in elbows during collision detection.
Ellipse - Filters in ellipses during collision detection.
Reducer - Filters in reducers during collision detection.
Pipe - Filters in pipes during collision detection.
Plane - Filters in planar surfaces during collision detection.
Polymesh - Filters in polymeshes during collision detection.
Projected Line Strings - Filters in projected line strings during collision detection.
Projection - Filters in projections during collision detection.
Revolution - Filters in revolutions during collision detection.
Ruled surface - Filters in ruled surfaces during collision detection.
Shape - Filters in shapes during collision detection.
Sphere - Filters in spheres during collision detection.
Tipped cone - Filters in tipped conical surfaces during collision detection.
Torus - Filters in torus surfaces during collision detection.
Valves - Filters in valves during collision detection.
Related Topics

Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to select colors for the collision types. These colors appear in the graphic
view when collisions occur.
Important
Default - Specifies a default color for all collision types. This default color is used for
any collision type that does not have one of the override colors selected below.
Intersecting - Specifies a color for collisions with intersecting elements.
Tangent - Specifies a color for collisions with tangent elements.
Contains another - Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are contained
within other elements.
Embedded within - Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are embedded
within other elements.
Between component elements - Specifies a color for graphic elements with the same
DMRS linkage, or label key. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a
larger component.
Edit - Displays the Colors dialog box, which allows you to choose a different color
for each Collision color type.
Related Topics
• Collision Detection Dialog Box, page 335
Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
Allows you to specify sounds that play as collisions occur. You can select one or
more types of collisions to match with sounds.
Important

Default - Assigns a default sound to all collision types. The default sound is used for
any collision type that does not have one of the override sounds selected below.
Intersecting - Assigns a sound to collisions with intersecting elements.
Tangent - Assigns a sound to collisions with tangent elements.
Contains another - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that contain other
elements.
Embedded within - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements embedded in other

elements.
Between component elements - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that

have the same DMRS linkage. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of
a larger component.
Browse - Allows you to locate a specific .wav file for each collision type.
Related Topics
Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
Allows you to set the delta at which the collision detection process runs for a single
step collision. You enter north, east, or elevation deltas in MU:SU:PU, and then you
can begin a single step collision detection run. While the collision detection runs, the
Collision Detection dialog box hides from view and the status bar updates
periodically to show the number of collisions and objects compared. Sounds play or
colors appear if they are defined for the collision set.
After you run at least one collision detection session, you can generate a report. Each
collision detection run is known as a frame. You can select a frame and zoom to
individual collisions in that frame, or you can display all collisions at one time. You
also can change the viewing angle of the display, take a snapshot of collisions, and
save a copy of the collision report as a text file.

Important
North - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the north
(y-axis) direction.
East - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the east (x-
axis) direction.
Elevation - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the
elevation (z-axis) direction.
Activate collision detection - Turns on the active collision detection mode.
Use collision limit - Halts the collision detection run after the specified number of
collisions in the Collision limit box on the Run tab have occurred.
Collision limit - Halts the collision detection after the specified number of collisions
occurs.
Single Step - Starts the collision detection process for single step, display sets, or
static collisions.
Report - Displays the collision detection results in the Report Collision Detection
Results dialog box.
Notes
• Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU allows you to enter delta
values for the North, East, or Elevation directions in which you want
to move the object. Single step allows you to temporarily move an
object one step. This movement should not be confused with moving a
display set. Single step move allows you to temporarily move an
object a certain amount to determine if it collides with anything. You
can then adjust the move delta values to move the object a different
amount and try it again. To move multiple times, you can make a
display set out of the element and use the Move Display Set
command.


Related Topics
Select Filters for Collision Types

1. Click Tools > Collision Detection.
2. Click the Type Filter tab.
3. In the Collision set name box, select a name.
Tip
• To define a new collision set, type a name in the Collision set name
box. Single tick marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name. Then, click
Apply to save the collision set name.
Note
4. Under Collision types, select All types or Selected types.
Tip
• If you choose Selected types, you can select specific filters for the
collision detection process. The software only reports the types of
collisions that you specify.
Notes
• Always start on the Type tab to either create or select an existing
collision set name. You cannot select any other tab until you select a
name.
• To delete a collision set, select a collision set name in the Collision set
name box, and then click Delete.
• Click Apply at any time to save your settings.
Related Topics

Select Graphic Element Types

4. Click the Geometry Filter tab.
5. Under Non-linear graphic elements, select All types or Selected types.
Tip
• If you choose Selected types, you can choose the individual types of
geometry to filter.
Notes
Related Topics
Select Objects and Range

4. Click the Selection tab.
5. Under Object, select the type of object that you would like to include in the
collision detection process.
Tips
• To move a single element through three dimensional space during the
collision detection process, select Single graphic element. Click
Select to further refine the object definition.
• To move a set of objects through space, select Display sets. Click
Select to further refine the object definition.

• To locate collisions in a static volume, select Stationary collisions in

selected range cube.
6. Under Range cube, select either Entire model or Range cube.
Tip
• To define a specific volume for collision detection, select Range cube.
7. If you selected Range cube, type coordinates under Minimum range and
Maximum range. Each range is bounded by East (x-axis), North (y-axis), and
Elevation (z-axis) coordinates. Units are in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub
Notes
Related Topics
Select Collision Display Colors

4. Click the Color tab.
5. Under Collision colors, select one or more color filters.
6. Select one or more of the following options to assign colors to collision types.
• To assign a default color to all collisions that do not have special
overriding colors assigned, click Default.
• To assign a color to intersecting collisions, click Intersecting.
• To assign a color to tangent collisions, click Tangent.
• To assign a color to collisions in which elements enclose other
elements, click Contains another.
• To assign a color to all collisions in which elements are embedded in
other elements, click Embedded within.

• To assign a color to all collisions that are made up of elements with the
same DMRS linkage, click Between component elements.
Notes
• You can click Edit for each selected option to choose a different color.
• If you assign a color to Default and a color to Intersecting, the
Intersecting color takes precedence and displays for intersecting
collisions.
• To save your settings at any time, click Apply.
Related Topics
Select Collision Sounds

4. Click the Sound tab.
5. Select one or more of the following options to assign sounds to collision types.
• To assign a sound to all collisions that do not have special overriding
sounds assigned, click Default.
• To assign a sound to intersecting collisions, click Intersecting.
• To assign a sound to tangent collisions, click Tangent.
• To assign a sound to collisions in which elements enclose other
elements, click Contains another.
• To assign a sound to all collisions in which elements are embedded in
other elements, click Embedded within.
• To assign a sound to all collisions that are made up elements with the
same DMRS linkage, click Between component elements.
6. For each selected option, click Browse to locate a .wav sound file.

Tip
• If the sound does not seem to be working, check the following items:
- Make sure the file is present on the system in an appropriate folder.
- Adjust the speaker volume.
- If there is still no sound, make sure the audio drivers are installed on the
computer.
Notes
• If you assign a sound to Default and a sound to Intersecting, the
Intersecting sound takes precedence and plays for intersecting
collisions.
• During a collision detection run, the software searches for sound files
in the following standard locations: the current folder, the Windows
folder, the Windows system folder, folders listed in the PATH
environment variable, and the list of folders mapped in a network.
Related Topics
Run Collision Detection

4. Click the Run tab.
5. Under Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU, type the deltas in the North (y-
axis), East (x-axis), and Elevation (z-axis) fields.
Tip
• Units for the North, East, and Elevation fields are in MU:SU:PU
6. Under Execution control, select Activate collision detection.
7. Select Use collision limit. This is optional.

8. Type a number in the Collision limit box.

9. Click Single Step to step through the collisions.
Tips
• The Collision Detection dialog box hides until the collision detection
process is complete.
• The status bar shows the number of objects compared and number of
collisions found.
• Sounds and colors display for collisions based on the selections on the
Sound and Color tabs. For a given collision type assigned to a sound
file, the sound plays only on the first collision of that type.
10. After you run at least one collision detection session or frame, click Report to
review previously-executed frames and create a report of the collisions.
Notes
• You can stop the current, in motion collision detection process by
pressing the Escape key.
• For a more precise means of motion control, use keypad motion to
move display sets when checking for collisions.
• A record of each collision run is always stored in the project database.
Optionally, you can save a text log file of any single collision run that
exists in the database.
Related Topics

Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box

Displays a report of the detected collisions after performing a collision detection run.
You can make a snapshot of any collision, and you can save the collision report as a
text file.
Important
Collision set name - Allows you to select a collision set name. Collisions for the
selected collision set display in the list view.
Frame number - Allows you to select a specific frame in the collision set to view.
Wireframe highlight - Specifies that the requested report include wireframe

highlights around colliding objects.
Collision results output - Displays information about the collisions, such as type,
objects, and range points. To zoom in on a collision, click the list view, and then click
a collision number in the left column.
Tip
• You also can use the arrow keys to move through and view the
collisions in the List view.
Note
Save - Allows you to save the collision detection results to a text file.
Snapshot - Allows you to take a snapshot of the collision detection results.
Display All - Allows you to display all of the collision detection results for the
current collision set and frame number. If the collisions are not clearly visible, try
adjusting the view cone to get a better viewing angle.
Related Topics

View Collision Reports

4. Click the Run tab.
5. Under Execution control, click Report.
6. In the Frame number box, select a frame.
Tip
• When you click Report on the Collision Detection dialog box, the
report automatically displays collisions for the most recent frame of
the selected collision set.
7. View the collisions.
Notes
• Click Display All to list all collisions with the current view angle. If
the collisions are not clearly visible, try adjusting the view cone to get
a better viewing angle.
• To zoom in on a collision, click the list view. Then, click the collision
that you want to view. You also can use the arrow keys to move
through and view the collisions in the List view. Due to the type of
coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files, the zoom to
collision feature may not work well on some files. In these cases,
adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All
command on the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box to
view the collisions.
• Click Save to store your data in a text file.
• Click Snapshot to take a picture of the view with the current collision
colors and view angles.
• You can click Report on the Collision Detection dialog box at any
time to review a report from any previously-executed collision
detection run in the database.
• After running a collision detection and generating a report, move the
Report Collision Detection Results dialog box off the Main view
window to view the collision results.
• Collision detection reports show any moved display sets in their
current locations. The current location of a display set may or may not
be the same location of the display set at the time collision detection
was run.

• A new frame number will not be added to the collision report data
when collisions do not occur during a collision detection run.
Related Topics

Collaborating with Others: An Overview

Collaboration allows you and other users in different locations to view and examine
the model simultaneously. All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date
design version. Collaboration accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a
single conference.
Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of

Microsoft NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review. Processing occurs at each
computer so that performance depends on each computer, not on the network.
You can change the options for the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration >
Edit. The Collaboration Settings dialog box allows you to update details for the data
sets and participants in the collaboration.
You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The
Conference members list box displays the current participants in a tree format.
NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member, based on the NetMeeting
profile of the user.
The Driver options box allows you to establish settings for the driver of the
conference. Because memory and performance limitations of some operating systems
may cause difficulties for high speed collaboration sessions, you should assign the
Driver to the slowest computer. You also can have the driver work offline while
positioning the view for the passenger computers. This will reduce the number of
updates that are sent to passengers during a short time interval. Slowing the speed of
animation replay and motion updates may also improve operating system
performance during a collaboration session.
After you confirm the options on the Collaboration Settings dialog box, you can
start the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Run.
Tips
• The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the
collaboration conference. A collaboration passenger is the person that
is watching the session. A session can have only one driver at a time.
Multiple passengers can participate in the session, and any one
passenger can change to driver.
• During a collaboration, online mode occurs when the driver is
transmitting commands to passengers. Offline mode occurs when the
driver is not transmitting. The driver can use offline mode to configure
the computer and temporarily pause the session. A passenger always
works online.
• Only the driver, working online, should make changes which impact
the project database such as adding or deleting measurements or tags
and adding display sets.

Collaboration sessions may run on the same shared copy of the project
database or on multiple copies of the project database. One problem
encountered in a collaboration session occurs when collaboration users
have multiple databases that get out of synchronization on measurement,
tags or display sets. This problem can occur when users make offline
changes to add measurement, tags and display sets or delete measurements
and tags. Only changes made by a driver working online will be broadcast
to keep all active users synchronized.
Passengers receive information but do not send database changes to other
users. Drivers working off line do not do not send database changes to
other users. As SmartPlant Review adds a new record to the database, the
internal table indices are updated for the new record. For example, if
passenger A adds tag 5, that tag will not be transmitted to the other users.
If the driver then adds tag 5, passenger A's database will not accept the
change because their database already has a tag 5. In this situation, the
driver's tag 5 will not appear on passenger A's display or in passenger A's
database.
If running on the same shared copy of the project database, it is
recommended that the same rule for changes be followed. When sharing a
common database, it is possible for an individual user to start the Refresh
Data command to update their local computer. However, depending on
the contents of the database, the Refresh Data command can take some
time to execute.
When you click Send Driver's State, the views transmit from the driver computer to
all passenger computers. This action is useful when you change drivers or a new
participant joins the conference.
When you click Work Offline, transmission stops from the driver. When you click
Track Mouse Cursor, the software synchronizes the cursor track of each computer.
All participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom.
The Refresh button provides an up-to-date list of conference members, as shown in

the Conference members box. The Drive button assigns your computer as the driver,
and no longer passenger.
Related Topics

Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review

When you establish a collaboration conference among computers, you can apply the
use of NetMeeting in two methods:
• Application Sharing Mode - This is the default behavior for

NetMeeting. The computer that displays the application only needs
one copy of SmartPlant Review. NetMeeting receives all graphics calls
and transmits the changes to the display to other users.
If you have a high-end graphics card with private client drivers, and you
want to share the SmartPlant Review application with other users, you
should be the user who sets the NetMeeting option on the View >
Settings > Options tab in SmartPlant Review. This setting allows the user
with a high-end graphics card to properly share SmartPlant Review
through NetMeeting.
• Collaboration Mode - Available from SmartPlant Review. Do not
select the View > Settings > Options > NetMeeting check box,
regardless of the video card installed on your computer. Collaboration
Mode does not use application sharing from NetMeeting.
Tips
• Application Sharing Mode can possibly have a slow response on your
computer. However, if your computer uses high-end graphics cards
that have private client drivers and you want to use NetMeeting in the
Application Sharing Mode, be sure to check the NetMeeting box on
the View Settings dialog box.
• You cannot use NetMeeting in both modes at the same time.
Related Topics
• Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 352

Passenger Settings
During a collaboration conference, the collaboration driver is the person currently in
command of the controlling computer. A collaboration passenger is the person
watching the session.
The passenger can view several different activities originating at the driver computer,
including:
• Movements of the pointer

• Standard single pane, three pane and four pane view layouts and
toolbars
• Updates to the view
• Display modes
• Auto-Highlight and display of object data in the text window
• Tags (for creating, editing, and deleting)
• Add measurement and delete last measurement
• Create display set
• Display set manipulations
• Change to the driver control
• Changes in NetMeeting (for example, whiteboard, sound, security,
Internet Directory)
• Regular view updates in all views
• ScheduleReview Animation
• Collision Detection with display set movement only
Notes
• If the driver changes either the active measurement collection or the
settings of a measurement collection, those changes will not display on
the passenger computer.
• The driver can turn on or off the passenger's toolbars. However, the
passenger's preferred toolbar arrangement and button size will not be
modified. If necessary, the passenger can dock or arrange the toolbars
as needed on their computer.
• Closing or resizing individual windows on the driver's computer will
not display on the passenger's computer.
• You will experience the following behavior for passengers running
with a different display resolution than the driver:
- The collaboration software automatically compensates for different
display resolutions between the driver and passenger computers.

- The software attempts to make the SmartPlant Review application

the same size on all computers. If the passenger is running a
smaller display than the driver, the collaboration software will
adjust the SmartPlant Review application to fit the passenger's
display while keeping the window size proportionally the same as
the driver's SmartPlant Review window size.
- If the passenger is running at a lower resolution than the driver, it
may be necessary for the passenger to Auto-hide the task bar on
their desktop to see the full SmartPlant Review window.
Related Topics
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box

Data set name - Identifies the data set that is currently open.
Conference members - Displays the current collaboration participants in a tree

format. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member based on the
NetMeeting profile of the user.
Send Driver's State - Transmits the views from the driver computer to all passenger
computers. This action is useful when you change drivers or when a new participant
joins the conference.
Work Offline - Stops transmission from the driver computer. This action is useful
when you need to perform set-up prior to a collaboration session.
Track Mouse Cursor - Synchronizes the cursor track on each computer in the
conference. All participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and
during a zoom.
Refresh - Updates the list of conference members.
Drive - Allows you to become the driver in the collaboration session. Any passenger
can become a driver at any time.

Important
• Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires
installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review.
• Performance depends on each computer, not on the network. To avoid
difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual
operating systems, assign the Driver to the slowest computer.
• Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the
passenger computers. This will reduce the number of updates sent to
passengers during a short time interval.
• To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers, slow the speed
of animation replay and motion updates.
• You must install the Collaboration module before you can use this
functionality.
Related Topics
Establish a Collaboration Session

1. At the computer assigned as driver, host a NetMeeting call.
Tip
• The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the
collaboration conference. A collaboration passenger is the person that
is watching the session. The driver can work online to transmit
commands to the passenger computers or work offline to temporarily
stop transmitting. A passenger always works online. A session can
have only one driver at a time. Multiple passengers can participate in
the session, and any one passenger can become the driver.
2. Type the password.
3. Set the security level that you want.
4. On each passenger computer, call the driver computer and log in using the
conference name and password (if applicable).
5. Start SmartPlant Review on each computer. On all computers use the same
dataset or share a common data set, and use the same database.
6. On each computer, click Tools > Collaboration > Run. The default driver is the
meeting host.

Important
• To change the driver during a collaboration session, the passenger who
wants to control the session clicks the Drive button. Performance
depends on each computer, not on the network. To avoid difficulties
with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating
systems, assign the Driver to the slowest computer.
• The driver can click Work Offline to stop transmission to the
passenger computers. This action allows the driver to work without
anyone viewing the display on the computer. For example, the driver
can work offline to configure the computer. Also, have the driver work
offline while positioning the view for the passenger computer. This
will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short
time interval.
• The driver can manually send views and the text window information
by clicking the Send State button.
• Instead of hosting a meeting, two computers can call each other with a
password (optional). In this case the caller is the driver.
functionality.
Related Topics
Rejoin a Collaboration Session

Sometimes, something goes wrong with NetMeeting and you get dropped out of a
conference due to network or other outside problems. To cleanly rejoin the
conference, do the following:
1. Exit NetMeeting.
2. Exit Collaboration by toggling off Tools > Collaboration > Run.
3. If you were not the conference Host, re-start NetMeeting and rejoin the
conference.
4. If you were the conference Host, everyone in the conference needs to do steps 1
and 2.

Notes
• If the above steps do not work, or a "Bad Data Channel" message
appears, exit both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review, then re-start
both products. If you were not the conference Host, simply rejoin the
existing conference. If you were the conference Host, everyone needs
to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review.
• If you still have trouble rejoining the conference, exit both NetMeeting
and SmartPlant Review, then use Process tab in the Windows Task
Manager to determine if the conf.exe program is still running. The
conf.exe program is part of NetMeeting and sometimes does not stop
when NetMeeting is closed. If conf.exe is still running, click End
Task in Task Manager to stop the program, and then re-start both
NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review. If you were not the conference
Host, simply rejoin the existing conference. If you were the conference
Host, everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and
SmartPlant Review.
Related Topics
Edit Collaboration Settings

• Click Tools > Collaboration > Edit.
Important
• Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the
passenger computers. This reduces the number of updates sent to
functionality.
Related Topics

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview

ScheduleReview allows you to use abstract data from your project planning software
to display the sequence of construction. You also can reverse the action, so that you
can display the deconstruction sequence.
ScheduleReview allows you to visualize the construction cycle in single steps (by
day, week, or month) or continuously. You also can move along a predefined path in
the model as you continuously step through time. For example, you can use
ScheduleReview to help analyze the construction process to avoid problems, show the
construction of specific units in the context of the overall project schedule, display the
project as it should appear on a certain day, or fly through the model while displaying
the construction sequence. ScheduleReview is ideal for presenting a fly through to
project staff, senior management, and clients.
ScheduleReview provides the following commands and options:
• Settings
• Auto Association
• Query
• Review
• Task Symbology
• Add Association
• Remove Association
• New Project
• Delete Project
• Set Active Project
• Refresh Active Project
Important
Notes
• ScheduleReview supports the following planning software: Microsoft
Project 98, Primavera Project Planner 2.0B (with RA installed), and
Primavera Project Planner 3.0.
• You can import an existing .sri file to a user-defined database or to a
different project file and manipulate the data. You can export the
ScheduleReview information to an .mdb file to save the modified data.

• ScheduleReview sessions update the views using the Buffered Update

option. If this option is turned off, you see the update as it is drawn; if
this option is turned on, you see the update after all drawing is
complete. Key Frame Motion animation is always double-buffered.
For consistency, make sure the Buffered Update option is on.
ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box

Provides features that allow you to:
• Specify the SmartPlant Review model and the project planning

software.
• Group model elements manually or automatically for logical
manipulation.
• Associate element groups manually or automatically with specific
construction tasks.
• Display the start and stop of construction tasks in shaded, wireframe,
or transparent modes.
• Execute queries on model elements and display results graphically.
• Save animation frames to disk for post-processing with digital video
editing software.
Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Defines the brand of scheduling software that you are using and the name of the
project file.
ScheduleReview project - Displays the name of the currently active ScheduleReview

project file.
Project file - Specifies the name and path of the planner file associated with the
ScheduleReview project.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a new project file.
Project type - Allows you to select the type of planner project to associate with the
ScheduleReview project that is currently active. SmartPlant Review supports
Microsoft Project and Primavera project files.
Reset Fields - Resets all the project settings if you switch between scheduling
software, such as Microsoft Project to Primavera.

Caution
• Avoid opening a Microsoft Project planner file using automation
through ScheduleReview (specifically, with the Refresh Active
Project command) and concurrently opening the same file with an
instance of the Microsoft Project application.
Notes
• Prior to using ScheduleReview, at least one of the supported project
planning programs must be installed on your computer. Refer to the
user documentation for the respective program for information on
installing and using the software.
• If you are setting up your own model to view with ScheduleReview,
you must first create a New ScheduleReview Project.
Related Topics
• ScheduleReview Settings Command (Tools Menu), page 494
• ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box, page 361
Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)
Provides options for defining the appearance of SmartPlant Review elements when
you execute the ScheduleReview command. For example, you can specify that items
display in blue wireframe when tasks start and green shaded when tasks end. This
helps you identify the status of various elements in your project throughout the
review process.
Type - Specifies the type of object for which you are defining symbology. You can
define the appearance of each task individually.
Visible - Allows you to define the visibility for the symbology that is currently
selected.
Style - Allows you to define the style for the symbology that is currently selected.
You can choose Shaded, Wireframe, or Transparent.
Color - Displays the color of this symbology.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to edit the color for this
symbology.
Related Topics

Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Links a key frame animation group to ScheduleReview playback, using an animation
path that you created in SmartPlant Review with the Save/Recall View command.
View group - Specifies the name of the key frame view group that you want to link
to this ScheduleReview playback.
Start date - Specifies the date on which you want the view group animation to start
playing. Until this date is reached during playback, the first frame of the view group
is displayed.
Rate - Selects the rate for updating key frame animations, subject to the unit
selection. You can specify the rate in Days per frame or Frames per day.
Days per frame - Updates key frame animations by one frame per number of days
entered in the Rate box.
Frames per day - Updates frame animations by the number of frames entered in the
Rate box for each day of the ScheduleReview playback.
Start - Selects the first frame of the selected animation that displays.
End - Selects the highest frame number to display from the selected key frame
animation.
Loop - Specifies that key frame animations start over from the beginning
automatically if the last frame is reached before the ScheduleReview playback ends.
Notes
• If a ScheduleReview session is started with its own animation, any
KeyFrame Animation is stopped and the current animation state resets
by ScheduleReview. All Key Frame Motion animation commands are
disabled during the ScheduleReview session.
• If a ScheduleReview session is started without its own animation (No
Animation is selected in the View Group list), all the current Key
Frame Motion animation commands (Display, Play, Pause, and
Stop) can be used during the ScheduleReview session. Likewise, the
ScheduleReview Play, Pause, and Stop commands do not affect the
Key Frame Motion commands.
Related Topics

Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Defines the settings for the images that are created when you record a
ScheduleReview playback. Options specify the prefix name for each frame, anti-
aliasing level, frame size, as well as the folder and drive locations for the frames.
Width - Specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Height - Specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Anti-alias - Specifies the type of antialising that you want to apply to the frames. You
can choose from None, Low, Medium, and High. If you select None, the frames are
of the lowest quality but process quickly. If you select Low or Medium, the quality is
slightly higher but process more slowly. If you select High, the frames are high
quality but process very slowly.
Directory - Displays the destination folder path for the saved animation frames. You
can specify the folder by using Browse.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder or file.
Files prefix - Sets the prefix to use as the first part of the name of every
ScheduleReview snapshot.
Start number - Specifies the frame number to start at when naming image files. This
value is appended to the Files prefix to create the image file names. The sample File
name (directly below the Files prefix text box) updates to reflect changes.
File type - Specifies the graphic file type for the images saved to disk. Click .rgb for
Intergraph Red Green Blue file format, or click .bmp for Windows bitmap.
File name - Display a preview of what the first image will be called.
Caution
• The Snapshot Frame window captures the image of the cursor or any
dialog box that is positioned over it. Wait until all frames are written to
disk before performing other tasks.
Note
• If you write the frames to disk, the review process takes much longer
because ScheduleReview takes a "snapshot" of each review screen.
Related Topics
• Import ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu), page 412
• Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings, page 368

Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Displays the date settings for the ScheduleReview playback. With these command
options, you can step through the construction process by day, week, or month. This
process allows you to closely analyze each step through the construction process and
anticipate problems that may arise. For example, you can determine if adding a large
piece of equipment at a certain point in the construction process will interfere with the
construction of additional items in the model. In addition, this command provides
several different options such as viewing the model as it appears on a specific day or
at a certain percentage of work complete. You also can review the model based on
query criteria.
You also can step through the deconstruction process, if necessary. You can use this
option to analyze refurbishment plans for the model and analyze procedures for
removing or replacing existing pieces of equipment.
Start - Selects the first date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. The earliest
possible value (and the default value) is the starting date of the first task of the
project. You select a date from the calendar.
Current - Selects the current date of the ScheduleReview playback. You select a date
from the calendar.
End - Selects the last date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. The latest
possible value (and the default value) is the finishing date of the last task of the
project. You select a date from the calendar.
Percent complete - Displays the schedule status in terms of date and percentage of
completion.
Step in days - Selects the number of days to advance the current date during each
update of the ScheduleReview playback.
Per seconds - Sets the number of seconds in between dynamic updates of the
ScheduleReview playback. Decimal values, such as 1.5, are accepted.
Loop - Instructs ScheduleReview that if the animation finishes before the review
cycle is complete, the animation starts over from the beginning and runs until the
review process is complete.
Snapshot - Allows you to specify that the frames ScheduleReview playback

generates automatically write to disk, according to the settings on the Snapshot tab.
Highlight query during review - Displays query items during a schedule review.
This option is not selected by default.
Select Query - Displays a modified Query dialog box. You can either select an
existing query, or use the Query dialog box to define a new query. This dialog box
has a reduced set of options, and allows you to change only the Color (Highlight

Method) and Always Display (Additional Settings) options. If Always Display is not
selected, query results display only when you reach the query's start date. Otherwise,
this modified dialog box functions the same as the regular Query dialog box.
Notes
• Before using this command, define groups and associate tasks with the
groups.
• To interrupt the review process, click Stop on the ScheduleReview
toolbar.
Related Topics
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings

1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings.
2. On the Project tab, choose a Project type.
3. Click Browse to select a new Project file.
4. Click Reset Fields.
Notes
• You also can select Schedule Review Settings on the

ScheduleReview toolbar.
• Reset Fields resets the project settings if you switch between
scheduling software (Microsoft Project or Primavera, for example).
Related Topics
• Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 369
• Export ScheduleReview Project, page 371
• Import ScheduleReview Project, page 370
• Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 369
ScheduleReview Task Symbology

1. Click Tools > Schedule Review > Task Symbology.
2. Select a Type of task.
3. Select Visibility for Default or Visible.
4. Select Default for Style or select Wireframe, Transparent, or Shaded.
5. Select Default for Color or select a specific color.

Notes
• The Task Symbology command allows you to define the symbology
of specific tasks at the start and finish of the task.
• If you do not use this command to assign symbology, the Review
command uses the default symbology.
• This command is only available when you have selected a
ScheduleReview task after you import a file.
Related Topics
• Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings, page 367
• Set ScheduleReview Project Settings, page 366
• Set ScheduleReview Review Settings, page 368
• Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings, page 368
Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings

2. Click the Animation tab.
3. Select a View group.
4. Select a Start date.
5. Select a Rate.
6. Select Days per frame or Frames per day.
7. Select a Start frame.
8. Select an End frame.
9. Select Loop to loop animation.
Notes
• You also can select Schedule Review Settings on the

Related Topics

Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings

2. Click the Snapshot tab.
3. Type a number for the Dimensions Width.
4. Type a number for the Dimensions Height.
5. Select an Anti-alias.
6. Browse to the output folder for the ScheduleReview file.
7. Type a Prefix for the files.
8. Type a Start Number for the Frame.
9. Select a File type.
Note
• You also can select ScheduleReview Settings on the

Related Topics
• ScheduleReview Task Symbology, page 366
• Set ScheduleReview Project Settings, page 366
• Set ScheduleReview Review Settings, page 368
Set ScheduleReview Review Settings

2. Click the Review tab.
3. Select a Start date.
4. Select a Current date.
5. Select an End date.
6. Select a Step (in days) for Dynamic updating.
7. Type a number of Seconds for Dynamic updating.
8. Select Loop to repeat ScheduleReview play in a loop.
9. Select Snapshot to display as a snapshot.
10. Select Highlight query during review to display query items during a schedule
review.
11. Click Select Query to select or define a query.

Notes
• You also can select ScheduleReview Settings on the

Related Topics
Create a New ScheduleReview Project

1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project.
2. Type a Name for the new project.
3. Establish ScheduleReview Settings.
Related Topics
• Delete a ScheduleReview Project, page 369
Delete a ScheduleReview Project

1. In the Project Manager, select the ScheduleReview project that you want to
delete.
2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project.
Caution
• A message is displayed confirming that you want to delete the project.
When you delete a project, this action cannot be reversed.
Related Topics
Set Active ScheduleReview Project

Select a ScheduleReview project from the Project Manager.
Related Topics

Refresh Active ScheduleReview Project

Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Refresh Active Project.
Notes
• You must have project planning software such as MS Project or
Primavera loaded to use this command.
• This command is used to make sure the most recent schedule data is
available to the ScheduleReview program.
Related Topics
Import ScheduleReview Project

1. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects.
2. On the Open dialog box, select a file or browse to the file that you want, and click
Open.
Notes
• The project that you import must have a unique name.
• When you import an existing .sri file from a previous ScheduleReview
session, ensure that all ScheduleReview settings have a valid option
selected.
• To avoid error messages that may occur when you open an existing .sri
file created with MS Project Planner, open the MS Project Planner file
in MS Project 98.
• You can see a list of projects by expanding the ScheduleReview - MS
Projects branch in the Project Manager window.
Related Topics

Export ScheduleReview Project

1. Click File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects.
2. On the Save As dialog box, select a file or browse to the file that you want, and
click Save.
Notes
• You must set the active ScheduleReview project in the Project
Manager. See Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 369 for more
information.
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Auto Association

1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto Association.
2. Select a method.
Tip
• The program automatically associates the tasks that match the
specified criteria with the appropriate group.
Notes
• The Auto Association command automatically associates tasks with a
group. It works by comparing the names of existing groups to the
names of existing tasks.
• Before using this command, define all of the groups and tasks that you
will use to review the model.
Related Topics
• Add a ScheduleReview Association, page 372

Add a ScheduleReview Association

1. From the Project Manager, select the ScheduleReview task to add.
2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association.
Notes
• Use this command when you want to create an association between a
task and one or more display sets.
• This command is available only when you have selected a
Related Topics
• Remove a ScheduleReview Association, page 372
Remove a ScheduleReview Association

1. Select the ScheduleReview task to remove from the Project Manager.
2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association.
Notes
• You can restore the associations that you just removed by dragging the
display set name and dropping it on the recently unassociated display
set.
Related Topics
• ScheduleReview Auto Association, page 371
Create a ScheduleReview Query

1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New.
2. Enter a phrase to identify the query in the Name box.
3. In the Definition section, click the Edit button to specify the limits of the query in
the Criteria box.
4. Select an option in the Fit section.
Tips
• Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view.

• Fit All displays all graphics, not just the query results, in the Main
view.
• Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view.
5. Select an option in the Display section for viewing the query results.
Tips
• Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display
when you execute a query.
• Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with
the query results display when you execute a query.
• Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not
associated with the query results display when you execute a query.
6. In the Highlight method section, select the display format in Style and then
specify the color for displaying objects found in the query in Color. Click the
Edit button to display the Color dialog box if you need to change the color.
7. Click Execute Query.
Notes
• The New ScheduleReview Query command searches your SmartPlant
Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your
project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view
and displays the elements according to selected options. For example,
you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category
and display them as red, shaded graphics.
• The project planning file that you want to use with this query must
already exist.
• The search criteria reside in your project planning file. For example, if
you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost, % Complete,
and Remaining Work, these items are available as search criteria.
Related Topics
• Edit a ScheduleReview Query, page 373
Edit a ScheduleReview Query

1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit.
2. Select a query Name.
Tip
• To delete a query, select the query and click Delete.
3. Click Edit to update the query using your project planning program.
4. Select an option to Fit query results.

Tips
• Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view.
• Fit All displays all graphics, not just the query results, in the Main
view.
• Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view.
5. Select an option to Display query results.
Tips
• Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display
when you execute a query.
• Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with
the query results display when you execute a query.
• Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not
associated with the query results display when you execute a query.
6. Select a Highlight method Style.
7. Select a Highlight method Color.
Notes
• Edit ScheduleReview Query searches your SmartPlant Review model
for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file.
SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the
elements according to the options selected. For example, you can
search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and
display them as red, shaded graphics.
• The search criteria that you use come from your project planning file.
For example, if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual
Cost, % Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are available
as search criteria.
already exist.
• The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be
defined to use them in the query.
Related Topics

New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box

Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in
your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and
displays the elements according to selected options. For example, you can search for
elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded
graphics.
Name - Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.
Delete - Deletes the currently selected query.
Definition
Criteria - Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.
Edit - Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.
Execute Query - Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the
materials or objects in the Main view accordingly.
Restore Display - Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material
colors.
Fit
None - Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query.
All - Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.
Query results - Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main
view when you start the query.
Display
All - Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently
selected query.
Query results - Displays only matching elements when you start the currently
selected query.
All but query results - Displays only non-matching elements when you start the
currently selected query.
Highlight method
Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds.
Color - Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the highlight color for
the objects that your query finds.
Notes
already exist.
• The search criteria resides in your project planning file. For example,
if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost, %
Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are available as search
criteria.
Related Topics
• Query New Command (Tools Menu), page 495
Edit ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box

Allows you to edit an existing ScheduleReview Query.
Name - Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.
Delete - Deletes the currently selected query.
Definition
Criteria - Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.
Edit - Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.
Execute Query - Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the
materials or objects in the Main view accordingly.
Restore Display - Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material
colors.
Fit
None - Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query.
All - Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.
Query results - Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main
view when you start the query.

Display
All - Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently
selected query.
Query results - Displays only matching elements when you start the currently
selected query.
All but query results - Displays only non-matching elements when you start the
currently selected query.
Highlight method
Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds.
Color - Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the highlight color for
the objects that your query finds.
Notes
already exist.
Related Topics
• Query New Command (Tools Menu), page 495
Task Symbology Dialog Box

Enables you to edit symbology settings for the task that is currently active in the
ScheduleReview project tree.
Task ID - Displays the unique ID of the task to which this symbology applies.
Type - Allows you to select a symbology to edit.
Visibility
Default - Allows you to select the default visibility for the symbology.
Visible - Displays and sets the visibility for the symbology.

Style
Default - Allows you to select the default style for the symbology.
Style - Allows you to define the style for the symbology. You can choose
Wireframe, Transparent, or Shaded.
Color
Default - Allows you to select the default color for the symbology.
Color - Allows you to specify a color for the symbology.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to select the color for the
symbology.
Note
Related Topics
• Task Symbology Command (Tools Menu), page 499
Auto-Association Dialog Box

Compares the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks and
automatically associates the tasks with a group.
Match whole string - Looks for task names that exactly match the group name. For
example, if you have a task named steel pipe, the task is only associated with a group
called steel pipe.
Match substring of task name- Looks for task names with a substring that matches a
group name. For example, if you have a task named paint steel pipe, the task can be
associated with a group called steel pipe.
Match substring of group name - Looks for tasks that match a substring of a group
name. For example, if you have a task called steel pipe, the task can be associated
with a group called steel pipe iso15.
Match case - Matches tasks with groups using case-sensitivity. For example, Steel
Pipe matches Steel Pipe, but not steel pipe. You can use this option in association
with any of the three association methods.
Cumulative - Adds the result of the current operation to the existing set of
associations. If not selected, ScheduleReview deletes associations before creating
new ones. The Cumulative option also looks for task names with a substring that
matches a group name. For example, if you have a task named paint steel pipe, the

task can be associated with a group called steel pipe. You can use this option in
association with any of the three association methods.
Related Topics
• Auto-Association Command (Tools Menu), page 499
Add Association Dialog Box

Allows you to add an association between a task and one or more display sets.
Name - Specifies the display sets to select for completing the type of criteria
definition. Selected display sets are highlighted.
ID - Displays the unique ID for the display set.
Related Topics
• Add Association Command (Tools Menu), page 500
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box

Creates a new ScheduleReview project.
Name - Allows you to enter a unique name for the new ScheduleReview project.
Note
Related Topics
• New Project Command (Tools Menu), page 500
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box

Deletes one or more ScheduleReview projects.
Projects - Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.
Note
Related Topics

Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box

Allows you to select the active ScheduleReview project.
Note
Projects - Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.
Related Topics
• Set Active Project Command (Tools Menu), page 501
Using ScheduleReview Controls: An Overview

The ScheduleReview controls allow you to view your construction sequences quickly
and efficiently. You can play, pause, or stop the ScheduleReview process at your
convenience. You also can use more advanced commands, such as specifying a
particular date for viewing.
Note
Related Topics
• ScheduleReview Back, page 382
• ScheduleReview Forward, page 382
• ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 384
• ScheduleReview Go To End, page 383
• ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 383
• ScheduleReview Pause, page 381
• ScheduleReview Percent Complete, page 385
• ScheduleReview Play, page 380
• ScheduleReview Stop, page 382
ScheduleReview Play
1. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects.
2. Select a ScheduleReview project to open.
3. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview.

Notes
• The Play command starts the review process using the parameters
defined on the Review tab of the Settings dialog box. When you click
Play, the review process starts on the start date that you defined and
stops on the end date.
• You also can play the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+R on the
keyboard.
Related Topics
• ScheduleReview Record, page 384
ScheduleReview Pause
1. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start the ScheduleReview
project.
2. Click Pause on the ScheduleReview toolbar to pause ScheduleReview.

Tip
• Click Pause again or Play to continue the ScheduleReview project.
Note
• You also can use the Go To Start, Back, Forward, Go To End or
Stop command when Pause is activated to continue the
ScheduleReview project.
• You also can pause by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Space on the keyboard.
Related Topics

ScheduleReview Stop
Click Stop on the ScheduleReview toolbar to stop the ScheduleReview review
process.
Notes
• You also can stop the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+S on the
keyboard.
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Forward
3. Click Forward on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes
• Use the Forward command to step forward through the
ScheduleReview session.
• Forward is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Back
3. Click Back on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes
• Use the Back command to step back through the ScheduleReview
session.
• Back is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Go To Start
3. Click Go To Start on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes
• Go To Start is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Go To End
3. Click Go To End on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes
• Use the Go To End command, available only when ScheduleReview
is paused, to go directly to the end of the ScheduleReview session.

Related Topics
ScheduleReview Go To Date
Select a date using Go To Date on the ScheduleReview toolbar.
Note
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Record
2. Click the Animation tab.
3. Select a View group to play.
Tip
• If the Record button is not active, you do not have a valid View group
selected.
4. Select the Snapshot tab.
5. Select a folder to write your review.
6. Click Record on the ScheduleReview toolbar.
7. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Note
Related Topics

ScheduleReview Percent Complete

Move the slider bar for Percent Complete on the ScheduleReview toolbar to display
the review at that percentage of completion.
Notes
• Percent Complete displays the status of the review whenever a review
is played.
Related Topics

Printing: An Overview
SmartPlant Review provides high-resolution printing and other capabilities that give
you flexibility and control over printed results. To perform printing operations, use
the three print commands on the File menu. Some options may be unavailable,
according to which printer and printer driver that you select. Some dialog boxes,
such as the Advanced Document Properties dialog box, change according to the
printer that you have selected.
The following printing options are available:
• Change Print Setup Options

• Quick Print the Main View
• Quick Print the Full View
• Print the Main View at a High Resolution
Change Page Setup Options

1. Click File > Page Setup.
Tip
• The Page Setup automatically displays the default printer specified in
Control Panel - Printers options. The Orientation option is
unavailable for some printers.
2. Select a different printer from the Printer option.
Tip
• If the printer that you want is not in the printer list, click Network.
Use the resulting Connect to Printer dialog box to select the printer.
3. Select a paper size from the Page Setup > Paper Size list.
4. Click Portrait or Landscape to select an orientation.
5. Click Printer > Properties to select advanced options.
Related Topics
• Print the Main View at a High Resolution, page 387
• Quick Print the Full View, page 387
• Quick Print the Main View, page 387

Quick Print the Main View

1. Click File > Print.
Tips
• Printing an image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full
Review to capture and process the image quickly.
• Quick print Main captures the Main view image at the current screen
resolution and prints the view on the selected printer.
2. Select the options for your print job.
3. Click Quick print main.
Related Topics
• Change Page Setup Options, page 386
• Printing: An Overview, page 386
Quick Print the Full View

2. Select the options for your print job.
3. Click Quick Print Full.
Notes
• Quick Print Full captures an image of the entire SmartPlant Review
application window at the current screen resolution and sends it to the
selected printer.
Related Topics
• Printing: An Overview, page 386
Print the Main View at a High Resolution

2. Select your print job options.
3. Click High Resolution.

Caution
• Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during the
printing process or SmartPlant Review will capture those images
instead of the Main view. SmartPlant Review automatically disables
your screen saver for this reason.
Notes
• The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup
dialog box in all modules. However, these options are supported only
in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
Tips
• Printing an image on screen, rather than off screen takes full advantage
of any available hardware acceleration. This enables SmartPlant
Review to capture and process the image quickly.
on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot
Related Topics
• Print Dialog Box, page 391
Page Setup Dialog Box

Allows you to tailor a page to your specific requirements. Some options may be
unavailable, according to which printer and printer driver that you select.
Size - Specifies the size of the paper or envelope that you want to use.
Source - Specifies where the paper that you want to use is located in the printer.
Different printer models support different paper sources, such as the upper tray,
envelope feed, and manual feed.

Portrait - Positions the document so that the short edge of the paper is the top of the
page.
Landscape - Positions the document so that the long edge of the paper is the top of
the page.
Printable Area - Width specifies the width of the printable area on the page. Height
specifies the height of the printable area on the page.
One page - Width specifies the width of the page. Height specifies the height of the
page.
Horizontal - Specifies the horizontal size of the image.
Vertical - Specifies the vertical size of the image.
Left - Specifies the left position of the origin point in the image.
Top - Specifies the top position of the origin point in the image.
Fit to printable area - Reduces or enlarges the image to fit in the maximum printable
area.
Center Horizontally - Centers the print horizontally in the dimensions specified for
print. The image will be centered across the x-axis in the maximum printable area.
Center Vertically - Centers the print vertically in the dimensions specified for print.
The image will be centered across the y-axis in the maximum printable area.
Gamma - Enter a value from 0.1 to 10.0 to adjust the Gamma to more closely match
the screen display or other images. Typical effective values range from 1 to 2.
High resolution image only

Keep Aspect Ratio - Select to retain the proportion (x and y relationship) of the
image. If you change either the horizontal or vertical image size, the opposite value
changes to retain the proportion of the image. You cannot edit the values if Fit to
Printable Area is selected. The value in parentheses displays the size of the image in
pixels.
Antialias - Specifies the level to improve images by smoothing the transitions

between model edges. You can select one of four levels. Level 1 (default) applies no
anti-aliasing; level 4 applies the maximum. Print processing times increase as you
increase the anti-alias level.

Tip
on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use snapshot
Resolutions in pixels/inch - Specifies the resolution for the print job in pixels per
inch. The printer reduces the image for values greater than its maximum resolution.
Wide - Specifies the number of pages horizontally that the image is tiled on multiple
pages.
Tall - Specifies the number of pages vertically that the image is tiled on multiple
pages.
Printer - Allows you to change printer options.
Notes
dialog box in all modules. However, the options are only supported in
the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
Related Topics
• Page Setup Command (File Menu), page 417
Print Preview Dialog Box

Allows you to preview a page as it will look when printed.
Print - Displays the Print dialog box, which allows you to select options for printing
the Main view.
Next Page - Allows you to switch to the next page.
Prev Page - Allows you to view the previous page.
Two Page - Switches the preview from one page to two pages. When Two Page is
selected, the icon changes to One Page, allowing you to switch back to a one page
preview.
Zoom In - Allows you to enlarge the page.

Zoom Out - Allows you to decrease the page.
Close - Closes the Print Preview dialog box and returns you to the active window.
Print Dialog Box

The following features are available on the Print dialog box. Some options may be
unavailable, according to which printer and printer driver that you select.
Name - Lists the printers that are set up on your computer.
Properties - Displays the Document Properties dialog box, which allows you to
choose options for the selected printer. The available options depend on the features
of the printer.
Quick print main - Captures the Main view image at screen resolution and sends it
to the selected printer.
Quick print full - Captures an image of all SmartPlant Review windows at screen
resolution and sends the image to the selected printer.
High resolution - Captures an image at high resolution and sends it to the selected
printer.
Notes
dialog box in all modules. However, these options are supported only
in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
Tip
• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but have less than
the recommended screen resolution; click Single Pane Layout on
the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a
higher Anti-alias setting.
Number of copies - Provides a space for you to type the number of copies that you
want to print.
Collate - Allows you to specify collation for multiple copies.

Related Topics
• Print Command (File Menu), page 418

Using Accessories: An Overview

You can add commands and programs to the Accessories menu to extend the
functionality of the software. For example, you can add commands to start other
programs, such as a CAD application, a raster image editor, or a word processor. To
specify which add-ins appear on the Accessories menu, you edit the
ACCESSRY.TXT file, which is located in the SmartPlant Review application folder.
Add-in example programs delivered with the software demonstrate a number of

custom functions.
• The Text Annotations add-in (TXTANNO.EXE) places, edits, turns

on and off, and deletes text annotations. You also can specify the
position and color of the annotations.
• The Set Window Size add-in (WINSIZE.EXE) specifies custom sizes
for the Main, Plan, and Elevation view windows.
• The Move Display Set add-in (MOVEDSET.EXE) selects a display
set and a distance and moves or rotates the display set accordingly.
You can customize the add-in examples by using development tools and resources.
See the API folder for programming resources and tools. See the SmartPlant Review
Programmer's Guide (DRAPI_API.chm and DRAPIX_API.chm) for in-depth
documentation on developing custom add-in functions.
Related Topics
• Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview, page 403
• Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview, page 395
• Setting Window Size: An Overview, page 401
Modifying the Accessories Menu

A file named ACCESSRY.TXT defines the Accessories menu entries. You can edit
ACCESSRY.TXT with a text editor such as Notepad. This file is in the SmartPlant
Review application folder. If you edit the file in a word processor, such as Microsoft
Word, save the file as text-only.
File conventions
The following example shows a menu entry in the ACCESSRY.TXT file:
&Text Annotations= c:\Program
Files\Intergraph\SmartPlant\Review\Api\txtanno.exe.
The string before the equals (=) sign is the text that displays as an entry on the
Accessories menu. The ampersand (&) inserted in front of a given letter creates a
mnemonic, an underline on that letter, to aid in menu navigation. An optional
working folder, enclosed within an open bracket ([) and a close bracket (]), follows

the equals (=) sign. The working folder might be the location of other files needed by
the program or may be an output location for any files generated by the program. If
not specified, the working folder is the project folder (where the .dri file is located).
The program name, including any path and any parameters, follows the close bracket
(]) if a working folder is specified. If the working folder is not listed, the program
name string follows the equals (=) sign.
Other ACCESSRY.TXT file conventions include the following:
• Comment lines begin with a semicolon (;) and are ignored.

• Leading or trailing white space characters are ignored.
• A blank line between menu entries signifies a separator (horizontal
line) on the menu. Blank lines before first menu entry and after the last
are ignored.
• To create a submenu, use greater than signs (>) to enclose menu text
strings. The keyword ENDMENU is used after the last item in the
submenu.
Additional file information

The software looks for the ACCESSRY.TXT file first in the project folder (where the
.dri file is located). If the file is not there, the software looks in the home folder
defined by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH environment variables; if the file is
not there, the software looks in the folder of the running executable (where SPR.exe
is located). The software reads the first ACCESSRY.TXT file found and ignores the
others. The software reads the file at program start-up and when you click the Load
Accessories menu command.
The software reads the first ACCESSRY.TXT found and ignores the others. If the file
contains entries, the software puts the entries under the Accessories menu between
the Tags and Windows menus. If you move or delete ACCESSRY.TXT, the only
command available on the Accessories menu is the Load Accessories command.
Edits appear in the menu when you save the ACCESSRY.TXT file and click the
Load Accessories command.
Related Topics
• Starting Programs Automatically, page 395

Starting Programs Automatically

You can automatically start a program when you start the software. Open the
ACCESSRY.TXT file, and add the programs that you want to start automatically,
designated by an asterisk (*) before the regular menu entry names.
The menu entries marked by asterisks will NOT appear in the Accessories menu.
Note
• The following syntax will automatically start the Accessories > Text
Annotations > Place > One command every time that you open the
software:
*Text Annotation = c:\Program
Files\Intergraph\SmartPlant\Review\Api\txtanno.exe Place.
Related Topics
• Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview, page 395
• Modifying the Accessories Menu, page 393
Manipulating Text Annotations: An Overview

The Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE) add-in allows you to place, edit, turn on
and off, and delete text annotations. You also can specify the position and color of the
annotations, as well as leader lines. When exiting the software, you are given the
choice to store your annotations in the project database or let them be deleted.
Tip
• You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and
resources. See the API folder for programming resources and tools.
Related Topics
• Delete Text Annotations, page 400
• Display Text Annotations, page 401
• Edit Text Annotations, page 399
• Move Text Annotations, page 396
Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview

SmartPlant Review allows you to attach textual annotations to your model.
You can use the text annotation feature to place, edit, and move textual information,
such as equipment numbers, descriptions, and other alphanumeric strings. You also
can specify the position and color of the annotations, as well as a leader line.

After you click Text Annotations > Place on the Accessories menu, two commands
are available: One or Many. After you select one of these commands, select the
element you want to annotate. Once you confirm your selection, the software displays
the Place Annotation dialog box that allows you to approve the settings for the text.
Related Topics
• Place Annotation Dialog Box, page 395
• Place Many Command (Accessories Menu), page 535
• Place One Command (Accessories Menu), page 534
Place Text Annotations

• To place a single annotation, click Accessories > Text Annotations.
Then click Place > One.
• To place several consecutive annotations, click Accessories > Text
Annotations. Then click Place > Many.
2. Click locations for a leader point and a center point. The Place Annotation dialog
box appears.
3. In the Data attribute list, select an attribute to display as the annotation, or type
the text that you want to display.
4. Under Display options, select the items that you want to display.
Notes
• If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories
menu, edit the ACCESSRY.TXT file delivered with the software.
• You can change the color of text, background, and lines for
annotations. Under Colors, click the button corresponding to the color
attributes that you want to change. Use the standard Windows Color
dialog box to choose a color. The area under Preview updates to
reflect the changes that you made.
• If you chose the Place Many command, you can place another
annotation after clicking OK on the Place Annotation dialog box.
Place Annotation Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the contents and color of the annotation labels, as well as the
appearance of annotation leader lines.
Use these settings for annotations to follow - Sets the current settings as the default
for subsequent text annotations. This is applied to text annotations placed with the
Place Many command.

Data attribute - Lists the object's available attributes to display in the annotation.
You can also type the text to be displayed in the annotation.
Display options
• Leader - Determines whether a leader line should display with the
annotation.
• Arrow - Determines whether an arrow should display with the
annotation. This option is not available if you have turned off the
Leader option.
• Background - Determines whether the background should display on
the annotation label.
• Positional units - Determines whether the positional units
(MU:SU:PU) should display for the Display Leader Point attribute.
If not checked, only master unit and sub-unit will display for the
location of the leader.
• Persist - Stores the created text annotation in the project database. If
you turn off this option, SmartPlant Review does not save the text
annotation when you exit.
Colors
• Text - Allows you to select a color for the annotation text.
• Background - Allows you to select a color for the annotation
background.
• Line - Allows you to select a color for the annotation line.
• Preview - Shows what the annotation looks like based on the display
options and the chosen attribute.
Related Topics
• Place Many Command (Accessories Menu), page 535
• Place One Command (Accessories Menu), page 534
• Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview, page 395

Moving or Editing Text Annotations: An Overview

After you have added text annotations in the model, SmartPlant Review allows you to
relocate those annotations or change their contents and display options.
After you click Text Annotations > Move on the Accessories menu, two commands
are available: One or Many. Select One if you want to exit the Move command after
moving one text annotation. Select Many if you want the Move command to remain
active so that you can select and move additional text annotations. A message on the
status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to move and then
confirm your selection.
After confirmation, the Move Annotation dialog box appears. You can change the
location of the leader line or the center of the label by typing in values in the North,
East, and Elevation boxes. You can use the Apply button to text the appearance of
the annotation in the Main view. The Select button allows you to define the new
location with a data point, a standard 3D placement point, or by snapping to an
element in the model.
Like the Move command, the Edit command also has the One and Many options.
These commands are available by clicking Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit.
A message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to
change and then confirm your selection.
After confirmation, the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. You can select a
different item from Data attribute list. The Display Options group box allows you to
select or clear check boxes for Leader, Arrow, Background, Positional units, and
Persist. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text,
Background, and Line boxes. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance
of the annotation in the Main view.
Related Topics
• Move Many Command (Accessories Menu), page 536
• Move One Command (Accessories Menu), page 534
• Text Annotations Edit Command (Accessories Menu), page 536

Move Text Annotations

1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Move and then select either One or
Many.
Tip
• Select One if you want to exit the Move command after moving a
single annotation. Select Many if you want the Move command to
remain active so that you can select and move additional text
annotations.
2. Click the annotation that you want to move; click again to accept. The Move
Annotation dialog box appears.
3. Edit the North, East, and Elevation values to define a new coordinate for the
center of the annotation or the endpoint of the leader line.
Notes
• You also can graphically identify a new coordinate for the annotation
by clicking Select on the Move Annotation dialog box and identifying
the new location. The new coordinates appear in the dialog box.
Edit Text Annotations

1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit and then select either One or
Many.
Tip
• Select One if you want to exit the Edit command after editing a single
annotation. Select Many if you want the Edit command to remain
active so that you can select and edit additional annotations.
2. Click the annotation that you want to edit; click again to accept. The Edit
Annotation dialog box appears.
3. Change the settings as needed.
Notes
Related Topics

Deleting One or More Text Annotations: An Overview

SmartPlant Review allows you to delete textual annotations that you have placed in
your model.
You can use the text annotation feature to place, edit, and move textual information,
such as equipment numbers, descriptions, and other alphanumeric strings. You also
can specify the position and color of the annotations, as well as a leader line.
After you click Delete on the Accessories menu, three commands are available: One,
Many, or All.
If you click One, the status bar prompts you to select the item to delete. Then, a
message prompts you to confirm the deletion and states the positional attributes for
the item that you are deleting. If you click Many, the command works the same
except that you will not exit the command after you have deleted one text annotation.
If you click All, you also receive a message that prompts you to confirm deletion of
all the text annotations in the model.
Related Topics
• Delete All Command (Accessories Menu), page 538
• Delete Many Command (Accessories Menu), page 538
• Delete One Command (Accessories Menu), page 537
Delete Text Annotations

1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete.
• Click One to delete one text annotation. Locate and accept the
annotation that you want to delete. A Delete alert box appears. Click
Yes to delete the annotation.
• Click Many to continue in the command after deleting one text
annotation. Locate and accept the annotation that you want to delete.
A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the annotation.
• Click All to delete all annotations. A Delete alert box appears. Click
Yes to delete the annotation.
Note

Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview

SmartPlant Review allows you to show textual annotations in your model, or you can
turn off the display of the annotations.
After you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations, two commands are
available: On or Off. If the annotations currently are shown, click Off to turn off the
display. If the annotations currently are not displaying, click On to view the
information.
Related Topics
• Display Off Command (Annotations Menu), page 539
• Display On Command (Annotations Menu), page 538
Display Text Annotations

Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On or Off.
Notes
• You can also toggle the display of text annotations on or off from the
Display tab on the View Settings dialog box.
Setting Window Size: An Overview

The Set Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE) add-in allows you to change the size of the
software windows. You can use this add-in to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to
obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation. This add-in ensures the aspect ratio of
the Main view is correct before you save the animation view, providing a What You
See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) animation sequence.
Note
Related Topics
• Set Window Size, page 402

Set Window Size Dialog Box

Allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this dialog box
to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation.
Name - Allows you to select the type of window.
Set - Sizes the new window to the new size.
Old width - Displays the width of the window in pixels.
Old height - Displays the width of the window in pixels.
New width - Type a new width in pixels.
New height - Type a new height in pixels.
Width - Displays the width of application window in pixels.
Height - Displays the height of application window in pixels.
SmartPlant Review - Displays the current version of the software.
Related Topics
• Set Window Size Command (Accessories Menu), page 539
Set Window Size

1. Click Accessories > Set Window Size.
2. Under View, select the view window that you want to modify (either Main view,
Plan view, or Elevation view).
3. Type new width and height coordinates for the window, and then click Set. The
window displays in its new size.
Tip
• Under Application window, you can view the width and height of the
entire application window.
Note
• If the Set Window Size command does not appear on the Accessories
Related Topics

Creating Display Set Movement: An Overview

The Move Display Set (MOVEDSET.EXE) add-in allows you to create scripts of
movements and rotations that can then be played on any selected display set. This
script is not associated with any display set. This program is useful when you need to
see how an object fits in a space in the design. For example, you can use this program
to help plan equipment removal. This add-in allows you to analyze the removal
process and allows you to predict possible problems prior to actual removal.
Using the Move Display Set add-in, you create a sequence of movements to apply to
a display set. This sequence of movements is similar to a script, which can be saved,
opened, and revised. You can start, stop, forward-step, and reverse-step through this
script of movements. You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view.
The interactive display set motion and edit display set position functionality in the
software allow you to directly position display sets. The final display set position is
saved to the database, but the sequence of motions is not saved.
Note
To enable collision detection while using the Move Display Set API, do the
following:
1. Use the Tools > Collision Detection command to create the collision set.
2. Use the Motion > Settings command's Display Set tab to select the display set to
move, activate collision detection, and to select the collision set to use.
3. Switch to display set motion using the Motion > Display Set Motion command.
Thereafter, any movement using the Move Display Set API with the same display set
name will use collision detection. The results can be reviewed at any time using the
Tools > Collision Detection command. The API will only honor the current collision
detection settings of the Display Set tab of the Motion Settings dialog box if the
selected display set name on the Move Display Set API dialog box matches the
currently selected display set.
File name - Displays the file in which to save the display set script.
File - Allows you to select a file.
Display set - Provides information about the selected display set.
Name - Displays the name of the display set selected from the display set project tree.
Restore - Returns the selected display set to its original (unmoved) position.
Move display set - Sets properties for the display set movement.
Mode - Sets the mode for capturing the display set movement.

Screen - Displays the movements on your computer screen.
Movie snapshot - Takes a picture of the movements.
Update time - Specifies the number of seconds between each step.
Loop - Repeats the display set movement script until you click Stop.
Pong - Steps forward through the movement script and then backward.
Start - Begins the display set movement script.
Stop - Halts the display set movement script.
Continue - Resumes the display set movement script.
Forward - Steps forward through the display set movement script.
Reverse - Steps backward through the display set movement script.
Motion and move list - Lists the steps defined for the display set movement script.
Insert- Creates a new step in the script. You can specify the step as moving or
rotating.
Edit - Allows you to change a step.
Delete - Moves the selected step.
Number of steps - Displays the number of steps in the script. M indicates moving
and R indicates rotation.
Delta distance/degree - Displays the distances for moving and degrees for rotation.
SmartPlant Review version - Displays the current version of the software.
Note
Related Topics
• Move and Rotate Display Sets, page 406

Move Display Set Dialog Box

Allows you to create a sequence of movements to apply to a display set. This
sequence of movements is similar to a script, which can be saved, opened, and
revised. You can start, stop, forward-step, and reverse-step through this script of
movements. You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view.
File name - Displays the file in which to save the display set script.
File - Allows you to select a file.
Display set - Provides information about the selected display set.
Name - Displays the name of the display set selected from the display set project tree.
Restore - Returns the selected display set to its original (unmoved) position.
Move display set - Sets properties for the display set movement.
Mode - Sets the mode for capturing the display set movement.
Screen - Displays the movements on your computer screen.
Movie snapshot - Takes a picture of the movements.
Update time - Specifies the number of seconds between each step.
Loop - Repeats the display set movement script until you click Stop.
Pong - Steps forward through the movement script and then backward.
Start - Begins the display set movement script.
Stop - Halts the display set movement script.
Continue - Resumes the display set movement script.
Forward - Steps forward through the display set movement script.
Reverse - Steps backward through the display set movement script.
Motion and move list - Lists the steps defined for the display set movement script.
Insert- Creates a new step in the script. You can specify the step as moving or
rotating.
Edit - Allows you to change a step.
Delete - Moves the selected step.

Number of steps - Displays the number of steps in the script. M indicates moving
and R indicates rotation.
Delta distance/degree - Displays the distances for moving and degrees for rotation.
SmartPlant Review version - Displays the current version of the software.
Note
Related Topics
Move and Rotate Display Sets

1. Click Accessories > Move Display Set.
2. Under Display set, select the display set that you want to move.
3. Under Mode, select either Screen or Movie snapshot.
Tips
• To display the movements on your computer screen, select Screen.
• To take a picture of the movements, select Movie snapshot.
4. Under Motion and move list, click Insert.
5. On the Edit Step dialog box, select either Move or Rotate.
Tips
• If you select Move, type distance values for the North, East, and
Elevation directions.
• If you select Rotate, type degree values for the Front, Side, and Plan
directions.
6. Type the number of steps for this movement. For example, you can break the
process of moving a display set into 10 distinct steps to make the process easier to
analyze.
7. Continue to define your script of display set movement by clicking Insert or Edit.
8. When you are ready to begin the script, click Start.
9. Click File to specify a file in which to save the display script.

Notes
• To define the number of seconds between each step, type a value in the
Update time box.
• To keep repeating the display set movement, click Loop. To step
forward through the movement and then backward, click Pong.
• You can control the display set movement by clicking Continue,
Forward, Reverse, and Stop.
updates.
Related Topics

Command Reference: An Overview

The Command Reference section of this document contains definitions for the
various commands found under each menu.
Commands are used to control SmartPlant Review tasks. Most SmartPlant Review
commands are buttons on toolbars. For example, you can access the Single Pane
Layout command by clicking on the Common toolbar.
Many commands can be accessed by using either menu options or command buttons.
For instance, you can copy a selected object by clicking Copy on the Edit menu or
you can simply click on the Standard toolbar.
Related Topics
File Menu
This menu provides commands for creating and manipulating files in your project.
Open Command (File Menu)

File > Open
Allows you to select the model that you want to view using SmartPlant Review. If
there is already an open model, SmartPlant Review closes that model and then opens
the new one. SmartPlant Review automatically upgrades any databases in previous
versions to the current version the first time you open the project. You can open a
model from a command line prompt. See Open Model from Command Line, page 41
for more information.
The model must exist in a format that SmartPlant Review can interpret. This format
usually has a .dri extension and consists of ASCII text. However, you can select .pvi
files, .vue files, or any design file (such as, .dgn, .dwg, .sat, .dxf, or .prp files).
The .dri, .pvi and .vue files display automatically in the Files of Type field.

Note
• AutoCAD and SAT files do not include intelligent data. Therefore,
label files are not available for use with these types of files. These files
generally have .dwg, .dxf, and .sat extensions. SmartPlant Review
supports AutoCAD files through version 14 and AutoCAD 2002. SAT
files are supported through ACIS version 8.0
Warning
• If you stop loading a model when it was initially being read into
SmartPlant Review, you may invalidate display set definitions or
manipulations because all the elements in the display sets were not
loaded.
Close Command (File Menu)

File > Close
Allows you to close the current project without exiting SmartPlant Review.
Save Command (File Menu)

File > Save
Allows you to record information that you have updated in the model. The software
posts the changed material to the database. The Save command reads all the project
information in the current session and writes it to the .mdb file.
Note
• The software does not save text annotations when you exit SmartPlant
Review unless you turn on the Persist option when you place the
annotation. If you need a record of the text annotations that were not
placed with the Persist option turned on, you can take a snapshot of
that area of the model.

Related Topics
Save As Command (File Menu)

File > Save As
Saves the project in .vue format. A .vue file is a container file that allows you to
quickly read and change data. This format dramatically decreases the required time to
read in large models, and all of the data associated with the model.
Important
• To use this functionality, you must install the Application
Programming Interface (API) module.
This command is similar to the standard Save As command in the Windows
environment. However, the only use for this command in SmartPlant Review is
saving a file in .vue format.
Notes
• We recommend that you assign the same name to both the .dri file and
.vue file to avoid confusion. The .dri file is a text file that Plant Design
Integrator creates and uses to reference all related, design label data.
The .dri file is the primary method for opening SmartPlant Review.
• If you modify your .dri file by adding or removing files, you need to
reopen the .dri file. This action confirms that the software properly
reads in all new data related to the .dri file information.
Related Topics
Import Display Sets Command (File Menu)

File > Import > Display Sets
Imports display sets to a database that you have defined or to a different project file.
This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for
display sets.
The workflow for importing display sets requires that you to designate a name for the
file, or you can browse to locate the file. You also must select the identification or
name of each display set that you want to import.

You can import one or all attributes. The display sets correspond to the delivered
fields.
Notes
• The Import command handles ScheduleReview projects and tags, as
well as display sets.
file for importing.
Related Topics
• Import Display Sets Dialog Box, page 206
Import Saved Views Command (File Menu)

File > Import > Saved Views
Imports saved views from other project databases into the current database.
Notes
• The import database must be in the SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later project
database table format before it can be imported.
• You can use the Select All button to select all of the items in the Name
column.
groups will be merged. Any identically named view in the receiving view
group is overwritten by the incoming view.
already in the receiving database, make sure that both view groups are of
the same type, such as Main, Plan, or Elevation. If the view groups are of
a different type, the resulting view group may contain saved views of both
types, possibly causing unintended consequences for the user.
• SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the
Save and Recall Views dialog box. Before you import or export saved

views, you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to rename view
groups. This will avoid collisions with existing view group names in the
target database.
• SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data
that you import or export between project databases. SmartPlant Review
assumes that all projects used during import or export activities contain
equivalent model space and unit settings. Therefore, it is possible to
import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives
the data.
Related Topics
• Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3.7, page 92
• Import Saved Views, page 91
Import ScheduleReview Projects Command (File

Menu)
File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects
Allows you to import an existing .sri file to a user-defined database or to a different

project file and manipulate the data. You can export the ScheduleReview information
to an .mdb file to save the modified data.
Notes
Related Topics

Import Tags Command (File Menu)

File > Import > Tags
Allows you to import tags from an ASCII .tag file or a database file (.mdb). The
ASCII file allows you to use other Intergraph products to review and comment on
tags placed in SmartPlant Review files. Any comments you make using these other
products are written back to the same ASCII file. You can then import the modified
ASCII file into SmartPlant Review and display the comments made using the other
products.
Notes
• The import operation will not succeed if the sending database does not
have the SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later format. The sending database
must be upgraded to this format prior to importing from it.
• Importing tags from a database file (.mdb) allows you to optionally
overwrite like-numbered tags or append tags to the current project
data. Importing from a .tag file replaces all of the tag data in the
current project with data found in the .tag file.
Related Topics
• Import Tags, page 248
Import Volume Annotations Command (File Menu)

File > Import > Volume Annotations
Imports volume annotations from other project databases.
Notes
• You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotation
sets in the file for importing.

Related Topics
• Import Volume Annotations, page 272
Export Display Sets Command (File Menu)

File > Export > Display Sets
Exports display sets to a database that you have defined or to a different project file.
This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for
display sets.
The workflow for exporting display sets requires that you identify the database to use.
If you choose to browse, the Select Display Set Definition File dialog box allows
you to select the .mdb (master database) file that you want to use. You also must
select the identification or name of each display set that you want to export.
You can export one or all attributes. The display sets correspond to the delivered
fields.
Notes
• The Export command handles ScheduleReview projects and tags, as
well as display sets.
file for exporting.
Related Topics
• Export Display Sets Dialog Box, page 207

Export Saved Views Command (File Menu)

File > Export > Saved Views
Exports saved views to another project database.
Notes
• You can use the Select All button to select all the saved view sets in
the file for exporting.
• The database receiving the saved views must be in SmartPlant Review
5.0 or later project database table format.
• At your request, the Import > Saved Views and Export > Saved
Views commands overwrite existing records in the database. However,
if you imports or exports less data than currently exists in the target
database, SmartPlant Review does not delete the additional target
database records.
SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the
Save and Recall Views dialog box. Before you import or export saved
views, you can use the Save and Recall Views dialog box to rename view
groups. This will avoid collisions with existing view group names in the
target database.
You can import or export a view group with the same name but a different
view type, such as Main, Plan, or Elevation. We do not recommend this
action unless you are replacing all views in the target database. The views
you created as one type may not behave as expected when you transfer
them to a different view type.
Related Topics
• Export Saved Views Dialog Box, page 113
• Export Saved Views, page 93

Export ScheduleReview Projects Command (File

Menu)
File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects
Displays the Save As dialog box. From this dialog box, you can select the .mdb file to
which you want to export the active ScheduleReview project.
Notes
• You must set the active ScheduleReview project in the Project
Manager. See Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 369 for more
information.
Related Topics
Export Tags Command (File Menu)

File > Export > Tags
Writes the tag information in the current database to another project database or .tag
file.
Notes
• When exporting tags to a database file (.mdb), the tags from the
current database maintain their same numbering. In the instance
where like-numbered tags exist in both databases, the software allows
you to optionally overwrite tags in the receiving database. Otherwise,
the tags from the current database are merged with the tags in the
receiving database. There is no option to append exported tags to the
existing tags in the receiving database.
• Exporting to a .tag file replaces all of the tag data in the .tag file with
data found in the current project.
• The export operation will not succeed if the target database does not
have the SmartPlant Review 5.0 format. The target database must be
upgraded to this format prior to exporting to it.

• The .tag file format has not changed. None of the new attribute data
supported in a SmartPlant Review 5.0 project is written during an
export to a .tag file.
Related Topics
Export Volume Annotations Command (File Menu)

File > Export > Volume Annotations
Exports volume annotations to another project database.
Notes
• You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotation
sets in the file for exporting.
Related Topics
• Export Volume Annotations, page 272
Page Setup Command (File Menu)

File > Page Setup
Allows you to change media sizes, orientation from portrait to landscape, and
document properties. You can control dimensions for the printable area and image
size. If you want to print to a different printer, an associated dialog box allows you to
select another printer.

Notes
• The Page Setup dialog box appears with the active printer, as selected
in the Printer box after you click Start > Settings > Printers. The
orientation option is unavailable for most printers.
Related Topics
• Page Setup Dialog Box, page 388
Print Preview Command (File Menu)

File > Print Preview
Allows you to see a representation of the material before you transmit the print
request.
After you review the preview, you can proceed to print from the Print Preview
dialog box by clicking the Print button, or you can return to the standard view of the
data by clicking the Close button.
Related Topics
• Print Preview Dialog Box, page 390
Print Command (File Menu)

File > Print
Allows you to print the active drawing if the printer is configured for your computer.
Related Topics
Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)

File > Recently Used Files
Provides a list of files that you recently opened during editing sessions. The files
appear at the bottom of the File menu just above the Exit command.
The list is a handy reference when you want to return to files that you have been
reviewing or editing. You can open any of the listed files by clicking the file name.

This list remains on the menu after you open a project. You can open another project
without exiting SmartPlant Review. When you select another project, the software
closes the current project and then opens the new project.
Note
• The complete path, including drive letter, appears for each listed file
name.
Related Topics
• Open Command (File Menu), page 408
Exit Command (File Menu)

File > Exit
Exits SmartPlant Review.
When you exit SmartPlant Review, the project's .mdb file is updated. This file, which
has the same name as your project, contains all the parameters that you have set up
for the model, such as the eye point, clipping planes, lighting, and perspective.
SmartPlant Review displays a dialog box detailing the exit process.
Related Topics
• Save As Command (File Menu), page 410
Edit Menu
This menu provides commands for editing tasks.
Undo Command (Edit Menu)

Edit > Undo
Reverses up to the last 10 view manipulations that you completed.
Note
• You also can access the Undo command by pressing Ctrl + Z on your
keyboard.
Related Topics

Redo Command (Edit Menu)

Edit > Redo
Re-applies the previously undone view manipulation.
Note
• You also can access the Redo command by pressing Ctrl + Y on your
keyboard.
Related Topics
Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Edit > Cut
Removes the selected text from the Text view or text fields on dialog boxes and
places it on the Clipboard.
Note
• You also can access the Cut functionality dialog boxes by selecting
the text, right-clicking in a text field, and then clicking Cut from the
shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + X.
Copy Command (Edit Menu)

Edit > Copy
Copies the contents of the active view to the Clipboard.
Note
• You can also access the Copy command by selecting the text, right-
clicking in a text field, and then clicking Copy from the shortcut menu
or by pressing Ctrl + C.
Related Topics

Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Edit > Paste
Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point, and replaces any selection.
You can use this command to place text saved to the Clipboard into text fields on
dialog boxes. You cannot paste text into the Text view.
Note
• You also can access the Paste command by selecting the text, right-
clicking in a text field, and then clicking Paste from the shortcut menu
or by pressing Ctrl + V.
Related Topics
• Standard Toolbar, page 456
Find Object Command (Edit Menu)

Edit > Find Object
Searches for objects in the model that match criteria that you specify. The search
options can include a combination of data criteria, graphic criteria, graphic volume
(area), and individual elements.
The language for the definition list criteria consists of operations, types, and data; one
criterion per line. The operation on the first line is performed on all of the elements
in the model. The result is a group of elements that match the first criteria. The
operation on the second line (if there is one) is performed on this new group of
elements, narrowing the group down farther. Each of the remaining lines in the
definition performs another operation on the remaining elements, resulting in another
new group. After the last line, the final group consists of the objects that match all
the search criteria.
Related Topics
• Find Object Command (Edit Menu), page 421

View Menu
This menu provides commands for creating and manipulating views.
All to Model Command (View Menu)

View > Fit > All to Model
Displays the entire model in all views. SmartPlant Review moves the center point
toward the true center of the fit volume.
Related Topics
• Fit All Views to Model, page 79
View to Model Command (View Menu)

View > Fit > View to Model
Fits the model in the active view. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views
adjusts accordingly.
Note
• You also can access this command by clicking the Fit View to Model
button on the Common toolbar.
Related Topics
• Fit View to Model, page 79
View to Object Command (View Menu)

View > Fit > View to Object
Zooms in on the selected object.
Related Topics
• Fit View to Object, page 80

View to Volume Command (View Menu)

View > Fit > View to Volume
Zooms in on the selected volume. SmartPlant Review displays a tracking rectangle

from your first point to your second point. The current model coordinates of your
mouse position display in the status bar. After you place your second point, the Fit
View to Volume command adjusts the view window to display the volume selected.
The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly.
Note
• You also can access this command by clicking Fit View to Volume on
the Common toolbar.
Related Topics
• Fit View to Volume, page 80
View to Display Set Command (View Menu)

View > Fit > View to Display Set
Prompts you to select one or multiple display sets that you need to fit to the active
view. Then, matches the view to the selected display set.
Notes
• SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets.
However, the capacity of your computer can limit the number of
display sets that are available.
• A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one
or more display sets.
• Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or other display sets
to any level of nesting that you need.
Related Topics
• Fit View to Display Set, page 80
View by Eye Point Command (View Menu)

View > Place > View by Eye Point
Places the current active view at the selected point in the model, moving the eye point
and adjusting the center point in the corresponding manner. The model coordinates of
the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and
elevation views while you position it.

Tips
• The Eye Point setting motion is relative to the direction in which you
are looking.
• You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values
in the North, East, and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the
Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change the eye point location
using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Related Topics
View by Center Point Command (View Menu)

View > Place > View by Center Point
Centers the model on a defined point in the specified view. The model coordinates of
the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and
elevation views while you position it.
Notes
• You also can click the Center View command on the Common
toolbar.
• You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values
in the North, East, and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the
Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change the eye point location
using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Related Topics
Eye Point Only Command (View Menu)

View > Place > Eye Point Only
Places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. You can place
the eye point by locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the graphic
views. The model coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The
view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while you position it.
Note
• If the eye and center points get too close, some viewing operations will
cease to function properly.

Related Topics
Center Point Only Command (View Menu)

View > Place > Center Point Only
Allows you to view the model from the center of the current view. The model
coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in
the plan and elevation views while you position it.
Note
• If the eye and center points get too close, some viewing operations will
cease to function properly.
Related Topics
Far Clipping Plane Command (View Menu)

View > Place > Far Clipping Plane
Changes the location of the far clipping plane of the view cone. The model
Related Topics
• Near Clipping Plane Command (View Menu), page 425
Near Clipping Plane Command (View Menu)

View > Place > Near Clipping Plane
Changes the location of the near clipping plane of the view cone. The model
Related Topics
• Far Clipping Plane Command (View Menu), page 425

Top Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Top
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so that you are looking
down at the top of the model.
Related Topics
• Common View Control Toolbar, page 470
• Rotate with Model Fit Command (View Menu), page 430
Front (North) Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Front (North)
toward the north direction of the model.
Related Topics
Right (West) Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Right (West)
toward the west direction of the model.
Related Topics
Bottom Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Bottom
up at the bottom of the model.
Related Topics

Back (South) Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Back (South)
toward the south direction of the model.
Related Topics
Left (East) Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Left (East)
toward the east direction of the model.
Related Topics
Top Front Right (North West) Isometric Command

(View Menu)
View > Common > Top Front Right (North West) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the top front right
(north west).
Related Topics
Top Front Left (North East) Isometric Command (View

Menu)
View > Common > Top Front Left (North East) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the top front left
(north east).
Related Topics

Top Back Right (South West) Isometric Command

(View Menu)
View > Common > Top Back Right (South West) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the top back right
(south west).
Related Topics
Top Back Left (South East) Isometric Command (View

Menu)
View > Common > Top Back Left (South East) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the top back left
(south east).
Related Topics
Bottom Front Right (North West) Isometric Command

(View Menu)
View > Common > Bottom Front Right (North West) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the bottom front
right (north west).
Related Topics

Bottom Front Left (North East) Isometric Command

(View Menu)
View > Common > Bottom Front Left (North East) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the bottom front
left (north east).
Related Topics
Bottom Back Right (South West) Isometric Command

(View Menu)
View > Common > Bottom Back Right (South West) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the bottom back
right (south west).
Related Topics
Bottom Back Left (South East) Isometric Command

(View Menu)
View > Common > Bottom Back Left (South East) Isometric
Changes the orientation of the main view to display the model from the bottom back
left (south east).
Related Topics

Rotate with Model Fit Command (View Menu)

View > Common > Rotate with Model Fit
Determines if SmartPlant Review updates the eyepoint in the Main view when you
use the common view commands to rotate the model. If this command is on,
SmartPlant Review fits the Main view to the model after you rotate the model. If this
command is off, SmartPlant Review does not fit the model in the Main view when
you rotate the model.
Note
• If you want to use the common view commands to rotate about an
object, turn this option off and use the encircle mode to move around
the object. See Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An
Overview, page 157 for more information.
Zoom In Command (View Menu)

View > Zoom > In
Zooms into the model by a zoom factor that you specify. SmartPlant Review zooms
multiplies the zoom factor that you specify by the distance between the current eye
and center points.
Notes
• You can use this command in any view. However, if you use the
command in the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions
are effected. Each time that you zoom in, you increase the detail by the
current zoom factor.
• You can change the Perspective Angle of the Main view to produce
zoom effects without changing the Eye Point position.
• You specify the zoom factor by using the View > Zoom > Amount
command. See Zoom Amount Command (View Menu), page 432 for
more information.
Related Topics
• Zoom Amount Dialog Box, page 82

Zoom Out Command (View Menu)

View > Zoom > Out
Zooms out of the model by a zoom factor that you specify. SmartPlant Review zooms
and center points.
Notes
• Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything
within the window to appear smaller, providing an overview of that
portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all
the Window Zoom Out commands, except that each time that you
zoom out, you increase the viewing area by the current zoom factor.
• You can use this command in any view. However, if you use the
command in the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions
are affected.
• You also can produce zoom effects without changing the Eye Point
position simply by changing the Perspective Angle of the Main view.
more information.
Related Topics
Zoom About Point Command (View Menu)

View > Zoom > About Point
Lets you specify a point in the model about which to zoom. If this command is on,
you select the point in the model each time that you zoom. If this command is off,
SmartPlant Review zooms about the current eye point position.
Notes
• You can specify the point anywhere in the model. Depending on the
location of the point that you select and the current eye point location,
it is possible to create the illusion that you are zooming in the opposite
direction from that which you would expect.

more information.
Related Topics
Zoom Amount Command (View Menu)

View > Zoom > Amount
Lets you specify the zoom factor for zoom commands. SmartPlant Review zooms
and center points.
Related Topics
Settings Command (View Menu)

View > Settings
Displays the View Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the view display
options.
Related Topics

Display Commands: An Overview

The Display commands available on the View > Display menu provide access to
various display settings.
Wireframe Switches display of the model to wireframe.
Wireframe, Switches display of the model to hidden line wireframe.

Hidden Line
Flat Shading Switches to the use of flat shading when rendering the model.
Coarse Facets Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Coarse Facets
mode.
No Specular Switches to the use of non-specular shading when rendering the

model.
Full Shading Displays the model with full shading, the highest rendering mode
available.
Object Textures Displays a textured shading view of application session. To use

this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
Backfaces Draws the back sides of certain elements (for example, pipes,
elbows, reducers, and valves). Turn backfaces off for faster
display of your model.
End Caps Switches the display of pipes, valves, and reducers on or off.
Display is faster with caps off.
Annotations Switches the display of the text, data, and volume annotations on
or off in the model.
Measurements Switches the display of measurements on or off in the Main

view. Only those measurement collections for which the Tools >
Measure > Edit Collections > Edit tab > Display option is
checked will be displayed.
Axis Activate Switches the display of the x-, y-, and z-axes in the current view.
Axis XYZ Label Switches the display of the labels of the x-, y-, and z-axes from
Axis N, E, El to X, Y, Z in the current view.
Dashed View Displays the view cone as a dashed line for faster wireframe
Cone updates. This option is especially good during animation on slow
graphic cards.

Perspective Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Perspective

mode.
Perspective Angle Displays the Set Perspective Angle dialog box, which allows
you to specify the perspective angle for rendering the view.
Wireframe Displays the Color dialog box to change the Red, Green, and
Background Color Blue values of the wireframe background color.
Stroking Specifies the number of facets to render on cylindrical objects.

Tolerance
Lighting Direction - Specifies the direction of the light in the model.
Ambient - Specifies the amount of ambient light in the model.
Brightness - Specifies the brightness of the light in the model.
Range Rejection Activate - Turns on range rejection so that very small graphical
elements do not display as defined by the range rejection
settings.
All - Displays a series of Set All Range Rejection Values

dialog boxes, prompting you to specify display rejection criteria
for each view.
Main - Displays the Set Main Range Rejection dialog boxes,

allowing you to specify display rejection criteria for the Main
view.
Plan - Displays the Set Plan Range Rejection dialog boxes,

allowing you to specify display rejection criteria for the Plan
view.
Elevation - Displays the Set Elevation Range Rejection dialog

boxes, allowing you to specify display rejection criteria for the
Elevation view.
Show Settings - Displays the range rejection on or off status and

pixel ranges for each view.

Wireframe Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Wireframe
Switches the display of the model to wireframe.
Note
• The default mode is wireframe.
Related Topics
Wireframe, Hidden Line Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Wireframe, Hidden Line
Switches the display of the model to hidden line wireframe.
Wireframe, Hidden Line mode remains active even when you recall a saved view.
For example, you have a view in Wireframe, Hidden Line mode. When you recall
the saved view manually or by playing a key frame animation, the view remains in
hidden line mode. You can recall all other settings in the normal manner.
Important
• To use this functionality, you must install the On-Site Drawing
Generation module.
Related Topics
Flat Shading Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Flat Shading
Switches the display of the model to flat shading.
Flat Shading displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of
slightly different colors. The Flat Shading mode is the quickest mode to update.
Notes
• You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views.
• You can control the amount of time it takes for an image to appear
shaded by defining a shading quality on the Display tab of the Edit
Motion Settings dialog box. The Quality field defaults to Full
Shading, however, you also can choose No Specular, Coarse Facets,
or Flat Shading.

Related Topics
Coarse Facets Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Coarse Facets
Turns off the smooth shading. Surfaces are still shaded, but the display of circular
objects is very faceted. For example, pipes look like they are composed of flat sides.
Related Topics
• Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 167
• Display Tab, page 96
No Specular Command (View Menu)

View > Display > No Specular
Provides smooth shading. This command is faster than Full Shading because the sun
does not reflect bright spots on the element surface.
Related Topics
Full Shading Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Full Shading
Provides the highest rendering mode available. This command produces a more
curved appearance because various shades of the selected color are produced across
the surface of the elements. Therefore, the Full Shading mode is the slowest to
update.
Note
• You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views.
Related Topics
• Toggle Between Shaded and Wireframe, page 76

Object Textures Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Object Textures
Displays a textured shading view of the model.
Important
• Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the
display.
Related Topics
• Set Textures, page 61
Backfaces Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Backfaces
Draws the backsides of certain elements, such as pipes, elbows, reducers, and valves.
Important
• Turn Backface off for faster display of your model.
Note
all other elements will be maintained and updated according to your
Related Topics

End Caps Command (View Menu)

View > Display > End Caps
Switches the display of pipes, valves, and reducers on or off.
Important
• Turn End Caps off for faster display of your model.
Related Topics
Annotations Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Annotations
Switches the display of text, volume, and data annotations on or off in the model.
Related Topics
Measurements Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Measurements
Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view.
Note
• Only those measurement collections for which the Tools > Measure >
Edit Collections > Edit Tab > Display option is checked are
displayed.
Related Topics

Axis Activate Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Axis > Activate
Switches the display of the x-, y-, and z-axes on or off. When Axis is on, a small
coordinate displays in the top right corner of the view. The coordinate triad shows
which direction is E (x axis), N (y axis), and El (z axis). The N arrow always points in
the direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view.
Related Topics
• Axis XYZ Label Axis Command (View Menu), page 439
Axis XYZ Label Axis Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Axis > XYZ Label Axis
Changes the axis labels from N, E, El to X, Y, Z. The coordinate triad shows which
direction is X (east), Y (north), and Z (elevation). The Y arrow always points in the
direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view.
Related Topics
• Axis Activate Command (View Menu), page 439
Dashed View Cone (View Menu)

View > Display > Dashed View Cone
Displays the view cone as a dashed line for faster wireframe updates. This option is
especially useful if you are displaying animations on a computer with a slow graphic
card.
Related Topics
• View Cone Tab, page 98
Perspective Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Perspective
Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Perspective mode.
Related Topics
• Perspective Toolbar, page 469

Perspective Angle Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Perspective Angle
Displays the Set Perspective Angle dialog box, which allows you to specify the
perspective angle for rendering the view.
Related Topics
• Set Perspective Angle Dialog Box, page 132
Wireframe Background Color Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Wireframe Background Color
Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the values of the
wireframe background color.
Related Topics
Stroking Tolerance Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Stroking Tolerance
Displays the Set Stroking Tolerance dialog box, which specifies the number of
facets to render on cylindrical objects.
Note
• Stroking Tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes, reducers,
valves, and elbows are rendered. The larger the tolerance, the better
the display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the view
update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100.
Related Topics
• Set Stroking Tolerance Dialog Box, page 75
Direction Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Lighting > Direction
Displays the Set Light Direction dialog box, which allows you to specify the
direction of light in the model.
Related Topics
• Set Light Direction Dialog Box, page 74

Ambient Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Lighting > Ambient
Displays the Set Ambient Light Level dialog box, which specifies the amount of
ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0 to
100.
Related Topics
• Lighting Tab, page 100
• Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box, page 73
Brightness Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Lighting > Brightness
Displays the Set Brightness Level dialog box, which specifies the brightness of the
light in the model.
Related Topics
• Lighting Tab, page 100
• Set Brightness Level Dialog Box, page 73
Range Rejection Activate Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Range Rejection > Activate
Defines a range around very small graphical elements that you do not want to display.
Then, the Activate command turns on range rejection so that the elements do not
display in the model.
Note
• Reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws
improves display time.
Related Topics

All Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Range Rejection > All
Displays the Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, which allow you to
specify display rejection criteria for each view.
Related Topics
• Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box, page 74
Main Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Range Rejection > Main
Displays the Set Main Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify
display rejection criteria for the Main view.
Related Topics
Plan Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Range Rejection > Plan
Displays the Set Plan Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify
display rejection criteria for the Plan view.
Related Topics
Elevation Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Range Rejection > Elevation
Displays the Set Elevation Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to
specify display rejection criteria for the Elevation view.
Related Topics

Show Settings Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Range Rejection > Show Settings
Displays the range rejection on or off status and pixel ranges for each view.
Related Topics
Show/Hide for Main View Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Main View
Switches the project manager associated show/hide commands for levels and display
sets as applied to the main view. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the
views at the same time. Because of this, this command is only available if a view
other than the Main view is set to honor the show/hide commands.
Related Topics
Show/Hide for Plan View Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Plan View
sets as applied to the plan view. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the
views at the same time. Because of this, this command is only available if a view
other than the Plan view is set to honor the show/hide commands.
Related Topics

Show/Hide for Elevation View Command (View Menu)

View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Elevation View
sets as applied to the elevation view. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all
the views at the same time. Because of this, this command is only available if a view
other than the Elevation view is set to honor the show/hide commands.
Related Topics
Advanced Commands: An Overview

The Advanced commands available on the View menu provide access to various
other display settings.
Redraw on Redraws the selected view on refresh rather than using the buffer.
Refresh
Buffered Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays entire view at
Updates once.
Stereo To use the Stereo functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism
module.
Activate - Turns on stereo viewing.
Distances - Displays the Stereo Distances dialog box, used to

adjust the stereo distances to create realistic depth perception.
Left View - Displays the left "eye" of the stereo view.
Right View - Displays the right "eye" of the stereo view.
Far to Near Displays the Far to Near Clip Ratio dialog box, allowing you to
Clip Ratio adjust the display quality produced by some video cards.
NetMeeting Enables a high-end graphics card to work with Microsoft

NetMeeting software.
Elumens Activate - Toggles the Elumens display mode on or off. The

perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.
Settings - Displays the Elumens Settings dialog box, allowing you

to edit the Elumens display mode settings., allowing you to edit the
Elumens display mode settings.

Related Topics
Redraw on Refresh Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Redraw on Refresh
Sets the software to redraw everything in the selected view on refresh.
Notes
• For large models, turn this option off for better performance.
• When Redraw on Refresh is off, the backing store is used to repair
the display until you click Window > Refresh.
• Any item, such as a window, dialog box, or toolbar, that displays over
the Main, Plan, or Elevation view during a refresh is included in the
saved (backing store) image. Therefore, to improve system
performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image, you
should use caution when placing these items.
Related Topics
Buffer Updates Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Buffer Updates
Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once. When this
option is on, you will see the model being drawn during updates.
Related Topics
• Advanced Tab, page 101

Stereo Activate Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Stereo > Activate
Turns on stereo viewing.
The following stereo viewing hardware is required for this option:

• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or
CE-1).
• In addition, Electrohome has some projection systems that support
stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.
Important
• To view in stereo, you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter
turned on.
• Set the video driver to stereo interlaced mode before you run
SmartPlant Review.
• If the Stereo option is disabled, verify that Stereo Display is selected
in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the Video
Configuration application in Control Panel.
Related Topics
Distances Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances
Displays the Stereo Distances dialog box, which allows you to adjust the stereo
distances to create realistic depth perception.
Important
Related Topics
• Stereo Distances Dialog Box, page 120

Left View Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Stereo > Left View
Displays the left eye image of the stereo view.
Important
Related Topics
Right View Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Stereo > Right View
Displays the right eye image of the stereo view.
Important
Related Topics
Far to Near Clip Ratio Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Far to Near Clip Ratio
Displays the Set Far to Near Clip Ratio dialog box, which allows you to adjust the
display quality produced by some video cards.
In most cases, reducing the far to near clip ratio value improves the display quality.
Tip
• If some of your elements have a poor display quality, such as
appearing cracked, lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View
Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works
best. For example, reduce 1024 to 512, reduce 512 to 256, and so on
until the display quality is acceptable.
Related Topics
• Advanced Tab, page 101

NetMeeting Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > NetMeeting
Enables a high-end graphics card to work with Microsoft NetMeeting software.
Important
• Select the NetMeeting check box only if your computer has a high-
end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in
Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration
software.
Related Topics
Elumens Activate Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Elumens > Activate
Toggles the Elumens display mode on or off. The perspective angle changes when
the Elumens mode is on.
Note
VisionStation dish.
Related Topics

Elumens Settings Command (View Menu)

View > Advanced > Elumens > Settings
Displays the Elumens Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the Elumens
display mode settings.
Note
VisionStation dish.
Related Topics
• Elumens Settings Dialog Box, page 125
Display Order Command (Tools Menu)

View > Advanced > Display Order
Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view
updates. This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. If you are
interested in particular elements or if you are working in a specific area, you can
define those elements to display first.
Notes
• Only one list can exist at a time. Each time that you select this
command, you are prompted to either create a new list or add to the
existing list.
• You also can access this command by pressing Display Order on the
Tools toolbar.
Related Topics
• Define Display Order, page 64

Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > Settings
The Settings command displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box, which
allows you to set options for background and environment box images.
With Photo-Realism Settings, you can edit the raytracing options before actually
editing your raytracing model. Options for improving system performance during
raytracing operations are also provided.
Important
Related Topics
• Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 310
Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings
This command displays the Global Lighting dialog box, which allows you to edit
options for controlling lighting in your model.
Global Lighting Settings provides options for controlling the light that envelops
objects, the light from a camera flash bulb, and the light from the sun. Options for
controlling the computation of fog are also provided.
Important
Related Topics
• Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 313
• Cities Dialog Box, page 317
• Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 314
• Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 319
• Solar Vector Dialog Box, page 318
• Time Zones Dialog Box, page 316
• World Map Dialog Box, page 316

New Point Light Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > New Point Light
This command allows you to place a new point light. After specifying a position and
size for the new point light, the New Point Light dialog box displays, allowing you
to adjust the light options.
Important
Note
light to a point light, for example, you must delete the spot light, and
Related Topics
New Distant Light Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > New Distant Light
This command allows you to place a new distant light. After specifying a position and
size for the new distant light, the New Distant Light dialog box displays, allowing
you to adjust the light options.
Important
Note
Related Topics

New Spot Light Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > New Spot Light
This command allows you to place a new spot light. After specifying a position and
size for the new spot light, the New Spot Light dialog box displays, allowing you to
adjust the light options.
Important
Note
Related Topics
Edit Source Light Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light
The Edit Source Light command allows you to select a light in the model and adjust
its properties.
Important
• Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited.
Related Topics
• Edit Source Lights Dialog Box, page 329

Delete Source Light Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light
The Delete Source Light command allows you to select a light from the model and
delete it.
Notes
• Deleted lights are permanently removed from the database.
• Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.
Related Topics
• Delete Source Lights Dialog Box, page 330
Raytrace Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace
The Raytrace command raytraces the Main view. The output of the raytrace is
displayed in the Main view.
Important
• SmartPlant Review must be the topmost window when the raytraced
image is complete; otherwise, the raytraced image will be lost when
you switch back to the application. If the Main view is not fully visible
when the raytrace completes, you are prompted with an option to
reload the raytraced image
Tip
Notes
Settings.
• If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified, you must
click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again.
Related Topics

Raytrace Range Command (View Menu)

View > Photo-Realism - Raytrace Range
The Raytrace Range command allows you to confine a raytrace to within a set area
of the Main view.
Notes
Settings.
• If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings, you
must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the
image again.
Related Topics
Save and Recall Command (View Menu)

View > Save and Recall
Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view
windows, depending on the group. This command also allows you to define the
animation path for a movie.
Note
• Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within
that view. Thus, you can save a Plan or Elevation view, then Zoom
in/out or Pan left/right/up/down the model just within that view, and
then recall the saved view. The model position is restored as if the
Zoom and Pan had not occurred within that view. Saving the view
does not ever change the Main view's eye or center point.
Related Topics
• Recall Partial View, page 90
• Save and Recall Views Dialog Box, page 94

Snapshot Command (View Menu)

View > Snapshot
Displays the Snapshot View dialog box, which is used to create an image file (or
snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen.
Caution
• When you use the Snapshot command for a view, do not switch tasks
or bring up any dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead
of the image. For the same reason, any screen saver operations are
automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running.
Capturing the image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full
Review to capture the image quickly.
Note
• To use this functionality, you must install one of the following
modules: Construction, API, Collaboration, Simulation and Visual
Effects, Photo-Realism, or On-site Drawing Generation
Related Topics
• Snapshot View Dialog Box, page 220
Full Screen Command (View Menu)

View > Full Screen
Increases the current view layout on the screen. This command is very useful for
stereo viewing, because window borders can impair the stereo visual cues.
This command retains the show/hide and window positioning information of the Full
Screen toolbar. You can use the Alt + V then Alt + E key sequence to display or hide
the menu bar in full screen mode, but placing the mouse at the top of the screen does
not display the menu bar.
Related Topics
• Full Screen Display Mode, page 58

Toolbars: An Overview
A toolbar is a row of buttons or icons displayed on the screen. When you click these
buttons or icons, certain functions of the application are activated. Toolbars can be
customized and usually can be moved around on the screen according to your
preference.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar is used to open, save, print, cut, copy, or paste a file and to
display SmartPlant Review help.
Common Toolbar
Use the Common toolbar commands to display pane layouts and to set motion
parameters.
Motion Settings displays the Edit Motion Settings dialog box, which allows
you to edit motion settings.
Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text Window.
Forward/Back, Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back
by moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or
right.
Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up, down, left or right without changing
the viewpoint depth.
Rotate moves the display set in incremental steps.
Lateral moves through the model laterally.
Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. The eye point
encircles the model on this track.
Lock Center Point locks the center point of the Main view so that it does not
change during navigation or motion commands.
Lock Elevation locks the elevation of the Main view so that it does not change
during navigation or motion commands.
Views Control lets you select any common view by selecting the face or point
from which you want to view the model.

View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in
relation to the direction in which you are looking.
Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement
in relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing.
Fit View to Model fits the model in the active view.
Fit View to Object fits an object that you select in the active view.
Fit View to Volume zooms on the selected volume.
Center View centers the model on a defined point in a specified view.
Place Eyepoint places the selected point as the eye point position of a new
location.
Center Point Only allows you to view the model from the center of the current
view.
Zoom In zooms into the model by the current zoom factor times the distance
from the current eye and center points.
Zoom Out zooms out of the model by the current zoom factor times the
distance from the current eye and center points.
View Settings displays the View Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit
the view display options.
Save and Recall Views displays the Save and Recall Views dialog box, which
allows you to save any display in the view window, which you may want to
recall later. It also allows you to recall existing views.
Snapshot View displays the Snapshot View dialog box to create an image file
(or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or
screen. To use this functionality, you must install one of the following modules:
Construction; API; Collaboration; Simulation and Visual Effects; or Photo-
Realism.

Tools MiniBar
The Tools MiniBar toolbar provides access to some of the most commonly used
commands in SmartPlant Review.
Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line.
Find Tags searches for matching criteria for specified data.
Edit Tag edits the text of the active tag (the tag that appears in the text
window).
Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number.
Go To Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag.
Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag.
Find Object locates objects that match criteria that you specify.
Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one
or more design files.
Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points.
Shortest distance measures the shortest distance between two objects.
Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement that you placed from
the project.
ScheduleReview Toolbar
Use the ScheduleReview toolbar commands to play, pause, stop and move around in
a ScheduleReview file.
Important
Schedule Review Settings command displays the Schedule
Review Settings dialog box.
Go To Start moves the display back to the start date.
Back moves the display back.

Forward moves the display forward.
Go To End moves the display to the end date.
Play starts the review process using the parameters that you
define in the Review dialog box. The review process starts on the
Start Date that you defined and stops on the End Date.
Pause pauses the current review process.
Stop stops the current review process.
Record records a new review.
Go To Date moves the display to the date that you specify.
Percent Complete displays the percentage of the review that is

complete.
Notes
• You can use any of the following techniques to display the
ScheduleReview toolbar while you are in Full Screen mode:
- Press ALT + T, then V, then H.
- Press ALT + T, then V, then U and use the Customize dialog box to
turn on the ScheduleReview toolbar.
- Dock the Full Screen toolbar and right click on the docking area. Then,
select ScheduleReview from the menu.

Views Toolbar
Use the Views toolbar commands to resize and update the image displays that appear
within the various model views.
Toggle Display Between Shaded and Wireframe displays the model in

shaded mode or in wireframe mode in the Main view.
Fit View to Model displays the entire model.
Fit View to Object adjusts the view to fit an object that you select.
Fit View to Volume adjusts the view by volume.
Center View repositions the model in a view.
Eye Point Only places the selected point as the eye point position of a new
location.
Center Point Only displays the model from the center of the current view.
Far Clipping Plane changes the location of the far clipping plane of the view
cone.
Near Clipping Plane changes the location of the near clipping plane of the
view cone.
Zoom In decreases the viewing area by the current zoom factor, which causes
everything within the view to appear larger.
Zoom Out increases the viewing area by the current zoom factor, which causes
everything within the view to appear smaller.
Full Screen increases the current view layout on the screen.
View Settings modifies settings in the Main view.
Save and Recall Views defines the animation path for a movie or saves the
current view displayed in the Main, Plan, and Elevation views.
Snapshot View creates an image file (or snapshot file) of the current Main
view or screen.

Common Views Toolbar

Use the Common Views toolbar commands to display any of the common view
orientations in the current window.
Views Control displays the Views Control dialog box.
Rotate with Model Fit determines if SmartPlant Review updates the eyepoint
in the Main view when you use the common view commands to rotate the
model.
Top changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so that you
are looking down at the top of the model.
Front (North) changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so
that you are looking at the north elevation of the model.
Right (West) changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so
that you are looking at the north elevation of the model.
Bottom changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so that
you are looking up at the bottom of the model
Back (South) changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so
that you are looking at the south elevation of the model.
Left (East) changes the orientation of the main view to display the model so
that you are looking at the east elevation of the model.
Top Front Right (North West) Isometric changes the orientation of the main
view to display the model from the top front right (north west).
Top Front Left (North East) Isometric changes the orientation of the main
view to display the model from the top front left (north east).
Top Back Right (South West) Isometric changes the orientation of the main
view to display the model from the top back right (south west).
Top Back Left (South East) Isometric changes the orientation of the main
view to display the model from the top back left (south east).
Bottom Front Right (North West) Isometric changes the orientation of the
main view to display the model from the bottom front right (north west).
Bottom Front Left (North East) Isometric changes the orientation of the
main view to display the model from the bottom front left (north east).

Bottom Back Right (South West) Isometric changes the orientation of the
main view to display the model from the bottom back right (south west).
Bottom Back Left (South East) Isometric changes the orientation of the main
view to display the model from the bottom back left (south east).
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar provides easy access to some of SmartPlant Review most
commonly used commands.
Find Object locates objects that match criteria that you specify.
Edit Display Set allows you to edit the description, name, ID, and material for
the display set definition.
Assign Materials To Elements assigns material properties to model elements

and sets various rendering parameters. To use this functionality, you must
install the Photo-Realism module.
Unassign Materials removes the assigned material properties from model

elements. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism
module.
Edit Materials changes the properties of the assigned material properties for
model elements. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism
module.
Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one
or more design files.
Display Order defines the order in which the elements in the model display
each time the Main view updates.

Measure Toolbar
The Measure toolbar provides easy access to some of SmartPlant Review's most
commonly used measurement commands.
Display Measurements turns on or off the display of measurements.
One Click Measurement turns on or off the one click measurement mode.
Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points.
Surface Measurement measures from any surface point.
Shortest Distance measures the shortest distance between any two objects.
Move Measurement relocates a measurement label.
Restore Position returns to its original position the last measurement label that
you moved.
Edit Collections allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing
measurement collection.
New Collection automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets

it to be the active collection.
Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement in the current active
collection.
Delete Active Collection Measurements removes all of the measurements in

the active collection, but does not delete the collection itself.
Delete All Measurements removes all of the measurements in each of the

measurement collections, but does not delete the collections themselves.
Delete All Collections removes all measurement collections and any associated
measurements. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting all
of collections.

Annotation Toolbar
The Annotation toolbar provides easy access to some of SmartPlant Review's most
commonly used annotation commands.
Display Annotations turns on or off the display of annotations.
Text Annotations turns on or off the display of text annotations.
Data Annotations turns on or off the display of data annotations.
Volume Annotations turns on or off the display of volume annotations.
Edit Data Annotation edits the selected data annotation.
Delete Data Annotation deletes the selected data annotation.
Delete All Data Annotation deletes all of the data annotations in the model.
Place Volume Annotation allows you to place a new volume annotation.
Edit Volume Annotation allows you to review, edit, or create volume

annotations.
Adjust Volume Annotation allows you to change the location, dimensions, or

orientation of the selected volume annotation.
Delete Volume Annotation removes the selected volume annotation.
Delete All Volume Annotations removes all of the volume annotations.
Activate Clipping Volume turns on or off the view of the clipping volume.

Navigation Toolbar
Use the Navigation toolbar commands to move through the model and view various
points of interest.
Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text Window.
Forward/Back, Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back
by moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or
right.
Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up, down, left or right without changing
the viewpoint depth.
Rotate moves the display set in incremental steps.
View Cube displays the model in three dimensions.
Lateral moves through the model laterally.
Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. The eye point
Vertical Encircle places a vertical track around the sphere. The eye point
Surface Encircle places a track on the surface of the sphere, like a sectional
cut.
View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in
relation to the direction in which you are looking. S
Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement
in relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing.
View Independent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement
without relation to the direction or angle indicated by the elevation and bearing.
Plant North Motion moves the object (or display set) in relation to the plant
north.
Lock Center Point keeps the center point of the main view constant during
navigation commands.
Lock Elevation keeps the eye point elevation constant during navigation
commands.

Motion Toolbar
Use the Motion toolbar commands to control the movement of the view cone eye
point and move laterally and in a circular motion through the three dimensional
model and view various points of interest.
Move Eye Point allows motion commands to affect the graphic views.
Move Display Set allows motion command to affect display sets.
Motion Settings defines the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the
keyboard motion, the clipping planes, and allows you to set up the joystick. To
use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a
constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer.
Step moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in
a constant direction, using the keypad to steer.
Toggle Step Direction switches step direction from forward/clockwise to

backward/counter-clockwise.
Display Key Frames displays the Display Key Frames dialog box to set
movie definition items.
Play Key Frames plays the current key frame animation from its current
starting frame or from its current paused frame.
Pause Key Frames pauses the current playing key frame animation and/or
resumes the current paused key frame motion animation.
Stop Key Frames stops the current playing or paused key frame motion
animation.

Tags Toolbar
The Tags toolbar provides access to the most commonly used tags commands.
Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line.
Place Tag Without Leader places a new tag in the model without attaching a
leader line.
Edit Tag edits the text for the active tag (the tag that appears in the text
window).
Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number.
Find Tags displays the Find Tags dialog box that lets you search for a set of
tags by using a query.
Go To Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag.
Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag.
Go To Tag displays a tag number that you specify.
Window Toolbar
The Window toolbar provides access to the most commonly used window
commands.
Cascade arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that you can see
part of each window.
Tile Horizontal arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each
window is completely visible.
Tile Vertical arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each
window is completely visible.
Arrange All arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review.
Restore Pane Layout allows you to return the view layouts to their original
default configurations.
Single Pane Layout displays the Main view only.

Three Pane Layout displays the Main View, Plan View, and Elevation View.
Four Pane Layout displays the Main View, Plan View, Elevation View, and
Text View. See
Refresh Active View redraws the selected view to update its contents.
Photo-Realism Toolbar
Photo-Realism commands allow you to place and delete source lights, and define
and edit Photo-Realism settings, light settings, and raytrace options.
Important
Object Textures turns on or off texture display.
Photo-Realism Settings displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box, in

which you can edit the raytracing options before actually raytracing the model.
Global Lighting displays the Global Lighting dialog box, in which you can
edit options for controlling the lighting in the model.
Point Light allows you to place a new point light in the model. After
specifying a position and size for the new point light, the New Point Light
dialog box displays allowing you to adjust the light options.
Distant Light allows you to place a new distant light in the model. After
specifying a position and size for the new distant light, the New Distant Light
dialog box displays allowing you to adjust the light options.
Spot Light allows you to place a new spot light in the model. After specifying a
position and size for the new spot light, the New Spot Light dialog box
displays allowing you to adjust the light options.
Edit Light allows you to select a light in the model and adjust its properties.
Delete Light allows you to select a light in the model and delete it.
Raytrace executes a raytrace on the Main view and displays the output in the
Main view.
Raytrace Range allows you to raytrace a portion of the Main View.

Position Control Toolbar Command (View Menu)

View > Toolbars > Position Control
The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the view cone eye
point and center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement.
Note
• The docking areas for this toolbar are automatically restricted to help
reduce the possibility of the docking area obscuring the client area of
the application window. If you are unable to dock this toolbar where
you want it, try resizing the toolbar to be smaller or resizing the
application window to be larger.
Related Topics
Perspective Angle Toolbar

The Perspective Angle toolbar allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of
the view cone. Move the slider anywhere from two degrees (to decrease area) to 160
degrees (to increase area).
Increasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom Out command.
Everything within the viewing area appears smaller, but the Eye Point or Center Point
positions do not change.

Decreasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom In command.
Everything within the viewing area appears larger, but the Eye Point or Center Point
positions do not change.
Notes
• You can dock the Perspective Angle toolbar at the edge of the
window, or you can let it float like a dialog box.
Encircle Radius Toolbar

The Encircle Radius toolbar increases or decreases the radius of the green
sphere used in the Horizontal Encircle, Vertical Encircle, and Surface
Encircle Positioning Modes. A larger radius gives the effect of standing
farther away from the center point.
Note
• You can dock the Encircle Radius toolbar at the edge of the
window, or you can let it float like a dialog box.
Related Topics
• Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 521
• Surface Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 523
• Toolbars: An Overview, page 456
• Vertical Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 522
Views Control Toolbar

The Views Control toolbar lets you select any common view by selecting the face or
point from which you want to view the model.

Notes
• You can dock the Views Control toolbar at the edge of the window, or
you can let it float like a dialog box.
Using Key-In Commands

Although SmartPlant Review has been redesigned to make commands easier to use,
SmartPlant Review continues to support the Key-In commands found in
DesignReview.
Using Key-In Commands

1. Click View > Toolbars > Key-in to display the Key-in toolbar.
2. Select the Key-in command from the drop down box.
3. Press Enter.
Tip
• For more information about any SmartPlant Review command, click
the Search tab in the SmartPlant Review Help and enter the name of
the command.
Customizing Toolbars: An Overview

Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review. You
can show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in the model viewing area.
You also can add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own.
• To show or hide a toolbar, point to Toolbars on the View menu. The

list shows all of the available toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar
name means that the toolbar will be displayed. To show a toolbar that
is not checked, click its name. To hide a toolbar, click the name of the
toolbar to clear the check mark.
• To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar
and then drag the toolbar to the new location.
• To add a command to a toolbar from another toolbar, press CTRL and
drag the command onto the new toolbar.

• To add a command to a toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize

and then click the Commands tab. In the Categories list, click the
group that contains the command that you want to add, and then in the
Commands list, click that command and drag it to the toolbar in your
workspace.
• To remove a command from a toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and
release it anywhere in the model viewing area (except on another
toolbar).
• If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Photo-
Realism toolbar, you can reset the toolbar to its original state.
To dock toolbars next to each other, do the following:
1. Drag toolbar A so that the bottom of toolbar A is above the top edge of toolbar B.
2. While keeping toolbar A above toolbar B, drag the left edge of toolbar A sot that
it overlaps the right end of toolbar B.
3. Drop toolbar A. It will dock just to the right of toolbar B.
Related Topics
• Create a Toolbar, page 474
• Reset a Toolbar, page 474
Customize Dialog Box

Allows you to show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in the three
dimensional model viewing area. You also can add or remove commands from
toolbars, or create your own.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Allows you to display toolbars, create a new toolbar, reset a toolbar, or change the
toolbar button display.
Toolbars in use - Lists the available toolbars. To display a toolbar, select the check
box next to the name. To hide a toolbar, clear the check box. Toolbars contain the
same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review.
Custom name - Allows you to type a new name for the selected toolbar.
Show ToolTips - Displays on-screen descriptions of toolbar buttons when the pointer
pauses on them. ToolTips help you find toolbar command names. When you point
to a command button on the toolbar, a yellow tooltip label displays the command
name.
Cool Look - Changes the toolbar button display from three-dimensional buttons to
flat buttons.

Large Buttons - Increases the size of toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
New - Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, allowing you to create a new, empty
toolbar to which you can add buttons or menus.
Delete - Deletes the selected toolbar.
Reset - Removes any changes that you made to the selected toolbar and restores the
original settings. For example, if you add commands to one of the default toolbars,
such as the Photo-Realism toolbar, you can press Reset to change the toolbar back to
its original state.
Reset All - Removes any changes that you made to any of the toolbars and restores
the original settings.
Related Topics
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Allows you to view commands and command descriptions. You also can drag
buttons to a toolbar or change menu options.
Categories - Displays categories of commands, organized by menu name or by type.

You can click a category to change the list of commands in the Buttons box.
Buttons - Displays a list of buttons from the category that you select in the
Categories box. You can drag the button that you want from the Buttons box onto a
toolbar.
Description - Displays text explaining what the selected command does.
Related Topics
New Toolbar Dialog Box

Allows you to create a new, empty toolbar that you can add buttons or menus to.
Toolbar name - Allows you to type a name for the new toolbar.
Related Topics
• Customize Dialog Box, page 472
• Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 471
• Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box), page 472

Create a Toolbar
1. Click View > Toolbars > Customize.
2. Click New.
3. In the Toolbar name box, type a new name for the toolbar.
4. Click the Commands tab, and then in the Categories list, click the group that
contains the command that you want to put on the new toolbar.
5. In the commands list, click the command that you want to put on the new toolbar,
and then drag the command onto the new toolbar displayed in your workspace.
6. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have added all the commands that you want on the
new toolbar.
Tips
• You also can add a command to a toolbar by pressing CTRL and
dragging the command from an existing toolbar.
• To rename a custom toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and
then click the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars list, select the custom
toolbar that you want to rename. In the Toolbar name box, type a new
name.
• To delete a custom toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and
then click the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars list, select the custom
toolbar that you want to delete, and then click Delete.
Reset a Toolbar
1. On the View menu, point to Toolbars, and then click Customize.
2. Click the Toolbars tab.
3. In the Toolbars box, select the toolbar that you want to reset.
4. Click Reset.
Related Topics

Menu Bar Command (View Menu)

View > Menu Bar
Displays or hides the Menu Bar. You can hide the menu bar to provide more space to
view the model.
Note
• Press ALT V + ALT E to redisplay the menu bar when it is hidden.
Related Topics
Using the Status Bar: An Overview

The status bar is the horizontal strip at the bottom of the window for the active
software application on your computer. The status bar is an information tool because
it provides text that describes the current state of the data that you are viewing in the
window and any other contextual information.
One example of the use of the status bar in SmartPlant Review concerns collision
detection. When collision detection runs, the status bar updates periodically to show
the number of collisions and objects compared.
Brief command descriptions relate the basic function of a command. When you point
to a command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the status bar. Also,
messages explain the next action for you to take during a workflow in the command
Related Topics
• Show or Hide the Status Bar, page 476
• Status Bar Command (View Menu), page 475
Status Bar Command (View Menu)

View > Status Bar
Displays the Status Bar, which provides text that describes the current state of the
data that you are viewing in the window and any other contextual information.
Related Topics
• Using the Status Bar: An Overview, page 475

Show or Hide the Status Bar

1. Click View.
2. Click Status Bar to change the setting - from on to off, or off to on. When the
status bar is active, a checkmark appears to the left of the Status Bar command
name on the View menu.
Related Topics
• Status Bar Command (View Menu), page 475
• Using the Status Bar: An Overview, page 475
Project Manager Command (View Menu)

View > Project Manager
Displays the Project Manager window. By default, the Project Manager is a floating
dialog box. If you prefer, you can click Dockable on the Project Manager right-click
menu to dock the Project Manager on one of the edges of the SmartPlant Review
window. SmartPlant Review remembers this setting when you exit the application. If
you have the Project Manager as a floating dialog box, the Arrange All command
does not affect its position.
Project Manager allows you to look at an overview of the model and manage its
parts in the following tasks:
• View all project files associated with the model.

• Add, manage, and edit the display sets.
• Review construction sequences by using a ScheduleReview project.
Related Topics
185

Tools Menu
This menu provides commands for common SmartPlant Review tasks.
Show Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Show
Switches the visible or hidden display of the selected display set.
Notes
• You can also right-click on the display set in Project Manager, then
select a manipulate command.
Related Topics
Shade Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Shade
Switches between shaded or wireframe display of the selected display set.
Note
• You also can switch between shaded or wireframe by clicking View >
Settings or View > Display.
Dim Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Dim
Decreases the brightness of the selected display set. You can switch from a dimmed
level to normal brightness. This setting applies to all objects in a display set (that is,
you cannot isolate a portion of the display sets and apply a different setting). You can
never have some display sets in low brightness (or dimmed) and others in high
brightness.
Related Topics

Material Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Material
Turns on or off the display of the material application assigned to the selected display
set. If no material is assigned, the Assign Material dialog box appears for you to
specify material for the display set.
Note
• If an element is a member of more than one display set with different
display properties, the element is displayed using the properties
assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.
Related Topics
Move Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Move
Switches the display set position from the moved position to the unmoved position.
Using the Move command in conjunction with the Edit Display Set Position dialog
box, you can move an entire display set of objects rather than moving each object
separately.
Note
• You can access the Edit Display Set Position dialog box by clicking
Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position.
affected. All other elements are updated according to the active view
settings. Also, the temporary change to the Backface and Endcap
settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. User
settings are maintained and honored for all other updates.
Related Topics

Show Only Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Show Only
Allows you to show all selected display sets and hide all other display sets.
Notes
• You can also select Show Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut
menu. First, select the display sets in Project Manager, then right-
click on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.
Related Topics
• Display Sets - Show Only, page 189
Hide Only Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only
Allows you to hide all selected display sets and show all other display sets.
Notes
• You can also select Hide Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut
menu. First, select the display sets in Project Manager, then right-
click on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.
• Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and
verify that there are some display sets already created.

Related Topics
• Display Sets - Hide Only, page 190
Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition
Displays the Edit Display Set dialog box, which allows you to create a new or edit an
existing display set definition.
Options are provided for editing the description, name, ID, and material for the
display set definition.
Related Topics
• Edit Display Set Dialog Box, page 197
Display Sets Assign Material Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material
Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box, which allows you to assign
materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. You can select materials from
multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere.
You must select the display set in the Project Manager display set control before
running this command.
You also can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display
characteristics in the Material Sphere.
The following conditions must be met to assign materials to a three dimensional

model:
• The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the
model must already be created. The files must be in a folder that you
can access from SmartPlant Review.
• When you assign a material to a model surface, that material is applied
to every model element that is in that display set. If an element is a
member of more than one display set with different display properties,
the element is displayed using the properties assigned to the display set
with the lowest ID number.

• If a material assignment is not made to a display set, SmartPlant

Review uses the default material value for that surface or any materials
assigned to its elements.
Notes
material assignments, delete the .mat file of the project.
Related Topics
• Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box, page 205
Edit Position Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position
Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, which allows you to change the
position of the selected display set. However, moving display sets requires special
considerations. Moved display sets that contain special elements such as pipes,
valves, reducers, and elbows may sometimes not display properly unless the
Backfaces flags and Endcaps flags are turned on.
The Edit Display Set Position dialog box works in conjunction with the Tools >
Display Sets > Move command to allow you to reposition display sets independent of
their default location. This functionality is a very useful tool for checking clearances
and provides the ability to temporarily move a group of objects around in the model.
Note
all other elements are maintained and updated according to your
Related Topics

Auto-Define Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define
Displays the Auto-Define Display Sets dialog box, which allows you to pick items
by label to include in a new display set.
Note
• You can stop an auto-definition run by pressing the ESC key.
SmartPlant Review will stop the process at the next label.
Related Topics
• Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box, page 205
Folder Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > New > Folder
Creates a New Display Set folder in the Project Manager.
Note
• You also can create a new folder by clicking View > Project
Manager > Display Sets.
Related Topics
Display Set Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set
Allows you to create a new display set definition.
Important
• If you have an editable display set selected in the display set tree
control in the Project Manager, the display set name is defaulted to
"Copy of" and the selected display set name (for example, "Copy of
Reboiler System").
• If you do not have an editable display set selected in the display set
tree control in the Project Manager, BUT the current criteria
definition in memory for the Find Object command is not empty, then
the new display set's name is set to "Copy of Find Object".
Related Topics

Display Sets Delete Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Delete
Allows you to delete selected display sets.
Related Topics
• Delete Display Sets, page 191
Rename Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Rename
Allows you to change the name of an existing display set.
Note
• You also can change the name of a display set by clicking View >
Project Manager > Display Sets. Then, right click and choose
Rename from the shortcut menu.
Related Topics
Reverse Dim Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Display Sets > Reverse Dim
Allows you to reverse the brightness rendering state for all dimmed display sets.
When checked, all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Highlight brightness state.
When un-checked, all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Dim brightness state.
Important
• To use the Reverse Dim command, you must first select a display set
from the list in Project Manager.
Related Topics

Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Materials > Assign Materials
Displays the Assign Material to Elements dialog box allowing you to assign
materials in a palette file to elements in a model file. You can select materials from
multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere.
You also can select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying
the level and color of the element. In the SmartPlant Review environment, you also
can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window.
The following conditions must be met to assign materials to a model:
• The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the
model must already be created. The files must be in a folder that you
can access from the SmartPlant Review product.
• When you built the three dimensional model, you must have used
different levels and colors to distinguish between the different surfaces
in the model. As you assign materials to the model, identify the model
elements by specifying the color and level numbers used in the model
file. When you assign a material to a model surface, that material is
applied to every model element that is on the same level and color as
that element. If every part of the model is on one level and uses only
one color, you can assign only one material definition to the entire
model.
• If a material assignment is not made to a surface, SmartPlant Review
uses the default material value for that surface.
Notes
Related Topics
• Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box, page 291

Unassign Materials Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Materials > Unassign
Displays the Unassign Materials dialog box allowing you to remove materials in a
palette file from elements in a model file. You can select materials from multiple
palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. You also
can select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying the level
and color of the element. In the SmartPlant Review environment, you also can select
elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window.
Notes
Related Topics
• Unassign Materials Dialog Box, page 292
Edit Materials Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Materials > Edit
Creates and edits material definitions. If you want to assign an existing material to
your model, you do not need to use this dialog box. Go directly to the Tools >
Materials > Assign Materials command.
Important
A material definition consists of all the material's display properties: colors and
patterns, diffuse and specular reflectance, finish, ambient reflectance, transmittance,
refraction, and bump maps. Using the Edit Material dialog box, you can mix colors,
define surface characteristics, and select patterns and bump maps to create materials.
You can then save the materials in palette files.
When you create new materials, the software stores them in palette files. Palette files
contain groupings of materials and are assigned a .pal extension. By saving material
definitions in palette files, you can use them again, as needed, on many different
models. Several palette files are supplied with SmartPlant Review and can be found
in the ..\review\sample\projects\example folder.

If you delete or move materials that are used in a model, SmartPlant Review prompts
you to provide folders to search in for the missing files when it opens the model.
Related Topics
• Edit Materials Dialog Box, page 293
Create Materials Command (Tools Menu)

Tools> Materials > Create
Creates a palette (.pal) and material table (.mat) file from an existing IGDS or
MicroStation color table (.tbl). A palette file is created with material definitions for
each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The colors in the .tbl table are
used in the material definition, and default values are given to the remaining display
properties and rendering parameters. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks
like plastic with the .tbl colors. You also can edit the resulting palette through the
Edit Materials command.
The Create Materials command is most useful if you have a standard .tbl table to
start with. It offers a quick start to creating a palette and material table. Identify the
surfaces in the model to which you want to assign the IGDS or MicroStation color
table. The surfaces are specified by the color and level numbers in the model file. A
material table (.mat) file is created for each model file that you select, with material
assignments based on the surfaces that you identified.
Note
• To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module
• This command overwrites any existing material table.
• To display similar colors in SmartPlant Review and MicroStation, you
can attach a new color table to a .dgn file using the MicroStation
Color Table dialog box or the CT= key-in command. However, once
colors are assigned or a database is created, the VLT color table saved
in the database, along with the material assignments (if any), will
override the .dgn color table.
Related Topics

Edit Search Path Bump Map Command (Tools Menu)

Tools> Materials > Edit Search Path > Bump Map
Allows you to change the location in which SmartPlant Review looks for bump map
files.
Related Topics
• Edit Search Path Palette Command (Tools Menu), page 487
• Edit Search Path Pattern Command (Tools Menu), page 487
• Search Path Dialog Box, page 40
Edit Search Path Palette Command (Tools Menu)

Tools> Materials > Edit Search Path > Palette
Allows you to change the location in which SmartPlant Review looks for palette files.
Related Topics
• Edit Search Path Bump Map Command (Tools Menu), page 487
• Edit Search Path Pattern Command (Tools Menu), page 487
• Search Path Dialog Box, page 40
Edit Search Path Pattern Command (Tools Menu)

Tools> Materials > Edit Search Path > Pattern
Allows you to change the location in which SmartPlant Review looks for pattern files.
Related Topics
• Edit Search Path Bump Map Command (Tools Menu), page 487
• Edit Search Path Palette Command (Tools Menu), page 487

Snaplock Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Snaplock
Allows you to measure from a repeatable point on a selected piece of geometry.
SmartPlant Review generates snaplock points at fixed locations on a given piece of

geometry for use during snaplock measurement. A snaplock point is displayed as
either a small square or round tag point on a surface, as shown in the picture below.
The location of a given snaplock point is always in the same place for a specific type
of geometry, making snaplock measurement more precise because it is repeatable.
Related Topics
Surface Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Surface
Allows you to measure from any point on a piece of geometry.
Surface points can be any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode, not
including background points. While they work well for quick measurements between
two or more objects, surface point measurements are difficult to repeat precisely
because they can be at any point on a given surface.
Related Topics

Measure Shortest Distance between Objects

Command (Tools Menu)
Tools > Measure > Surface
Allows you to measure the shortest distance between two objects that you select.
This command honors the selection of a single element of a complex element when
the Auto-highlight elements mode is turned on. Otherwise, this command assumes
that the entire complex element is to be tested for the shortest distance between the
two selected objects.
Note
• The One Click Measurement Mode should not be used with the
Measure Shortest Distance between Objects command.
Related Topics
• Shortest Distance Measurement, page 227
Measure One Click Measurement Mode Command

(Tools Menu)
Tools > Measure > One Click Measurement Mode
Allows you to enter into Surface or Snaplock measurement and stay in the command
until you right click. When you are in One Click measurement mode, you do not have
to keep using the mouse or function keys to restart the Snaplock or Surface
measurement commands before entering the next measurement point. One Click
mode does not allow you to change the view or move around. You can exit the
measurement command, modify the view location or settings, and then return to
measurement to select the next point.
Related Topics

Move Measurement Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Move Measurement
Allows you to reposition measurement labels. When clicked, the Move

Measurement command displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the
position marker for the measurement that you want to move and then click where you
want the new position to be. The moved measurement is attached to the original
connecting line.
Related Topics
Restore Position Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Restore Position
Allows you to reposition a measurement label. When clicked, the Restore Position
command displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the position marker
for the measurement that you want to restore.
Related Topics
• Restore Position, page 228

Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Edit Collections
Groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. A measurement

collection is a named group of measurements that connect together within each
collection. One collection is independent of all other collections, allowing you to
display or hide measurement collections independently in the model. For example,
one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected series of footings
measurements. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and contain a series of
I-Beam measurements. The footings measurement collection will not connect to the I-
Beam measurement collection.
The Edit Collections command allows you to customize the measurement symbology
(for example, lines, snaplock points, measurement units, and text, and so forth) for
each measurement collection in your project.
Related Topics
New Collection Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > New Collection
Generates a new measurement collection and automatically sets it to be the active

collection. The default name for the new collection is prefixed with
AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the project site name and an incremented integer
(for example, AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). This name cannot be edited.
Note
• You also can access this command by pressing Ctrl + Shift + F8 or by
clicking New Measurement Collection on the Tools toolbar.
Related Topics

Delete Last Measurement Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Delete Last Measurement
Allows you to remove the last measurement added to the currently active collection.
Related Topics
Delete Active Collection Measurements Command

(Tools Menu)
Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements
Allows you to remove all of the measurements in the active collection, but does not
delete the collection.
Related Topics
Delete All Measurements Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements
Removes all of the measurements in each of the measurement collections, but does
not delete the collections.
Related Topics
Delete All Collections Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections
Removes all measurement collections and any associated measurements. You do not
need to delete the measurements before deleting all of collections.
Related Topics
• Delete All Collections, page 230

Hide Level Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Hide Level
Allows you to select an object to hide and then determine the views in which to hide
the item.
Note
• You also can access this command by pressing F + 4 on your
keyboard.
Related Topics
• Hide Level Dialog Box, page 116
Level Settings Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Level Settings
Displays the Level Settings dialog box, which allows you to select the categories (or
levels) that you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level
by selecting a category; or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn
it on by selecting the level number. You also can read the current level settings in the
Plan, Elevation, or Main view and change the level settings for designated views.
Related Topics
Collision Detection Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Collision Detection
Displays the Collision Detection dialog box, which allows you to select options for
running the collision detection program.
The Collision Detection command supports two modes of collision detection: static
and dynamic. Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a
specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a
touch or overlap condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems
such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting.

move.
Important
• SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space on the
hard drive where your TMP folder is located to run collision detection.
Note
affected. All other elements are updated according to the active view
settings. Also, the temporary change to the Backface and Endcap
settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. User
settings are maintained and honored for all other updates.
Related Topics
ScheduleReview Settings Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings
Displays the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, which allows you to use abstract
data from your project planning software to display the sequence of construction. You
also can reverse the action, so that you can display the deconstruction sequence.
Important
Related Topics

Query New Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New
displays the elements according to selected options. For example, you can search for
elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded
graphics.
Notes
already exist.
Related Topics
• New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box, page 375
Query Edit Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit
displays the elements according to the options selected. For example, you can search
for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red,
shaded graphics.
Notes
already exist.

Related Topics
Review Play Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Play
Starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review tab of the
Settings dialog box. When you click Play, the review process starts on the Start Date
that you defined and stops on the End Date.
Notes
Related Topics
Review Pause Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Pause
Interrupts the current ScheduleReview session.
Tip
• You also can use the Go To Start, Back, Forward, Go To End or
Stop command when Pause is activated.
Note
Related Topics
Review Stop Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Stop
Stops the current ScheduleReview session.
Note
Related Topics

Forward Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Forward
Allows you to step forward through the current ScheduleReview session.
Notes
• Forward is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics
Back Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Back
Allows you to step back through the ScheduleReview session in one-day increments.
Notes
• Back is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics
Go To Start Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go To Start
Takes you back to the initial start date defined for the ScheduleReview session.
Notes
• Go To Start is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics

Go To End Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go To End
Allows you to go directly to the last date defined in the current session.
Notes
• Go To End is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.
Related Topics
Go To Date Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go To Date
Allows you to jump to a specific date within the current ScheduleReview session.
Note
Related Topics
Record Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Record
Allows you to take snapshots of the ScheduleReview animation during playback.
Note
Related Topics

Task Symbology Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Task Symbology
Allows you to define the symbology of specific tasks at the start and finish of the
task.
Notes
• If you do not use this command to assign symbology, the Review
command uses the default symbology.
Related Topics
Auto-Association Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto-Association
Associates tasks with a group automatically. It works by comparing the names of

existing groups to the names of existing tasks. For example, you may have a group
called steel pipe associated with all the steel pipes in your model. You may also have
several tasks in your project file named install steel pipe, paint steel pipe, and inspect
steel pipe. When you use this command, ScheduleReview looks for group names that
match task names. The task names listed above have a text string (steel pipe) that
match the group name steel pipe. As a result, ScheduleReview can associate all the
tasks that contain the text string steel pipe with the group steel pipe.
Note
• Before using this command define all of the groups and tasks that you
will use to review the model.
Related Topics
• Auto-Association Dialog Box, page 378

Add Association Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association
Allows you to manually create an association between a task and one or more display
sets.
Note
• This command is available only when you have selected a
Related Topics
Remove Association Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association
Disassociates a task from one or more display sets.
Notes
• You can restore the associations that you just removed by dragging the
display set name and dropping it on the recently unassociated display
set.
Related Topics
• Remove a ScheduleReview Association, page 372
New Project Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project
Allows you to enter a unique name for a new session.
Note
• After a project is created, you must define ScheduleReview Settings.
Related Topics
• New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box, page 379

Delete Project Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project
Allows you to remove a previously defined ScheduleReview project from the session.
Caution
• When you delete a project, this action cannot be reversed.
Important
Related Topics
• Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box, page 379
Set Active Project Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Set Active Project
Identifies which ScheduleReview project is used in the current review session.
Important
Related Topics
Refresh Active Project Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > ScheduleReview > Refresh Active Project
Updates the active project with current data. Using this command ensures that the
most recent data is available for the ScheduleReview session.
Note
• You must have project planning software such as MS Project or
Primavera loaded to use this command.
Related Topics

Data Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Data Annotation > Display
Turns on or turns off the display of data annotations.
Note
• The View > Display > Annotations command controls the display of
all annotations, regardless of the program that created them. The
Tools > Data Annotation > Display command controls only
annotations created by the Data Annotations command. For data
annotations to display, you must turn on both the View > Display >
Annotations and the Tools > Data Annotation > Display commands.
Related Topics
Data Annotation Edit Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Data Annotation > Edit
Allows you to edit the selected data annotation.
Related Topics
• File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box), page 258
Delete One Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Data Annotation > Delete One
Deletes one selected data annotation from the current project.
Related Topics

Delete All Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Data Annotation > Delete All
Deletes all data annotations from the current project.
Related Topics
Volume Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Volume Annotation > Display
Starts or stops the display of volume annotations.
Note
• The Annotations command on the View > Display menu is a global
toggle. It controls the display of all annotations, regardless of the
program that created them. The Tools > Volume Annotation >
Display command controls only annotations created by the Volume
Annotation command.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
Volume Annotation Place Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Volume Annotation > Place
Allows you to place a new volume annotation.
Note
• Use the Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit command to set the
current volume annotation type.
• To create a new volume annotation after editing an existing volume
annotation, click Clear first.


Module.
Related Topics
• Create a New Volume Annotation Category, page 267
Volume Annotation Edit Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit
Displays the Edit Volume Annotations dialog box, which allows you to review, edit,
and create volume annotations.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
Volume Annotation Adjust Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust
Allows you to change the physical location, dimensions, or orientation of the selected
volume annotation. You can adjust the volume at the end of the placement operation,
or you can select a volume in the model and adjust it.
Notes
Module.
• Pres ESC to cancel any placements or adjustments done during the
command.
• You can right click to back up to the last placement step for the
volume or to adjust a volume using the following steps. If the Place
with dialog dimensions options on the Dimensions and Options tab
of the Volume Annotation dialog box is turned on, then you can right
click to set the volume to the default dimensions.
Position
You can adjust the position of a volume using the following steps:

1. Select the starting point.

• For scaffold, box and clipping volume types, select any yellow
highlighted edge of the volume glyph to position the anchor point of
the box volume.
• For cylinder and weld types, select any yellow highlighted straight
edge of the volume glyph to position the start center point of the
cylinder volume.
• For sphere types, select any yellow highlighted face of the volume
glyph to position the center point of the sphere volume.
• Click to place the current volume point at the current model view
depth.
• Double click to locate an object and its surface point. If there are
multiple objects under the cursor, click to cycle through the available
options and right click when the one that you want to use highlights.
Click again to accept the selected object and its surface point. The
current volume point will be positioned at the surface point of the
selected object.
• Double right-click at the location in one view ( for example, Plan).
Then, select the bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example,
Elevation). The current volume point will be positioned precisely at
the intersection of the bore-sight line and the cursor position.
• Right click to back up to the last placement step.
• Press ESC to either complete the placement process when placing a
volume or to cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools >
Volume Annotation > Adjust command.
Notes
• A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the
current position.
• The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by
the volume position. Thus, to locate to the same elevation, the main
view should be in a Top orientation.
• The model coordinate for the current mouse position is displayed in
the status bar N, E and El panes.
• If the Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Elevation command
option is on, then the elevation of the volume cannot be changed using
a single click.

Face
You can adjust a face of a scaffold, box, clipping volume, cylinder and weld volume
types using the following steps:
1. Select any yellow highlighted face of the volume glyph to select that face for
adjustment. The selected face will highlight in red.
• Select the new position for the current face. SmartPlant Review places
this point at the current model view depth.
current volume face will be positioned relative to the surface point of
the selected object.
Elevation). The current volume face will be positioned relative to the
intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse position.
• Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the
adjustment selection mode.
• Press ESC key to either complete the placement process when placing
a volume or to cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools >
Notes
current face adjustment.
• If you cannot select the face that you want to adjust because it is
behind another face, simply orient the view so the correct face is in
front.
the center of the current face position. Thus, to locate to the same
elevation, the main view should be in a Top orientation.
• The sizing for the current mouse position is displayed in the status bar
N, E and El information panes. For box volumes, these panes
represent the depth, width, and height dimensions. For cylinder
volumes, these panes represent the length dimension.
• If the cylinder volume has been reoriented (rotated), then it may be
temporary un-oriented (un-rotated) during the face adjustment process.

• The face adjustment is automatically prevented from allowing a

dimension of zero by either snapping back to the starting dimensions
or adjusting the opposite face to compensate.
Radius
You can adjust the radius of the cylinder, weld and sphere volume types using the
following steps:
1. Select any yellow highlighted face cross brace of the volume glyph to select the
radius value for adjustment. The cross braces will highlight in red.
• Click to position the radius of the cylinder or sphere volume relative to
the current cursor position at the current model view depth.
volume will be sized to the surface point of the selected object.
Elevation). The volume will be sized precisely to the intersection of
the bore-sight line and the mouse position.
Volume Annotation > Adjust command
Notes
current sizing.
the volume position. Thus, to locate to the same elevation, the main
view should be in a Top orientation.
• The radius for the current cursor position is displayed in the status bar
N, E and El information panes.
• The radius adjustment is automatically prevented from allowing a
radius of zero by snapping back to the starting radius.
Orientation
You adjust the orientation (rotation) of the scaffold, box, clipping volume, cylinder
and weld volume types using the following steps:

1. Select any yellow highlighted axis of the volume glyph to select the
corresponding model axis about which to orientate the volume. The selected axis
will highlight in yellow. The red axis allows the volume to be rotated around the
model's X (or East) axis. The green axis allows the volume to be rotated around
the model's Y (or North) axis. The blue axis allows the volume to be rotated
around the model's Z (or Elevation) axis. All rotation is about the current center
point of the volume.
• Click to orient the current axis of orientation relative to the current
cursor position at the current model view depth.
current axis of orientation will orient relative to the surface point of the
selected object.
Elevation). The current axis of orientation will orient relative to the
intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse position.
Notes
current volume orientation.
• Because orientation is around the model axes, a view orientation that is
perpendicular to the axis of rotation is best suited for visual feedback.
For example, the Top view when rotating about the Z axis, the Front
view when rotating about the Y axis, and the Right view when rotating
about the X axis.
• The current model view depth for the click is determined by the center
of the volume.
• The orientation angles for the current cursor position are displayed in
the status bar P, F and S information panes (Plan, Front, and Side).
• To reset the orientation to an un-oriented position, right click to the
last placement step.

Related Topics
• Adjust a Volume Annotation, page 269
Volume Annotation Delete One (Tools Menu)

Tools > Volume Annotation > Delete
Deletes the selected volume annotation from the current project.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
Volume Annotation Delete All Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Volume Annotation > Delete All
Deletes all volume annotations from the current project.
Note
Module.
Related Topics
Collaboration Run Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Collaboration > Run
Starts the Collaboration module and NetMeeting. Collaboration allows you and
other users in different locations to view and examine the model simultaneously.
All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date version. A collaboration
session accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference.

Important
• Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the
functionality.
Related Topics
Collaboration Edit Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Collaboration > Edit
Displays the Collaboration Settings dialog box, which allows you to update details
for the data sets and participants in the collaboration.
You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The
Conference members list box displays the current participants in a tree format.
NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member, based on the NetMeeting
profile of the user.
The Driver options box lets you establish settings for the driver of the conference.
Important
• Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the

functionality.
Related Topics
• Collaboration Settings Dialog Box, page 356
Refresh Data Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Refresh Data
Updates views with changed data. The software refreshes information such as
measurements, tags, and display sets. The status bar, located at the bottom of the
window, provides brief messages that state the actions of the software during the
refresh operation.
Related Topics
• Refresh Data, page 45
Edit Attachments Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments
Displays the Edit Attachments dialog box, which allows you to add, edit, or remove
files associated with an object. Changes on this dialog box also alter the entries on the
Get External Data popup menu. The file associations are saved to the Microsoft
Access Get External Data database file for the project. You can attach Microsoft
Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files, ASCII text files from Notepad or from the
SmartPlant Review text window, MicroStation files, sound, animation, and Video
Engine files. You can attach virtually any file type. Executables and their associated
files must exist before you attach them. If you select an object that contains no label
data and no attached data, the Edit Attachments button is disabled.
Related Topics

Edit Types Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types
Displays the Edit Types dialog box, which allows you to define the application used
to open files of a selected type when using the Get External Data command. You
also can use the Edit Types dialog box to delete associations.
Related Topics
• Edit Types, page 282
Open Database Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Get External Data > Open Database
Allows you to open or create a Get External Data database, which allows you to
attach data to objects in the model. If your project is already pointing to a Get
External Data database, then selecting this command will show any updates made to
the database by other users in the project since you opened your session.
You can access the Open Database command from the Tools menu or from the
shortcut menu for an object in the Main view. You can use the Edit Attachment and
Edit Types commands, which appear with the Open Database command on the
Tools menu.
Related Topics
Motion Menu
This menu provides commands for moving through your model.

Eye Point Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Eye Point
Allows motion commands to affect the graphic views.
Note
• The Eye Point setting motion is relative to the current directional
mode.
Related Topics
• Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview, page 162
Display Set Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Display Set
Allows motion commands to affect display sets.
Notes
• The Display Set motion setting is relative to the defined display set.
Related Topics
Continuous Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Move > Continuous
Moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a
constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide
no input. When Continuous Step is off, you move through the model only by
command from the mouse, keypad, or joystick. Continuous motion mode also
allows you to use other commands while in motion.
Notes
• You also can click Continuous on the Motion toolbar or press 0 on
the keypad to start Continuous motion.

• If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion, the last

keypad motion command is repeated up to the rate specified by
Maximum moves per second on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.
For example, if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction
and then press 0, Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction
motions.
• Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single
step, then select Continuous, and then toggle the step direction.
However, Continuous motion does not reverse direction if the last
keypad motion before you toggled the step direction was not a step.
Related Topics
Single Step Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Move > Single Step
Moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a constant
direction, using the keypad to steer.
Notes
• You can use the Motion Settings dialog box to specify the step size.
• You also can click Step on the Motion toolbar or press period (.) on
the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU
on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.
Related Topics
Toggle Step Direction Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction
Switches step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and

back again.
Note
• You also can click Toggle Step Direction on the Motion toolbar or
press 5 on the keypad.
Related Topics

Motion Settings Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Settings
Displays the Motion Settings dialog box, which defines the time for screen updates,
the shading mode, the keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. You also can use
this command to set up a joystick.

Related Topics
Auto-Highlight Elements Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Element
Allows you to display object label data for single elements of geometry instantly in
the Text view. If you are in Single Pane Layout, you can see label data by clicking
and accepting the object. The label data displays in a pop-up window.
When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight Element
mode to view object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl, Alt, and
Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Ctrl key
activates the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates the Pan
mode. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode.
Related Topics

Auto-Highlight Complex Elements Command (Motion

Menu)
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Complex Element
Allows you to display object label data for complex elements of geometry (such as
cells) instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single Pane Layout, you can see label
data by clicking and accepting the object. The label data displays in a pop-up
window.
When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight Complex
Element mode to view object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl,
Alt, and Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The
Ctrl key activates the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates
the Pan mode. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode.
Related Topics
• Auto-Highlight Elements Command (Motion Menu), page 515
Auto-Highlight Components Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Components
Allows you to display object label data for components (elements grouped by DRMS
linkage) instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single Pane Layout, you can see
label data by clicking and accepting the object. The label data displays in a pop-up
window.
When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight Component
mode to view object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl, Alt, and
Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Ctrl key
activates the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates the Pan
mode. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode.
Related Topics
• Auto-Highlight Complex Elements Command (Motion Menu), page
516
• Auto-Highlight Elements Command (Motion Menu), page 515

Auto-Highlight
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight.
2. Click an object in the model.
Notes
• Auto-Highlight displays object label data instantly in the Text view. If
you are in Single Pane Layout (you do not have the Text view open),
you can click and accept an object to view the label data.
• Auto-Hightlight also displays the corresponding object surface point
location in the status bar while you drag the mouse over an object. If
no object is currently under the mouse, then the point is on the view
plane at the center point location.
• You also can click the Auto-Highlight command on the View

toolbar.
Related Topics
• Auto-Highlight Components Command (Motion Menu), page 516
Forward/Back, Left/Right Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right
Moves the view cone forwards or backwards in reference to the object that you are
looking at in the model when moving the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or
right causes the view cone to rotate about the eye point left or right. When using any
of the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view
cone.
You can activate this mode by pressing the Ctrl key, clicking the command on the
View toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back,
Left/Right.
Note
• The Positioning Mode and Directional Mode that you select affects
this Mouse Drag Mode.
Related Topics

Pan Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan
Increases and decreases the view cone elevation when you move the mouse up or
back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to move in a line parallel
to the far clipping plane. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step side-ways.
When using any of the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye
point of the view cone.
You can activate this mode by pressing the Shift key, clicking the command on the
View toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan.
Note
Related Topics
• Pan, page 141
Rotate Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate
Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the
mouse left or right causes the view cone to rotate left and right. When using any of
the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view
cone. Rotate mode is similar to standing in one place and tilting your head up and
down and looking left and right. The view cone eye point does not move using this
mode.
You can activate this mode by pressing the Alt key, clicking the command on the
View toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate.
Note
Related Topics

View Cube Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes >View Cube
Points the view cone in a direction that you define interactively. When using any of
the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view
cone. View Cube mode is similar to standing in one place and looking in any
direction. The view cone eye point does not move using this mode.
You can activate this mode by clicking the command on the View toolbar or by
clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube.
Related Topics
Priority Mode Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Mode > Priority Mode
Sets the mouse drag motion to allow a combination between north and east axis
translation.
Notes
• Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north
and east axis translation (thus diagonal movements are possible).
• Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the
greatest move amount (thus only non-diagonal movements are
possible).
Related Topics
• Set Priority Mode, page 142
Center Mode Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode
Sets the mouse drag origin to always be the center of the view instead of the point
where the mouse drag began. The Center Mode command allows you to use motion
with a selected object based at the center.
Related Topics

Lock Center Point Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Center Point
Locks the center point of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation
or motion commands. When this option is turned on, commands that only affect the
center point of the view are not available.
Related Topics
• Lock Elevation Command (Motion Menu), page 520
Lock Elevation Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Elevation
Locks the elevation of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or
motion commands. When this option is turned on, commands that only affect the
elevation of the view are not available.
Related Topics
• Lock Center Point Command (Motion Menu), page 520
Positioning Modes Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes
This command provides options for controlling the movement of the view cone eye
point.
With Positioning Modes, you can set the view cone eye point for the following
movements:
• Move freely in any direction in the model.

• Restricted to a circular track parallel to the Plan View.
• Restricted to a circular track perpendicular to the Plan View.
• Restricted to a circular track that can be moved in any orientation.
Related Topics
• Set Vertical Encircle Motion, page 158

Lateral Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes >Lateral
Allows you to move through the model in any direction that you choose using any
combination of Mouse Drag and Directional modes.
You can define the current eye point location using the Position Control toolbar, the
View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Eye Point Only command.
Related Topics
157
Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle
Restricts the movement of the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that
displays in the Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that
also displays in the two views. In the Horizontal Encircle mode, the blue track is
always parallel to the Plan view and perpendicular to the Elevation view.
The eye point always looks toward the center point, the green cross, of the sphere.
You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar,
the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only
command. Changing the elevation of the track in the Elevation view changes the
direction of the view cone. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the
radius of the green sphere.
The Rotate Mouse Drag Mode is useful when using this positioning mode because
you can control both the rotation of the eye point around the track and elevation of the
track.
Notes

Related Topics
157
Vertical Encircle Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle
Restricts the movement of the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that
displays in the Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that
also displays in the two views. In the Vertical Encircle mode, the blue track is
locked to the center point of the Plan View. The track is always perpendicular to the
Plan view.
You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar or
command. Changing the location of the track in the Plan view changes the direction
of the view cone. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the
green sphere.
Notes

Related Topics
157
Surface Encircle Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle
Locks the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and
Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two
views. In the Surface Encircle mode, you can reposition the track in either view. The
eye point always remains in the center of the track as seen in the Plan view.
You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar,
command. Changing the location of the track changes the direction of the view cone.
You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere.
Notes
Related Topics

Clip to Encircle Sphere Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere
Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the Encircle positioning modes. When
toggled On (the default), the Far clipping plane clips to the encircle sphere whenever
you enter one of the Encircle positioning modes. When toggled Off, the Far clipping
plane will not be reset when entering one of the Encircle positioning modes.
Related Topics
Maintain Encircle Clipping Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere
Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the Encircle positioning modes. When
toggled On (the default), all clipping plane values set in any of the Encircle
positioning modes are maintained when you return to the Lateral positioning mode.
When toggled Off, when you return to the Lateral positioning mode all clipping plane
values set in any of the Encircle positioning modes are reset to the values they had
before entering any of the Encircle positioning modes.
Related Topics
• Lateral Command (Motion Menu), page 521
View Dependent Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent
Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on the direction in which you
are looking. The eye point to center point vector of the view cone defines this
direction. Using the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mouse drag mode, forward moves
you towards where you are looking, back moves you away. Your elevation in the
model changes using the View Dependent mode if the view cone is pointed up or
down.
The View Dependent mode allows you to move directly toward where you are
looking.

how this Directional Modes operate.
Related Topics
View Dependent, Level Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent, Level
Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on the direction in which you
are looking. The eye point to center point vector of the view cone defines this
direction. Using the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mouse drag mode, forward moves
you towards where you are looking, back moves you away. However, your elevation
in the model does not change if the view cone is pointed up or down.
The View Dependent Level mode allows you to move toward where you are looking
but keep the same elevation.
Related Topics
View Independent Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent
Gives you full control in defining the forward direction by using the motion bearing
and elevation indicators on the Position Control toolbar. You can define different
view bearing and elevation values. This gives you the flexibility to move forward in
an arbitrary direction while looking in another arbitrary direction.
For example, you could define the motion bearing as 135 degrees and the view
bearing as 45 degrees. Moving forward would cause the eye point to move southeast,
while looking northeast.
how this Directional Modes operate.
Related Topics

Plant North Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North
Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on north in the model.
Forward moves north, back moves south, right moves east, and left moves west.
North in the model is always the top of the Plan view. Watch the Plan view when
using this mode until you become familiar with the mode.
The Plant North mode allows you to look in one direction, defined by the view cone,
while moving in another direction. This mode is similar to View Independent mode
with the exception that forward is always north.
Related Topics
Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar)

Motion > Key Frame > Display
Displays the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box, which allows you to set movie
definition items you created with the Save and Recall Views command. This
command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.
Important
Effects module.
Related Topics

Key Frame Play Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Key Frame > Play
Plays the selected key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its
current paused frame.
Note
• You also can access the Play command by pressing Ctrl + R on your
keyboard.
Important
Effects module.
Related Topics
Key Frame Pause Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Key Frame > Pause
Pauses the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resumes the currently
PAUSED key frame motion.
Note
• You also can access the Pause command by pressing Ctrl + Space on
your keyboard.
Important
Effects module.
Related Topics

Key Frame Stop Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Key Frame > Stop
Stops the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation.
Note
• You also can access the Stop command by pressing Esc on your
keyboard.
Important
Effects module.
• Clicking Play resumes the key frame animation at the starting frame,
not the frame at which you stopped.
Related Topics
Snapshot Command (Motion Menu)

Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot
Displays the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box, which provides options for saving
your key frame snapshots.
Important
• Press ESC to stop the Snapshot process once it is started. You will be
given the option to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the
moment the process stopped.
Effects module.
Related Topics
• Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box, page 176

Tags Menu
This menu provides commands for creating and manipulating tags in your model.
Leader Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Place > Leader
Places a new tag in the model with a leader line. The new tag is assigned the next
available tag number, and the tag becomes the active tag. When you place the new
tag, the software saves the corresponding view.
Important
• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the Tags > Display
> None command is active. This means that the tags do not appear in
the design.
Notes
• You also can access the Leader command by pressing F9 on your
keyboard.
Related Topics
No Leader Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Place > No Leader
Places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. Tags appear in all three
views. The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new
tag. The new tag then becomes the active tag. When you place the new tag, the
software saves the corresponding view.
Notes
• You also can access the No Leader command by pressing Ctrl + F9
on your keyboard.


the associated object is highlighted.
Related Topics
Tags Edit Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Edit
Displays the Edit Tags dialog box, which allows you to view or change the attributes
of the active tag.
Note
• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags >
Display > All to view tags in the view.
Related Topics
• Edit Tags Dialog Box, page 253
• Symbology Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box), page 254
Tags Delete Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Delete
Deletes a single tag by specifying the tag number. When you delete a tag, the tag
number is removed from use and is not reassigned to a new tag.
Related Topics

Tags Find Command (Tag Menu)

Tags > Find
Displays the Find Tags dialog box, which allows you to search for tags that match
the criteria you specify on the dialog box.
Notes
Displays > All to view tags in the design file.
Related Topics
• Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box), page 255
• Find Tags Dialog Box, page 255
• Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box), page 257
Next Command (Tag Menu)

Tags > Next
Allows you to move to the tag number following the active tag. If the active tag
number is the highest-numbered tag in the tag list, the next tag number is the lowest-
numbered tag in the tag list.
Notes
• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do
not appear in the design. To display the tags, click Tag > Display >
All.
• You also can access the Next command by pressing F10 on your
keyboard.
Related Topics
• Next Tag, page 245

Previous Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Previous
Allows you to move to the tag number preceding the active tag. If the active tag
number is the lowest-numbered tag in the tag list, the previous tag number is the
highest-numbered tag in the tag list.
Notes
• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do
not appear in the design. To display the tags, click Tags > Display >
All.
• You also can access the Previous command by pressing Ctrl + F10 on
your keyboard.
Related Topics
• Previous Tag, page 245
Go To Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Go To
Displays the Go To Tag dialog box, which allows you to display a specific tag by
selecting its number. The tag that you go to becomes the active tag.
Note
Display > Active Only to display the tags in the model.
Related Topics
• Go To Tag Dialog Box, page 257
Display Activate Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Display > Activate
Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last active. The
text for the tag displays in the Text view.
Related Topics

Active Only Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Display > Active Only
Allows you to display only active tags.
Note
Related Topics
Display All Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Display > All
Allows you to display all the tags in the view.
Note
• You must have tag display turned on to use the All command.
Related Topics
• Display All Tags, page 247
Display None Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Display > None
Allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model.
Related Topics
Action Comments Command (Tags Menu)

Tags > Display > Action Comments
Allows you to display the action comments for the current tag.
Related Topics
• Display Action Comments, page 247

Accessories Menu
This menu provides commands to load and manipulate accessories for use in
SmartPlant Review. For example, you can add commands and programs to the
Accessories menu to extend the functionality of the software. For example, you can
add commands to start other programs, such as a CAD application, a raster image
editor, or a word processor. To specify which add-ins appear on the Accessories
menu, you edit the ACCESSRY.TXT file, which is located in the SmartPlant Review
application folder.
Load Accessories Command (Accessories Menu)

Accessories > Load Accessories
Allows the software to read the ACCESSRY.TXT file. If the file contains entries, the
software puts the entries under the Accessories menu between the Tags and
Windows menus.
Important
• If you move or delete ACCESSRY.TXT, the only command available
on the Accessories menu is the Load Accessories command.
Related Topics
Text Annotations Place One Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > One
Allows you to place one textual annotation in your model. The command
automatically exits after you place the annotation, as opposed to the Place > Many
command, which remains active so that you can place another annotation.
After selecting the command, a message on the status bar prompts you to select the
object that you want to annotate and then confirm your selection.
After confirmation, the Place Annotation dialog box displays, which allows you to
control the settings for the annotation.
Related Topics

Text Annotations Place Many Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > Many
Allows you to place textual annotation in your model. This command does not
automatically exit after the placement of an annotation, like the Place > One
command, but remains active so that you can place additional annotations.
object that you want to annotate and then confirm your selection.
After confirmation, the Place Annotation dialog box displays, which allows you to
control the settings for the annotation.
Turn on the Use these settings for annotations to follow option to automatically
apply the settings to subsequent annotations. If this option is turned off, you must
apply the settings to each annotation.
Related Topics
Text Annotations Move One Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Move > One
Allows you to relocate annotation labels or leaders. The command automatically exits
after moving one annotation as opposed to the Move > Many command, which
remains active so that you can move one or more annotations. After clicking the
Move > One command, a message on the status bar prompts you to select the
annotation that you want to move and then confirm your selection.
After you select an annotation and confirm your selection, the Move Annotation
dialog box appears. You can change the values in the North, East, and Elevation
boxes to change the location of the label center or the leader endpoint. You can use
the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view. The
Select button allows you to graphically define the new location of the annotation
label or the leader.
Related Topics

Text Annotations Move Many Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Move > Many
Allows you to relocate annotation labels or leaders. This command works the same as
the Move > One command except that the command does not automatically exit after
moving a single annotation. After clicking the Move > Many command, a message
on the status bar prompts you to select the annotations that you want to move and
then confirm your selection.
After you select an annotation and confirm your selection, the Move Annotation
dialog box appears. You can change the values in the North, East, and Elevation
boxes. You can use the Apply button to test the appearance of the annotation in the
Main view. The Select button allows you to graphically define the new location of
the annotation label or the leader line.
Related Topics
Text Annotations Edit One Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit > One
Allows you to change the contents and display options of an annotation.
annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection.
different item from the Data attribute list. The Display Options group box allows
you to select or clear check boxes for Leader, Arrow, Background, Positional
units, and Persist. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text,
Related Topics

Text Annotations Edit Many Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit > Many
Allows you to change the details that you recorded when you created an annotation.
This command works like the Edit > One command except that the command does
not automatically exit after editing a single annotation.
annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection.
different item from the Data attribute list. The Display Options group box allows
you to select or clear check boxes for Leader, Arrow, Background, Positional
units, and Persist. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text,
Related Topics
Text Annotations Delete One Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > One
Allows you to delete a text annotation. The command automatically exits after the
annotation is deleted, as opposed to the Delete > Many command, which remains
active so that you can delete another annotation. After selecting the annotation that
you want to delete, an alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the text annotation.
Note
• Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the
annotation display on.
Related Topics

Text Annotations Delete Many Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > Many
Allows you to delete multiple text annotations. This command does not automatically
exit after deleting an annotation, like the Delete > One command, but remains active
so that you can delete another annotation. After selecting the annotation that you want
to delete, an alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the text annotation.
Note
Related Topics
Text Annotations Delete All Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > All
Allows you to delete all text annotations in the model. After selecting the command,
an alert box appears. Click Yes to delete all text annotations in the model.
Note
Related Topics
Text Annotations Display On Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On
Allows you to show textual annotations in your model.
Related Topics

Text Annotations Display Off Command (Accessories

Menu)
Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > Off
Allows you to turn off the display of textual annotations in your model.
Related Topics
Set Window Size Command (Accessories Menu)

Accessories > Set Window Size
Allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this add-in to set
a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animations. This
add-in ensures the aspect ratio of the Main view is correct before you save the
animation view, providing a What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG)
animation sequence.
Related Topics
Move Display Set Command (Accessories Menu)

Accessories > Move Display Set
Displays the Move Display Set dialog box, which allows you to create scripts of
movements and rotations that can then be played on any selected display set. This
program is useful when you need to see how an object fits in a space in the design.
For example, you can use this program to help plan equipment removal. This add-in
allows you to analyze the removal process and allows you to predict possible
problems prior to actual removal.
Related Topics
• Move Display Set Dialog Box, page 405

Paint Command (Accessories Menu)

Accessories > Paint
Displays the Microsoft Paint program, which can be used for editing images.
Related Topics
Window Menu
This menu provides commands for manipulating windows in SmartPlant Review.
Main Command (Window Menu)

Window > Main
Turns on or off the Main view.
Related Topics
Plan Command (Window Menu)

Window > Plan
Turns on or off the Plan view.
Related Topics

Elevation Command (Window Menu)

Window > Elevation
Turns on or off the Elevation view.
Related Topics
Text Command (Window Menu)

Window > Text
Turns on or off the Text view.
Related Topics
Single Command (Window Menu)

Window > Pane Layout > Single
Closes the Plan, Elevation, and Text views leaving only the Main view active.
Project Manager remains displayed if active. The Single Pane Layout is useful if
you are viewing the model using Full Screen mode.
Note
• You also can access the Single command by clicking the Single Pane
Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 1 on
your keyboard.
Related Topics

Three Command (Window Menu)

Window > Pane Layout > Three
Displays the Plan, Elevation, and Main views while hiding the Text view if active.
Project Manager remains displayed if active.
Note
• You also can access the Three command by clicking the Three Pane
your keyboard.
Related Topics
Four Command (Window Menu)

Window > Pane Layout > Four
Opens the Plan, Elevation, Main, and Text views. Project Manager remains
displayed if active.
Note
• You also can access the Four command by clicking the Four Pane
your keyboard.
Related Topics
Cascade Command (Window Menu)

Window > Cascade
Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that you can see part of each
window.
Related Topics

Arrange Icons Command (Window Menu)

Window > Arrange Icons
Arranges the collapsed window icons within SmartPlant Review so that you can see
each icon.
Related Topics
Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)

Window > Tile Horizontally
Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely
visible.
Related Topics
Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu)

Window > Tile Vertically
Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely
visible.
Related Topics

Arrange All Command (Window Menu)

Window > Arrange All
Returns all toolbars and views back to the default configuration.
Related Topics
Restore All Command (Window Menu)

Window > Restore All
Resets the size of all open views to the current default sizes. The default sizes are set
to the view sizes that you were using when you exited the application.
Related Topics
Scroll Bars Command (Window Menu)

Window > Scroll Bars
Turns on or off the scroll bars for the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. When
displayed, these scroll bars let you pan around the current view plane of the view. The
step arrows pan by the motion rates set in the Motion > Settings command.
Related Topics

Refresh All Command (Window Menu)

Window > Refresh All
Redraws all of the views to update the current window contents.
Notes
Related Topics
Refresh Command (Window Menu)

Window > Refresh
Refreshes all views.
Notes
Related Topics

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solutions to Common Problems

The following tables lists solutions to common problems that you may have when
using SmartPlant Review. If the problem is not listed here, open and read the
README file.
Problem Solution See . . .

You are lost in the Click View > Fit > View to Model. Working with
view. The current active view will be Views
updated.
Fit (View to
Model)
Part of the model Adjust the Front and Back Clipping Set Clipping
appears cut off. Planes. Planes
Main view is blank but Move the Eye Point and adjust the Set Eye Point
Plan and Elevation view cone.
views display the Set Clipping
model. Planes
Views are blank or Check View Settings (turn on View Settings

objects seem to be Backface, Endcaps, or increase
missing or hidden. Tolerance). Level Settings
Make sure that the Eye Point and the Display Set
Center Point are not set to the same, or Settings
nearly the same, values.
Set Eye Point
Check the settings for Levels and
Display Sets. Set Center Point
Check the Range Rejection settings. Range Rejection
Navigation speed is too Increase or decrease Dynamic Motion Motion Settings

fast or too slow. speed.
Changes do not appear Refresh the view. Working with

in the view. Views
Refresh

Troubleshooting
Saved image contains Make sure windows, dialog boxes, Working with
overlapping image that toolbars, etc. are not overlapping the Views
you do not want. view. Then, press Ctrl+F5 to
Redraw on Refresh.. Refresh
Text Annotations Do not exit (Text Annotations are not Text Annotations
disappear after you exit saved).
the program.
Annotations do not Turn on all Annotations. Globally

display. Displaying
Annotations
Displaying Data
Annotations
Displaying Text
Annotations
When using Keypad Make sure Num Lock is turned on Keypad

motion, movement does and that the focus is on either the
not occur. Main, Plan, or Elevation view (the Motion Settings
title bar displays which view has
focus). Check Motions Settings.
When using Keypad When using Mouse motion, Continuous

motion, movement still movement continues after releasing Motion
continues after left mouse button. Click the left
releasing keypad keys. mouse button in the Main view to stop Keypad
the motion.
Turn off Continuous Motion.Turn off

Continuous Motion.
Objects in my new Possible overlapping display sets. The Create Display

display set do not last action performed on the object by Set
appear. corresponding display set
manipulations wins.
I got dropped from a Exit NetMeeting and SmartPlant Rejoin

Collaboration session. Review, and then restart both Collaboration
applications. Session

Troubleshooting
Collaboration sessions Because of poor resource and memory Readme.txt

lock up on Windows support by Windows 98, do not use
98. Collaboration on Windows 98 Microsoft
computers, unless the Windows 98 MSDNMicrosoft
computer is driving. MSDN
Performance is A known issue with Windows NT 4.0 System

extremely slow when Virtual Memory will slow your Performance Tips
using Windows NT 4.0. system to a crawl after 63% of
committed memory is reached. Set the
Virtual Memory to 1.5 times the
number of processors times the RAM
on your computer OR to 1.5 times the
number of processors times the largest
data set used by the largest
application.
Performance appears Modify the registry entry for the System

sluggish when opening Microsoft Jet database Page Timeout Performance Tips
a dataset over the setting to a value less than the default
network. 5000 milliseconds (for example, set
the value to 5 milliseconds).
Performance seems to Increase the minimum Page file System

be dragging or a "Low settings. Performance Tips
on System Resources"
message appears.
Error messages appear To improve performance of label data Changes to Label

when I try to open a queries, the format for the label Database Format
model file using database (.mdb2 file created when
SmartPlant Review SmartPlant Review first reads-in your
4.2.1, but the file model) has been changed.
worked in previous
versions of SmartPlant
Review.
Stereo Viewing depth Change the stereo polarity in Stereo Viewing

perceptions appear SmartPlant Review by clicking View
mostly flat or turning > Advanced > Stereo, and then
the glasses upside down selecting either polarity direction.
corrects the view. Right is the normal and default
polarity direction setting. However,
left may be necessary on some setups,
particularly projection system.

Troubleshooting
Related Topics
• Additional Documentation, page 23
System Performance Tips

• Virtual Memory (Swap Space) - Make sure that you have enough
virtual memory. Windows NT 4.0 takes half of the system's memory
for the operating system, leaving you without as much available
memory for your model. Also, a known issue with Windows NT 4.0 is
that virtual memory will slow your system to a crawl after 63% of
committed memory is reached. While it is important to have sufficient
swap space for all operating systems, for Windows NT 4.0 sufficient
swap space is critical for good performance.
Calculate the minimum virtual memory (swap space) by taking the larger
of these two calculations:
• (1.5 * RAM) * the number of processors on the computer
• (1.5 * the largest dataset used in the application) * the number of
processors
Set the minimum and maximum virtual memory (swap space) settings to the same
value for best performance. If the page file has to grow, it can become very
fragmented.
For FAT and FAT32 file systems, virtual memory is limited to approximately 4 GB.
For NTFS file systems, virtual memory is limited to approximately 17.59 GB. The
operating system can only address 2 GB of virtual memory at one time for each
application; however, the swap space can be larger because multiple applications can
be in virtual memory at the same time.
For large vue files, the virtual memory must be set to much larger than the vue file
size. For extremely large vue files, you may need to set the virtual memory to the
maximum for your file system, defragment the drive, and close any non-essential
programs to provide the vue file with the maximum amount of space possible.
Disk fragmentation - Defragment your disks regularly. File fragmentation on the

disk slows down the system and SmartPlant Review. Use a tool like DiskKeeper to
avoid disk fragmentation.
Memory Allocation - In Windows NT 4.0, the more memory that is allocated, the
longer the next memory allocation takes. As more data files are loaded into the
system, the next data file takes progressively longer to load than the file would take if
loaded individually. Windows 2000 memory allocation is much more efficient.

Troubleshooting
Page Timeout - Check the Microsoft Jet database page timeout settings in the
registry. These settings can affect database performance over the network. The page
timeout value for the Microsoft Jet database 3.5 and 4.0 versions is set to 5000
milliseconds by default. Set this value to 5 milliseconds for best performance,
especially over a Novell network. Make sure that you find and set all values of the
page timeout setting.
Here are some examples of where the page timeout settings can be found in the
registry:
\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\3.5\Engines\Jet
2.x\Page Timeout
3.5\Page Timeout
2.x\Page Timeout
3.x\Page Timeout
4.0\Page Timeout
Warning
• Any changes that you make to the registry are at your own risk.
• File System - Make sure the system is using the fastest file system.
For Windows NT and Windows 2000, studies have shown that the
NTFS file system with a 4K cluster size provides better performance
than a FAT or FAT32 file system. The NTFS file system is not
available for Windows 98.
• Database Format - Use the Access 2000 format databases instead of
the Access 97 format. Access 2000 databases are faster than Access
97.
Related Topics
Customer Support
For support information, connect to
http://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp.

Glossary
Glossary
A
ambient
A light source that distributes light uniformly in all directions from no specified
location. All objects are illuminated equally regardless of their location and
orientation. The ambient light and the brightness setting interact directly in a given
view of the model.
anti-aliasing
A technique for smoothing the jagged edges of pixelized graphics by blending the
edges with colors. This technique fills the pixels along the jagged edges with varying
amounts of transition colors which soften the edge and blend the edge smoothly into
the background.
attenuation
The reduction of the intensity of light based on the distance from the source of the
light. Attenuation can be illustrated as the difference between a 100 Watt and a 60
Watt light bulb.
B
bore line
A line displayed during 3-D input to assist in depth selection.
C
cell
A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group, and
then manipulated as individual elements.
D
default
The prede myArray[myArray.length] = new Array ("TERMined value of a parameter
that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not
specified by the user.
delta
A specified offset or distance between two points in space.
dithering
A technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution.
More colors are produced with the loss of some detail.

Glossary
E
element
The basic building block of a geometric figure, also completed geometric figures such
as lines, shapes, circles, and so forth.
F
fresnel
The simulated reduction of the intensity of light passing through transparent materials
and the increase in reflectivity of reflective materials as the angle of incidence
deviates from perpendicular.
I
interest
In lighting, the second point in a two-point placement that de
myArray[myArray.length] = new Array ("TERMines where the light is cast. For point
lights, interest represents the falloff point located on a sphere centered on the light
location that is tangent to the interest point. For distance and spot lights, interest
represents an idealized point on a line from the light location in the direction that the
light is cast. Note that once the light is placed, this point is normalized.
interlaced
A myArray[myArray.length] = new Array ("TERM that describes a situation when
only every other line of pixels on a computer myArray[myArray.length] = new Array
("TERMinal screen or TV monitor is refreshed on each pass. For example, in
American television, every second line is refreshed 60 times per second. Interlacing
saves half of the signal information that non-interlaced screens use.
L
label
The database information associated with an element.
levels
The MicroStation design plane consists of a multilevel design structure. Elements can
be organized in any fashion on 63 levels, although no element can span two levels.
Only one level can be active at a time, but any combination can be displayed or
blanked from the screen. The active level must be displayed.
O
offset
The distance perpendicular to an alignment, denoted as minus left and positive right.
opaque
A characteristic of an element through which light cannot pass.

Glossary
P
palettes
A file for the storage of materials, colors, and patterns to be assigned to objects in a
model.
point
A graphic element representing a position in space.
R
raytracing
A rendering algorithm that casts an imaginary ray from the viewpoint back into the
screen until it hits an object, and then recursively casts rays toward light sources and
other objects in order to compute the color of a pixel. This technique creates more
realistic 3-D effects by adding reflections and shadows to images.
refraction
The change of direction that light makes as it passes through a transparent surface.
rendering
A method for generating synthetic images in a scene from a precise description of the
geometry and other characteristics of the scene.
rotate
To turn, to change the angular orientation, to transform by revolution about a specific
axis.
S
scale
To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined element, modifying only the dimensions,
not the ratio among the pieces.
snaplock points
Points generated by SmartPlant Review at fixed locations on a given piece of
geometry for use during snaplock measurement. A snaplock point is displayed as
either a small square or round tag point on a surface. The location of a given snaplock
point is always in the same place for a specific type of geometry, making snaplock
measurement more precise because it is repeatable.
surface
The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.
surface points
Any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode, not including background
points. While they work well for quick measurements between two or more objects,
surface point measurements are difficult to repeat precisely because they can be at
any point on a given surface.

Glossary
T
translucent
Permitting the passage of light.
transmittance
The degree of transparency that a surface exhibits. Values range from 0-1, where 0 is
0 percent transparent, or opaque, and 1 is 100 percent transparent, or invisible. A ray
goes through a translucent surface.
transparency
A surface property that allows light to pass through the surface. Glass bottles are
examples of transparent objects.
V
vector
A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally represented as a line.
Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple
(x,y,z).

Index
Index
accessories ScheduleReview, 363, 367, 384
annotations, 395, 396, 399, 400, 401, 534, 535, ScheduleReview,, 361
536, 537, 538, 539 settings, 363, 367
commands, 534, 540 snapshot, 29
customizing, 393 annotations
loading, 534 arrowheads, 261
menu, 393 colors, 258, 260
paint, 540 creating, 260
programs, 395 data, 240, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 502, 503
starting, 395 deleting, 262, 400, 464, 502, 503, 509, 537, 538
using, 393 displaying, 65, 261, 401, 438, 502, 503
windows, 401, 402, 539, 544 editing, 258, 260, 261, 395, 399, 401, 464, 535,
activating 536, 537, 538, 539
commands, 532 files, 258, 260
display, 246, 532 hiding, 261, 502, 503
Elumens, 448 leader lines, 261
joystick, 152, 164 ns, 464
lighting, 313, 314, 316, 318, 319, 326 placing, 257, 260, 262, 395, 396, 399, 464, 503,
range rejection, 62, 70, 441 534, 535, 536
stereo, 119, 446 properties, 258, 259
tags, 246, 532 text, 240, 395
active volume, 265, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 503, 504,
measurements, 229, 492 509
project, 360, 368, 369, 370, 380, 501 annotations,displaying, 464
project,, 365 annotations:, 464
tags, 240 anti-alias
viewing, 79, 80, 423 key frames, 174
adding raytrace, 308
associations, 360, 372, 379, 500 settings, 308
display sets, 184 snapshot, 176, 220
game controller, 152 applications
project manager, 184, 185 programming interface, 24
projects, 185 sharing, 354
ScheduleReview, 184, 185 windows, 219, 402
views, 89, 94 arrange icons, 543
adjusting arranging
annotations, 504 icons, 543
bump, 298 views, 56, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544
gamma, 307 windows, 56, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544
patterns, 297 aspect
views, 423 ratio, 388
adjusting volume annotations, 269 settings, 75
advanced assigning
commands, 444, 445 materials, 195, 205, 287, 289, 291, 462, 480, 484
settings, 63, 64, 71, 101, 109, 121 properties, 287, 289, 480, 484
allowing associations
joystick, 151, 152, 164 adding, 372, 379, 500
texturing, 167 auto, 371, 499
angles removing, 372, 500
bearing, 162, 164, 168, 515 ScheduleReview, 372, 379, 500
perspective, 178 attributes, 250
animation tags, 254, 255
save and recall, 82 volume annotations, 273, 274, 275

Index
back view, 427, 461 modules, 25

background NetMeeting, 25, 26
colors, 60, 66, 96, 105, 178, 310, 440 passengers, 355, 356, 359
editing, 302 running, 357, 358, 509
settings, 60, 310 sessions, 356, 359
bearing settings, 352
compass, 128, 469 snapshots, 25
motion, 164, 168 track mouse cursor, 352
settings, 164, 168 work offline, 352
sun, 69, 100, 108, 440, 441 collections
bottom back left view, 429 creating, 225, 226, 231, 236, 237, 238, 239, 491
bottom back right view, 429 deleting, 230, 232, 462, 463, 492
bottom front left view, 429 editing, 462, 463
bottom front right view, 428 formatting, 235, 236
bottom view, 426, 461 measurements, 230, 232, 235, 236
buffer positioning, 490
updates,, 63 restoring, 490
bump snaplock, 488
adjusting, 298 surface, 488
map, 293 collision detection
bump maps, 487 colors, 333, 335, 337, 338, 340, 341, 344, 345,
button mapping for joystick, 153 346, 347, 349, 493
buttons construction, 26
mapping for joystick, 171 dynamic, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340, 341, 343,
cascade view, 542 344, 346, 347, 349, 350, 493
center modules, 26
lock, 520 reports, 340, 341, 346, 347, 349, 350
modes, 142, 519 ScheduleReview, 26
view, 460 selections, 337, 340, 341, 344, 346, 347, 349
changes for version 5.0, 19 single step, 340, 346, 347
changing snapshot, 26
annotations, 395 sounds, 340, 346
collaboration, 510 static, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340, 341, 343, 344,
collections, 225, 226, 228, 231, 232, 235, 236, 237, 346, 347, 349, 350, 493
238, 490 type filter, 336, 343, 345, 346, 350
display sets, 189, 194, 197, 198, 213, 214, 215, colors
217, 218, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481 background, 60, 66, 96, 105, 178, 310
environments, 302 collision detection, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340,
lighting, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 321, 322, 341, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 493
323, 452, 453, 477 indexes, 323
measurements, 225, 226, 228, 231, 232, 235, 236, lighting, 313, 314, 319
237, 238, 490 points, 225, 237, 238
page setup, 386 settings, 60
positions, 213, 214, 215, 217, 218, 481 symbology, 362, 377
settings, 302 tables, 287, 290, 299, 485, 486
clipping plane comamnds
placing, 425 Photo-Realism, 450, 451
clipping volume, 271 commands
closing accessories, 534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539, 540
files, 409 adjust, 504
models, 409 advanced, 445, 446, 447, 448
coarse facets, 167 annotation, 438, 502, 503, 504, 509, 534, 535, 536,
collaborations 537, 538, 539
conference members, 355 collaboration, 509, 510
drivers, 355, 356, 359 collections, 227, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492
editing, 359 delete, 453, 501, 530, 537, 538

Index
display, 436, 437, 438, 439, 440, 441, 442, 443, top, 426
444, 455, 502, 503, 538, 539 top back left, 428
display sets, 410, 414, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, top back right, 428
482, 483, 513, 539 top front left, 427
edit, 419, 420, 421, 502, 510, 511, 512, 530, 536, top front right, 427
537 west, 426
Elumens, 123, 448, 449 compatibility
export, 248, 414, 415, 416, 417 software,, 30
file, 248, 408, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, construction
416, 417, 418, 419 collision detection, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340,
functions, 144, 145 341, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 350, 493
import, 410, 411, 412, 413 modules, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340, 341, 343,
levels, 115, 493 344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 350, 375, 376, 379, 493
lighting, 440, 441, 452, 453 sequence, 187
materials, 480 controlling
measurements, 227, 438, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492 display sets, 165, 513
motion, 140, 455, 513, 514, 515, 517, 519, 520, keys, 144
526, 527, 528 lighting, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 321, 322,
place, 503 452, 453
positioning, 520 motion, 165, 513
saved views, 411, 413, 415 movements, 160, 161, 162, 524, 525, 526
ScheduleReview, 412, 416, 494, 495, 496, 497, ScheduleReview, 380
498, 499, 500, 501 creating
ScheduleReview,, 496 animation paths, 82
stereo, 446, 447 annotations, 260
tags, 248, 413, 416, 529, 530, 531, 532, 533 collections, 225, 226, 231, 236, 237, 238, 239, 491
toolbars, 474 display sets, 192, 482
tools, 115, 227, 449, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482, folders, 482
483, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492, 493, 494, 495, groups, 85, 94
496, 497, 498, 499, 500, 501, 502, 503, 509, lighting, 301, 319, 320, 322, 323, 324, 326, 327,
510, 511, 512 329, 450, 451, 452
tools,, 501 materials, 287, 290, 299, 485, 486
view, 80, 422, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 428, 429, measurements, 225, 226, 231, 236, 237, 238, 239,
430, 432, 435, 436, 437, 438, 439, 440, 441, 438, 491
442, 443, 444, 446, 447, 448, 449, 450, 451, projects, 36, 37, 38, 43, 46, 379
452, 453, 454, 455 queries, 375, 376
volume annotations, 417 snapshots, 174, 176, 528
window, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545 toolbars, 473, 474
common views, 461 creating,definitions, 193
back, 427 creatubg
bottom, 426 groups, 96
bottom back left, 429 criteria
bottom back right, 429 queries, 375, 376
bottom front left, 429 searching, 212, 421
bottom front right, 428 current
east, 427 date, 365, 368
front, 426 levels, 117
left, 427 view, 94
north, 426 customizing
north east, 427, 429 accessories, 393
north west, 427, 428 settings, 65, 327
right, 426 toolbars, 471, 472, 473, 474
rotate with model fit, 430 dashed
south, 427 line, 439
south east, 428, 429 pattern, 235
south west, 428, 429 view cone, 133, 433, 439, 469

Index
data commands, 61, 433, 436, 437, 438, 447, 532

annotations, 240, 258, 259, 260, 438 Elumens, 123, 444, 445
attributes, 396 key frames, 171, 172, 175, 526
points, 133, 134 lighting, 62, 433
refresh, 45, 511 measurements, 433, 438
sets, 352 menu bar, 475
tags, 255 model, 79, 422
data annotations motion, 147, 165, 166, 167, 169, 171, 172, 175,
deleting, 464 513, 526
editing, 464 order, 64, 449, 462, 463
placing, 464 project manager, 180, 182, 476
databases quality, 66, 78, 96, 105, 178, 435, 447
formatting, 549 query, 372, 373
opening, 512 range rejection, 62, 442
project, 30 settings, 58, 62, 64, 68, 75, 76, 77, 78, 98, 106,
using, 36, 37, 38, 43, 46 162, 165, 166, 167, 169, 435, 440, 441, 442,
defining 455, 513, 515
animation paths, 82 status bar, 475
bore sight, 133, 134 stereo, 447
criteria, 421 tags, 60, 178, 240, 245, 246, 247, 531, 532, 533
display sets, 162, 166, 191, 192, 482, 515 view cone, 433, 439, 440
search path, 40, 291, 300 display sets
deleting adding, 184
annotations, 262, 400, 502, 503, 509, 537, 538 assigning materials, 195, 205
collections, 230, 232, 463, 492 auto-define, 195, 205, 482
display sets, 191, 483 brightness, 197, 477, 483
groups, 85 changes from DesignReview, 31
lighting, 322, 453, 468 creating, 192, 482
measurements, 229, 230, 232, 463, 492 databases, 31
projects, 360, 379 defining, 191, 192, 206, 482
source lights, 330 deleting, 191, 372, 483, 500
tags, 244, 253, 255, 458, 467, 530 editing, 185, 186, 189, 194, 197, 198, 213, 214,
views, 87, 94 215, 216, 217, 218, 462, 477, 479, 480, 481
descriptions exporting, 196, 207, 414
editing, 96, 104 hiding, 183, 190, 479
viewing, 96, 104 importing, 196, 206, 410
DesignReview materials, 478
changes from, 30 positioning, 147, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218,
display set changes, 31, 188 403, 405, 406, 478, 481, 539
function key changes, 33 project manager, 184, 185, 186
measurement changes, 33 ScheduleReview, 185, 186, 372, 500
position control changes, 34 showing, 183, 189, 190, 477, 479
VUE file changes, 35 user IDs, 31
DesignReview saved views viewing, 80, 189, 190, 423, 479
importing, 92 displaying
directional modes measurements, 463
plant north, 162, 526 motion, 163
view dependent, 161, 524 settings, 163
view dependent level, 161, 525 docking toolbars, 471
view independent, 161, 525 drawing
display backfaces, 437
action comments, 247, 533 on-site drawing generation, 27
activating, 246, 532 dynamic
annotations, 261, 401, 433, 438, 502, 503, 538, collision detection, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340,
539 341, 343, 344, 346, 347, 349, 350, 493
axis, 439 updating, 365, 368

Index
east view, 427 date, 365, 368

editing frame, 363, 367
annotations, 260, 261, 395, 399, 400, 502, 535, exporting
536, 537, 538 display sets, 196, 207, 414
attachments, 277, 278, 280, 282, 284, 285, 286, projects, 416
511, 512 saved views, 93, 113, 415
collaborations, 359, 510 ScheduleReview, 416
collections, 225, 226, 228, 231, 232, 235, 236, 237, tags, 248, 416
238, 462, 490 volume annotations, 272, 277, 417
commands, 420, 421, 502 eye point
display sets, 80, 185, 186, 194, 197, 198, 213, 214, motion, 166, 513
215, 216, 217, 218, 423, 462, 477, 480, 481 placing, 423
files, 277, 278, 280, 282, 284, 286, 512 settings, 129, 166, 424, 513
frames, 88, 103 view cone, 157, 521, 524
levels, 66, 96, 105, 114, 115, 118 far
lighting, 301, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 321, clip ratio, 444, 447
322, 323, 324, 326, 327, 329, 450, 452, 453, 468 clipping plane, 132
materials, 287, 462, 480, 484, 485 features
measurements, 225, 226, 228, 231, 232, 235, 236, Elumens, 122
237, 238, 490 Microsoft IntelliMouse, 138, 143
motion, 162, 166, 515 files
Photo-Realism, 302, 332 annotations, 258, 260
positions, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 481 AutoCAD, 52
queries, 373, 376, 495 closing, 409
settings, 302, 332 defaults, 287
tags, 244, 458, 467, 530 designing, 41
undoing, 419 editing, 277, 278, 280, 282, 284, 286, 512
views, 86, 88, 94, 96, 103, 104 exporting, 93, 248, 272, 415, 416, 417
volume annotations, 273, 504 formats, 52
elements images, 302
assigning materials, 289, 291, 462, 480 importing, 91, 92, 196, 206, 248, 272, 370, 371,
auto-highlight, 140, 515, 516, 517 380, 410, 411, 412, 413
display order, 64, 449 matching, 115, 117, 118
editing materials, 462 material, 40, 291, 300
label data, 515, 516 opening, 36, 41, 43, 408
off, 70 printing, 386, 387, 417, 418
snapping to, 133, 135 projects, 48, 180
unassigning materials, 290, 292, 462 SAT, 52
elevation saving, 24, 45, 409, 410
compass, 128, 469 ScheduleReview, 364, 416
eye point, 129, 424 searching, 41
lock, 520 systems, 549
view, 55, 59 types, 48, 52, 91, 112, 277, 278, 280, 282, 284,
elevation view, 541 286, 364, 512
Elumens find,object, 193
activating, 444, 445 finding
commands, 123 display sets, 198
modes, 123, 444, 445 objects, 197, 207, 421, 458, 462
settings, 124, 125, 126, 444, 445, 448, 449 tags, 240, 244, 246, 251, 255, 257, 467, 531, 532
encircle volume, 203, 204
horizontal, 157, 158, 521, 524 volume annotations, 273, 274, 275
radius toolbar, 470 fitting
surface, 157, 159, 523 queries, 372, 373
vertical, 157, 522 views, 79, 80, 422, 423, 460, 461
end formatting
caps, 65, 66, 96, 105, 433, 438 collections, 231

Index
databases, 549 encircle, 158

files, 52, 53 printing, 388
measurements, 231, 236 icons
forward arrange, 543
mouse modes, 138, 141 images
ScheduleReview, 382 files, 302
ScheduleReview,, 497 lighting, 69, 100, 108, 440, 441
frames raytracing, 331
copying, 88 resolutions, 388
displaying, 171, 172, 175, 526 sizes, 388
key frames, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 526, 527, 528 importing, 250
modifying, 88, 103 DesignReview saved views, 92
motion, 171, 172, 174, 175, 526, 528 display sets, 196, 206, 410
moving, 87 files, 370, 371, 380
settings, 363, 367 projects, 370, 371, 412
snapshot, 364, 368 saved views, 91, 112, 411, 413
front view, 426, 461 ScheduleReview, 370, 371, 380, 412
full tags, 248, 413
shading, 76, 433, 436 volume annotations, 272, 276
view,, 387 information
function display sets, 213, 481
changes, 33 editing, 213
keys, 144, 146 lighting, 323
functionality isometric views, 461
new,, 30 joystick
generating activating, 151, 152, 164
modelview view files, 91, 94, 112 buttons, 171
shadows, 303, 309 installing, 151, 152
getdata mapping buttons, 153
arguments, 277, 278, 280, 282, 284, 285, 286, 511, motion, 152, 164, 170
512 settings, 151, 152, 153, 162, 164, 166, 170, 171,
getting 515
data, 277, 278, 280, 282, 284, 285, 286, 511, 512 keeping
go to ratio, 388
date, 384, 458, 498 key frames
end, 383, 458, 498 displaying, 171, 172, 175, 526
start, 383, 497 motion, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 526, 527, 528
start,, 458 keyboard
tags, 240, 246, 255, 257, 458, 467, 532 functions, 146
graphics keypad keys, 147
card, 119, 446 keys
display sets, 188 changes, 33
objects, 188 shortcut, 144, 145, 146
viewing, 219 labels
groups data, 53
creating, 85, 96 on-site drawing generation, 27
moving, 103 positioning, 228
renaming, 84, 95 restoring, 228
views, 86 left view, 427, 461
hiding levels
display sets, 183, 190, 479 anti-alias, 308
levels, 114, 116, 117, 493 current, 114, 115, 118
objects, 114, 117, 493 editing, 66, 96, 105, 115
project manager, 182 hiding, 114, 116, 493
status bar, 475, 476 indexes, 323
horizontal lighting, 73, 74

Index
settings, 66, 96, 105, 114, 115, 117, 118, 178, 458, creating, 287, 290, 293, 299, 485, 486
462, 493 display sets, 195, 205
lighting editing, 287, 289, 290, 293, 310, 462, 480, 484,
controlling, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 321, 485
322, 452, 453 files, 40, 291, 300
deleting, 321, 322, 452, 453, 468 Photo-Realism, 28
distant, 319, 323, 326, 327, 329, 468 unassigning, 290, 292, 462, 485
editing, 468 measurements
levels, 73, 74 changing, 33
new, 319, 322, 323, 324, 326, 327, 329, 452 collections, 225, 226, 228, 230, 231, 232, 235, 236,
OpenGL, 311 237, 238, 239, 490, 491
Photo-Realism, 28 creating, 27, 225, 226, 231, 236, 237, 238, 239,
point, 319, 323, 326, 327, 329, 468 438, 491
settings, 62, 74, 178, 313, 317, 324, 468 deleting, 229, 230, 232, 463, 492
shadows, 322 displaying, 463
source, 319, 323, 326, 327, 329 editing, 228, 231, 232, 235, 236, 490
spot, 319, 323, 326, 327, 329, 452, 468 formatting, 231, 236
lines lines, 231, 235
collections, 231 one click mode, 489
colors, 235 point-to-point, 225
dashed, 133, 439, 469 positioning, 228, 463, 490
measurements, 231, 235 restoring, 228, 490
patterns, 235 shortest distance, 227, 489
view cone, 133, 439, 469 snaplock, 225, 231, 237, 238, 458, 463, 488
width, 235 surface, 226, 463, 488
loading text, 231, 236
accessories, 534 menu
commands, 534 accessories, 393
main view, 540 customizing, 393
manipulating using, 393
annotations, 395, 399, 400, 401, 535, 536, 537, menu bar, 475
538, 539 MicroStation
collaborations, 510 color table, 287, 290, 299, 485, 486
display sets, 189, 194, 197, 198, 213, 214, 215, design files, 51
217, 218, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481 model rotation, 430
environments, 302 models
lighting, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 321, 322, closing, 409
323, 452, 453, 477 fitting, 79, 80, 422, 423
measurements, 463 opening, 36, 41, 43, 408
page setup, 386 saving, 45, 410
Photo-Realism, 302 viewing, 79, 80, 182, 422, 423
project manager, 180, 182 modes
settings, 147, 302 application sharing, 354
map files backfaces, 437
bump maps, 487 coarse facets, 436
palette maps, 487 directional, 160, 161, 162, 524, 525, 526
pattern maps, 487 display, 58, 438, 455
mapping Elumens, 123
joystick buttons, 153 mouse drag, 138, 141, 142, 143, 518, 519, 520
matching positioning, 157, 158, 159, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524
files, 115, 117, 118 priority, 142, 519
materials rendering, 66, 76, 77, 78, 96, 105, 435, 436, 437,
adjusting, 297, 298 438
annotations, 240 modules
assigning, 195, 205, 287, 289, 291, 462, 480, 484 API, 24
backgrounds, 310 collaboration, 25

Index
collision detection, 26, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, project manager, 182
340, 341, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 350, 493 save and recall, 94
construction, 26, 29, 333, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340, speed, 162, 163, 166, 515
341, 343, 344, 345, 346, 347, 349, 350, 375, view, 87
376, 379, 380, 493 with mouse, 138, 140, 141, 143, 515, 516, 517,
on-site drawing generation, 27 518, 519
Photo-Realism, 28, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, navigating
321, 322, 331, 452, 453 joystick, 149
ScheduleReview, 26 on-site drawing generation, 27
Simulation and Visual Effects, 29, 102, 173, 527 navigation
snapshot, 26 toolbars, 465
motion NetMeeting
bearing, 162, 164, 166, 168, 515 collaboration, 25, 63, 352, 355, 356, 357, 358, 359,
controlling, 155, 165, 166, 513, 527 445, 448, 510
directional, 160, 161, 162, 524, 525, 526 using, 354
displaying, 163, 165, 167, 169, 171, 172, 175, 513, new
526 collections, 225, 226, 231, 236, 237, 238, 239, 491
encircle, 157, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524 display sets, 192, 482
joystick, 137, 152, 153, 164, 170 folders, 184
key frames, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 178, 526, groups, 85
527, 528 measurements, 225, 226, 231, 236, 237, 238, 239,
keyboard, 137, 147 491
lateral, 157, 521 projects, 184, 185, 360, 369, 379, 500
modes, 158 queries, 372, 375, 379, 495
mouse, 137, 138, 140, 141, 142, 143, 515, 516, source lights, 301, 319, 320, 322, 323, 324, 326,
517, 518, 519, 520 327, 329, 451
priority, 142, 519 toolbars, 473
rates, 162, 163, 166, 515 new features, 19
settings, 152, 153, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, next
168, 169, 170, 513, 515 lighting, 74
snapshot, 174, 528 printing, 390
steps, 155, 156, 514 range rejection, 74
toolbars, 466 tag, 245, 458, 467, 531
types, 155 north
mouse directional mode, 162, 526
auto-highlight, 138, 516, 517 eye point, 129, 424
auto-highlight complex elements, 516 north east view, 427, 429
auto-highlight elements, 515 north view, 426
modes, 138, 140, 141, 142, 157, 158, 159, 160, north west view, 427, 428
161, 162, 515, 516, 517, 518, 519, 520, 524, number
525, 526 go to, 257
motion, 136, 138, 140, 141, 143, 515, 516, 517, keys, 147
518, 519 tags, 257
rotating, 141 objects
scrolling, 138, 143 annotations, 502, 503, 509
stepping, 143 assigning materials, 195, 205, 287, 289, 291, 480,
movements 484
controlling, 160, 161, 162, 524, 525, 526 auto-highlight, 140, 516, 517
joystick, 152, 164, 406 collision detection, 337, 344
moving deleting, 262, 502, 503, 509
annotations, 399, 535, 536 display order, 64, 449
display sets, 213, 214, 216, 217, 403, 405, 406, finding, 197, 421, 458, 462
478, 481, 539 findng, 207
groups, 103 fitting, 80, 422
measurements, 228, 463, 490 hiding, 114, 116, 117, 493
motion, 156, 514 label data, 516

Index
linking, 260 toolbars, 456, 458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 467,
pick, 206 470, 475
range rejection, 70 views, 55, 59, 75, 79, 82, 127
textures, 61, 66, 96, 105, 433, 437 page
unassigning materials, 290, 292, 485 setup, 386, 417
one click measurement mode, 463, 489 timeout, 549
on-site drawing generation palette maps, 487
annotations, 27 palettes, 291, 292
drawing, 27 pane
labels, 27 layout, 55, 57, 58, 467, 541, 542
measurements, 27 restoring, 544
modules, 27 partial
navigating, 27 recall, 89, 90, 110
SmartSketch, 27 setup, 94, 110, 176
snapshot, 27 view, 89, 90, 110
tags, 27 passengers
opening collaborations, 356, 359
databases, 46, 512 settings, 355
files, 36, 41, 43, 408 pattern maps, 487
models, 36, 41, 43, 408 patterns
options adjusting, 297
bounce, 305 weight, 293
display, 65 pausing
gamma, 307 key frames, 173, 527
printing, 388, 391 motion, 173, 527
raytrace, 310 ScheduleReview, 381, 382, 383, 496
settings, 65 performance
tags, 60 anti-alias, 308
threshold, 304 enhancing, 549
transmittance, 305, 306 raytrace, 308, 310
overviews settings, 307
accessories, 393 system, 48, 65
annotations, 240, 257, 262, 395, 401 tips, 549
attachments, 277, 278 perspective
collaborations, 352 angles, 178, 433, 440, 469
collision detection, 333 view cone, 133, 439, 469
commands, 408 Photo-Realism
data, 277 deleting, 330
display, 433 lighting, 28, 301, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319,
display sets, 188, 191 320, 322, 323, 324, 326, 327, 329, 330, 450,
joystick, 149 451, 452
keyboard, 144 modules, 28, 29
keyframes, 171 raytrace, 303, 304, 305, 306, 331, 453
levels, 114 raytracing, 331
lighting, 313 settings, 63, 301, 302, 307, 308, 310, 332, 450
materials, 240, 287, 289, 290, 480, 484, 485 snapshot, 28
motion, 136, 137, 155, 160, 171, 526 stereo, 28
mouse, 138, 143 textures, 28
Photo-Realism, 301 threshold, 304, 305
printing, 386 toolbars, 468
project manager, 180 transmittance, 305, 306
raytracing, 331 pick
SmartPlant Review, 36 objects, 206
snapshot, 219 point, 120, 121, 324, 446
stereo, 119 place
tags, 240 annotations, 503

Index
placing creating, 369, 500

3D points, 133 deleting, 369, 501
annotations, 257, 262, 395, 396, 534, 535 ScheduleReview, 361, 369, 376, 380, 501
collections, 225 project manager
data points, 133, 134 adding, 184, 185
eye point, 129, 424 display sets, 80, 184, 185, 189, 218, 423
far clipping plane, 425 displaying, 182, 476
lighting, 301, 319, 320, 322, 323, 324, 326, 327, editing, 185, 186
329, 450, 451, 452 hiding, 182, 183
measurements, 225 moving, 182
near clipping plane, 425 ScheduleReview, 186
tags, 241, 242, 253, 254, 458, 467, 529 viewing, 180, 182, 183, 184
views, 423 projects
volume annotations, 265 creating, 36, 37, 38, 43, 46, 184, 185
plan view, 540 deleting, 379
plane files, 180, 361
far clipping plane, 425 importing, 412
near clipping plane, 425 opening, 36, 43, 46
play ScheduleReview, 361, 375, 379, 412
key frames, 173, 527 properties
ScheduleReview, 187, 380, 382, 383, 496 assigning, 287, 289, 480, 484
ScheduleReview,, 381 editing, 287, 289, 290, 480, 484, 485
points printing, 386, 391
colors, 225, 237, 238 settings, 152
measurements, 225 unassigning, 290, 485
sizes, 225, 237, 238 queries, 495
styles, 225, 237, 238 creating, 372, 375, 379, 495
positioning editing, 373, 376, 495
annotations, 258, 259, 261 executing, 375, 376
controlling, 34, 128, 469 ScheduleReview, 360, 365, 368, 372, 495
data, 261 querying
display sets, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 478, tags, 251
481 range
editing, 213, 214, 215, 217, 218, 481 cube, 337, 344
labels, 228 raytrace, 468
lighting, 323 rejection, 62, 70, 74, 433, 441, 442, 443
measurements, 463 range box
modes, 157, 158, 159, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524 colors, 235
modes,, 136 measurements, 235
restoring, 228, 463, 490 patterns, 235
previous width, 235
printing, 390 rates
tag, 245, 532 animation, 363, 367
printing motion, 162, 163, 166, 515
options, 390, 391 settings, 162, 163, 166, 515
previewing, 390, 418 raytrace
properties, 391 anti-alias, 308
quick print, 387, 391 bounce, 305
resolutions, 387, 391 gamma, 307
settings, 388 performance, 308, 310
views, 387 range, 332, 454, 468
programs settings, 308, 310, 332
accessories, 395 shadows, 309
starting, 395 snapshot, 176, 220
project threshold, 304
active, 380 transmittance, 305, 306

Index
viewing, 303, 331, 453 exporting, 113

recalling importing, 112
keyframes, 175, 178 saved views
partial, 89, 90, 94 exporting, 415
views, 82, 89, 90, 94, 102, 110, 454 importing, 91, 411, 413
redraw on refresh, 71, 101, 109 saving
reflective .mdb files, 409
bounce, 305 .vue files, 45, 410
threshold, 304 commands, 454
refreshing recall, 454
data, 45, 511 views, 82, 102, 454
projects, 360, 370, 501 ScheduleReview
views, 467 active project, 365, 368, 369, 370, 501
windows, 56, 57, 545 animation, 361, 363, 367
removing associations, 371, 372, 378, 379, 499, 500
associations, 360, 372, 500 collision detection, 26
collections, 230, 232, 492 construction, 26
measurements, 229, 230, 232, 492 controls, 380, 381, 383, 496, 497
rendering deleting, 369, 379, 501
modes, 76, 77, 435, 436, 437, 438 editing, 186
raytracing, 331 go to, 384, 497, 498
textures, 437 importing, 370, 371, 380, 412
restoring modules, 26
collections, 490 new, 369, 500
labels, 228 percent complete, 385
measurements, 490 play, 496
panes, 467, 544 project manager, 186
positions, 228, 463, 490 projects, 361, 366, 369, 380, 412, 416, 500, 501
windows, 544 queries, 372, 495
results record, 384, 498
displaying, 375, 376 refresh, 370, 501
queries, 375, 376 resetting, 361, 366
review review, 365, 368
construction sequence, 187 settings, 187, 360, 361, 363, 366, 367, 382, 458,
play, 496 494, 496, 497
ScheduleReview, 360 snapshot, 26, 361, 364, 368
ScheduleReview,, 361 stop, 382, 496
right view, 426, 461 symbology, 361, 362, 366, 377, 499
rotating search path
display sets, 213, 215, 216, 218, 405, 406 defining, 40, 291, 300
motion, 141 design file, 41
snapshot, 220 directories, 40, 291, 300
using keypad, 147 search paths, 487
using mouse, 138, 518 selecting
view cone, 141 all, 86
rotating model, 430 collision detections, 335, 337, 344
running queries, 365, 368
collaborations, 357, 358, 509 views, 86
collision detection, 335, 336, 337, 338, 340, 341, sending
343, 344, 346, 347, 349, 350 driver's state, 352
save and recall snapshots, 222
renaming groups, 84, 95 settings
views, 82, 86, 87, 90 advanced, 64, 310
save views angles, 62, 132, 164
exporting, 93 collaboration, 355, 510
saved view

Index
collision detection, 336, 340, 341, 343, 346, 347, collaborations, 25

350 collision detection, 26
display, 60, 61, 64, 65, 66, 68, 75, 76, 77, 96, 98, key frames, 175, 178
105, 106, 162, 435, 440, 443, 444 motion, 174, 528
Elumens, 124, 125, 126, 448, 449 on-site drawing generation, 27
joystick, 152, 162, 166, 171, 515 Photo-Realism, 28
levels, 114, 115, 117, 118, 178, 458, 462, 493 ScheduleReview, 365, 368, 384
lighting, 61, 69, 100, 108, 197, 301, 320, 322, 440, ScheduleReview,, 361
441, 450, 451, 483 sending, 222
motion, 142, 155, 156, 158, 162, 163, 166, 513, sequencer, 364, 368
514, 515, 519, 520 taking, 174, 176, 219, 528
Photo-Realism, 301, 302, 308, 310, 319, 322, 323, view, 176, 219, 220, 455
324, 326, 327, 329, 332, 446, 450, 452, 468 south east view, 428, 429
placing, 130, 425 south view, 427
print, 388 south west view, 428, 429
projects, 185, 360, 361, 365, 366, 368, 369, 501 starting
range rejection, 62, 74, 441, 442 accessories, 395
ScheduleReview, 360, 361, 362, 363, 364, 365, date, 363, 365, 367, 368
366, 367, 368, 377, 382, 458, 494, 496, 499 frame, 363, 367
steps, 156, 514 number, 364
stereo, 120, 121 programs, 395
tags, 60, 247, 533 steps
view cone, 130, 132, 133, 142, 425, 439, 469 in days, 365
views, 59, 60, 62, 64, 65, 75, 76, 77, 78, 432, 435, motion, 155, 156, 514
439, 440, 441, 442, 469, 515 stereo
window, 401, 402, 539 activating, 119, 444, 445, 446
setup distances, 120, 121, 178, 444, 445, 446
keyframes, 175, 178 eye separation, 178
page, 417 left view, 444
partial, 94, 110, 178 Photo-Realism, 28
recall, 89, 90, 110, 175, 178 right view, 444
snapshot, 176 settings, 120, 121, 446
view, 89, 90, 110 viewing, 445, 447
shading, 167 stopping
display sets, 477 key frame motion, 174, 528
modes, 436 ScheduleReview, 382, 458, 496
view, 178 surface
shortcut keys, 144 collections, 226, 488
shortest distance, 463 encircle, 159, 523
measurements, 227, 489 measurements, 226, 463, 488
showing symbology, 250, 251
display sets, 183, 189, 477, 479 tags, 254, 257
project manager, 182 tabs
project manager settings, 443, 444 advanced, 71, 101, 109
range rejection, 443 display, 66, 96, 105
settings, 443 view cone, 68, 98, 106
SmartPlant Review tags
features, 19, 122 action comments, 247, 533
modules, 19, 122 activating, 246, 532
netmeeting, 354 attributes, 250, 254, 255
snaplock commands, 532
collections, 225, 231, 237, 238, 488 deleting, 244, 255, 458, 467, 530
measurements, 225, 231, 237, 238, 458, 463, 488 displaying, 60, 65, 178, 245, 246, 247, 531, 532,
snapshot 533
animation, 29 editing, 244, 253, 254, 255, 458, 467, 530
calculations, 223 example workflow, 249, 250, 251

Index
exporting, 240, 248, 416 top front right view, 427

finding, 240, 244, 246, 251, 255, 257, 467, 531, top view, 426, 461
532 unassigning
go to, 240, 246, 255, 257, 458, 467, 532 materials, 290, 292, 462, 485
importing, 240, 248, 250, 413 properties, 290, 485
placing, 240, 241, 242, 458, 467, 529 updating
settings, 60 backing store, 59
symbology, 250, 254, 257 buffer, 59, 71, 101, 109, 445
text position, 167
annotations, 240, 438 views, 45, 445, 511
collections, 231, 236 using
measurements, 231, 236 accessories, 393
scrolling, 138, 143 auto-association, 378
viewing, 59, 515, 516 ScheduleReview, 378
text annotations version 5.0 changes, 19
deleting, 400, 537, 538 vertical
displaying, 401, 538, 539 encircle, 158, 522
editing, 536, 537 printing, 388
manipulating, 395 view
placing, 395, 396, 399, 534, 535, 536 advanced, 59, 64, 440, 445, 447, 448
text view, 541, 544 arrange icons, 543
textures cascade, 542
displaying, 65 commands, 424, 425, 432, 436, 437, 438, 440, 443,
objects, 66, 96, 105, 437 444, 445, 475, 493, 511
Photo-Realism, 28 common views, 461
rendering, 437 display sets, 189, 190, 479
settings, 61 displaying, 58, 61, 64, 66, 96, 105, 114, 116, 302,
tile view, 543 436, 437, 438, 439, 443, 444, 449, 455, 493
time editing, 86, 88, 96, 103, 104
display, 63, 71, 101, 109 elevation, 541
zone, 314 exporting, 113
toolbars fitting, 79, 80, 422, 423, 460
annotation, 464 groups, 85, 87, 96, 103, 174, 176, 363, 367, 384
common, 456 importing, 112
customizing, 467, 471, 472, 473, 474 levels, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 493
docking, 471 lighting, 61, 69, 100, 108, 440, 441
encircle, 470 main, 540
motion, 466 measurements, 438
naigation, 465 menu bar, 475
Photo-Realism, 468 placing, 87, 423, 424, 425
position control, 34, 128, 469 plan, 540
resetting, 472, 474 printing, 387
ScheduleReview, 458 project manager, 180, 182, 476
standard, 456 range rejection, 70
tag, 467 raytrace, 303, 331, 332, 453
tools, 458, 462, 463, 464 refreshing, 45, 511
viewing, 460, 461, 471, 472, 473, 474 rotating with model fit, 461
views control, 470 save and recall, 82, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91,
window, 467 94, 96, 102, 103, 104, 110, 112, 178
tools settings, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 69, 76,
collaborations, 509 77, 78, 96, 100, 105, 108, 129, 178, 424, 432,
data, 45, 511 435, 440, 441
refresh, 45, 511 snapshot, 176, 219, 220, 223, 455
top back left view, 428 stereo, 119, 446
top back right view, 428 tags, 60, 245
top front left view, 427 text, 541, 544

Index
tile horizontally, 543 attributes, 273, 274

toolbars, 460, 471, 472, 473, 474 clipping volume, 271
tile vertoca;, 543 creating categories, 267
view cone, 440 deleting, 270, 271, 464
windows, 56, 57, 58, 402, 455, 542, 544 displaying, 275
zooming, 81, 82, 430, 431, 432 editing, 268, 273, 464, 504
view cone exporting, 272, 277, 417
center point, 130, 425 finding, 269, 273, 274
clipping planes, 425 importing, 272, 276
eye point, 157, 521, 524 inactivating categories, 268
manipulating, 147 placing, 265, 464
moving, 141 symbology, 275
perspective, 132, 133, 439, 469 wireframe, 275
rotating, 141 west view, 426
settings, 68, 98, 106, 130, 142, 425, 439 what's new, 19
settings,, 129, 424 window
toolbar, 469 arranging, 56, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544
using, 127 cascade, 542
viewing elevation, 541
back view, 427 icons, 543
bottom, 426 main, 540
bottom back left view, 429 pane layout, 57, 58, 541, 544
bottom back right view, 429 plan, 540
bottom front left view, 429 project manager, 182
bottom front right view, 428 refreshing, 56, 57, 545
east view, 427 restoring, 544
front view, 426 settings, 402
left view, 427 size, 402
north east view, 427, 429 text, 541, 544
north view, 426 tile horizontally, 543
north west view, 427, 428 tile vertically, 543
right view, 426 toolbar, 467
rotate with model fit, 430 views, 56, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544
south east view, 428, 429 wireframe
south view, 427 background, 440
south west view, 428, 429 color, 440
top back left view, 428 hidden line, 433
top back right view, 428 workflow
top front left view, 427 tags, 249, 250, 251
top front right view, 427 zoom
top view, 426 about point, 431
west view, 426 factor, 82, 432
views control, 470 in, 80, 81, 422, 430, 431, 460
volume annotations out, 81, 430, 431, 460
adjusting, 269 printing, 390

SPRUsers Guide V5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

SPRUsers Guide V5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPRUsers Guide V5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartPlant Review

Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review: An Overview............................................. 36

Working with Views: An Overview............................................................................... 55

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 3

View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates ........................................................59

4 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Export Saved Views..........................................................................................................93

Using the View Cone: An Overview ............................................................................ 127

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview ........................................................... 136

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 5

Forward/Back, Left/Right ...............................................................................................141

Using Project Manager: An Overview ........................................................................ 180

6 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Display or Hide the Project Manager ..............................................................................182

Working with Display Sets: An Overview .................................................................. 188

Taking Snapshots: An Overview ................................................................................. 219

Placing Measurements: An Overview ......................................................................... 225

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 7

Snaplock Measurement ...................................................................................................225

Using Annotations: An Overview ................................................................................ 240

8 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Adjust a Volume Annotation...........................................................................................269

Assigning Material Properties: An Overview............................................................. 287

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview...................................................... 301

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 9

Detecting Collisions: An Overview .............................................................................. 333

Collaborating with Others: An Overview................................................................... 352

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview ......................................................................... 360

10 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Auto-Association Dialog Box .........................................................................................378

Printing: An Overview.................................................................................................. 386

Using Accessories: An Overview.................................................................................. 393

Command Reference: An Overview............................................................................ 408

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 11

File Menu ................................................................................................................. 408

12 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 13

Display Order Command (Tools Menu) .........................................................................449

14 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................................480

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 15

Data Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................502

16 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Tags Menu................................................................................................................ 529

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 17

System Performance Tips ........................................................................................ 549

Index ............................................................................................................................... 555

18 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Introducing SmartPlant Review

SmartPlant Review displays and manipulates PDS™ three dimensional models as

The functionality of SmartPlant Review is separated into modules. This makes it

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 19

Simplicity For Casual Users

See the following topics for more information:

New Option for Programmers

See the following topic for more information: